DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual

Model No. : IM010

Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life. Keepthis manual in a safe place for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may diﬀer from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modiﬁcations of functions due to ﬁrmware update for the camera, thecontents will diﬀer. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.

Product Manuals
In addition to the “Instruction Manual”, we also oﬀer a “Camera Function Guide”.
Consult these manuals when using the product.
Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from the OLYMPUS website
or directly using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share)
smartphone app.

Camera Function Guide
A function and setting guide that helps you use camera features to the full. It has
been optimized for display on mobile devices and can be viewed using OI.Share.
http://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/jp/support/cs/webmanual/index.html

Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual:

2 EN

%

Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.

$

Notes and other supplementary information.

gReferences to other pages in this manual.

Product Manuals

1

P. 2

Table of Contents

P. 4

Feature Index

P. 16

Parts of the Camera

P. 20

Package Contents

P. 24

Before You Begin

P. 25

Getting Ready

P. 27

Read this chapter, together with the other relevant sections of this manual, when using thecamera to take photographs or ﬁlm movies.

2

Taking and Viewing Photographs

1
P. 51

Read this chapter for information on using the camera to take photographs. This chapter also
covers the features you’ll use when shooting and viewing photos.

3

Shooting and Viewing Movies

2
P. 293

Read this chapter for information on using the camera to record movies. This chapter also
covers the features needed to record movies and view them on the camera.

4

Customizing the Camera

3
P. 453Customize camera buttons and dials to suit your shooting style.

4
5

Using Field Sensor Data

P. 567

Read this chapter for information on using the camera’s built-in sensors and GPS feature.

5
6Connecting the Camera to External Devices

P. 581Connect the camera to external devices such as computers or displays using cables or via
wireless LAN.

7

Technical Notes

6
P. 631This chapter covers such topics as camera maintenance and provides a list of default
settings that you can refer to while using the camera.

8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

7
P. 663This chapter includes safety precautions for using your camera. Be sure to read them.

8
9

Index

P. 675910 Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update

P. 68310

EN 3

Table of Contents
Product Manuals .................................................................................................... 2
Feature Index ........................................................................................................ 16
Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................. 20
Package Contents ................................................................................................ 24
Before You Begin ................................................................................................. 25
1

Getting Ready ................................................................................................ 27
Attaching the Strap .................................................................................. 28
Attaching Cable Protectors...................................................................... 29
Removing the Eyecup ............................................................................. 30
Inserting and Removing Batteries ........................................................... 31
Batteries and Chargers .................................................................... 33
Using Your Charger Abroad ............................................................. 33
Using External Power Sources................................................................ 34
Connecting via USB ......................................................................... 34
Optional AC Adapters ...................................................................... 35

4 EN

1-1

Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................. 36
Using Two Memory Cards................................................................ 37
Memory Cards ................................................................................. 37
Formatting Memory Cards (Card Setup) ......................................... 38

1-2

Attaching Lenses ............................................................................................ 39
Removing Lenses ............................................................................ 40
MF Clutch Lenses ................................................................................... 41
Interchangeable Lenses .......................................................................... 42

1-3

Using the Monitor............................................................................................ 43

1-4

Turning the Camera On .................................................................................. 44
Sleep Mode ...................................................................................... 44

1-5

Initial Setup ..................................................................................................... 45
What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display............................................... 47
Correcting the Clock Using GPS ............................................................. 48

1-6

Focusing the Viewﬁnder.................................................................................. 49

Table of Contents

2

Taking and Viewing Photographs ................................................................ 51
2-1

Basic Photography and Playback ................................................................... 52
Taking Photos .......................................................................................... 52
Holding the Camera ......................................................................... 52
Taking Photos with the Shutter Button ............................................. 53
Taking Photos with Touch Controls .................................................. 54
Remote Photography ....................................................................... 55
Viewing Photographs .............................................................................. 56
Choosing a Memory Card ................................................................ 57
Adjusting Volume ............................................................................. 58
Playback Using Touch Controls ....................................................... 58

2-2

Shooting Settings............................................................................................ 59
Direct Buttons .......................................................................................... 60
The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel ............................................ 62
Using the Menus ..................................................................................... 66
Using Live Controls ................................................................................. 68

2-3

Card-Related Settings .................................................................................... 71
Storage Options (K Save Settings)....................................................... 72
Choosing a Card for Photos (K Save Slot) ........................................... 74
Storage Slot Selection ............................................................................. 75
Storage Folder Selection (Assign Save Folder) ...................................... 76

2-4

Image Quality and Size................................................................................... 78
Photo File and Image Size Options (KK) .......................................... 78
Choosing Available Options (K Set) ..................................................... 81
Choosing Values for [X] and [W] Sizes (Pixel Count)...................... 82

2-5

The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays ............................................................. 83
Display Selection ..................................................................................... 83
Choosing the Information Displayed ....................................................... 84
Display Selection Options (EVF Auto Switch) ......................................... 85
The Shooting Display .............................................................................. 86
Optical Viewﬁnder Simulation (S-OVF) ................................................... 89

2-6

Photo Review (Rec View) ............................................................................... 90

2-7

Restoring Default Settings (Reset) ................................................................. 91

2-8

Choosing a Shooting Mode ............................................................................ 93
Letting the Camera Choose Aperture and Shutter Speed(P: Program AE) ................................................................................... 94
Adjusting Settings in Mode P........................................................... 95
Program Shift ................................................................................... 95

Table of Contents

EN 5

Choosing an Aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE) ...................................... 96
Adjusting Settings in Mode A .......................................................... 97
Choosing a Shutter Speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)................................. 98
Adjusting Settings in Mode S......................................................... 100
Choosing Aperture and Shutter Speed (M: Manual Exposure) .................101
Adjusting Settings in Mode M ........................................................ 102
Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M ................................... 103
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time) ............................................................ 104
Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time Focusing)............. 107
Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite Photography) .................................. 108
Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite Settings) ........................110
Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial
(C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom Modes) ......................................................... 111
Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode) ..................................... 111
Using Custom Modes (C1/C2/C3/C4) ..........................................112
2-9

6 EN

Focus .............................................................................................................114
Focus Mode (K AF Mode)....................................................................115
Choosing an AF-Target Mode (AF Target Mode)................................... 120
Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point) .......................................... 123
Custom AF Targets (t Target Mode Settings) ................................... 125
Lens MF Clutch (Manual Focus Clutch) ................................................ 127
Disabling the MF Clutch (MF Clutch) ............................................. 128
Focusing at a Preset Distance (Preset MF) .......................................... 129
Face/Eye Priority AF.............................................................................. 133
Using Face/Eye Priority AF ............................................................ 135
Zoom Frame/Focus Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)..................................... 136
Assigning [a] (Magnify) to a Control ............................................ 136
Using [a] (Magnify) ...................................................................... 137
Focus Zoom Options (LV Close Up Settings)........................................ 139
Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL) ..................................................................................... 141
Lens Focus Range (AF Limiter) ............................................................ 143
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C-AF Sensitivity) ................................... 145
C-AF Lens Scanning (AF Scanner) ....................................................... 146
C-AF Starting Focus Target (K C-AF Center Start) ............................ 147
C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center Priority) ......................... 148
Tracking Focus on Selected Subjects (K Tracking Subject) ............... 149

Table of Contents

2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i) ............................................................................... 151
Sequential Shooting/Self-Timer ............................................................. 151
Burst Shooting Options (jL Settings/jH Settings) ......................... 155
Self-Timer Options (c Custom Self-timer) .......................................... 157
Reducing Shutter Slap (Anti-Shock r) ................................................ 160
Adjusting Anti-Shock Settings ........................................................ 160
The Electronic Shutter (Silent s)......................................................... 163
Long Exposure Noise Reduction (Noise Reduction s) ................ 166
Silent-Mode Options (Silent s Mode Settings) ............................ 167
Reducing Shutter Lag (Pro Capture Photography) ............................... 168
Interval-Timer Photography (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)............................. 172
Burst Mode Image Stabilization (j Image Stabilization) .................... 174
Viewﬁnder Display Rate (Frame Rate) .................................................. 175
2-11 Image Stabilization ....................................................................................... 176
Reducing Camera Blur (K Image Stabilizer)....................................... 176
Half-Press Image Stabilization (Half Way Rls With IS).......................... 178
2-12 Metering and Exposure................................................................................. 179
Adjusting Exposure (Exposure Compensation)..................................... 180
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity (K ISO) ....................................................... 181
Options for [K ISO] > [AUTO] (K ISO-Auto Set) .............................. 183
Shooting Mode and [K ISO] > [AUTO] (K ISO-Auto) ....................... 185
Exposure Metering (Metering) ............................................................... 186
Locking Exposure (AE Lock) ................................................................. 188
Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction) .................................................... 190
Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV) ............................. 190
Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting) .............. 191
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan) ...................... 193
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ................................................................. 195
Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND Shooting) ......................... 197
Live View Exposure Preview (Live View Boost) .................................... 200
2-13 Color and Quality .......................................................................................... 202
Adjusting Hue (K WB) ........................................................................ 202
Preserving Warm Colors (KW Keep Warm Color) .................... 205
Fine-Tuning White Balance (K White Balance Compensation)... 206
Metering White Balance (One-Touch White Balance
P/Q/W/X) ................................................................................. 207
High-Resolution Photos (High Res Shot) ............................................. 210
High Res Shot Image Quality (KK) .......................................... 213

Table of Contents

EN 7

Image Enhancement (Picture Mode) .................................................... 215
Choosing a Picture Mode .............................................................. 217
Creating Custom Picture Modes (K Custom Picture Mode) ......... 219
Adjusting Sharpness (Sharpness) ................................................. 220
Adjusting Contrast (Contrast) ........................................................ 221
Adjusting Vividness (Saturation) .................................................... 222
Adjusting Shading (Gradation) ....................................................... 223
Color Filters for Black-and-White Photography (Color Filter) ........ 224
Monochrome Tints (Monochrome Color) ....................................... 225
Adjusting i-Enhance Eﬀects (Eﬀect) .............................................. 226
Choosing a Tone Curve (Highlight&Shadow Control) .................... 227
Hue and Saturation (Color Creator) ............................................... 229“Leave Color” Eﬀects (Partial Color) .............................................. 231
Choosing a Color Space (Color Space) ......................................... 232
2-14 Eﬀects ........................................................................................................... 233
Aspect Ratio (Image Aspect) ................................................................ 233
Zoom (Digital Tele-converter) ............................................................... 235
Varying Settings Little-by-Little over a Series of Shots (Bracketing) ..... 236
Increasing Depth of Field (Focus Stacking) ......................................... 243
Overlaying Pictures (Multiple Exposure) .............................................. 246
Keystone Eﬀects/Enhancing Perspective (Keystone Comp.) ............... 248
Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye Compensation) ....................... 250
2-15 Flash Photography........................................................................................ 252
Compatible Flash Units ......................................................................... 252
Choosing a Flash Mode (#Flash Mode) .............................................. 254
Adjusting Flash Output (x) ................................................................ 259
Choosing a Flash Sync Speed (#X-Sync.) ......................................... 260
Setting a Slow Shutter Speed Limit (#Slow Limit) .............................. 261
Wireless Remote Flash Control............................................................. 262
Third-Party Flash Units .................................................................. 264
2-16 Working with Saved Images ......................................................................... 265
Choosing the Information Displayed ..................................................... 265
The Playback Info Display ..................................................................... 266
Zooming In (Playback Zoom) ................................................................ 267
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback) ..................... 268
Rotating Pictures (Rotate) ..................................................................... 269
Protecting Pictures (0) ...................................................................... 270
Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset Protect) ................. 271

8 EN

Table of Contents

Copying Pictures Between Cards (Copy) .............................................. 272
Copying All Pictures (Copy All) ...................................................... 274
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ...................................................................... 275
Deleting All Pictures (All Erase)............................................................. 276
Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order) ........................................ 277
Removing Share Marking from All Pictures(Reset Share Order).................................................................... 278
Selecting Multiple Pictures(0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/Share Order Selected) ................. 279
Adding Audio to Pictures (K) ................................................................. 281
Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback(R) .................................................................................................... 283
Retouching Pictures (Edit)..................................................................... 284
Retouching RAW Pictures (RAW Data Edit) .................................. 284
Retouching JPEG Pictures (JPEG Edit) ........................................ 287
Combining Pictures (Image Overlay) .................................................... 289
Selecting Pictures for Printing (< — DPOF) ......................................... 291

3

Shooting and Viewing Movies .................................................................... 293
3-1

Basic Recording and Playback ..................................................................... 294
An Introduction to Movie Recording ...................................................... 294
Recording Movies.................................................................................. 295
Holding the Camera ....................................................................... 295
Recording Movies with the Touch Screen ...................................... 295
Remote Photography ..................................................................... 297
Touch Screen Options ................................................................... 298
Focus Zoom (V) ......................................................................... 298
Using the Viewﬁnder ...................................................................... 299
Viewing Movies ..................................................................................... 300
Playback Volume ........................................................................... 301
Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size ................................................. 301
Choosing a Memory Card .............................................................. 302
Playback Using Touch Controls ..................................................... 303

3-2

Shooting Settings.......................................................................................... 304
Direct Buttons ........................................................................................ 305
Touch Controls (Silent Controls)............................................................ 306
The LV Super Control Panel.................................................................. 309
Using Live Controls ............................................................................... 312
Using the Menus ................................................................................... 314

Table of Contents

EN 9

10 EN

3-3

Card-Related Settings .................................................................................. 316
Choosing a Card for Movies (n Save Slot) ......................................... 316
Storage Slot Selection ........................................................................... 318
Storage Folder Selection (Assign Save Folder) .................................... 319

3-4

Movie File Settings ....................................................................................... 321
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nK)....................................... 321
Time Codes (Time Code Settings) ........................................................ 324

3-5

The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays ........................................................... 326
Choosing the Information Displayed ..................................................... 327
Display Selection Options (EVF Auto Switch) ....................................... 328
The Shooting Display ............................................................................ 329
Restoring Default Settings (Reset) ........................................................ 331

3-6

Movie Recording Options ............................................................................. 332
Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode) .............................................. 332
Letting the Camera Choose Aperture and Shutter Speed(P: Program AE) .......................................................................... 334
Choosing an Aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE) ............................ 335
Choosing a Shutter Speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE) ....................... 336
Choosing Aperture and Shutter Speed (M: Manual Exposure) ..... 337
Filming High-Speed Movies (nK) ..................................................... 339
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies) ......................................................... 342

3-7

Focus ............................................................................................................ 345
Focus Mode (n AF Mode) ................................................................... 345
Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode) ................................... 349
Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point) .......................................... 352
Lens MF Clutch (Manual Focus Clutch) ................................................ 355
Disabling the MF Clutch (MF Clutch) ............................................. 356
Focusing at a Preset Distance (Preset MF) .......................................... 357
Face Priority AF ..................................................................................... 360
Using Face Priority AF ................................................................... 361
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity (n C-AF Sensitivity) .................................... 362
C-AF Focus Speed (n C-AF Speed) ................................................... 363
Zoom Frame/Focus Zoom AF ............................................................... 364

3-8

Metering and Exposure................................................................................. 367
Adjusting Exposure (Exposure Compensation)..................................... 367
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity (n ISO) ........................................................ 369
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control (b ISO-Auto Set).................................. 372
Locking Exposure (AE Lock) ................................................................. 373
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker Scan) ...................... 374

Table of Contents

3-9

Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality ......................................................... 376
Reducing Camera Blur (n Image Stabilizer) ....................................... 376
Image Stabilization Options (n IS Level) ............................................. 378
High ISO Noise Reduction Options (n Noise Filter) ............................ 379
Adjusting Hue (n WB) ......................................................................... 380
Preserving Warm Colors (nW Keep Warm Color) ............................ 383
White Balance Compensation (n White Balance Compensation)....... 384
Fine-Tuning White Balance (n All x) ............................................... 385
Metering White Balance (One-Touch White Balance
P/Q/W/X).................................................................................. 386
Image Enhancement (Picture Mode) .................................................... 388
Choosing a Picture Mode .............................................................. 390
Creating Custom Picture Modes (K Custom Picture Mode) ......... 392
Highlight&Shadow Control (n Picture Mode) ...................................... 393
Preview Options for Movie Picture Modes (a View Assist) ................ 395
Adjusting Sharpness (Sharpness) ......................................................... 396
Adjusting Contrast (Contrast) ................................................................ 397
Adjusting Vividness (Saturation) ........................................................... 398
Adjusting Shading (Gradation) .............................................................. 399
Color Filters for Black-and-White Photography (Color Filter) ................ 400
Monochrome Tints (Monochrome Color) ............................................... 401
Adjusting i-Enhance Eﬀects (Eﬀect) ...................................................... 402
Choosing a Tone Curve (Highlight&Shadow Control) ........................... 403
Hue and Saturation (Color Creator) ...................................................... 405“Leave Color” Eﬀects (Partial Color) ..................................................... 407

3-10 Eﬀects ........................................................................................................... 408
Power Zoom (n Elec. Zoom Speed) ................................................... 408
Adjusting Zoom During Filming (Movie H) .......................................... 409
Filming at a Higher Zoom Ratio (Digital Tele-converter) ........................411
3-11 Audio Recording ........................................................................................... 412
Sound Recording Options (Movie K) .................................................... 413
Using the Olympus LS-100 IC Recorder ............................................... 415
3-12 Customizing Camera Controls ...................................................................... 417
Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function) ................................. 417
Choosing a Role for the Shutter Button (n Shutter Function) ............. 423
Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (n Dial Function) .......... 424
Customizing the Fn Lever (n Fn Lever Function) ............................... 426
3-13 Display Settings ............................................................................................ 428
Viewing On-Screen Controls (n Control Settings)............................... 428
Shooting Indicators (n Info Settings) ................................................... 429
Battery Level Display Options (8 Display Pattern) .......................... 431

Table of Contents

EN 11

3-14 HDMI Devices ............................................................................................... 432
HDMI Output (n HDMI Output) ........................................................... 432
External Monitor Display Options (HDMI) ............................................. 434
3-15 Working with Saved Movies .......................................................................... 436
Choosing the Information Displayed ..................................................... 436
The Movie Playback Info Display .......................................................... 437
Finding Movies Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback) ....................... 438
Protecting Movies (0) ........................................................................ 439
Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset Protect) ................. 440
Copying Pictures Between Cards (Copy) .............................................. 441
Copying All Pictures (Copy All) .............................................................. 443
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ...................................................................... 444
Deleting All Pictures (All Erase)............................................................. 445
Selecting Movies for Sharing (Share Order) ......................................... 446
Removing Share Marking from All Pictures(Reset Share Order).................................................................... 447
Selecting Multiple Pictures (0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/ Share
Order Selected) .................................................................................. 448
Editing Movies (Movie Edit) ................................................................... 450
Trimming Movies (Movie Trimming) ............................................... 450
Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture) ............................ 451

4

12 EN

Customizing the Camera ............................................................................. 453
4-1

Basic Camera Settings (the e Setup Menu) ................................................. 454
Formatting Memory Cards and Deleting All Photos and Movies(Card Setup) ....................................................................................... 454
Setting the Camera Clock (X Settings) ................................................ 455
Choosing a Language (W Language) ................................................ 455
Monitor Brightness and Hue (s) ........................................................ 456
Post-Shooting Display Time (Rec View)................................................ 456
Wireless LAN Options (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ................................. 457
Viewing the Firmware Version (Firmware) ............................................ 457

4-2

Custom Shooting Modes .............................................................................. 458
Saving Settings to the Mode Dial (Assign to Custom Mode)................. 458
Using Custom Modes (C1/C2/C3/C4) ................................................. 460

4-3

Customizing Buttons and Dials ..................................................................... 462
Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)................................. 463
Multi-Function Button Options (Multi Function) ..................................... 470
Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function) .......... 473
Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function) .............................. 475

Table of Contents

5

6

4-4

“My Menu” ..................................................................................................... 477
Creating a Personalized Menu (My Menu) ............................................ 477

4-5

Customizing Camera Functions.................................................................... 480
Focus-Related Items (Custom Menus J, K, L, and I) .................. 480
Control-Related Items (Custom Menus J and K).............................. 498
Release-Related Items (Custom Menus N and O) ............................ 505
Display-, Sound-, and Connection-Related Items(Custom Menus P, Q, R, and S) ................................................. 513
Exposure-Related Items (Custom Menus T, U, and V) ................... 530
Flash-Related Items (Custom Menu W) ............................................... 539
Image Quality, White Balance, and Color-Related Items(Custom Menu X) ............................................................................. 542
Storage- and Deletion-Related Items (Custom Menus Y and Z)....... 547
Viewﬁnder-Related Items (Custom Menu a) ....................................... 553
Other Custom Settings (Custom Menus b, c, and Q) ..................... 558

Using Field Sensor Data ............................................................................. 567
5-1

Notes on Field Sensors ................................................................................ 568
GPS: Precautions for Use ..................................................................... 568
Before Using GPS (A-GPS Data) .......................................................... 569
Updating the A-GPS Data Using a Smartphone ............................ 569
Updating the A-GPS Data Using a PC ........................................... 569

5-2

Using Field Sensors...................................................................................... 570
Recording Location Data (Record GPS location) .................................. 570
Field Sensor Logs ................................................................................. 571
Logging Data (Field Sensor Logger) .............................................. 571
Viewing Sensor Data (G/Info Settings) ............................................... 574
Enabling Sensor Data Display ....................................................... 575
Sensor Data Display Options (Elevation/Temperature) ......................... 578
GPS Options (GPS Priority) .................................................................. 579

5-3

Disabling GPS .............................................................................................. 580

Connecting the Camera to External Devices ............................................ 581
6-1

Connection Types and Software ................................................................... 582
Precautions for Using Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® ........................................ 583

6-2

Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi .......................................................... 584
Installing Apps ....................................................................................... 585
Connecting to Smartphones (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ........................ 586
Readying the Camera (Availability)................................................ 586
Pairing the Camera and Smartphone ............................................ 587
Connecting When the Camera Is Oﬀ (Power-oﬀ Standby).................... 590

Table of Contents

EN 13

Copying Pictures to Smartphones ......................................................... 592
Downloading Pictures Selected with OI.Share .............................. 592
Auto Download .............................................................................. 594
Removing Share Marking (Reset Share Order) ............................. 595
Remote Photography Using a Smartphone........................................... 596
Accessing Field Sensor Logs ................................................................ 597
Ending the Connection .......................................................................... 598
Ending the Current Connection ..................................................... 598
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® ........................................................... 598

14 EN

6-3

Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi .............................................................. 600
Installing Software ................................................................................. 601
Readying the Computer (Windows) ...................................................... 602
Pairing the Computer with the Camera (New Link) ............................... 603
Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings (T Wi-Fi Connect) ...................................... 605
Enabling Camera Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ........................ 606
Connecting via WPS (Connect by WPS) ....................................... 607
Connecting Manually (Manual Connections) ................................. 609
Choosing a Network from a List
(Connect from Access Point List) ................................................ 612
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken ................................................. 614
Ending the Connection .......................................................................... 616
Ending the Current Connection ..................................................... 616
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® ........................................................... 617

6-4

Network Settings ........................................................................................... 618
Changing Passwords (Connection Password) ...................................... 618
Restoring Default Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® Settings (Reset Settings) ............. 619

6-5

Connecting to Computers via USB ............................................................... 620
Compatible Computers.......................................................................... 621
Installing Software ................................................................................. 621
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (0) ..................................... 622
Copying Pictures to the Computer (Storage) ........................................ 624

6-6

Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery) ................................. 625

6-7

Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI........................................ 626
Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI) .......................................................... 627
HDMI Output .................................................................................. 627
Connecting the Camera to a TV .................................................... 629
Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control) ...................................................... 630

Table of Contents

7Technical Notes............................................................................................ 631
7-1

Storage and Maintenance............................................................................. 632

7-2

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 634

7-3

Warnings and Error Messages ..................................................................... 637

7-4

Default Settings ............................................................................................ 640
Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel ........................................... 640
The K Shooting Menus ............................................................... 642
The n Video Menu ....................................................................... 643
The q Playback Menu ................................................................. 645
The e Setup Menu ......................................................................... 646
The G Custom Menus................................................................... 647

7-5

Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................. 654

7-6

Speciﬁcations................................................................................................ 656

7-7

System Chart ................................................................................................ 660

8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. 663

9Index ............................................................................................................. 675

10 Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update ............................................ 683

Table of Contents

EN 15

Feature Indexg

FeatureShooting Mode

93 – 110n Speciﬁcation Settings

Custom Mode

111, 460

nK

Monitor Display

83, 326b ISO-Auto Set

372

Viewﬁnder Display

83, 326n Noise Filter

379

Direct Button Functions

60, 305

n WB

380

Live Controls

68, 312n All x385

LV Super Control Panel62, 309

nW Keep Warm Color383

n Picture Mode

393

FeatureW Shooting Menu 1

321, 339

91, 111,331, 458,
460

n AF/IS Settingsn AF Mode

345

Picture Mode

215, 388

n C-AF Speed

363

KK

78, 82,
213, 543

n C-AF Sensitivity

362

n Image Stabilizer

376

n IS Level

378

Reset / Custom Modes

Image Aspect

233

Digital Tele-converter

235, 411

j/Y/i (Drive Mode)n Button/Dial/Lever

151

n Button Function

417

n Dial Function

424

n Fn Lever Function

426

n Shutter Function

423

n Elec. Zoom Speed408

X Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing

236

HDR

195

Multiple Exposure

246

Keystone Comp.

248

Anti-Shock r/Silent s

160, 163

High Res Shot

210

Live ND Shooting

197

n Video Menu
n Mode Settings

16 EN

g

n Mode332n Flicker Scan

374

Feature Index

n Display Settingsn Control Settings

428

n Info Settings

429

Time Code Settings

324

8 Display Pattern431

a View Assist

395

Movie K

413

n HDMI Output

432

Featuregq Playback Menu
R

283

Edit

284

Print Order

291

Reset Protect

271, 440

Reset share Order

278, 447

Copy All

274, 443

TWi-Fi ConnectgFeatureI AF/MF

586

G Custom Menu

129, 357,
494

Preset MF distance
MF Assist495

MF Clutch

128, 356,
496

Focus Ring

496

Bulb/Time Focusing

107, 497

Reset Lens

497

J Button/Dial/Lever

J AF/MF
K AF Mode115

K AF+MF

481

K AEL/AFL141

AF Scanner

146, 482

K C-AF Sensitivity

145, 483

K C-AF Center Start

147, 483

K C-AF Center Priority

148, 484

K AF/MF

K Button Function

463

S Center Button

499

T Direction Key

499

K Dial Function

473, 500

Dial Direction

500

K Fn Lever Function

475, 501

Fn Lever/Power Lever

501

K Button/Dial/LeverK Elec. Zoom Speed

502

C-LOCK Settings

503

KNMode Settings

485

AF Area Pointer486

AF Targeting Pad

486

N Set Home

487

N Select Screen
Settings

488

jL Settings

155, 506

125, 488

jH Settings

155, 507

Flicker reduction

190, 509

t Target Mode Settings
K Orientation Linked
N

489

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority

505

C-AF Release Priority

505

O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
K Image Stabilizer

176, 510

143, 490

j Image Stabilization

174, 511

AF Illuminator

490

Half Way Rls With IS

178, 511

I Face Priority

133, 360,
491

K Tracking Subject

149, 491

L AF/MF
AF Limiter

AF Focus Adj.

Lens I.S. Priority

512

492

Feature Index

EN 17

Featureg

P Disp/8/PC

g

K Control Settings

513

Bulb/Time Timer

533

G/Info Settings

515

Bulb/Time Monitor

534

Picture Mode Settings

520

Live Bulb

534

j/Y Settings

520

Live TimeMulti Function Settings

521

Composite Settings

200, 521

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p

K Flicker Scan

Q Disp/8/PC
Live View Boost

Metering

535
110, 535
536
186, 536

Art LV Mode

522

Frame Rate

175, 522

AEL Metering537

LV Close Up Settings

139, 523

N Spot Metering

537

qa Default Setting

523

Exposure Shift538

z Settings

524

W #Custom#X-Sync.

260, 539

Grid Settings

524#Slow Limit

261, 539

Peaking Settings

525

x+F

540

Histogram Settings

526

#+WB

540

Mode Guide

526#RC Mode

541

Selﬁe Assist

527

X K/WB/ColorR Disp/8/PC

S Disp/8/PC
8

527

HDMI

434, 528,
627

USB Mode529

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p
EV Step
ISO Step

18 EN

FeatureU Exp/ISO/BULB/p

530
530

K ISO-Auto Set

183, 531

K ISO-Auto

185, 531

K Noise Filter

532

K Low ISO Processing

532

Noise Reduct.

533

Feature Index

K Set

81, 542

Pixel Count

82, 543

Shading Comp.

543

K WB

544

K All x545

KW Keep Warm Color

205

Color Space232

FeatureggFeaturec K Utility

Y Record/Erase
Card Slot Settings

547

Battery Settings

561

File Name

548

Backlit LCD

561

Edit Filename

548

Sleep

562

dpi Settings

549

Auto Power Oﬀ

562

Copyright Settings

549

Quick Sleep Mode

563

Lens Info Settings

550

Z Record/Erase
Quick Erase

Q K Utility
Record GPS location

570

551

GPS Priority

RAW+JPEG Erase

551

Elevation/Temperature

565, 578

Priority Set

552

Field Sensor Logger

565, 571

a EVF

564, 579

Certiﬁcation

566

85, 328,553

e Setup Menu

553

Card Setup38, 276,445, 454

EVF Style554

X Settings

455

V Info Settings

555

W

455

EVF Grid Settings

556s

V Half Way Level

556

Rec View

90, 456

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings

457, 586,
607

EVF Auto Switch
EVF Adjust

S-OVF

89, 557

b K Utility
Pixel Mapping

558, 633

Press-and-hold Time

558

Level Adjust

559

Touchscreen Settings

559

Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensation

FirmwareMy Menu

456

457
477

560
250, 560

Feature Index

EN 19

Parts of the Camera
Mount (remove body cap before attachinglens)

Lens attachment mark (P. 39)
Self-timer lamp (P. 151)
AF illuminator (P. 490)

Lens lock pin
External ﬂash terminal(P. 264)

One-touch white balance
e buttonbuttoon(XY) *1 (P. 207, 386)

Lens releasebutton (P. 39)

Front dial (P. 94–101,
334–338)

M
Microphone jack
ccoverPreview button (XZ) *1(P. 464, 524)

Headphone jackcover

Vertical-use one-touch
white balance button(YY) *1*2 (P. 207, 386)

Vertical-use front dial *(P. 94–101, 334–338)

C
Connector coverBattery
compartment
cover (P. 32)

2

Battery compartment
lock (P. 32)

Vertical-use preview button(YZ) *1*2 (P. 464, 524)
DC connector (P. 35)

DC connector cover(P. 35)Microphone jack (R) (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack) (P. 413)
Headphone jack (P) (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack)
Cable protector mount (P. 29)
HDMI connector (Type D) (P. 627)
USB connector (Type C) (P. 415, 603, 622, 625)

*1 Can be assigned other roles. g “Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)”(P. 463), “Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function)” (P. 417)
*2 Used when the camera is rotated 90° to shoot pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
Performs the same function as the standard (landscape or “wide”) orientation equivalent.

20 EN

Parts of the Camera

Stereo microphone (P. 412)
#jY (ﬂash/sequential shooting//
self-timer) button (P. 151, 252)

F (exposurecompensation) button *(P. 180, 227, 367, 403)

Shutter button(P. 53)ISO button *(P. 181, 369)

Strap eyelet (P. 28)
R (movie) /H button * (P. 295 /P. 279, 448)

AFp (AF/metering
eringmode) button (P.
P. 115,186, 345)

Strap eyelet (P. 28)
Mode dial (P. 93, 294)

ON/OFF lever(P. 44)Mode dial lock (P. 93)
BKT button (P. 236)
Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (P. 256)

* Can be assigned other roles. g “Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)”(P. 463), “Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function)” (P. 417)
Parts of the Camera

EN 21

AEL/AFL / 0 (protect) button *1(P. 141, 188, 373 / P. 270, 439)
Fn lever (P. 94–102, 334–338,
426, 475)

Rear dial (P. 94–101,
334–338)

Fn button *1 (P. 417, 463)
Lock lever (P. 503)
WB (white balance) /h (share) button *1(P. 202, 380 / P. 277, 44446)
46)
CARD (card select) button
bu
utton
n
(P. 75, 318)

Multi selector (S/T) *4(P. 120, 123, 137, 349,
352, 410)
INFO button (P. 84,
265, 436)

Card accesslamp

 (erase) button(P. 275, 444)
MENU button(P. 66, 314)q (playback) button (P. 56, 300)
Vertical-use multi selector
torr (S/T) *2*4
(P. 120, 123, 137, 349, 352,
3552, 410)
Vertical-use AEL/AFL /0 (protect) button *1*2
(P. 141, 188, 373 / P. 270,
70, 439)

A
Arrow pad (FGHI)) *3(P.
(P
P 56, 300)
OK button (P. 56, 62, 66, 300)

Vertical-use rear dial *2(P. 94–101, 334–338)*1 Can be assigned other roles. g “Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)”(P. 463), “Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function)” (P. 417)
*2 Used when the camera is rotated 90° to shoot pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
Performs the same function as the standard (landscape or “wide”) orientation equivalent.
*3 The I and G positions on the arrow pad can be assigned other roles. g “Assigning
Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)” (P. 463), “Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button
Function)” (P. 417)
*4 The multi selector is designed to be used in two ways. You can place a ﬁnger lightly on
the multi selector and pivot it in the desired direction (T). You can also press down on thecenter of the multi selector much as you would a button (S).

22 EN

Parts of the Camera

Viewﬁnder (P. 49, 83, 326)

Eyecup (P. 30)
Eye sensor

Diopter adjustment dial (P. 49)
u (LV) button *1(P. 62, 83, 328)

Card compartment cover lock(P. 36)
Card compartment cover(P. 36)

Monitor (touch screen)(P. 43, 54, 58, 83,295, 303, 326)

Remote cable terminal(b) (P. 55, 297)

Card slot 1
(P. 3
36)

CHARGE (battery charge)
lamp (P. 34)
pod
d socket
TripodSpeakeer
Speaker
Vertical-use ISO button (YK) *1*2
(P. 181, 369)

Card slot 2(P. 36)

Remote cable terminal cover(P. 55, 297)

Vertical-use shutter button *1*2 (P. 53)
Vertical-use F (exposure compensation) button(YF) *1*2 (P. 180, 227, 367, 403)

*1 Can be assigned other roles. g “Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)”(P. 463), “Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function)” (P. 417)
*2 Used when the camera is rotated 90° to shoot pictures in portrait (“tall”) orientation.
Performs the same function as the standard (landscape or “wide”) orientation equivalent.
Parts of the Camera

EN 23

Package Contents
At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories. Contact
your retailer should you discover anything damaged or missing.

CameraBody cap *1

Battery cartridge *1

BLH-1 rechargeable
lithium-ion battery *2

CC-1 cable clip

CP-1 cable protector

EP-17 eyecup *1

Hot shoe cover *1

BCH-1 charger for
lithium-ion batteries *2

CB-USB11 USB
cable

Strap

• Warranty Card

Basic Manual*1 The body cap, eyecup, hot shoe cover, and battery cartridge ship attached to or inserted in
the camera.
*2 The camera comes with two rechargeable batteries and two battery chargers.

24 EN

Package Contents

Before You Begin
Read and Follow Safety Precautions
To prevent incorrect operation resulting in ﬁre or other damage to property or harm
to yourself or to others, read “8 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 663) in its entirety
before using the camera.
While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation.
Be sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Olympus will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use ofthis product outside the country or region of purchase.
• Use of these features outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held liable
for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.

Wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS
The camera features built-in wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS. Use of thesefeatures outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not beheld liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “5 Using Field Sensor Data” (P. 567), “6 Connecting the Camera to External
Devices” (P. 581)

User Registration
Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.

Before You Begin

EN 25

MEMO

26 EN

1

Getting Ready1

Read this chapter whether you are taking photographs orﬁlming movies.

EN 27

Attaching the Strap
1

Before attaching the strap, remove the end fromthe keeper loop and loosen the strap as shown.

Keeper loop

2

Pass the end of the strap through the strap
eyelet and back through the keeper loop.

3

Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.

1• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it ﬁrmly to ensure that it will not come loose.

28 EN

Attaching Cable Protectors
Attach the supplied cable protectors when connecting the supplied USB and HDMI
cables. This prevents accidental disconnection and damage to the connectors.

1

Mount the cable protector on the camera.

1
2

Tighten the screw.

3

Clip the cable clip to the cable and attach the clip to the strap.
• The clip attaches to the buckle.

2
1

EN 29

Removing the Eyecup
The eyecup can be removed from the viewﬁnder eyepiece as shown.

1

Push up where shown.

2

To re-attach the eyecup, slide it straight down
the rails.

1

30 EN

Inserting and Removing Batteries
The camera can be used with up to two batteries at a time. It can also be used witha single battery.

1

Charge the batteries.
Insert battery in direction shown (▲)
Battery charger

3

1

1

2
Charge lamp
Power cable
Rechargeable Li-ion battery

Outlet• Batteries charge in about 2 hours. Charge status is shown as follows:
Charge lamp

Charge status

Flashes amber once per second
Flashes amber twice per second<50% charged
Charging

Flashes amber three times per second

50–79% charged
80–99% charged

Lights green

Charging complete

Flashes green ﬁve times per second

Charging error• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.
• Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is powered by an
AC adapter or connecting to an external device via USB. g “Charging via USB”
(P. 34), “Optional AC Adapters” (P. 35), “6-6 Powering the Camera via USB (USBPower Delivery)” (P. 625)

2Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

ON/OFF lever

EN 31

3

Unlatch the battery compartment cover and remove the battery cartridge.
1

2

3

4

Insert the batteries into the battery cartridge.

1
Bay 1
Bay 2

5

Insert the battery cartridge into the camera and latch the battery compartment
cover.
1

2

3$• We recommend that before using the camera for extended periods, you ready fully-charged
spare batteries to swap in when the current batteries are exhausted.
• See “Batteries and Chargers” (P. 33).
• The order in which the batteries are used when two batteries are inserted can be chosen in
the menus. g [Battery Settings] (P. 561)

32 EN


Removing Batteries
To remove the batteries from the cartridge, slide them intoward the connectors and then lift them out.
2

1

Batteries and Chargers• The camera uses two Olympus rechargeable Li-ion batteries. Use only genuine Olympusbrand batteries.
• Camera power consumption varies widely with the conditions of use.
• The following lead to greatly increased power consumption even when no photographs aretaken or movies recorded:- Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway for repeated autofocus operations- Viewing pictures in the monitor for extended periods- Using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, or GPS- Leaving the camera connected to a computer• The camera may turn oﬀ without warning when the batteries are exhausted.
• The batteries are not fully charged at purchase. Use a battery charger to charge batteries
before ﬁrst use.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or more.
Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives, potentiallyrendering them unusable.
• The supplied chargers take roughly two hours to charge the supplied batteries.
• Use only chargers speciﬁcally designated for use with the supplied batteries. Similarly, use
only batteries speciﬁcally designated for use with the supplied chargers.
• Incompatible batteries may explode (or rupture) during use.
• Follow the instructions in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 664) when preparing usedbatteries for disposal.

1

Using Your Charger Abroad• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to 240 V
AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you are in,
the AC wall outlet may be shaped diﬀerently and the charger may require a plug adapter tomatch the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.

EN 33

Using External Power Sources
Connecting via USB
Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected to a
USB-AC adapter, computer, or other USB device via a USB cable. The batteries
charge only when the camera is oﬀ.
Devices that conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard can also be
used to power the camera. g “6-6 Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power
Delivery)” (P. 625)Charging via USB

1 1
2Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

Connect the camera to the external device via USB.
• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable
protector and cable clip to prevent damage to theconnectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)• The CHARGE lamps light during charging. Charging
times vary with the output of the USB device. The lamps
each go out in turn as the batteries reach full charge.
• If only one battery is inserted, the camera will charge thebattery in whichever bay is occupied.

3

Charging ends when the camera is turned on.

• The batteries cannot be charged via USB when the camera is on.
• If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamps will blink. Disconnect and reconnect the USB
cable.
• USB charging is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.
%• If connected to both an AC adapter and a USB device, the camera will receive power only
from the AC adapter.
• The supply of power ends when the batteries are charged. Disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable to resume charging.
• The batteries will not charge while the camera is oﬀ if pictures are being uploaded to asmartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Connecting When the Camera Is Oﬀ(Power-oﬀ Standby)” (P. 590)

34 EN


Powering the Camera via USB
The camera can be powered using mobile batteries or similar devices connected via
USB. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A
For more information, see “6-6 Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power
Delivery)” (P. 625).

Optional AC Adapters
While inserted in the camera, batteries can be charged using an optional AC-5
AC adapter (on-board charging). The AC adapter can also be used to power thecamera. When powered by an AC adapter, the camera can be used even if nobatteries are inserted. Use only AC adapters designated for used with the camera.
The power cable supplied with the AC adapter is not to be used with other devices.

1

Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

2

Open the DC connector cover.

3

Connect the AC-5 by plugging the DC jack into thecamera DC connector.

1• The batteries will charge while the camera is oﬀ.
• Securely close the DC connector cover when the AC adapter is not in use.
• If batteries are inserted in the camera, the CHARGE lamps light while the batteries charge.
The lamps each go out in turn as the batteries reach full charge.
• If only one battery is inserted, the camera will charge the battery in whichever bay is
occupied.
• Charging via AC adapter is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.
%• The batteries will not charge while the camera is oﬀ if pictures are being uploaded to asmartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Connecting When the Camera Is Oﬀ(Power-oﬀ Standby)” (P. 590)

EN 35

1-1

Inserting Memory Cards

The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the
SD (Secure Digital) standard. Read “Memory Cards” (P. 37) before use.

1

Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

2

Rotate the card compartment cover lock asshown (1, 2) and open the card compartment
cover (3).

1

3• The camera has two card slots.

2

1

3

Slide the card in until it locks into place.

Card slot 1• Turn the camera oﬀ before inserting or removing
memory cards.
• Do not attempt to forcibly insert cards that aredamaged or deformed. Failure to observe thisprecaution could result in damage to the slots.

Connectors
Card slot 2

4

Close the card compartment cover.
• Press the cover closed until it clicks into place.
• Be sure the cover is closed before using thecamera.

• Format memory cards in the camera before ﬁrst use (P. 38).

36 EN

1-1 Inserting Memory Cards


Removing Memory Cards
Press the card to eject it. The card can then be removed byhand.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the card access lamp
is lit or the memory card access indicator (P. 86, 88, 329, 330)
is displayed.

Card access lamp

Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose how each card is usedaccording to your goals. g [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547)

1

• Record only to a selected card
• Record to a selected card until it is full, then record to the second card
• Record pictures with diﬀerent sizes or compression ratios to diﬀerent cards• Record copies of each picture to both cards

For information on card role selection, see “2-3 Card-Related Settings” (P. 71).

Memory Cards
This manual refers to storage devices as “memory cards”. The
camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards
conforming to the SD (Secure Digital) standard. Visit the Olympus
website for the latest information.
• Use a memory card with a Speed Class of 10 or better when recording movies.
• Use a memory card with a UHS-II or UHS-I Speed Class of 3 or better when:
Recording movies with [4K] or [C4K] selected for [nK]/Recording movies with [A-I] (AllIntra) selected for the [nK] bit rate
g [nK] (P. 321)
• Some data remain when memory cards are formatted or pictures are deleted. To protect yourpersonal information when disposing of memory cards, destroy the card or take other steps
to render the data unrecoverable.
• SD memory cards are equipped with a write-protect switch. Datacannot be written to the card when the switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Returning the switch to its original position allows data to again be
written to the card.
LOCK

1-1 Inserting Memory Cards

EN 37

Formatting Memory Cards(Card Setup)

Use the camera to format newly-purchased memory cards or cards that have beenused in another camera, computer, or other device.
Formatting deletes all data from the card, protected pictures included. Conﬁrm thatthe card does not contain important ﬁles before formatting.
When ﬁrst turned on, the camera will display a message prompting you to conﬁgurebasic settings; do not format the card until the initial setup process is complete.
g “1-5 Initial Setup” (P. 45)

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
• For information on using the menus, see “Using theMenus” (P. 66).

1

2

In the e setup menu, highlight [Card Setup] andpress the OK button.
• If two memory cards are inserted, one in Slot 1 and theother in Slot 2, [Select Card to Set Up] options will be
displayed. Highlight the desired slot and press the OK
button.
• If the card already contains data, a menu will be
displayed. Highlight [Format] and press the OK button.

3

Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.
• The camera will format the card.

38 EN

1-1 Inserting Memory Cards

1-2

Attaching Lenses

1

Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

2

Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
Rear lens cap
1

1
2

1

3

2

Align the (red) attachment mark on thelens with the (red) attachment mark on thecamera body and insert the lens into thecamera lens mount.

Lens attachment mark4

Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into
place.

1-2 Attaching Lenses

EN 39

5

Remove the front lens cap.
1
1
2

1
2

1

• Be careful not to press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
• Do not touch the camera’s internal parts.

Removing Lenses

1 1

2Conﬁrm that the camera is oﬀ.

Hold the lens release button and rotate the lensas shown.

Lens release button

2

1

40 EN

1-2 Attaching Lenses

MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used
to switch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

MF

AF/MF

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11

1

16

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

AF/MF

16

Focus distances visible

Focus ringMF

• Selecting [MF] or [PreMF] for focus mode on the camera disables autofocus even when thefocus ring is in the AF/MF position.

1-2 Attaching Lenses

EN 41

Interchangeable Lenses
The camera can be used with interchangeable lenses designatedexclusively for use with the “Micro Four Thirds” system, which can be
identiﬁed by the presence of the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL trademark or thelogo shown at right.
Four Thirds and OM system lenses can also be used. An adapter(available separately) is required.

1• To prevent dust or other foreign matter entering the camera, keep the lens mount pointed
down when the lens or body cap is removed.
• Do not remove the body cap or exchange lenses in dusty locations.
• Do not point the lens at the sun while it is mounted on the camera. Sunlight focused throughthe lens could cause product malfunction or ﬁre.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap or rear lens cap.
• To prevent dust entering the camera, attach the body cap when a lens is not in place.

Lens Compatibility
Lens
Micro Four Thirds system
lens
Four Thirds system lensCameraMicro Four Thirds
system camera

OM system lens
*1 Not available during movie recording.
*2 Does not produce accurate results.

42 EN

1-2 Attaching Lenses

Compatible

AF

Metering

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mount adapter
requiredYes *1YesNo

Yes *2

1-3

Using the Monitor

Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.

Up to 90°
Up to 180°

1

Up to 270°

• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.

• The camera can be conﬁgured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g [Selﬁe Assist] (P. 527)

1-3 Using the Monitor

EN 43

1-4

Turning the Camera On

Rotate the ON/OFF lever to ON.
• The camera will turn on and the monitor will light.
• To turn the camera oﬀ, rotate the lever to OFF.
ON/OFF lever

Monitor

The Battery Level Display
The level of the current battery and thenumber of the bay in which it is inserted areshown in the display. The battery level isshown in 10 increments. The indicator ﬂashes
red when the level reaches 10%.

1

1

100%

Current battery bay
Level of current battery

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023• The camera may require additional time to power on when [On] (enabled) is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-oﬀ Standby]. g “Connecting When the Camera Is Oﬀ(Power-oﬀ Standby)” (P. 590)

Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn oﬀ and operation will besuspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, thecamera will turn oﬀ automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-oﬀ Standby]. g “Connecting When the
Camera Is Oﬀ (Power-oﬀ Standby)” (P. 590)
• The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns oﬀ automatically can be selected in the
G custom menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute and turn oﬀ
automatically after four hours. g [Sleep] (P. 562), [Auto Power Oﬀ] (P. 562)

44 EN

1-4 Turning the Camera On1-5

Initial Setup

When ﬁrst turned on, the camera will prompt you to pick a language and set theclock.
• The current time and date are saved with each picture taken.
• File names include the current date. Be sure to set the clock before using the camera. Somefeatures are only available if the clock is set.

1

When the camera displays a setup
dialog prompting you to select a
language, press the OK button.

1

100%

Please select your language.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.

1

OK button

2

Highlight the desired language using the arrow pad(FGHI) or front or rear dial.

Arrow pad
• The language-selection dialog has two pages of options.
Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons or front or rear dial.

Cursor1

W

100%

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français
0DJ\DU

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Indonesia

Italianoଛ˯ߪ

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

Norsk

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)

日本語

Set

1

W

100%

RomanianɊɭɫɫɤɢɣ

SrpskiῚ㜴)䴭℀*

Slovensky

6ORYHQãþLQD

Español

SvenskaѳъѕῚ㜴)修℀*

Türkçeɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ

Viet Nam

Setare

1-5 Initial Setup

EN 45

3

After highlighting the desired language, press the
OK button.

• If you press the shutter button before pressing the OK
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and nolanguage will be selected. The language selection dialog
can be displayed by turning the camera oﬀ and thenon again, after which you can repeat the process from
Step 1.
• The language can be changed at any time from thee setup menu. g [W] (P. 455)

4

Choose the time and date.
• Highlight items using the HI buttons.
• Edit the highlighted item using the FG buttons.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the e setup
menu. g [X Settings] (P. 455)
• Press the OK button when settings are complete.

1

24 hour clock5

Highlight a time zone using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• Press the INFO button to enable or disable daylightsaving time.

6

Press the OK button to set the clock.

• Leaving the camera with the batteries removed may cause the clock to be reset.
• Choose the frame rate as necessary before recording movies. g [nK] (P. 321)%
• The clock can be automatically updated via GPS. g “Correcting the Clock Using GPS”
(P. 48)46 EN

1-5 Initial Setup

What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not haveselected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose anotherlanguage.

1

Press the MENU button to view themenus.

1100%ѯєьѬщҕѥѕѓѥё111іѨѯоѶшѱўєчдѦўьчѯѠк

2

дјѤэ

ѱўєчѓѥё
KK

YF

ѝѤчѝҕњьѓѥё

4:3

чѧлѧъѤјѯъѯјзѠь
j/Y/i

юѧч

шѤҖкзҕѥ

MENU button

2

1

Highlight the e (setup) tab using
FG on the arrow pad and press
the OK button.

Arrow padOK button

3

Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.

4

Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the OK button.

1-5 Initial Setup

EN 47

Correcting the Clock Using GPS
GPS can be used to correct the clock. Time and date information acquired via
GPS are used to automatically correct the clock while the camera is on. The timezone must be selected in advance using the [Time Zone] option. g “Choosing aLanguage (W Language)” (P. 455)

1

1

Press the MENU button to view themenus.

MENU button

2

Highlight the e (setup) tab using
FG on the arrow pad and press
the OK button.

Arrow padOK button

3

Highlight [X Settings] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

4

Highlight [Auto Time Adjust] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

5

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

48 EN

1-5 Initial Setup

1-6

Focusing the Viewfinder

At default settings, putting your eye to the viewﬁnder automatically turns the display
on. Adjust viewﬁnder diopter if the display is not in focus.
• Rotate the diopter adjustment dial until the display in the
viewﬁnder is in focus.
• The viewﬁnder may turn oﬀ while you adjust the angle of themonitor.
• The camera can be conﬁgured not to switch automaticallybetween the monitor and viewﬁnder displays. g [EVF Auto
Switch] (P. 553)

1

1-6 Focusing the Viewﬁnder

EN 49

MEMO

50 EN

2

Taking and Viewing
Photographs
Read this chapter for information on using the camera to
take photographs. This chapter also covers the features
you’ll use when shooting and viewing photos.

2

EN 51

2-1

Basic Photography andPlayback

Read this section for information on basic photography and playback that will get
you started using your camera right away. It also provides basic information on such
topics as using the touch screen and switching memory cards.

2

Taking Photos
Holding the Camera
Be careful that your ﬁngers or other objects, such as the camera strap, do not
obstruct the lens or AF-assist illuminator.

Landscape (wide) orientation

Portrait (tall) orientation• To prevent unintended operation, you can lock camera controls using the lock lever. You canchoose which controls are locked. g [C-LOCK Settings] (P. 503)

52 EN

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

Taking Photos with the Shutter Button
Frame your subject in the viewﬁnder and take photos with the shutter button.
Compose the shot to position the AF frame over your subject and focus before
shooting.

1

Focus.
• Press the shutter button a short distance to the ﬁrst stop (referred to as “pressing the
shutter button halfway”). The in-focus indicator (() will be displayed and the AF target
for the area in focus will light.
Press the shutter
button halfway
1

In-focus indicator
1

100%

T

100%

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

YF

YF

4K

4K

30p

P

W
28 mm

250 F5.6 0.0

30p

1:02:03

P

1023

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

2

AF frame
AF target• If the camera is unable to focus, the in-focus indicator will ﬂash.
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. AF-target mode
defaults to M (single target). The area covered by the AF target can be chosen in
the AF-target selection display (P. 120). The AF frame is not displayed when q (alltargets) is chosen for AF-target mode.

2

Take the picture.
• Starting from the halfway point, press the shutter button the rest of the way down(“press the shutter button all the way down”).
• The shutter will be released and a photograph will be taken.

Pressing the Shutter Button Halfway or All the Way Down
The camera features a two-position shutter button. Pressing the button a short distanceto the ﬁrst position is referred to as “pressing the shutter button halfway”, while pressing it
further down to the second position is referred to as “pressing the shutter button all the way
down”.
Press halfway

Press all the way
down%• The photograph will be displayed for viewing in the monitor. You can disable the display of
pictures after shooting or choose how long they are displayed. g [Rec View] (P. 90).
• Press the q (playback) button to view photos as they are saved to the memory card after
shooting. You can check pictures even as the camera records large numbers of photos taken
during burst photography or the like. Some playback options are not available.

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

EN 53

Taking Photos with Touch Controls
Frame a shot in the monitor and touch your subject in the display to focus andshoot. You can also use touch controls to position or zoom in on the AF target.


Touch Shutter Options
Tap T in the monitor to choose an option.
1• The option selected changes each time you tap T.

100%

S-IS AUTO

T Tap your subject to focus and take a picture.
ISO-A
200

U Touch shutter disabled.
V

YF
4K

Tap to position the AF target and focus. You can
resize or position the AF frame with your ﬁngers.
Press the shutter button to shoot.

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1023


Focus Zoom (V)21

Tap your subject.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO• An AF target is displayed.
• Adjust the size of the target using the slider.
• To hide the target, tap S.

14
10
7
5
Off

P

2

3x

250 F5.6 0.0

After adjusting the size of the target with the slider,tap Y to zoom the target in.
• While zoom is in eﬀect, you can slide your ﬁnger toscroll the display.
• To exit zoom, tap Z.

• Touch controls are not available in some circumstances, including:- In the one-touch WB white balance metering display- While camera buttons or dials are in use• Do not touch the display with your ﬁngernails or pointed objects.
• Touch controls may not function as expected if you are wearing gloves or the monitor iscovered with a protective sheet.
%• Touch controls can be disabled. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 559)

54 EN

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

Remote Photography
You can use remote photography when photographing night scenes, during macro
photography, or in other situations in which you wish to avoid camera blur causedby operating the shutter button. You can either use an optional RM-CB2 remote
cable or take pictures remotely via a wireless connection using the OI.Sharesmartphone app.

Using a Remote Cable
Open the remote cable terminal cover and connect the remote cable.

2
Using OI.Share
You will need to conﬁgure the camera for connection to a smartphone. Install
OI.Share on your smartphone before proceeding. g “6-2 Connecting to
Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 584)

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

EN 55

Viewing Photographs
View photographs stored on the memory cards.

1

Press the q button.
• The most recent picture will be displayed (single-frame
playback).
• Use the multi selector (T), front dial (k), or HI on
the arrow pad to view other pictures.
• To return to the shooting display, press the shutter button
halfway.

1

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

15

Single-frame playback
View previous picture

View next picture

Front dial

2

Multi selector

Arrow padq button

2

Rotate the rear dial (j) to cycle through the playback displays.
• Cycle through the displays as follows:

p

1

100%

4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

YF 100-0015

15

Single-frame playback

q

p

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00

20

1

2019.4

100%

Sun

q

Index playback

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calendar playback

S (center of multiselector)

S (center of multi selector) or OK• To return to single-frame playback from the index playback display, press the multiselector.
• To return to single-frame playback from the calendar playback display, press the OK
button.
• Use [G/Info Settings] (P. 515) > [G Settings] in G Custom Menu P to choose thenumber of pictures shown in each page of the index playback display.

56 EN

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

3

Press the shutter button halfway to end playback and exit to the shooting
display.

%• Press the q (playback) button to view photos as they are saved to the memory card after
shooting. You can check pictures even as the camera records large numbers of photos taken
during burst photography or the like. Some playback options are not available.

Choosing a Memory Card
If two memory cards are inserted, you can switch from viewing pictures on one card
to viewing pictures on the other while playback is in progress.

1

Press the q button to start playback.

1

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Hold the CARD (card select) button androtate the front or rear dial to choose acard slot, and then release the CARD
button.

15

2+
CARD button• The number of the slot currently selected is shown in the
playback display.

1

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

15

Current slot
• The camera automatically switches between the last photo on the ﬁrst memory card and theﬁrst photo on the second card.
%• To choose the card selected for playback when the q button is pressed, use [Card Slot
Settings] (P. 547)
• You can also switch cards using the q button. Hold the q button and rotate the front orrear dial to switch cards while playback is in progress.

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback

EN 57

Adjusting Volume
Adjust playback volume for sound recorded with pictures.
You can also add audio to photos after shooting. g [K] (P. 281)

1
2

Press the q button to start playback.

1

100%

Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• Press F to increase the volume, G to decrease.

Playback Using Touch Controls
Touch controls can be used to zoom in on and scroll pictures and to page throughpictures during playback.

Single-Frame Playbcak

2 1
2

Press the q button to start playback.
Touch the monitor and slide your ﬁnger left or
right.

1100%• Flick left to view the next picture, right to view theprevious picture.

3

Tap the monitor again.
• A slider and a P icon will be displayed.

4

Drag the slider up or down.

1

100%

• Drag the slider up to zoom in, down to zoom out.

Slider5

When the picture is zoomed in, you can slide a
ﬁnger over the display to scroll.
• Lightly tap twice to zoom in on a selected location.
Repeat the process to zoom out.
• Touch controls are also available during index
playback. Swipe up or down to change pages.

58 EN

K 2-1 Basic Photography and Playback2-2

Shooting Settings

The camera oﬀers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that canbe used for detailed adjustments.
MethodDescription

Direct buttons

Adjust settings directly using buttons, including those listed below.
Commonly-used functions are assigned to buttons for quick
access during viewﬁnder photography.
• The AFp, WB, and #jY buttons

LV super control panel/
super control panel

Choose from a list of settings showing current camera status. You
can also view current camera settings.

Live controls

Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display.

Menus

Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor.

2

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 59

Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred
to as “direct buttons”. Included are the buttons listed below, which can be used forbasic shooting settings.
The camera features buttons for shots framed in (“wide”) orientation and others
that make the camera easier to use when rotated to take pictures in portrait (“tall”)
orientation. Unless otherwise noted, either can be used.

3
4

1
2

2

5

1

4

2

6
7
8
6
7

9

c

0
a
b
Direct button
1 Y button *Assigned function
One-touch white balanceg207, 386

2 Z button *Preview

3 Fn button

N (AF-target selection)

464

4 AEL/AFL button *AEL/AFL

5 Arrow pad

N (AF-target selection)

123

6 F button *Exposure compensation

180, 227

123
141, 188

7 ISO button *ISO sensitivity

181

8 WB button

White balance

202

60 EN

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

Direct buttongAssigned function

9 #jY button

Flash/sequential shooting/self-timer

0 AFp button

AF/metering mode

151
115, 186

a BKT button

Bracketing236

b u (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewﬁnder) selection

62, 83c R button

Movie recording294* Also assigned to a button for use when the camera is rotated to take shots in portrait (“tall”)
orientation. g “Parts of the Camera” (P. 20)

1

Press the desired button.
• The camera will display options for the chosen function.

Options2

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to select the desired
option.

• Additional options may be available for some functions.
In this case options can be displayed by pressing the
INFO button.
• You can also choose a setting by holding the button androtating the front or rear dial. Release the button to exit
the option list and return to the shooting display.

%• To prevent unintended operation, you can lock camera controls using the lock lever. You canchoose which controls are locked. g [C-LOCK Settings] (P. 503)
• Buttons can be assigned diﬀerent roles. g G Custom Menu J [K Button Function](P. 463)

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 61

The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the LV super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“liveview”), the super control panel when framing shots in the viewﬁnder.
The instructions in this manual are for the LV super control panel.
• Pressing the u (LV) button during live view enables viewﬁnder photography and displays
the LV super control panel in the monitor.

u

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0opS-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

(LV button)

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

2

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

P

1023

Live view photography

250 F5.6 0.0

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:031023

Viewﬁnder photography (monitor
turns oﬀ while viewﬁnder is on)

LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)
To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the OK button during live
view.
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

OK

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

Super Control Panel (Viewﬁnder Photography)
When you frame subjects in the viewﬁnder, the super LV control panel will be
displayed in the monitor at all times.
1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0opS-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

62 EN

250 F5.6 0.0

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p
1:02:03

1023

OK


Using the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel

1

Press the OK button.

Cursor• If you press the button during live view, the LV supercontrol panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.

2

Rotate the rear dial or tap to selecta setting in display.
• The selected setting will behighlighted.
• You can also highlight settings using
the multi selector or arrow pad(FGHI).

3

4

Rotate the front dial to change thehighlighted setting.

2

Press the shutter button halfway to accept current
settings and exit the LV super control panel.
• If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will
vanish and setting will end.

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 63

Additional Options
Pressing the OK button in Step 2 displays options for thehighlighted setting. In some cases, additional options canbe viewed by pressing the INFO button.

INFO button

OK button

OK

INFO

[K Image Stabilizer]

2• Touch controls can be used in place of the OK button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice todisplay options.

64 EN

K 2-2 Shooting Settings
Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
e

1

f

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

g
h
i
j

9

0 ab c d

1 Option currently selected
2 ISO sensitivity ................................. P. 181
3 K AF mode ....................................P. 115
AF-target mode ............................... P. 120
4 Flash mode ..................................... P. 254
5 Flash compensation........................ P. 259
Manual ﬂash output ........................ P. 257
6 K image stabilization .................... P. 176
7 n image stabilization *1.................. P. 376
8 K storage options ........................... P. 72
9 Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer) ........................................ P. 151
0 K image quality .............................. P. 78
a Metering mode ................................ P. 186
b I face priority ................................ P. 133
c n image quality *1 .................. P. 321, 339
d Aspect ratio ..................................... P. 233
e K white balance ........................... P. 202
K white balance compensation .... P. 206
K color temperature *2 .................. P. 202

f Picture mode................................... P. 215
g N Sharpness.................................. P. 220
u Contrast ..................................... P. 221
t Saturation .................................. P. 222
z Tone gradation........................... P. 223
x Color ﬁlter .................................. P. 224
y Tint............................................. P. 225
3 Eﬀect.......................................... P. 226
R Color *3 ....................................... P. 231
c Color/Vivid *4 ............................... P. 229
Eﬀect *5............................................ P. 226
h Color space..................................... P. 232
i Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 227
j Control assignment ......................... P. 463

2*1 Settings indicated by a “n” (movie) icon are for movie recording. See “3 Shooting andViewing Movies” (P. 293).
*2 Displayed when CWB (custom white balance) is selected for K white balance.
*3 Displayed when “Partial Color” is selected.
*4 Displayed when “Color Creator” is selected.
*5 Displayed when an art ﬁlter is selected.

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 65

Using the Menus
Items not listed in the control panels can be found in the menus, including items foradjusting shooting and playback settings and customizing the camera for ease ofuse.
Tab name

Tab

Tab

2

Tab name

Item (setting)Description
Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting oraccess basic photo settings.

W

Shooting Menu 1

X

Shooting Menu 2

Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.

nVideo Menu *1

Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.

q

Playback Menu

Playback- and retouch-related items.

G

Custom Menu

Items for customizing the camera.

e

Setup Menu

Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.

P

My Menu *A customizable menu containing only items you select.
g “Creating a Personalized Menu (My Menu)” (P. 477)

2

*1 The n video menu is for movie recording. See “3 Shooting and Viewing Movies” (P. 293).
*2 “My Menu” contains no items at shipment. Use “My Menu” to store and organize frequentlyused items from other menus. Select items for addition to “My Menu” from the camera
menus (P. 477).

66 EN

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
11

Tool tip2

On-screen guides
Press the MENU button to exit to
the previous display

Press the OK button to select thehighlighted item

• Tool tips are displayed for roughly 2 seconds after an item is highlighted. Press the
INFO button to view or hide tool tips.

2

Highlight a tab using FG on the arrow pad and press the OK button.
• Selecting the G custom menu tab displays group tabs.
Highlight a group tab using the FG buttons and press
the OK button to select.

2Group tabs

3

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the OK button to view
options.
Item

Current setting

OK

4

Highlight options using the FG buttons and press the OK button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the multi selector or the front and rear dials in placeof the arrow pad.

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 67

Using Live Controls
Live controls are used to view and adjust settings
during live view. The eﬀects of the selected
settings can be previewed in the live view display.
Live controls are hidden by default. They can beaccessed by enabling their display in the menus.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

o
4:3

YF

NaturalP
Viewing Live Controls

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight the G (custom menu) tab using FG on
the arrow pad and press the OK button.

3

Highlight the P (Disp/8/PC) tab using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.

4

Highlight [K Control Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.

5

Highlight [Live Control] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

2• A check (v) will appear next to [Live Control].
• To exit the menus, press the MENU button repeatedly orpress the shutter button halfway.

68 EN

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

4K

30p

J

K

6

Press the OK button during live view to display the LV super control panel.
1100%

S-IS AUTO

OK

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Press the INFO button to switch to the live control display.

INFO• Press the INFO button again to return to the LV super control panel.

2Using Live Controls

1

Press the OK button to view live controls.

2

Highlight a setting using FG on the arrow pad,then highlight an option using the HI buttons andpress the OK button to select.

• To hide live controls, press the OK button again.

Settings
1

100%

#

p

• Settings can also be adjusted using the dials. Use therear dial to highlight a setting and the front dial to choose
an option.
• The highlighted option will be selected automatically if nooperations are performed for 8 seconds.

#+ -

p
S-AF
ISO
AUTO
i

ESP

P

p B C D E

Options

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

EN 69


Available Live Controls
1100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

o

Settings

4:3

YF

NaturalP

2

K image stabilization .......................... P. 176
Picture mode ........................................ P. 215
K white balance ................................. P. 202
Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer)........................................................ P. 151
Aspect ratio........................................... P. 233
K image quality .................................... P. 78
n image quality * ................................. P. 321

4K

30p

J

K

Options

Flash mode ........................................... P. 254
Flash compensation ............................. P. 259
Metering mode...................................... P. 186
K AF mode ..........................................P. 115
K ISO sensitivity ................................ P. 181
I face priority ...................................... P. 133
K movie audio * .................................... P. 413* Available during movie recording. g “3 Shooting and Viewing Movies” (P. 293)

70 EN

K 2-2 Shooting Settings

2-3

Card-Related Settings

The camera can be used with up to two memory cards simultaneously. This section
describes memory-card–related settings.
The menus and control panels oﬀer items choosing how ﬁles are saved when two
memory cards are inserted. For example, you can opt to save pictures of diﬀerent
types to diﬀerent cards or automatically switch to the other card when one card ﬁlls.
For information on the cards that can be used for still photography, see “Memory
Cards” (P. 37).

2

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

EN 71

Storage Options(K Save Settings)

Choose how the camera stores pictures when two memory cards are inserted.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 73)- The menus (P. 73)• The option selected for image quality may change when you change settings or remove amemory card and replace it with a card that has space available. Check image quality before
shooting.

2yStandard

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected for[K Save Slot] (P. 74). Shooting ends when the card is full.

z

Auto Switch

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected for[K Save Slot] (P. 74). Pictures will be recorded to the remaining
card when the card in the selected slot ﬁlls. This setting automaticallyreverts to [Standard] when only one memory card is inserted.

Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two diﬀerent image
quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot (P. 78).
Dual
1 Independent 1 Shooting ends when either card is full. Image quality is set separately
for each slot; after changing the option selected, check the current
image quality setting.
Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two diﬀerent image
quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot (P. 78).
Dual
2 Independent 3 Recording continues to the card in the remaining slot when either
card ﬁlls. Image quality is set separately for each slot; after changing
the option selected, check the current image quality setting.

3 Dual Same 1

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using the option
currently selected for image quality. Shooting ends when either cardis full. This setting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.

4 Dual Same 3

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using the option
currently selected for image quality. Recording continues to the cardin the remaining slot when either card ﬁlls. This setting automaticallyreverts to [Standard] when only one memory card is inserted.

72 EN

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Save Settings] in the LV super control
panel.

2

Rotate the front dial to choose a setting.

K save settings

3

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the LV supercontrol panel.
• Image quality may change depending on the option
selected. Check image quality before shooting.

Menu Access
Choose a setting using [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) >[K Save Settings] in G Custom Menu Y.

2
MENU button
G tab
Y tab
[Card Slot Settings][K Save Settings]
I on the arrow pad to display options
Use the FG buttons to choose an optionPress

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

EN 73

Choosing a Card for Photos(K Save Slot)

Choose the memory card used to store photos when two memory cards areinserted. Card selection is available when y (standard) or z (auto switch) is
selected for [K Save Settings].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Save Settings] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.
• [Card Slot Settings] options will be displayed.

2

K save settings

2

Highlight [K Save Slot] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight an option using the rear dial or the FG
buttons.
[5]: Photos are recorded to the card in Slot 1.
[4]: Photos are recorded to the card in Slot 2.

4
5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Menu Access
Choose a setting using [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) >[K Save Slot] in G Custom Menu Y.
• [K Save Settings] (P. 72) is available when [Standard] or[Auto Switch] is selected.

MENU button
G tab
Y tab
[Card Slot Settings][K Save Slot]
the arrow pad to display options
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

74 EN

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

Press I on

Storage Slot Selection
If two memory cards are inserted with y (standard) or z (auto switch) selected
for [K Save Settings], the card used to store pictures can be selected using the
CARD (card select) button.

1

Press the CARD button.
• You will be prompted to choose a slot.

CARD button

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to choose the desiredslot.
[5]: Record pictures to the card in Slot 1.
[4]: Record pictures to the card in Slot 2.

3

2

Press the OK button to exit.
• The icon for the selected card will be displayed.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

K save settings

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

EN 75

Storage Folder Selection(Assign Save Folder)

Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
New Folder- The menus (P. 77)

Create a new folder as the destination for subsequent pictures.

Existing Folder Choose an existing folder.
• A new folder cannot be created if a folder with the same name exists on either memory card.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Save Settings] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.
• [Card Slot Settings] options will be displayed.

2
K save settings

2

Highlight [Assign Save Folder] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight [Assign] using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.

76 EN

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[New Folder]:Choose the desired folder number andpress the OK button.
[Existing Folder]: Highlight an existing folder using the FG
buttons and press the OK button. The
camera will display the ﬁrst two photos andthe last photo in the selected folder.

5
6

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Menu Access
Choose a setting using [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) >[Assign Save Folder] in G Custom Menu Y.

2
MENU button
G tab
Y tab
[Card Slot Settings][Assign Save Folder]
I on the arrow pad to display options
Use the FG buttons to choose an optionPress

K 2-3 Card-Related Settings

EN 77

2-4

Image Quality and Size

Choose the compression ratio, ﬁle format, and size used when saving pictures. The
options available via the LV super control panel or live controls can be selected in
the menus.

2

Photo File and Image Size Options(KK)

Choose image quality settings used when photos are saved. When choosing an
option, consider how the photos will be used: for example, are you planning toprocess it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website?
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 79)- Live controls (P. 80)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel1

In the LV super control panel, highlight the [KK]
option for Slot 1 (5) or Slot 2 (4).
• Choose the option used for each card when [DualIndependent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] is selected
for [K Save Settings] (P. 72).
K image quality

78 EN

K 2-4 Image Quality and Size

2

Rotate the front dial to choose an option.
• Choose from the following options. The image size/compression combinations
available can be selected in the menus. g G Custom Menu X > [K Set] (P. 81)
OptionImage size

Compression ratio

YSF

5184 × 3888

SuperFine (1/2.7)

JPG

YF

5184 × 3888

Fine (1/4)

JPG

YN

5184 × 3888

Normal (1/8)

JPG

XN

3200 × 2400

Normal (1/8)

JPG

RAW

5184 × 3888

Lossless compression

ORF

RAW+JPEG

File format

RAW plus the JPEG option selected above• When [Standard], [Dual Same 1], or [Dual Same 3], or [Auto Switch] is selected
for [Card Slot Settings] > [K Save Settings] (P. 547) in G Custom Menu Y, theselected option applies to the cards in both slots 5 and 4.
• IF, JF, IF+RAW, and JF+RAW options are available when High Res Shot
(P. 210) is enabled.
• Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to checkthe image quality setting before shooting.

3

2

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the LV super control panel.
• The image quality option selected may change if you change the option chosen
for [K Save Settings] or remove a memory card and replace it with one that has
space available. In particular, image quality will require readjustment when [DualIndependent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] is selected.

Menu AccessSelect [KK] in W Shooting Menu 1.

MENU button
W tab
[KK]
the FG buttons to choose an option

Press I on the arrow pad to display options

Use

K 2-4 Image Quality and Size

EN 79


Access via Live Controls
Highlight [KK] in the live controls and use HI on thearrow pad to choose an option.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

o
4:3

YF

P

5184×3888

4K

YF
YN
YF YN XN WN +RAW
+RAW

1023

30p

K image quality• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live Controls” (P. 68).
• When [Dual Independent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] is selected for [Card Slot Settings] >[K Save Settings], you can select the image quality used for pictures recorded to thememory card in Slot 1.

2$• RAW images consist of unprocessed image data to which settings such as exposurecompensation and white balance have yet to be applied. They serve as raw data for images
that will be processed after shooting. RAW image ﬁles:- Have the extension “.orf”- Cannot be viewed on other cameras- Can be viewed on computers using Olympus Workspace Digital Photo Managing
software- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 284) retouch option in thecamera menus

80 EN

K 2-4 Image Quality and Size

Choosing Available Options(K Set)Choose the combinations of image size (measured in pixels) and compression(“image quality”) available in the [KK] menu (P. 78).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu X (K/WB/Color).

3

Highlight [K Set] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the I button.
• Image size and compression ratio selection options will
be displayed.

2
4

Using the HI buttons, highlight the size (in pixels)
or compression ratio for the desired image quality
setting ([K1] – [K4]) and then use the FG
buttons to choose a value.

Image size (in pixels)
Compression ratio• The following sizes and compression ratios are available. The sizes for [X] and [W]images can be selected from a menu.
Image size (pixels)

Compression ratio

Y (Large)

5184 × 3888

SF (Super Fine)

1/2.7

X (Medium)3200 × 2400

F (Fine)

1/4

W (Small)

1280 × 960

N (Normal)

1/8

5

Press the OK button to accept the new values.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• G Custom Menu X will be displayed.

K 2-4 Image Quality and Size

EN 81

Choosing Values for [X] and [W] Sizes(Pixel Count)

Choose the size, in pixels, of the [X] (Xiddle) and [W] (Wmall) [KK] options(P. 78).
• The size, in pixels, of the [X] and [W] options can be selected from following:
Xiddle (medium)

3200×2400, 1920×1440

Wmall (small)

1280×960, 1024×768

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu X (K/WB/Color).

3

Highlight [Pixel Count] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Highlight [Xiddle] or [Wmall] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

2• Options will be displayed.

5

Choose a size using the HI buttons and press the
OK button.
• The size-selection dialog ([Xiddle] or [Wmall]) will be
displayed.

6

Press the OK button to accept the new values.
• G Custom Menu X will be displayed.

7

82 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-4 Image Quality and Size

2-5

The Viewfinder and Monitor
Displays

Display Selection
The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the monitor
and viewﬁnder displays. The monitor live view display and viewﬁnder also show
information on camera settings. Options are available for controlling display
switching and choosing the information shown.
Framing photos in the monitor

Framing photos in the viewﬁnder
Put your eye tothe viewﬁnder

2
MonitorViewﬁnder

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1
100%

1023

Live view in monitor shooting displayP

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns
the viewﬁnder on. The monitor turns oﬀ
while the viewﬁnder is on.

• Pressing the u (LV) button switches the display in the monitor from live view to the supercontrol panel. Putting your eye to viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder on. The monitor turns oﬀ.
u (LV) button

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0opS-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Monitor(super control panel)%• Display switching and viewﬁnder display options are available in the menus. g [EVF Auto
Switch] (P. 553), [EVF Style] (P. 554)

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 83

Choosing the Information Displayed
Press the INFO button.

• The information displayed changes each time the INFO button is pressed.
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

1

100%

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Basic info

INFO

Info hidden

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Level gauge(Custom Display 2)

2

S-IS AUTO

INFO button

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

P

INFO

1

100%

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Histogram(Custom Display 1)• You can also hold the INFO button and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the information
displayed. The displays can be cycled in either direction.
%• You can choose the items displayed in Custom Displays 1 and 2. You can also display datafrom GPS and other sensors. Use G Custom Menu P > [G/Info Settings] (P. 515) >[LV-Info] to choose items for display in live view, G Custom Menu a > [V Info Settings](P. 555) to choose items for display in the viewﬁnder.

Histograms
Many
Histograms graph the distribution of brightness
in an image. The horizontal axis showsFewbrightness, the vertical axis the number ofpixels. During shooting, pixels brighter than the
Dark
Brightupper limit are shown in red, pixels darker thanthe lower limit in blue, and pixels in the spot metering area in green.
You can choose the upper and lower limits. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 526)

Highlights and Shadows
Highlights and shadows, deﬁned according to the upper and lower limits for thehistogram display, are shown in red and blue. You can choose the upper and lower
limits. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 526)


The Level Gauge
The level gauge shows camera tilt. Pitch is shown by the vertical bar, roll by thehorizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you ﬁnd it is no longer truly plumb or level. g [Level Adjust](P. 559)

84 EN

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

Display Selection Options(EVF Auto Switch)

Adjust settings for switching between the monitor and viewﬁnder displays.

Using the u (LV) Button

1

Press and hold the u button.
• The [EVF Auto Switch] menu will be displayed.

u button2

Highlight an option using FG on the arrow pad and press the OK button.
[On]: The display switches to the viewﬁnder when you put your eye to the viewﬁnder andto the monitor when you take your eye away. During live view, you can turn live view
on or oﬀ by pressing the u button.
[Oﬀ]: Press the u button to switch back and forth between the monitor and viewﬁnder.

2

Menu Access
Adjust settings using [EVF Auto Switch] in G Custom
Menu a (P. 553).

MENU button
display options

G tab
a tab
[EVF Auto Switch]
Press I on the arrow pad to
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 85

The Shooting Display
Camera menus can be used to choose the information shown in the monitor andviewﬁnder. g [G/Info Settings] (P. 515), [V Info Settings] (P. 555)
Monitor (Still Photography)
1 2 3 45 6

w1

a b c d

HDR

1 ND8
LV

BKT

R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H

2

9 0

1

100%

j
T

78

A
e f gh i

FP RC BKT

FPS

Ÿ

99

FLK T

k

W
28 mm

lm
W

28 mm

S-IS AUTO

#

p
S-AF

WB
AUTO

ISO-A
200

o
4:3

#-2.0

YF
4K

-3

C1 AEL

P

C

1023

BA

1 Memory card access indicator .......... P. 37
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................... P. 584, 600
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
4 Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)........................................................ P. 600
5 Wireless LAN connection........................................ P. 592, 596, 597
6 Pro Capture active .......................... P. 168
7 Super FP ﬂash ................................ P. 252
8 RC mode......................................... P. 252
9 Bracketing ....................................... P. 236
0 HDR ................................................ P. 195
a Multiple exposure............................ P. 246
b Keystone compensation ................. P. 248
c Fisheye correction .......................... P. 250
d Live ND ﬁlter photography .............. P. 197
e High frame rate ............................... P. 175
f Digital teleconverter ........................ P. 235

30p+7
1:02:03

250 F5.6 +2.0

GFED

+2

z y w v

n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u

1:02:03PCx

g Interval timer photography .............. P. 172
h Face/eye priority ............................. P. 133
i Flickerless photography .................. P. 190
j Zoom direction/focal lengthk Internal temperature warning .......... P. 639
l Flash-ready indicator ...................... P. 252(blinking: charging in progress;
steady: charging complete)m In-focus indicator .............................. P. 53
n K image stabilization .................... P. 176
o Picture mode................................... P. 215
p K white balance ........................... P. 202
q Drive mode (single-frame/sequential
shooting/self-timer/vibration reduction/
silent photography/Pro Capture/
High Res Shot) ...............P. 151 – 170, 210r Aspect ratio ..................................... P. 233
s K image quality .............................. P. 78
t n image quality * ........................... P. 321* Settings indicated by a “n” (movie) icon are for movie recording. See “3 Shooting andViewing Movies” (P. 293).

86 EN

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

1 2 3 4

5 6

w1

9 0

a b c d

HDR

1 ND8
LV

BKT

R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H

1

100%

j
T

78

A
e f gh i

FP RC BKT

FPS

Ÿ

99

FLK T

k

W
28 mm

lm
W

28 mm

S-IS AUTO

#

p
S-AF

WB
AUTO

ISO-A
200

o
4:3

#-2.0

YF
4K

-3

C1 AELPC

u Available recording time ................. P. 655
v Number of exposures remaining..... P. 654
w Card slot settings
Top: n save slot ............................ P. 316
Bottom: K save settings ................. P. 72
x Active connection to computer (USB) *........................................................ P. 600
y Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 227
z Top: ﬂash compensation ................. P. 259
Bottom: exposure compensation .... P. 180
A Level gauge ...................................... P. 84
B Exposure compensation value........ P. 180
C Aperture value ..........................P. 94 – 102
D Shutter speed ...........................P. 94 – 10230p+7
1:02:03

250 F5.6 +2.0

GFED

+2

1023

BA

z y w v

n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u

2
1:02:03PCx

E Histogram ......................................... P. 84
F Preview ........................................... P. 464
G Exposure lock ................................. P. 188
H Shooting mode..........................P. 93 – 110
I Custom mode .................................. P. 111
J Log status ....................................... P. 571
K GPS status...................................... P. 570
L Touch controls................................... P. 54
M Flash compensation........................ P. 259
N K ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 181
O K AF mode ....................................P. 115
P Metering mode ................................ P. 186
Q Flash mode ..................................... P. 254
R Battery level/bay number .................. P. 44* Displayed only if a computer is currently selected in the [0] menu as the sole destination
for new pictures (P. 622).
• You can also display data from GPS and other sensors. g “5-2 Using Field Sensors”(P. 570)

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 87

Viewﬁnder (Still Photography)
1
FP RC BKT

99

FLK T

W
28 mm

S-IS AUTO

#

p
S-AF
MF

o
4:3

#-2.0

YF
4K

30p

1#
100%

P C1 AEL

2 3 45
1#

2

100%

P

b

gh i

C1 AELc d e fw1

6

250 F5.6 +2.0

7

Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6

8250 F5.6 +2.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

9Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6

1:02:031023

0 a
WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

j

n

1023

k
WB ISO-A
AUTO 200+2.0

1:02:03

l
m

1023

PC
o

• This is the default display style ([Style 2]). The display style can be selected using G Custom
Menu a > [EVF Style] (P. 554). To display the same information as appears in the monitor,choose [Style 3] for [EVF Style].
1
OVF simulation *1 ......................... P. 89
2 Flash-ready indicator ...................... P. 252(Blinks: ﬂash charging; on: charging
complete)
3 In-focus indicator .............................. P. 53
4 Custom mode .................................. P. 111
5 Exposure lock ................................. P. 188
6 Shutter speed ...........................P. 94 – 102
7 Aperture value ..........................P. 94 – 102
8 Exposure compensation value........ P. 180
9 Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 227
0 K white balance ........................... P. 202
a K ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 181
b Battery level/bay number .................. P. 44
c Memory card access indicator .......... P. 37
d Wireless LAN connection........ P. 584, 600

e Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
f Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)........................................................ P. 600
g Shooting mode..........................P. 93 – 110
h Pro Capture active .......................... P. 168
i Preview ........................................... P. 464
j Top: ﬂash compensation ................. P. 259
Bottom: exposure compensation .... P. 180
k Card slot settings
Top: n save slot ............................ P. 316
Bottom: K save settings ................. P. 72
l Available recording time ................. P. 655
m Number of exposures remaining..... P. 654
n Level gauge *2 ................................. P. 556
o Active connection to computer (USB) *3........................................................ P. 600*1 Displayed in the viewﬁnder only. g [S-OVF] (P. 89)*2 Displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. g [V Half Way Level] (P. 556)
*3 Displayed only if a computer is currently selected in the [0] menu as the sole destination
for new pictures (P. 622).

88 EN

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

Optical Viewﬁnder Simulation(S-OVF)

Increase dynamic range of the viewﬁnder display, increasing the amount of detailvisible in highlights and shadows in a manner similar to optical viewﬁnders. Backlit
subjects and the like are easier to see.
• The eﬀects of exposure, white balance, picture mode art ﬁlters, and other shooting settingscannot be previewed while optical viewﬁnder simulation is in eﬀect.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu a (EVF).

3

Highlight [S-OVF] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the I button.

42Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[Oﬀ]: The eﬀects of exposure and other settings are visible in the viewﬁnder display.
Choose this option to preview the eﬀects of settings during shooting.
[On]: Dynamic range is increased. The eﬀects of exposure, white balance, and othershooting settings are not visible in the display.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu a will be displayed.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

%• This option can be assigned to a camera control using [K Button Function] in G Custom
Menu J. You can then turn optical viewﬁnder simulation on or oﬀ at the touch of a button.
g G Custom Menu J [K Button Function] (P. 463)

K 2-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 89

2-6

Photo Review (Rec View)

Pictures are displayed immediately after shooting. This gives you a chance toquickly review the shot. You can choose how long pictures are displayed or disable
photo review altogether.
To end photo review and resume shooting at any time, press the shutter button
halfway. This item defaults to [Oﬀ].

2

0.3–20sec

Choose how long photos are displayed.

Oﬀ

Photo review disabled. The camera continues to display the view throughthe lens after shooting.

Auto q

Switch to playback after shooting. You can delete images and perform
other playback operations.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Rec View] in the e setup menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

4

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• The e setup menu will be displayed.

5

90 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-6 Photo Review (Rec View)

2-7

Restoring Default Settings(Reset)Reset the camera to factory default settings. You can opt to reset almost all settings
or only those directly related to photography.
Full

Reset all settings with a few exceptions, such as the clock and language.

Basic

Reset photography-related settings only.

• See “7-4 Default Settings” (P. 640) for information on the settings that are reset.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

2
3Highlight [Reset] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• The [Reset / Custom Modes] menu will be displayed.

6

Press the OK button in the [Reset / Custom Modes]
menu.
• The [Reset] menu will be displayed.

7

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• Settings will be reset.

K 2-7 Restoring Default Settings (Reset)

EN 91

%
• Settings can be saved to a computer using Olympus Workspace. For more information, visit
the OLYMPUS website at the following URL:
https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/

2

92 EN

K 2-7 Restoring Default Settings (Reset)

2-8Choosing a Shooting Mode

Choose a shooting mode according to your artistic intent. The shooting mode isselected with the mode dial. Choose custom modes to save and recall shooting
settings as required.


Shooting Modes
See the page numbers listed below for more information.
P

Program AE (P. 94)

A

Aperture-priority AE (P. 96)

S

Shutter-priority AE (P. 98)

M

Manual exposure (P. 101)

B

Selected mode

Bulb/time (P. 104)
Live composite (P. 108)nMovie (P. 294)

C1–C4

Custom (P. 111)

Index

2


Choosing a Shooting Mode

1

Press the mode dial lock to unlock the mode dial.
• The mode dial locks while the mode dial lock is depressed. Press the lock to lock or
unlock the dial.

2
3

Rotate the mode dial to choose a mode.
Press the mode dial lock to lock the dial.

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 93

Letting the Camera Choose Aperture and Shutter
Speed(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.

1

Rotate the mode dial to P.

2

Focus and check the display.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.

2

3

ISO-A
200

Take pictures.

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will ﬂash as shown.
Display
Large aperture (low f/-number)/slow shutter speed

60"

F2.8

Small aperture (high f/-number)/fast shutter speed

8000

F22

Problem/solution
The subject is too dark.
• Use a ﬂash.
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) ﬁlter
to reduce the amount of light entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available ins (silent) mode. g “2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)”(P. 151)• If auto ISO sensitivity control is disabled, choose a value using [K ISO]. g “Adjusting
ISO Sensitivity (K ISO)” (P. 181)
• The aperture value shown when the displays ﬂash varies with the lens and focal length.

94 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Adjusting Settings in Mode P
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 180)
Rear dial: Program shift• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J [K Dial Function] (P. 473)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475)

Program ShiftWithout changing exposure, you can choose from
diﬀerent combinations of aperture and shutter speed
selected automatically by the camera. This is known as
program shift.
• Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P to
Ps while program shift is in eﬀect. To end program shift, rotate
the rear dial in the opposite direction until Ps is no longer
displayed.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

2

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

Ps

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Program shift%• You can choose whether the display reﬂects the eﬀects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the eﬀects of
exposure settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 95

(A: Aperture-Priority AE)

Choosing an Aperture

In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automaticallysets the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower
aperture values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be
in focus (depth of ﬁeld), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller
apertures) increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of andbehind the subject.
Lower aperture values…

F2.8

F4.0

…reduce depth of ﬁeld and increase
blur.

1

Rotate the mode dial to A.

2

Choose an aperture.

Higher aperture values…

F5.6

F8.0

F11

…increase depth of ﬁeld.

2• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating therear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.

3

Take pictures.

YF
4K

30p

0.0

Aperture value

96 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
ﬂash as shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Slow shutter speed

60" F5.6

Fast shutter speed

8000

F5.6

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value,
the limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) ﬁlter
to reduce the amount of light entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available ins (silent) mode. g “2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)”(P. 151)• If auto ISO sensitivity control is disabled, choose a value using [K ISO]. g “Adjusting
ISO Sensitivity (K ISO)” (P. 181)

2

Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 180)
Rear dial: Aperture• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J [K Dial Function] (P. 473)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475)
• You can choose whether the display reﬂects the eﬀects of exposure settings or maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the eﬀects of exposure settings
are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)
• You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview its eﬀects. g G Custom
Menu J [K Button Function] (P. 464)

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 97

Choosing a Shutter Speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
aperture for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter
speeds appear to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur tomoving objects, lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic eﬀect.
Slower shutter speeds…

60”

15

Faster shutter speeds…

30…produce dynamic shots with a senseof motion.

1

Rotate the mode dial to S.

2Choose a shutter speed.

60

125

250

8000

…“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.

2• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
the rear dial.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in s(silent) mode. g [Silent s] (P. 163)
• The aperture selected automatically by the camera willappear in the display.

3

98 EN

Take pictures.

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

S

250 F5.6 0.0

Shutter speed

1:02:031023

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will ﬂash
as shown.
Display

Problem/solution

Low aperture value

2000

F2.8

High aperture value

125

F22

Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.
Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed,
the limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) ﬁlter
to reduce the amount of light entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available ins (silent) mode. g “2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)”(P. 151)• If auto ISO sensitivity control is disabled, choose a value using [K ISO]. g “Adjusting
ISO Sensitivity (K ISO)” (P. 181)
• The aperture value shown when the display ﬂashes varies with the lens and focal length.

2

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 99

Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 180)
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

2%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J [K Dial Function] (P. 473)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475)
• You can choose whether the display reﬂects the eﬀects of exposure settings or maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the eﬀects of exposure settings
are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)
• To achieve the eﬀect of a slow shutter in brightly-lit settings in which slow shutter speeds are
not otherwise available, use the live ND ﬁlter. g [Live ND Shooting] (P. 197)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby ﬂicker from ﬂuorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be conﬁgured to reduce
the eﬀects of ﬂicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker reduction](P. 190), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 193)

100 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Choosing Aperture and Shutter Speed(M: Manual Exposure)In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of ﬁeld.

1

Rotate the mode dial to M.

2Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front dialand shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available ins (silent) mode. g “2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)”(P. 151)• The display shows the diﬀerence between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will ﬂash if the diﬀerence exceeds ±3 EV.
• When [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO], ISO sensitivity
will automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the
selected exposure settings. [K ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Adjusting ISO Sensitivity (K ISO)” (P. 181)

3

ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 -2.0

2

1:02:03

1023

Diﬀerence from optimal
exposure

Take pictures.

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 101

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for[K ISO], the ISO sensitivity display will ﬂash as shown.
Display2

Problem/solution

ISO-A
L64

Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.

ISO-A
6400

Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for [K ISO-Auto Set] > [High Limit].

%• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby ﬂicker from ﬂuorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be conﬁgured to reduce
the eﬀects of ﬂicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker reduction](P. 190), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 193)
• You can choose whether the display reﬂects the eﬀects of exposure settings or maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display maintains a constantbrightness for ease of viewing. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)

Adjusting Settings in Mode M
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed%• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J [K Dial Function] (P. 473)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475)

102 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for[K ISO]. Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO
sensitivity, aperture and shutter speed are not aﬀected. g [K ISO] (P. 181),[K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 183)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F button. Hold the F button and rotate
the front or rear dial.
• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure diﬀerence
S-IS AUTO
shown in the display.
1

100%

ISO-A
800

YF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

1023

Exposurecompensation
Exposure compensation
plus exposure diﬀerence2

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 103

Long Exposures(B: Bulb/Time)

Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview
the photo in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have beenachieved. Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographingnight scenes or ﬁreworks.
“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates thelive view display during the exposure.

“Time” and “Live Time” Photography

2

The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the exposure,press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates thelive view display during the exposure.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select bulb or time photography.
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.

1

100%

S-IS OFF

ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

B

BULB F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Bulb or time photography

3

Press the MENU button.
• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which thepreview is updated.

104 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode4Highlight an interval using FG on the arrow pad.
• Select [Oﬀ] to disable the preview.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.

6

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menus.
• If an option other than [Oﬀ] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or[LIVE TIME] will appear in the display.

7

Adjust aperture.

1

100%

• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using thefront dial.

ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

B

LIVE BULB F5.6

Aperture8

1:02:03

1023

2

Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter buttonpressed. The exposure ends when the button isreleased.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all
the way down once to start the exposure and again to
end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected
for [Bulb/Time Timer] is reached. The default is [8 min].
The time can be changed. g [Bulb/Time Timer](P. 533)• [Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display
shows the time remaining until the process is complete.
You can choose the conditions under which noise
reduction is performed (P. 533).

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 105• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or ﬁsheye correction is in eﬀect.
• Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or ﬁsheye correction is in eﬀect.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE and ﬂash bracketing,and multiple exposure; limitations also apply during live bulb and live time photography.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 176) turns oﬀ automatically.
• Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noiseor bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 533) is enabled.

2%• Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. At default settings, thedisplay is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 534)
• During bulb/time photography, the brightness of the subject in the display is enhanced forease of viewing when lighting is poor. Settings can be adjusted, for example to prioritize
image quality or the display rate. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)
$ NoiseThe longer the exposure, the greater the number of image artifacts (“noise”) that appears in thedisplay. The increasing temperature of the image sensor and its internal circuitry turns them into
heat sources that generate currents in areas of the sensor not otherwise exposed to light. Thisphenomenon becomes more noticeable if you increase ISO sensitivity or exposure times whenshooting at high ambient temperatures. The camera’s long-exposure noise reduction helps
reduce this type of noise. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 533)

106 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Adjusting Focus During Exposures(Bulb/Time Focusing)

You can adjust focus manually while shooting in B (bulb) mode. This allows you todefocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu I (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

2[Oﬀ]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during
an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an
exposure.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• You can also exit the menus by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 107

Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite Photography)
Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left byﬁreworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select [LIVE COMP].
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.

2 3

Press the MENU button.
• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed.
Live composite photography

4Highlight an exposure time using FG on the arrowpad.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• You can also exit the menus by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

7

Press the shutter button all the way down to readythe camera.
• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready for composite
shooting] is displayed.
• Adjust aperture using the front dial. The exposure barshows the diﬀerence between the exposure produced by
the selected settings and the optimal exposure meteredby the camera.

8

Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• Live composite photography will start. The display will be
updated after each exposure.

108 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

9Press the shutter button again to end shooting.
• Live composite photography can continue for up to threehours. The maximum recording time available varies withbattery level and shooting conditions.

• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, HDR photography, AE
bracketing, ﬂash bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystonecompensation, the live ND ﬁlter, and ﬁsheye correction.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 176) turns oﬀ automatically.
%• Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. At default settings,
the display is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 534)

2

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 109

Choosing the Shutter Speed(Composite Settings)

The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography canbe chosen in advance using the menus.

2

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu U (Exp/ISO/BULB/p).

3

Highlight [Composite Settings] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• G Custom Menu U will be displayed.

110 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial
(C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom Modes)
Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved as custom modes andrecalled as needed simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved menu settings can also
be recalled directly.
• Save settings to positions C1 through C4.
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.

Saving Settings

1(Assign to Custom Mode)

Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or B and adjust
settings as desired.
• For information on the settings that can be saved, see
the menu list (P. 640).

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

2

• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Assign to Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Assign to Custom Mode] options will be displayed.

5

Highlight the desired custom mode (C1, C2, C3, orC4) using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• The menu for the selected custom mode will be
displayed.

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 111

6

Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The [Assign to Custom Mode] menu will be displayed
again.
• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom mode,
highlight [Reset] and press the OK button.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

Using Custom Modes(C1/C2/C3/C4)

To recall all saved settings, including the shooting mode:

1

Rotate the mode dial to the desired custom mode
(C1, C2, C3, or C4).
• The camera will be set to the settings for the selectedmode.

2• Saved settings will not be aﬀected if you adjust settings after recall. The saved settings will
be restored when next you select the custom mode with the mode dial.


Recalling Saved Settings
In modes P, A, S, M, and B, you can recall saved settings but not the shooting
mode. The shooting mode remains that currently selected with the mode dial.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

112 EN

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode3Highlight [Recall from Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• The [Recall from Custom Mode] menu will be displayed.

4

Highlight the desired custom mode using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

5

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• W Shooting Menu 1 will be displayed.

2
6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Using the Fn Button[Recall from Custom Mode] can be assigned to a camera control. Settings fora selected custom mode can be recalled at the touch of a button. The selectedshooting mode is also recalled. Press the control to turn the custom mode on or oﬀ.
g G Custom Menu J [K Button Function] (P. 463)

K 2-8 Choosing a Shooting Mode

EN 113

2-9

Focus

Focus can be adjusted automatically (autofocus) or manually (manual focus).
Autofocus features options for focusing on selected points or to track focus on amoving subject. In the case of moving subjects in particular, by adjusting settings
according to the type of subject or shooting conditions, you can photograph agreater variety of subjects. This section covers autofocus photography, including
how you can combine settings to get the most from autofocus.

2

114 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Focus Mode

(K AF Mode)

Choose the focus mode for auto or manual focus.
Autofocus (AF):The camera focuses automatically. Choose from single AF (P. 115), in
which the camera focuses just once when the shutter button is pressedhalfway, and continuous AF (P. 115), in which the camera adjusts focus
continuously while the shutter button is pressed. Also available is tracking
AF (P. 116), in which focus detects and tracks the subject.
Manual focus (MF): Focus manually by rotating the lens focus ring (P. 116). Also available ispreset MF (P. 116), in which the camera focuses at a preset distance.
AF+MF:
Focus can be adjusted manually using the lens focus ring. Switch fromauto to manual focus at will or ﬁne-tune focus manually after focusing with
autofocus (P. 117). If [On] is selected for [K AF+MF] in G Custom Menu
J, b will be displayed in [S-AF], [C-AF], and [C-AF+TR] modes. [On] isselected by default (P. 481).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- Live controls (P. 119)- The AFp button (P. 118)- The menus (P. 119)- The LV Super Control panel (P. 119)• The explanation that follows assumes that camera defaults are used for the beep thatsounds and the AF target displayed when the camera focuses.

2

Single AF (S-AFb and S-AF)
Choose for photographs of subjects that are stationary or are not moving away fromor toward the camera. The camera focuses once each time the shutter button ispressed halfway.
• When the camera focuses, a beep will sound. The in-focus
indicator and AF target will be displayed.
• Autofocus with manual adjustment is available in [S-AFb]
mode. Keep the shutter button pressed halfway and adjust
focus manually (P. 117).

In-focus indicator
1

T

100%

W
28 mm

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

AF target

Continuous AF (C-AFb and C-AF)
Track focus on subjects whose distance to the camera is continuously changing. The
camera focuses continuously while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• The in-focus indicator is displayed when the subject is in focus. The beep sounds and the AF
target is displayed only the ﬁrst time the subject is in focus.
• Autofocus with manual adjustment is available when [C-AFb] is selected. Rotate the lensfocus ring to interrupt autofocus and focus manually (P. 117).

K 2-9 Focus

EN 115Manual Focus (MF)
Focus manually.
• Rotate the lens focus ring to focus.
• If the lens is equipped with an MF clutch, you can rotate thelens focus ring to engage manual focus regardless of the
focus mode selected with the camera. g “Lens MF Clutch(Manual Focus Clutch)” (P. 127)
• The MF clutch can be disabled. g [MF Clutch] (P. 128)

Minimum focus
distance)

Focus ring

Tracking AF (C-AF+TRb and C-AF+TR)
Track focus on a speciﬁc subject while keeping the composition roughly the same.
On detecting the subject, the camera will continue to track it while the shutter button
is pressed halfway.

2• The camera detects the subject when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus. The
camera will track the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• While tracking is in progress, the in-focus indicator and AF
In-focus indicatortarget will be displayed. The target turns red if the camera canno longer track the subject. Press the shutter button again.
S-IS AUTO• Autofocus with manual adjustment is available when
C-AF+TR[C-AF+TRb] is selected. Rotate the lens focus ring tointerrupt autofocus and focus manually (P. 117).
YF• Tracking AF cannot be used with:
keystone compensation, High Res Shot, focus stacking,P
250 F5.6 0.0
1023
focus bracketing, interval timerphotography, HDR
photography, the live ND ﬁlter, or ﬁsheye correction.
Target displayed while
tracking is in progress
1

100%

T

W
28 mm

ISO-A
200

4K

30p

1:02:03

Preset MF (PreMF)
Select [PreMF] to focus at a preset distance. g “Focusing at a Preset Distance(Preset MF)” (P. 129)

116 EN

K 2-9 Focus

AF+MF (S-AFb, C-AFb, C-AF+TRb)
Manual focus adjustment is enabled. The method used to adjust focus depends on
the AF mode. Manual focus is available when [On] is selected for [K AF+MF] in
G Custom Menu J (P. 481).
After focusing using single AF, you can keep the shutter button pressedhalfway and adjust focus manually. Alternatively, you can switch tomanual focus by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing.
Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter is open andduring burst photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
C-AFb/C-AF+TRb: You can switch to manual focus while the camera is focusing incontinuous AF and continuous tracking AF modes. Press the shutter
button halfway a second time to refocus using autofocus. Focus canalso be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
S-AFb:• Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g [K AEL/AFL] (P. 141)
• The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro Four
Thirds PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit the OLYMPUS website.
• In B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time Focusing].

2%• The beep can be muted and the AF target display changed in the G Custom Menu. g [AFArea Pointer] (P. 486), [8] (P. 527)
• You can conﬁgure the camera to automatically zoom in on the focus target when the lensfocus ring is rotated or to highlight outlines that are in focus. g [MF Assist] (P. 495)
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 120), and [AF Target Point] (P. 123)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [K Fn Lever Function] in G Custom Menu J(P. 475).

K 2-9 Focus

EN 117


Access via the AFp Button

1

Press the AFp button.

AFp button• [K AF Mode] options will be displayed.

[K AF Mode] options2

2

Rotate the rear dial.
• You can also rotate the dial while pressing the button.
• If [K AF+MF] (P. 481) is [Oﬀ], only [S-AF], [C-AF],[MF], [C-AF+TR], and [PreMF] will be displayed.

3

118 EN

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

K 2-9 Focus


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
The focus mode can also be selected using the LV supercontrol panel.

K AF mode
Press the OK button[K AF Mode]

Rotate the front dial to choose an optionMenu Access
The focus mode can also be selected using [K AF
Mode] in G Custom Menu J.

MENU button
G tab
J tab
[K AF Mode]
options
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

Press I on the arrow pad to display

2
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [K AF Mode] in the live controls and use HI
on the arrow pad to choose an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

K AF mode

K 2-9 Focus

EN 119

Choosing an AF-Target Mode

(AF Target Mode)

The point or area in the frame on which the camera focuses is called the “AF target”. [AFTarget Mode] is used to choose the number of AF targets used and the size of the area
covered. Reducing the number of targets restricts focus to a small area of the frame,
while increasing the number expands focus to a larger area. Choose [Single Target] forsubjects that are easy to track, [Target Group] or [All Targets] for more elusive subjects.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The multi selector (P. 121)- The LV super control panel (P. 122)

M Single Target
Select a single focus target.

M2

o Small Target
Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target
selection. Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.
o

N 5-Target Group
Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.
nr 9-Target Group (3 × 3)
Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.

rs 25-Target Group (5 × 5)
Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.

120 EN

K 2-9 Focussq All Targets (11 × 11)
The camera chooses the target used for focus from all
121 targets.
q

u/v/w/x Custom Target
Use the AF target mode selected for [t Target Mode Settings] (P. 125) in
G Custom Menu K. The default setting is single target.


Access via the Multi Selector

1

Keep the multi selector pressed while rotating the front or rear dial.

+

2

Multi selector• The camera cycles through AF target modes as shown.

q

M

o

s

r

n

• At default settings, the custom target is not displayed. Display can be enabled using[KNMode Settings] (P. 485).

2

Release the multi selector when the desired mode is displayed.
• AF target mode options will no longer be displayed.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the arrow pad to
be used for AF-target selection. Pressing the FGHI buttons displays the AF target. N(AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow pad by default.
• The following reduce the number of AF targets available:- Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 235)
- Selecting an option other than [4:3] for [Image Aspect] (P. 233)

K 2-9 Focus

EN 121%• The AF target display can be accessed using the multi selector. The multi selector can be
conﬁgured using [S Center Button] in G Custom Menu J (P. 499).
• Settings can be changed using the arrow pad. The role assigned to the arrow pad can beselected using [K Button Function] (P. 463) > [Xd] (arrow pad) in G Custom Menu J.
At default settings, it is assigned to the Fn button.
• Separate AF target modes can be selected according to camera orientation.
g [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 489)
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 120), and [AF Target Point] (P. 123)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475) in G Custom Menu
J.
• You can adjust AF target settings for [C-AF]. g [K C-AF Center Start] (P. 147) and[K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 148)
• Settings can also be adjusted by ﬁrst pressing a button and then using the front dial.
Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been assigned
via [K Button Function]. You can then adjust settings by rotating the front dial. At default
settings, [N] is assigned to the Fn button. g [K Button Function] (P. 463)

2

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

After displaying the LV super control panel, highlight[AF Area] and press the OK button.

AF Area• AF-target selection will be displayed.

M

2

Rotate the front dial to choose an AF-target mode.
• You can choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AFtarget selection. Use [N Select Screen Settings] (P. 488) in G Custom Menu K. At
default settings, the front dial is used to choose the AF target mode.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to exit.

• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb], [C-AF], or [C-AFb] ischosen for [K AF Mode] (P. 115), select [On2] for [AF Area
Pointer] (P. 486). The camera will display AF targets for all
areas that are in focus.

122 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point)

The green frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AFtarget”. You can position the target over your subject. At default settings, the multiselector is used to position the AF target.
• AF-target selection is available when an option other than q (all targets) is selected for [AFTarget Mode] (P. 120).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The multi selector- The LV super control panel (P. 124)

Access via the Multi Selector

1

Use the multi selector to position the AF target.

Multi selector

2• The AF target is displayed in green at the start of theoperation.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector orpress and hold the OK button.

AF target

2

Take pictures.
• The AF-target selection display will clear from themonitor.
• The AF frame is displayed in place of the selected AF
target.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the arrow pad to
be used for AF-target selection. Pressing the FGHI buttons displays the AF target. N(AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow pad by default.
• If you assign [N] to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 463), you can press thecontrol and then position the AF target using the multi selector or arrow pad. This option is
assigned to the Fn button by default.
• In [C-AF] and [C-AFb] modes, the AF target can be repositioned while focus is in progress.
%• When [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad], you can reposition the AF target using monitor
touch controls while framing your subject in the viewﬁnder. g [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 486)

K 2-9 Focus

EN 123Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [AF Area] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.
• AF-target selection will be displayed.
• The number of targets available varies with the AF targetmode.
AF Area2

Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the AF
target.
• The AF target can also be positioned by moving the multiselector.
• You can center the AF target by pressing the multiselector or by pressing and holding the OK button.
• You can choose the roles played by the front and reardials or arrow pad during AF-target selection. Use[N Select Screen Settings] (P. 488) in G Custom
Menu K. At default settings, the arrow pad is used toposition the AF target.

2
3

M

AF target

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to the shooting display.

• The following reduce the number of AF targets available:- Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 235)
- Selecting an option other than [4:3] for [Image Aspect] (P. 233)%
• You can disable the use of the multi selector in the shooting display. g [T Direction Key](P. 499)• Separate AF targets can be selected according to camera orientation. g [K Orientation
Linked N] (P. 489)
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 120), and [AF Target Point] (P. 123)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475) in G Custom Menu
J.

124 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Custom AF Targets(t Target Mode Settings)

Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves during
AF target selection. Targets can be larger than group targets or sized for subjects
whose motion can be predicted. You can also increase the distance between
available targets for faster target selection. The camera can store up to four diﬀerent
combinations of settings.
Size

Choose the target size. Target width and height can be set separately. Choose
from vertical and horizontal dimensions of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.

Step

Choose the number of steps the target moves during target selection. The
horizontal and vertical step sizes can be set separately; choose from steps of 1, 2,
and 3.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu K (AF/MF).

2
3

Highlight [t Target Mode Settings] using FG on
the arrow pad and press the I button.

4

Use the FG buttons to highlight the destination forthe custom target and press the I button.
• Custom target options will be displayed.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 1255Choose the size of the AF target.
• Highlight [Size] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

• Use the HI buttons or the front dial to choose thehorizontal size and the FG buttons or the rear dial tochoose the vertical size.
• To exit without saving changes, press the MENU button.
• After choosing a size, press the OK to return to thecustom target options for the selected group.

6

Choose the step size.
• Highlight [Step] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

2• Use the HI buttons or the front dial to choose thehorizontal step size and the FG buttons or the rear dial
to choose the vertical step size.
• To exit without saving changes, press the MENU button.
• Press the OK button when settings are complete.
• To save additional combinations, repeat Steps 4–6.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• At default settings, the custom target is not displayed. Display can be enabled using[KNMode Settings] (P. 485).
• To use the custom target, select it in the AF-target mode selection display. g [AF Target
Mode] (P. 120)%
• AF-target settings for [C-AF] can be set separately for each custom target. g [K C-AF
Center Start] (P. 147), [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 148)

126 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Lens MF Clutch(Manual Focus Clutch)

The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used
to switch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the focus ring before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

MF

AF/MF

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 1116

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

AF/MF

16

Focus distances visible

Focus ring2

MF

• Selecting [MF] or [PreMF] for focus mode on the camera disables autofocus even when thefocus ring is in the AF/MF position.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 127

Disabling the MF Clutch(MF Clutch)

Disable the manual focus clutch. This can prevent autofocus being disabled by the
clutch engaging accidentally.

2

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu I (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [MF Clutch] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Use the FG buttons to highlight an option.
[Operative]: The camera responds to the position of thelens focus ring.
[Inoperative]: The camera focuses according to the option
selected for [K AF Mode], regardless of theposition of the lens focus ring.

5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.

• Manual focus using the lens focus ring is not available when [Inoperative] is selected for [MFClutch], even if the lens focus ring is in the manual focus position.

128 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Focusing at a Preset Distance(Preset MF)

Quickly focus at a previously-stored distance. An example of a situation in which thisoption might be eﬀective is astronomical photography featuring the moon or stars,
when you want to focus quickly at inﬁnity. The focus distance can be set using AF/
MF or by entering the focus distance directly.
If the lens is equipped with a focus limiter, disable it before proceeding.
• The ﬁgures displayed are intended as guides only.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The menus (P. 131)
- The AFp button- Live controls (P. 131)
- The LV super control panel (P. 131)%
• [PreMF] (preset MF) can be assigned to a camera control using [K Button Function] in
G Custom Menu J, allowing you to focus at a preset distance at the touch of a button(P. 463).
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 120), and [AF Target Point] (P. 123)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [K Fn Lever Function] in G Custom Menu J(P. 475).

2Access via the AFp Button

1

Press the AFp button.

AFp button• [K AF Mode] options will be displayed.

[K AF Mode] options

K 2-9 Focus

EN 1292

Highlight [Preset MF] using the rear dial.

3

Press the INFO button.
• You will be prompted to choose the focus distance for[Preset MF].

4

Choose a focus distance.
• To choose a focus distance using autofocus:
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on a subject at
the desired distance.

2• To choose a focus distance using manual focus:
Rotate the lens focus ring and check the distance in thedisplay.

5

Press the OK button to accept the selected focus
distance.
• To focus at the distance selected for [Preset MF
distance], select [Preset MF] for [K AF Mode] (P. 115).
• The camera also focuses at the preset distance:- when turned on and- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.

130 EN

K 2-9 Focus


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Highlight [K AF Mode] > [PreMF] in the LV super control panel, press the OK
button, and then press the INFO button to display options. You can then press the
shutter button halfway to focus on a subject at the desired distance, or choose thefocus distance manually by rotating the focus ring.
• The camera will focus at the selected distance whenever you select [PreMF] for [K AF
Mode].


Menu Access
Choose a focus distance using [Preset MF distance] in
G Custom Menu I.
• [Preset MF distance] can be used to select the units for thefocus distance display; choose from [m] or [ft].
• To focus at the distance selected for [Preset MF distance],
select [Preset MF] for [K AF Mode] (P. 115).
MENU button
display options

G tab
I tab
[Preset MF distance]
Press I on the arrow pad to
Use the FGHI buttons to choose a focus distance and distance units2Access via Live Controls
Select [K AF Mode] > [PreMF] in the live controls and press the INFO button todisplay the preset focus distance. You can then press the shutter button halfway tofocus on a subject at the desired distance, or choose the focus distance manually
by rotating the focus ring.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live Controls” (P. 68).

INFO

PreMF K AF mode

K 2-9 Focus

EN 131

Using [Preset MF]

1

Choose a focus distance using [Preset MF].
• For information on choosing a focus distance, see page129.

2

Highlight [K AF Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

K AF mode3

Select [PreMF] (preset MF) using the front dial.
• The camera will focus at the selected distance.
• You can also adjust focus manually by rotating the focus
ring.

2

132 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Face/Eye Priority AF
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects. When digital ESP metering is used, exposure will be weighted according
to the value metered for the face.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 134)

I

(face priority on)- Live controls (P. 134)

The camera detects and focuses on faces.

J (face priority oﬀ)

Face priority AF oﬀ.

K (face and eye priority)

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eye closest
to the camera.

L (face and right eye priority)

The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.

M (face and left eye priority)

The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

• Face/eye priority is unavailable if [N Spot Metering] (P. 537) is selected during C (spot)
metering (P. 186) in single-target AF-target mode (P. 120).
• Face/eye priority will be disabled if an option other than [Oﬀ] is selected for [K Tracking
Subject] in G Custom Menu L when tracking AF (C-AF+TR or C-AF+TRb) is enabled(P. 116).

2

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [I Face Priority] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.

I face priority

2
3

Highlight an option using HI on the arrow pad.
Press the shutter button halfway to select the highlighted option and exit the LV
super control panel.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the arrow pad to be
used for AF-target selection. Press the FGHI buttons and use the rear dial to choose atarget. N (AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow pad by default.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 133
Menu Access
Choose an option using [I Face Priority] in G Custom
Menu L.

MENU button
display options

G tab
L tab
[I Face Priority]
Press I on the arrow pad to
Use the FG buttons to choose an option
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [I Face Priority] in the live controls and use
HI on the arrow pad to choose an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
• You can also select face/eye priority by rotating the rear dial in
the AF-target selection display.

2

I face priority%
These settings can also be accessed using the following methods.
• Highlight [AF Area] in the LV super control panel and press the OK button. You can thenadjust settings by rotating the rear dial.
• Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been assigned
via [K Button Function]. You can then adjust settings by rotating the rear dial. At default
settings, [N] is assigned to the Fn button.

134 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Using Face/Eye Priority AF

1

Point the camera at your subject.
• Faces detected by the camera are indicated by whiteborders.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

2

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by agreen border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus onan eye.
• A white border is also displayed if a face is detectedduring manual focus. Exposure will be set according to
the value metered for the center of the face.

3

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1

1023

T

100%

W
28 mm

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Press the shutter button all the way down.

• The camera may fail to detect some subjects.
• The camera may be unable to detect the subject depending on the settings selected for the[Picture Mode] art ﬁlter options (ART1–ART16).
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.

K 2-9 Focus

2

EN 135

Zoom Frame/Focus Zoom AF(Super Spot AF)

You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during
focusing, zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas
smaller than the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired
during zoom.

Assigning [a] (Magnify) to a Control
Focus zoom can be assigned to a control via:
• The LV super control panel• The menus (P. 137)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Button Function] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• [K Button Function] options will be displayed.

2
K button function

2

Using FG on the arrow pad, highlight the control towhich [a] (magnify) will be assigned and then pressthe I button.

3

Highlight [Magnify] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

4

Press the OK button again.
• The menu will clear from the display.

136 EN

K 2-9 Focus


Menu AccessUse [K Button Function] in G Custom Menu J tochoose the roles played by camera controls.

MENU button
G tab
J tab
on the arrow pad to display options[K Button Function]
Choose a control
Press IUse the FG buttons to choose [a] (magnify)

Using [a] (Magnify)

1

Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.
• The frame is displayed in the same position as the target
most recently used for autofocus.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

Off

YF
4K

30p

P

2

Position the frame using the multi selector.
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector or press
and hold the OK button.
• The frame can also be positioned using the arrow pad(FGHI).

Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose thezoom ratio.

1023

2

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

Off

YF
4K

30p

P

3

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

1

100%

• Press the INFO and then use the FG buttons or thefront or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom frame.
• Press the OK button to accept and exit.
5x

K 2-9 Focus

EN 137

4

Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to ﬁll thedisplay.
• Use the multi selector to scroll the display.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• You can also scroll the display using the arrow pad(FGHI).
• In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you can pressthe INFO button during zoom to choose aperture or
shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the OK button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.

5

2

1

100%

10x

1

100%

250 F5.6

Exposure adjustment
display for modes M and B

Press the shutter button halfway to focus using
autofocus.

• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not aﬀected.
%• Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. Tap the your subject in the display. The zoom
frame will be displayed; tap Y to zoom in.
• You can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or conﬁgure the camera
to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus. g [LV Close Up
Settings] (P. 139)

138 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Focus Zoom Options(LV Close Up Settings)

Choose display options for use with focus zoom. This item comes in handy when
you want to view the entire composition before shooting or if you want an easy-tosee display for checking focus with focus zoom.
Choose what happens if the shutter button is pressed halfway during focus
zoom.
LV Close Up
Mode[mode1]: Focus zoom ends. You can check the composition after focusing
using focus zoom.
[mode2]: Focus zoom remains in eﬀect while the camera focuses. Compose
the shot before focusing, then zoom in for precise focus and take apicture without ever ending zoom.
Adjust the brightness of the area in the zoom frame.

Live View
Boost[On]: The area in the zoom frame brightens for ease of viewing. Use for aclearer focus display during macro photography or the like.
[Oﬀ]: Display brightness does not change. Exposure can be previewed during
focus zoom.
• This item is available when [Oﬀ] is selected for [Live View Boost] in
G Custom Menu Q (P. 521).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu Q (Disp/8/PC).

3

Highlight [LV Close Up Settings] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight [LV Close Up Mode] or [Live View Boost]using the FG buttons and press the I button.

K 2-9 Focus

2

EN 1395Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• The [LV Close Up Settings] menu will be displayed.

6

Press the OK button to accept the changes.
• G Custom Menu Q will be displayed.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2

140 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL
Button(K AEL/AFL)
Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or AEL/
AFL button is pressed. The camera normally focuses and locks exposure when the
shutter button is pressed halfway, but this can be changed according to the subject
or shooting conditions.
S-AF

Choose options for each K focus mode.

C-AF

S-AF: [S-AF] or [S-AFb]
C-AF: [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb]
MF: [MF] or [PreMF]

MF

Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter is pressed halfway.
Half WayAF[Operative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway initiates autofocus regardlessof whether autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL button.
In [C-AF] mode, the last button pressed is used to maintain focus.
This option has no eﬀect in [MF] mode.
[Inoperative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway will not initiate autofocus if
autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL button.

2

The table below shows how this setting interacts with [Half Way AF].
• “1” indicates the operation performed when [Half Way AF] is enabled, “2” the operation
performed when it is disabled.
AEL/AFL button

Shutter button pressed
AEL/AFL mode

C-AF

MF

All the way down

Kept pressed

AF

AE

AF

AE

AF

AE

S-AF

Locks

—

—

—

Locks

mode2

S-AF

—

—

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

1: S-AF
2: —

Locks

—

—

S-AF

—

mode1

C-AF

Locks

Ends

—

—

Locks

mode2

C-AF

—

Ends

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

1: C-AF
2: —

Locks

Ends

—

C-AF

—

mode4

1: C-AF
2: —

—

Ends

Locks

C-AF

—

mode1
S-AF

Halfway

mode1

—

Locks

—

—

—

Locks

mode2

—

—

—

Locks

—

Locks

mode3

—

Locks

—

—

S-AF

—

K 2-9 Focus

EN 141

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight the G (Custom Menu) tab using FG on
the arrow pad and press the I button.

3

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

4

Highlight [K AEL/AFL] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

5

Highlight a focus mode using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

2• Choose from [S-AF], [C-AF], and [MF].
• To adjust settings for [Half Way AF], select [Half Way AF].

6

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• The focus mode selection menu will be displayed.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

%• The function performed by the AEL/AFL button can also be assigned to other buttons. Use[K Button Function] (P. 463) in G Custom Menu J. At default settings, the AEL/AFL
button is used.

142 EN

K 2-9 Focus

Lens Focus Range(AF Limiter)

Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is eﬀective insituations in which an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera
during the focus operation, causing drastic changes in focus. You can also use it toprevent the camera focusing on foreground objects when shooting through a fence,
window, or the like.
If the lens is equipped with a focus limiter, disable it before proceeding.
Distance settings

Choose the range of focus distances available. The camera can store
up to three settings for diﬀerent situations. The distances shown areintended as guides only.

Release Priority

The shutter can still be released if subject is outside the selected range
when [On] is selected for [AF Limiter].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu L (AF/MF).

2

3

Highlight [AF Limiter] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

5

Highlight [Distance settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• A list of stored focus settings will be displayed.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 143

6Highlight the desired setting ([Setting 1]–[Setting 3])
using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• Lens focus range options will be displayed.

7

Choose a range using the arrow pad.
• Press the FG buttons to choose a number and thenpress the I button to highlight the next digit.
• The units used can be selected from [m] or [ft].

8After choosing a focus range, press the OK button.
• The list of stored focus settings will be displayed.

9

2

Press the OK button again to return to the AF limiter
display and then highlight [Release Priority] using
the FG buttons and press the I button.
• Release priority options will be displayed.

10 Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

• [AF Limiter] options will be displayed.

11 Press the OK button repeatedly to return to thecustom menu.

• Press the MENU button one more time to exit themenus.
• The options chosen for [S-AF Release Priority] and[C-AF Release Priority] in G Custom Menu N have noeﬀect when [On] is selected for [Release Priority].
%• If [AF Limiter] is assigned to a button using [K Button Function] (P. 463), the selecteddistance can be recalled by pressing the button and rotating the front or rear dial.

144 EN

K 2-9 Focus

C-AF Tracking Sensitivity(K C-AF Sensitivity)

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for[K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or preventthe camera refocusing when an object passes between the subject and the camera.
• Choose from ﬁve levels of tracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects thatsuddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent the camera
refocusing when the subject is brieﬂy obscured by other objects or to prevent the camera
focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF target.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

2
3

Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 145

C-AF Lens Scanning(AF Scanner)

Choose whether the camera performs a focus scan. If the camera is unable tofocus, it will scan for the focus position by cycling the lens from the minimum focus
distance to inﬁnity. You can limit the scanning operation if desired. This option takes
eﬀect when [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], [C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF
Mode] (P. 115).

2

mode1

The camera will not scan if unable to focus. This prevents focus changing to suchan extent that you lose sight of your subject when attempting to track small objects
and the like.

mode2

When unable to focus, the camera scans only once. The camera will not scan
again as long as the focus operation continues.

mode3

The camera scans when unable to focus, cycling focus as often as necessary if itloses track of the subject during the focus operation.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [AF Scanner] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• Regardless of the option selected, the camera will scan once if unable to focus when [S-AF]
or [S-AFb] is selected for [K AF Mode].

146 EN

K 2-9 Focus

C-AF Starting Focus Target(K C-AF Center Start)
When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF]
and [C-AFb] focus on the center of the selected group only during the initial scan.
During later scans, the camera will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining
this option with an AF-target mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus
on erratically-moving subjects.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Start] will apply
and then press the OK button.

2• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,press the OK button again.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• This option is not available when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 148) is enabled.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 147

C-AF Center Target Priority(K C-AF Center Priority)
When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] and [C-AFb] modes, the camera
always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeatedseries of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center
focus target will it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group.
This helps you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably.
Center priority is recommended in most situations.

2

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] using FG on
the arrow pad and press the I button.

4

Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply
and then press the OK button.
• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,press the OK button again.

5

148 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-9 Focus

Tracking Focus on Selected Subjects(K Tracking Subject)
The camera can detect and track subjects of speciﬁc types when focusing using[C-AF+TR] or [C-AF+TRb]. You may ﬁnd it hard to focus on the driver or cockpit
of a fast-moving subject such as a race car or airplane. This feature detects andfocuses speciﬁc elements of such subjects.
Motorsports

The camera detects cars or motorcycles. It tracks focus on such elements as
the chassis (chieﬂy of types used in motor sports) or driver.

Airplanes

The camera detects planes and helicopters. It tracks focus on such elements
as the fuselage or cockpit.

Trains

The camera detects trains. It tracks focus on such elements as the cars or
driver’s compartment.

Oﬀ

Tracking subject selection disabled.

• Selecting an option other than [Oﬀ] automatically sets face/eye detection to [Oﬀ].
• The following cannot be used while photography is in progress:
the live ND ﬁlter, interval-timer or HDR photography, keystone compensation, ﬁsheye
correction, High Res Shot, focus bracketing, or Pro Capture High1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu L (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [K Tracking Subject] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

2• To disable this feature, select [Oﬀ].
• G Custom Menu L will be displayed.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-9 Focus

EN 149

6

To use this feature, select [C-AF+TR] or[C-AF+TRb] for [K AF Mode].
• The focus mode can be selected using the menus or LV
super control panel.

Taking Photographs Using [K Tracking Subject]

1

Select [C-AF+TR] or [C-AF+TRb] for [K AF
Mode].

2

Point the camera at your subject.
• When detected, subjects of the type selected for[K Tracking Subject] are shown by white frames.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO
C-AF+TR
b

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

2 3

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• When an element such as the driver, cockpit, or driver’s
compartment is detected, a subject tracking indicator will
be displayed.
• If multiple subjects are detected, the camera will focus
on the subject in the AF frame.

4

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down totake the picture.

• The camera may fail to detect the subject depending on the subject or art ﬁlter selected.
• The camera may fail to detect the subject depending on its type or on shooting conditions.

150 EN

K 2-9 Focus

1023

2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)Your choice of drive mode determines what happens when the shutter button ispressed, for example whether the camera takes a series of pictures while the button
is pressed or starts a timer and takes a picture after a delay.
Choose an option that suits your goals, whether they are to capture subject motion
in a series of photos or take photos that record changes in your subject over along period of time. Drive mode can be eﬀectively combined with other settings tophotograph a variety of subjects under diﬀerent shooting conditions.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The #jY button (P. 153)
- The LV super control panel (P. 154)

- The menus (P. 154)
- Live controls (P. 154)

Sequential Shooting/Self-Timer

2

Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to
your subject.
SingleSingle-frame advance. The camera takes one photo each time the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.

SequentialHigh

The camera takes photos at up to about 15 fps while the shutter
button is held all the way down. Focus, exposure, and whitebalance are locked at the values for the ﬁrst shot in each series.
You can choose the frame advance rate and the maximum numberof shots in each series (P. 155). The frame advance rate drops at[K ISO] settings over 8000.

Sequential
Low

The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while the shutter
button is held all the way down. You can choose the frame advance
rate and the maximum number of shots in each series (P. 155).
Focus and exposure conform to the options selected for [K AF
Mode] (P. 115) and [K AEL/AFL] (P. 141). If [C-AF], [C-AFb],[C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode], thecamera will focus before each shot. The frame advance rate drops
at [K ISO] settings over 8000.

X

Y 12sec

The shutter is released 12 s after the shutter button is pressed all
the way down. The self-timer lamp will light for about 10 s and thenstart to ﬂash about 2 s before the shutter is released. The camera
focuses when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Z

Y 2secWhen the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the selftimer lamp will start to ﬂash and a photo will be taken after about
2 seconds. The camera focuses when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

oTS

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 151

c

Custom SelfTimer

Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer delay and thenumber of shots taken when the timer expires (P. 157).

Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion. The electronic
S(sample Anti-Shock r front-curtain shutter is used. Available in single-frame, sequential
low, and self-timer modes (P. 160).
icon)

♥S
(sample Silent s
icon)

p

Pro CaptureHighq

Pro Capture
LowhHigh Res Shot

2

Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for shutter speeds
faster than 1/8000 s or in settings where the sound of the shutter
would be unwelcome. Available in single-frame, sequential low,
sequential high, and self-timer modes. Frame advance rates of up
to 60 fps are available when sequential high is selected (P. 163).
In ♥T mode, focus, exposure, and white balance are locked atthe values for the ﬁrst shot in each series. The ﬂash sync speed is
1/50 s. At [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000, the ﬂash sync speed
drops to 1/20 s and the maximum frame advance rate to 30 fps.
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The
camera starts recording pictures, including those captured while thebutton was pressed halfway, when the button is pressed all the way
down (P. 168). In p mode, focus, exposure, and white balance
are locked at the values metered when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. At [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000, the maximum frame
advance rate drops to 30 fps.
Take high-resolution photos. Hand-held photography is supported(P. 210).

• Some drive modes are not displayed by default. Use [j/Y Settings] (P. 520) in
G Custom Menu P to choose the modes displayed.
• To cancel the self-timer before shooting starts, press G on the arrow pad.
• Mount the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer photography.
• Standing in front of the camera while operating the shutter button in self-timer mode could
cause photos to be out of focus.
• In S and q modes, the view through the lens is shown during shooting. In T and pmodes, the camera shows a shot taken immediately before shooting starts.
• The frame advance rate varies with the lens and zoom position.
• If the battery indicator starts to ﬂash while burst shooting is in progress, the camera will stop
shooting and start recording photos to the memory card. Some photos may not be recorded
depending on the charge remaining.
• Fast-moving subjects and violent camera motion may cause distortion in photos taken insilent and Pro Capture modes.
• To use the ﬂash in [Silent s] mode, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings] > [FlashMode] (P. 167).
• The frame advance rate may slow when [On1] or [On2] is selected for [Live View Boost].
Select [Oﬀ] to maintain a consistent frame rate. g [Live View Boost] (P. 200)

152 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)
Access via the #jY Button
Direct drive mode selection is available via the #jY button.

1

Press the #jY button.

#jY button• [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) options will be
displayed.

[j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) options2

2

Rotate the rear dial to highlight an option.
• Custom self-timer or high-res shot options can be viewed
by pressing the INFO button.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.
• You can also highlight options by holding the #jY
button and rotating the front or rear dial. Releasing the
button selects the highlighted option and returns you tothe shooting display.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 153Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in
the LV super control panel.

j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

2
3

Rotate the front dial to choose an option.
Press the shutter button halfway to return to theshooting display.

Menu Access2

Use [j/Y/i] (drive mode) > [j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) in W Shooting Menu 1.

MENU button
W tab[j/Y/i][j/Y]
options
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

Press I on the arrow pad to view
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in thelive controls and press HI on the arrow pad to choose
an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

154 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

Burst Shooting Options(jL Settings/jH Settings)
Choose the maximum frame advance rates and shots per burst for sequential
shooting modes. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots is reached while
the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for S (sequential low) andT (sequential high) modes. For information on Pro Capture modes, see “Reducing
Shutter Lag (Pro Capture Photography)” (P. 168).

jL Settings(sequential low
options)

jH Settings(sequential highoptions)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for
S (sequential low), S (anti-shock sequential low), and ♥S (silent
sequential low) modes. You can also adjust settings for q (Pro CaptureLow) mode (P. 168).
• S and S modes:[Max fps]: 1–10 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)• ♥S mode:[Max fps]: 1–18 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)

2

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for T(sequential high) and ♥T (silent sequential high) modes. You can also
adjust settings for p (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 168).
• T mode:[Max fps]: 10–15 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)• ♥T mode:[Max fps]: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu N (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] using
FG on the arrow pad and press the I button.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 155

4Highlight [j/j], [♥j], or [J] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• The camera will display options for the selected item.

5

Choose a setting for [Max fps].
• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

6

Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• This option will only be available if you selected [J] in
Step 4.
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• To disable pre-capture, select [0].

27Choose the maximum number of shots per burst([Frame Count Limiter]).
• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button ispressed all the way down, select [Oﬀ].
• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlightthe current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots
captured while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
g “Reducing Shutter Lag (Pro Capture Photography)”(P. 168)• Press the OK button to save changes to settings.

8

Press the OK button.

9

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.

• For information on taking photos in Pro Capture modes, see page 168.

156 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

Self-Timer Options(c Custom Self-timer)

Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number ofshots taken when the timer expires.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The #jY button- The LV super control panel (P. 158)

- The menus (P. 159)
- Live controls (P. 159)

Number of Frames Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.
Y Timer

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the shutter
button is pressed all the way down.

Interval Length

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose the interval between the
shots taken when the timer expires.

Every Frame AF

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose whether the camera focuses
before each shot.


Access via the #jY Button

1

2

Press the #jY button.

#jY button• [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) options will be
displayed.

[j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) options

2

Rotate the rear dial to highlight [c], [c], or[♥c].

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 157

3

Press the INFO button to display self-timer options.
• Choose from [Y Timer], [Number of Frames], [Interval
Length], and [Every Frame AF].
• Highlight items using the HI buttons and use the FG
buttons to choose an option.

4

Press the OK button to save the changes and returnto the shooting display.
• You can also choose a setting by holding the #jY
button and rotating the rear dial. Release the button to
select the setting and return to the shooting display. In
this case, the INFO button cannot be used to display
self-timer options.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in
the LV super control panel and press the OK button.

2
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

2

Highlight [c] using HI on the arrow pad andpress the INFO button.
• Custom timer options will be displayed.

3

Highlight items using the HI buttons and use FG
to change.

4
5

Press the INFO button to save the changes.

158 EN

Press the shutter button halfway to return to theshooting display.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)Menu AccessUse [j/Y/i] (drive mode) > [j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) in W Shooting Menu 1.

MENU button
W tab[j/Y/i][j/Y][c]Press I on the arrow pad
to view custom self-timer settings
Use the FG buttons to highlight an item, press the I
button, and use the FG buttons to choose an option
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in thelive controls, highlight [c] using HI on the arrow pad,and press the INFO button.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

2

EN 159Reducing Shutter Slap

(Anti-Shock r)

Reduce the slight blur caused by the motion of the shutter. Pictures are taken using
an electronic front-curtain shutter. This option can be used in combination withsequential shooting and self-timer modes.
Oﬀ

Disable anti-shock. Anti-shock options will not be listed when you press the#jY button or highlight the drive mode in the LV super control panel.

Choose how long the camera waits to take the picture after the shutter button
0 sec – 30 sec is pressed all the way down. Select [0 sec] for standard electronic frontcurtain shutter photography.
• The mechanical shutter is used at shutter speeds faster than 1/320 s.

Adjusting Anti-Shock Settings

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2 2Highlight [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting
Menu 2 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Anti-Shock r] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight a shutter-release delay ([0 sec]–[30 sec])using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• [Anti-Shock r] options will be displayed.

160 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)5

Highlight the desired shutter-release delay using theFG buttons and press the OK button.

6

Press the OK button when the desired option ishighlighted.
• [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] options will be displayed.
• To disable anti-shock, highlight [Oﬀ] in the [AntiShock r/Silent s] display and press the OK button.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• The anti-shock version of the current drive mode(indicated by a  icon) will be selected.
• If h (High Res Shot) was selected when you entered
the menu, o (single frame anti-shock) will be selected
when you exit.
• If q (Pro Capture Low) was selected when you entered
the menu, S (sequential low anti-shock) will beselected when you exit.

2• At settings other than [Oﬀ], anti-shock options will be listed in the drive-mode menu when
you press the #jY button or highlight drive mode in the LV super control panel or using
live controls.
• You can choose the options available in the drive mode display. g G Custom Menu P >[j/Y Settings] (P. 520)

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 161
Accessing Anti-Shock Options
When an option other than [Oﬀ] is selected for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [AntiShock r] in X Shooting Menu 2, you can access anti-shock options using:
The #jY Button#jY button

Rotate the rear dial to select options marked with r

The LV Super Control Panel
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer)marked with r

Rotate the front dial to select options

The Menus
Use [j/Y/i] (drive mode) > [j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) in W Shooting Menu 1.

2

MENU button
W tab[j/Y/i][j/Y]
Press I on the arrow pad to view
options
Use the FG buttons to select options marked with rLive Controls
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in thelive controls and use HI on the arrow pad to selectoptions marked with r.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

162 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)(Silent s)

The Electronic Shutter

Take pictures using the electronic shutter. Use for shutter speeds faster than 1/8000 s
or in settings where the sound of the shutter would be unwelcome. The electronic
shutter can be used in single-frame mode and self-timer modes and for frame rates ashigh as 60 fps in sequential shooting modes.
• The ﬂash sync speed is 1/50 s.
• At [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000, the ﬂash sync speed drops to 1/20 s and the maximum
frame advance rate to 30 fps.
Oﬀ

Disable silent mode. Silent modes will not be listed when you press the #jY
button or highlight the drive mode in the LV super control panel.

Choose how long the camera waits to take the picture after the shutter button
0 sec–30 sec is pressed all the way down. Select [0 sec] for standard electronic front-curtain
shutter photography.
• At settings other than [Oﬀ], silent modes will be listed when you press the #jY button or
highlight drive mode in the LV super control panel or using live controls.
• To use the ﬂash in [Silent s] mode, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings] > [FlashMode] (P. 167).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting
Menu 2 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Silent s] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight a shutter-release delay ([0 sec]–[30 sec])using the FG buttons and press the I button.

2• [Silent s] options will be displayed.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 163

5Highlight the desired shutter-release delay using theFG buttons and press the OK button.

6

Press the OK button when the desired option ishighlighted.
• [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] options will be displayed.
• To disable anti-shock, highlight [Oﬀ] in the [AntiShock r/Silent s] display and press the OK button.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• The silent version of the current drive mode (indicated by
a s icon) will be selected.

2• You can choose the options available in the drive mode display. g G Custom Menu P >[j/Y Settings] (P. 520)

164 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)
Accessing Silent-Mode Options
When an option other than [Oﬀ] is selected for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] >[Silent s] in X Shooting Menu 2, you can access silent-mode options using:
The #jY Button#jY button

Rotate the rear dial to select options marked with s

The LV Super Control Panel
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer)marked with s

Rotate the front dial to select options

The Menus
Use [j/Y/i] (drive mode) > [j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) in W Shooting Menu 1.

2

MENU button
W tab[j/Y/i][j/Y]
Press I on the arrow pad to view
options
Use the FG buttons to select options marked with s

Live Controls
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in thelive controls and use HI on the arrow pad to selectoptions marked with s.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 165

Long Exposure Noise Reduction(Noise Reduction s)

Reduce noise in long exposures when shooting in silent mode.
Auto

Reduce noise in long exposures when shooting in silent mode. The sound of the
shutter may be audible when noise reduction is active.

Oﬀ

Noise reduction oﬀ.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting
Menu 2 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Noise Reduction s] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Noise Reduction s] options will be displayed.

2
4Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] options will be displayed.

5

166 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

Silent-Mode Options(Silent s Mode Settings)

Choose whether to enable [8], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] in silent mode.
Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [Not Allow] to ignore
current settings and disable the selected item.
8

Choose whether to use the settings currently selected for [8] in G Custom
Menu S (P. 527).

AF Illuminator

Choose whether to use the settings currently selected for [AF Illuminator] in
G Custom Menu L (P. 490).

Flash Mode

Choose whether to use current ﬂash settings (P. 254).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting
Menu 2 and press I on the arrow pad.

2
3Highlight [Silent s Mode Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Silent s Mode Settings] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight the desired item using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

5

Highlight [Allow] or [Not Allow] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 167

Reducing Shutter Lag (Pro Capture Photography)
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins.
If the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected
number of pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you mightotherwise miss due to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag. Choose from [Pro
Capture Low] and [Pro Capture High].
Pro Capture Low (q)The camera shoots at up to 18 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured
before the shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF], [C-AFb],[C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 115), the camera
will focus before each shot. Choose this option if you anticipate that the distance tothe subject will change during shooting.

2

Pro Capture High (p)The camera shoots at up to 60 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured
before the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF]
when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 115) and [S-AFb]
when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected. Choose this option if the distance tothe subject is unlikely to change very much during shooting.
• Aperture is restricted to values between maximum aperture and f/8.0 while q (Pro CaptureLow) mode is in eﬀect.
• Pro Capture is not available while the camera is connected to a smartphone.
• Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in q (Pro CaptureLow) mode.
• The camera will continue to capture pictures for up to a minute while the shutter button ispressed halfway. To resume shooting after capture ends, release the button and then press it
halfway once more.
• Photographs may be aﬀected by ﬂicker under ﬂuorescent or other artiﬁcial lighting or if thesubject moves markedly during shooting.
• During shooting, the display will not go black and the sound of the shutter will not be audible.
• Shutter speeds cannot be slower than a certain value.
• Depending on subject brightness and the options selected for [K ISO] and exposurecompensation, the display frame rate may drop below that selected for [Frame Rate](P. 175) in G Custom Menu Q.

168 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

As is the case with other drive modes, Pro Capture modes can be selected using
the #jY button.

1

Press the #jY button.

#jY button• [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) options will be
displayed.

[j/Y] (sequential
shooting/self-timer) options2

2

Rotate the rear dial to highlight q (Pro CaptureLow) or p (Pro Capture High) and press the OK
button.
• Drive options will clear from the display.
• You can also highlight options by holding the #jY
button and rotating the rear dial.

3

Take pictures.
• Capture starts when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. A capture icon (Z) will be displayed. If the
button is kept pressed halfway for over a minute, capture
will end and the Z icon will clear from the display. Press
the shutter button halfway again to resume shooting.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving
pictures to the memory card.
• Shooting will continue while the shutter button is pressed
all the way down, up to the number of shots selected for[Frame Count Limiter].

Capture icon (green)
1

T

100%

W
28 mm

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023• Pro Capture modes can be selected in much the same way using the LV super control
panel or live controls. They can also be selected using [j/Y/i] (P. 154) in W Shooting
Menu 1.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 169
Pro Capture Options
Pro Capture options can be adjusted in G Custom Menu N. Use [jL Settings](Pro Capture Low options) to adjust settings for Pro Capture Low and[jH Settings] (Pro Capture High options) to adjust settings for Pro Capture High.
Max fps

Choose the frame advance rate. All ﬁgures are approximate.
• Pro Capture Low: 10, 15, or 18 fps• Pro Capture High: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps

Pre-shutter
FramesChoose the number of shots captured before the shutter button is pressed
all the way down. The maximum is 35.

Frame Count
Limiter

Choose the number of shots recorded, including shots captured before
recording begins. You can limit the number of shots recorded while the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. Select [Oﬀ] to continue shooting
as long as the shutter button is kept pressed all the way down.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu N (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight the desired item using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

2• Select [jL Settings] to adjust settings for Pro Capture
Low, [jH Settings] to adjust settings for Pro Capture
High.

4

Highlight [J] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

5

Choose a setting for [Max fps].
• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

170 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

6

Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• To disable pre-capture, select [0].

7Choose the maximum number of shots per burst([Frame Count Limiter]).
• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button ispressed all the way down, select [Oﬀ].
• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlightthe current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots
captured while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• Press the OK button to save changes to settings.

8

Press the OK button.

2• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.

9

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 171Interval-Timer Photography(Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
Take a series of photos automatically at a preset interval. You also have the optionof saving the series as a time-lapse movie.
• Interval-timer photography is available in modes P, A, S, and M.
• Bracketing, HDR bracketing, multiple exposure, and live ND ﬁlter features cannot be used.
• You can use the wireless release option for connected smartphones.
Number of Frames

Choose the number of shots.

Start Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the ﬁrst shot.

Interval Length

Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting has
begun.
Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.

Time Lapse Movie

2
Movie Settings[Oﬀ]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use them tocreate a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them tocreate a time-lapse movie.
Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([FrameRate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [j/Y/i] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] options will be displayed.

172 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

4Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

5

Highlight items using the FG buttons.
• Press the I button to display options for the highlighted
item.
• Press the OK button when settings are complete.

6

Press the OK button repeatedly to return to
W Shooting Menu 1.

• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A 99 icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon
shows the selected number of shots).

Interval-timer photography
1

99

100%

S-IS AUTO

2

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• The 99 icon will turn green and the number of shots
remaining will be displayed.
• To end shooting before all shots are taken, press the
MENU button.
• Pictures will be taken even if the autofocus operation
fails. Use manual focus to focus at a ﬁxed distance.

• Each picture will be displayed for 0.5 seconds after it is taken ([Rec View], P. 90).
• If the option selected for [Start Waiting Time] or [Interval Length] is longer than 1 minute30 seconds, the monitor will go dark and the camera will turn oﬀ after one minute. The
camera and monitor will turn on automatically 10 seconds before the next shot. They canalso be turned on by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• The camera uses [S-AF] when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] and[S-AFb] when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected.
• Touch controls are disabled during interval-timer photography.
• The ﬂash will not ﬁre if the time needed for it to charge is longer than the interval.
• A time-lapse movie will not be created if any of the photos fail to record correctly.
• A time-lapse movie will not be created if the space on the memory card is insuﬃcient.
• Performing any of the following operations after shooting has started cancels interval-timer
photography: rotating the mode dial, pressing the MENU, q, or lens-release button, orconnecting a USB cable.
• Turning the camera oﬀ ends interval-timer photography.
• Interval-timer photography will end if the battery runs low. Be sure the battery is charged
before shooting.
K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 173

Burst Mode Image Stabilization(j Image Stabilization)
Choose the type of image stabilization applied during burst shooting.
To maximize the eﬀects of image stabilization during burst shooting, the camera
centers the image sensor for every shot. This slightly reduces the frame advancerate.
IS Priority

Priority is given to image stabilization. The frame advance rate drops slightly.

Fps Priority

Priority is given to the frame advance rate. Image stabilization may be slightly
less eﬀective under some conditions.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu O (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight [j Image Stabilization] using FG on
the arrow pad and press the I button.

45
6Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

2

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• You can also exit the menus by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

• [j Image Stabilization] is ﬁxed at [Fps Priority] in q (Pro Capture Low) and p (Pro
Capture High) modes.

174 ENK 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

Viewﬁnder Display Rate

(Frame Rate)

Increase the viewﬁnder display rate to smooth subject motion. This eases the taskof tracking fast-moving and otherwise hard-to-frame subjects.
NormalThe normal display rate. Select this option in most circumstances.

High

Smooths motion even when the subject is moving quickly. Fast-moving subjects
are easier to track. [Normal] will be selected automatically if the camera’s internal
temperature rises during shooting.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu Q (Disp/8/PC).

3

Highlight [Frame Rate] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

45
6Highlight an option using the FG buttons.

2

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• You can also exit the menus by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

K 2-10 Drive Mode (j/Y/i)

EN 175

2-11 Image Stabilization
Image stabilization reduces blur caused by the camera moving while the shutter is
open.
The camera is equipped with 5-axis image stabilization that in addition to reducing
blur caused by motion on the pitch and yaw axes, can be used with all lenses toreduce blur caused by motion on the horizontal, vertical, and roll axes. Not only
can it be used at night, in darkened interiors, with telephoto lenses, and in othersituations in which blur due to camera motion is likely to occur, it can also be used
to reduce blur during macro photography. You will need to provide the lens focal
length when using image stabilization with lenses that are not part of the Four
Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family.

Reducing Camera Blur

2

(K Image Stabilizer)

Reduce blur caused by the camera shake that commonly occurs, for example, when
the subject is poorly lit or in photos taken at high zoom ratios.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 177)
- The menus (P. 177)

- Live controls (P. 177)

S-IS Oﬀ

Image stabilization disabled. Select this option when using a tripod.

S-IS AUTO (auto)

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes. If panningmotion is detected, the camera will automatically suspend image
stabilization on that axis.

S-IS1 (multi-directional)

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.

S-IS2 (vertical)

Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use when panningthe camera horizontally.

S-IS3 (horizontal)

Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use when panningthe camera vertically.

• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very slow
shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in eﬀect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.
• [S-IS AUTO] functions as [S-IS1] when [On] is selected for [Lens I.S. Priority].
%• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway. g [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 178)
• You can prioritize lens image stabilization. g [Lens I.S. Priority] (P. 512)

176 ENK 2-11 Image Stabilization
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Image Stabilizer] in the LV super control
panel.

K image stabilization

2
3

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu AccessUse [K Image Stabilizer] in G Custom Menu O(Release/j/Image Stabilizer).

MENU buttonview options

G tab
O tab
[K Image Stabilizer]
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

2

Press I on the arrow pad toAccess via Live Controls
Highlight [K Image Stabilizer] in the live controls andselect an option using HI on the arrow pad.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

K image stabilization$ Non-Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds Lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will needto specify the lens focal length. Press the INFO button in the menu where you select an
option, then use the FGHI buttons to highlight a value and press the OK button. If thelens information saved with [Lens Info Settings] (P. 550) is used, the saved focal length will beapplied.
• Choose from values of from 0.1 mm to 1000.0 mm.
• Use the value printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 91) > [Reset](basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.

K 2-11 Image Stabilization

EN 177

Half-Press Image Stabilization(Half Way Rls With IS)
Choose whether image stabilization applies while the shutter button is pressedhalfway. An example of a situation in which you might want to suspend image
stabilization would be when using the level gauge to keep the camera level while
framing photographs.
On

Image stabilization is performed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Oﬀ

Image stabilization is not performed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu O (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight [Half Way Rls With IS] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight [On] or [Oﬀ] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2

178 ENK 2-11 Image Stabilization

2-12 Metering and Exposure
The camera meters subject brightness and adjusts exposure accordingly. The
camera can be conﬁgured to raise ISO sensitivity automatically when lighting ispoor. You can also reduce ﬂicker when shooting under artiﬁcial light.

2

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 179Adjusting Exposure(Exposure Compensation)

The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit yourartistic intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values tomake them darker. Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The F button- The dials• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S. To enable exposurecompensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [K ISO] (P. 181).

Negative value

20

Positive value• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV. The exposure bar in the display
shows values of up to ±3 EV. The bar ﬂashes when a value outside this range is selected.
• The viewﬁnder and live view show the eﬀects of values not exceeding ±3.0 EV.
• To view the eﬀects of exposure compensation in live view, select [Oﬀ] for [Live View Boost] in
G Custom Menu J (P. 200). [Live View Boost] is [Oﬀ] by default.


Access via the F (Exposure Compensation) Button
Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial. You
can also hold the F button and use the HI buttons on
the arrow pad.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 +1.3

1:02:03

1023

Exposure Exposurecompensation bar• To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the OK button.
%• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. Use [K Button Function](P. 463) in G Custom Menu J.

Access via the Dials
In modes P, A, and S, exposure compensation can be adjusted using the front dial.
Rotate the dial left or right. In mode M, hold the F button and rotate the front orrear dial.

180 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureAdjusting ISO Sensitivity(K ISO)

Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photographdarker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let thecamera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The ISO button- The LV super control panel (P. 182)

- Live controls (P. 182)

AUTO

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions. Use[K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 183) in G Custom Menu T to choose the maximum
sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter speed at which auto
sensitivity control takes eﬀect.

L64, L100,
200–25600

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 oﬀers a good balance between
noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L64] for larger apertures (higher
f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L64] is equivalent to ISO 64, [L100] toISO 100.
• [L64] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
• [L64] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.

2• Combining values over ISO 8000 with settings that use an electronic shutter (for example,
silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the ﬂash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Regardless of the value selected for ISO sensitivity, the ﬂash sync speed for photos takenusing ISO bracketing in silent mode is 1/20 s.

Access via the ISO Button

1

Press the ISO button.

ISO button• [K ISO] options will be displayed.

[K ISO] options

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 181

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option.
• You can also rotate the front or rear dial while pressing
the ISO button.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.

%• ISO sensitivity selection can be assigned to other controls. Use [K Button Function](P. 463) in G Custom Menu J.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

2

1

Display the LV super control panel and highlight[K ISO].

K ISO

2
3

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

Access via Live Controls
Highlight [K ISO] in the live controls and select an
option using HI on the arrow pad.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

K ISO

182 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureOptions for [K ISO] > [AUTO] (K ISO-Auto Set)
Choose how the camera adjusts settings when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO].

Upper Limit /Default

Lowest S/S
Setting[High Limit]: Choose the maximum sensitivity selected automatically by thecamera.
[Default]: Choose the default sensitivity.
• The maximum is 6400. Sensitivity may drop below the default value if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the current aperture and shutter
speed.
Choose the shutter speed at which the camera will start to raise ISO sensitivity
when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO]. This option takes eﬀect in modes P
and A. Select [Auto] to let the camera choose the minimum shutter speed
automatically.

• The maximum ISO sensitivity automatically changes:- to ISO 800 when the live ND ﬁlter is enabled,- to ISO 1600 when [Shooting Method] > [Tripod] is selected for High Res Shot, and- to ISO 1600 when [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is selected for picture mode.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu T (Exp/ISO/BULB/p).

3

Highlight [K ISO-Auto Set] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure2

EN 183

4Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
[Upper Limit / Default]: Highlight an option using the HI
buttons and use the FG buttons
to change. Press the OK button
to return to the [K ISO-Auto Set]
menu.
[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose [Auto] or select a shutter
speed. To choose a new value,highlight the current setting using
the FG buttons and press the I
button, then highlight the desired
option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button. Press the
OK button again to return to the[K ISO-Auto Set] menu.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2

184 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureShooting Mode and [K ISO] > [AUTO](K ISO-Auto)
Choose the shooting modes in which auto ISO sensitivity control ([K ISO] >[AUTO]) is available.
P/A/S

Auto ISO sensitivity control is available when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO] inmodes P, A, and S.

AllAuto ISO sensitivity control is available when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO] inmodes P, A, S, and M.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu T (Exp/ISO/BULB/p).

2
3Highlight [K ISO-Auto] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 185

Exposure Metering(Metering)

Choose the method used to measure subject brightness.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The AFp button- The LV super control panel (P. 187)

p metering)Suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The camera
meters 324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal exposure
taking into consideration the nature of the scene.

(center-weighted
B averaging)Suited to compositions that place the main subject at
the center of the frame. The camera sets exposure
based on the average light level for the entire frame
while assigning the greatest weight to the area in thecenter.

C (spot metering) *Use a speciﬁc area of the subject meter exposure. The
camera meters a small portion (approximately 2%) of
the frame.

(digital ESP

2- The menus (P. 187)
- Live controls (P. 187)

(spot highlight

D metering) *(spot shadow

E metering) *Brightens the spot metering area, brightening highlights.
Darkens the spot metering area, darkening shadows.

* The camera can be conﬁgured to meter the current AF target. g [N Spot Metering](P. 537)


Access via the AFp Button

1

Press the AFp button.

AFp button• [Metering] options will be displayed.

186 ENK 2-12 Metering and Exposure[Metering] options

2

Rotate the front dial to highlight an option.
• You can also rotate the front or rear dial while pressing
the AFp button.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Metering] in the LV super control panel.

2

Metering

2
3

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu AccessUse [Metering] in G Custom Menu V.
MENU button
G Custom Menu
V tab
[Metering]Use FG on the arrow pad to choose an option
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [Metering] in the live controls and select an
option using HI on the arrow pad.

1

100%

#

p

#+ -

p

• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

S-AF
ISO
AUTO
i

ESP

P

p B C D E

Metering

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 187

Locking Exposure(AE Lock)

Lock exposure at the metered value. Use when you want to meter one subject while
focusing on another or take several shots at the same exposure.
Exposure lock is performed using a button. Exposure lock is available only when[mode1] or [mode2] is selected for [K AEL/AFL] (P. 141). If the AEL/AFL button
is assigned a role other than exposure lock, you will also need to assign [AEL/AFL]
to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 463).

Choosing the AEL/AFL Button Mode

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu J (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [K AEL/AFL] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight a focus mode using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

5

Highlight [mode1] or [mode2] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2

188 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureUsing the AEL/AFL Button

1

Compose the shot to meter the subject for which you
want to set exposure and press the AEL/AFL button
once.

AEL/AFL button• Exposure will lock and an u icon will appear in thedisplay.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

AEL

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

u icon2

To end exposure lock, press the AEL/AFL button again.
• The u icon will clear from the display.

2• Operating the mode dial or the MENU or OK buttons also ends exposure lock.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 189Reducing Flicker(Flicker Reduction)

When shooting under ﬂuorescent or other artiﬁcial workplace or outdoor lighting,you may notice ﬂicker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken atfast shutter speeds. This item reduces these eﬀects.

Reducing Flicker in Live View

(Anti-Flicker LV)

Reduce ﬂicker under ﬂuorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if ﬂicker
makes the display diﬃcult to view.
Auto

The camera detects and reduces ﬂicker.

50Hz

Reduce ﬂicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating current
with a frequency of 50 Hz.

60Hz

Reduce ﬂicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating current
with a frequency of 60 Hz.

Oﬀ

Flicker reduction oﬀ.

2 1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu N (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight [Flicker reduction] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.
• [Flicker reduction] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.

190 ENK 2-12 Metering and Exposure

5Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• [Flicker reduction] options will be displayed.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

Reducing Flicker in Photographs(Anti-Flicker Shooting)

You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under ﬂickering light. When thisoption is enabled, the camera will detect the ﬂicker frequency and adjust the timingof the shutter release accordingly. This feature applies to photos taken with themechanical shutter.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu N (Release/j/Image
Stabilizer).

3

Highlight [Flicker reduction] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

2• [Flicker reduction] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 191

5Highlight [On] or [Oﬀ] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• [Flicker reduction] options will be displayed.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• A u icon appears in the display when [On] is selected.

u icon
1

FLK

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

2

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023• This option does not take eﬀect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent
modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
• The camera may be unable to detect ﬂicker at some settings. Normal release timing will be
used if ﬂicker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling ﬂicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.

192 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureReducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(K Flicker Scan)
Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan]
to optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro
Capture shooting.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1

Choose shooting and drive modes.
• Choose shooting mode S or M.
• Choose one of the following drive modes:- Silent mode (♥o, ♥S, ♥T, ♥X, ♥Z, or ♥c)- High Res Shot (h)- Pro Capture (q or p)

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Display G Custom Menu U (Exp/ISO/BULB/p).

4

Highlight [K Flicker Scan] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

2• [K Flicker Scan] options will be displayed.

5

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The camera will return to the previous menu.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 193

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

1

100%• The camera will exit to the shooting display. A P
icon will be displayed.
S

250.0

Flicker Scan

P icon7

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the
FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is nolonger visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P icon will no longer be displayed. You can adjust
aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the ﬂicker
scan display.

2 8

Take pictures once settings have been adjusted toyour satisfaction.

• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the ﬂicker
scan display. To view these items, ﬁrst press the INFO button to exit the ﬂicker scan display.
%• [K Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable ﬂicker scan. g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

194 ENK 2-12 Metering and Exposure

High Dynamic Range(HDR)

The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with awide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
HDR1

HDR2
3f 2.0EV
5f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV
7f 2.0EV

Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for naturallooking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly eﬀect.
• [K ISO] is ﬁxed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is ﬁxed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots canhowever be combined using HDR software on acomputer or other device.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press I
on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

3f 2.0EV
Numberof shots

Exposurerange

2• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 195

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• The camera will return to the shooting display. An c
icon will be displayed.
• The drive mode will be ﬁxed at T (sequential high).

c icon
1

100%

HDR

S-IS AUTO

ISO
200

T
YF
4K

30p

P

5

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera willtake the selected number of shots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera willautomatically combine the shots into a single picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, andS.
• In mode M, the camera takes the values selected
for aperture and shutter speed as a base for HDR
photography.

2• Use a tripod or take similar measures to ﬁx the camera in place.
• The image displayed in the monitor or viewﬁnder during shooting diﬀers from the ﬁnal HDR
picture.
• Noise may appear in the ﬁnal picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1] or[HDR2] mode.
• The following cannot be used:ﬂash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystonecompensation, live ND photography, and ﬁsheye correction.
%• [HDR] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable HDR.
g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

196 ENK 2-12 Metering and ExposureSlowing the Shutter in Bright Light(Live ND Shooting)
The camera makes a series of exposures and combines to create a single photothat appears to have been taken at a slow shutter speed.
• This option is available in modes S and M.

ND Number

LV Simulation

Choose an ND ﬁlter type; the camera will convert it to an exposure value
and reduce exposure by that amount. Options are available in increments of−1 EV:[ND2 (1EV)], [ND4 (2EV)], [ND8 (3EV)], [ND16 (4EV)], [ND32 (5EV)]
Choose whether to preview the eﬀect of the selected ﬁlter at the current
shutter speed.
[On]: The eﬀects of shutter speed are shown in the display.
[Oﬀ]: Use the standard shooting display.

• Changing exposure compensation or shutter speed resets the [LV Simulation] display.

2

1

Rotate the mode dial to S or M.

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Highlight [Live ND Shooting] in X Shooting Menu 2
and press I on the arrow pad.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 197

5

Choose an option for [ND Number].
• Highlight [ND Number] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button to view [ND Number] options.
• Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button to select the highlighted option.

6

Choose an option for [LV Simulation].
• Highlight [LV Simulation] using the FG buttons andpress the I button to view [LV Simulation] options.
• Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button to select the highlighted option.

7

Press the OK button to save the changes to [ND
Number] and [LV Simulation].

8

To take pictures using the live ND ﬁlter, highlight [On]and press the OK button, or select [Oﬀ] to proceedwithout enabling the live ND ﬁlter.

2• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

9

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If you selected [On] for [Live ND Shooting], live ND ﬁlter
photography will now start.
• An icon appears in the display when the live ND ﬁlter isenabled.
• To end live ND ﬁlter photography, select [Oﬀ] in the [LiveND Shooting] display shown in Step 4.

Live ND shooting
1

100%

ND8
LV

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

S

198 ENK 2-12 Metering and Exposure

30 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

10 Adjust shutter speed while previewing the results in

1

100%

ND8
LV

S-IS AUTO

the display.
• Adjust shutter speed using the front or rear dial.
• The slowest shutter speed available varies with the ND
ﬁlter selected.
[ND2 (–1EV)]: 1/30 s[ND4 (–2EV)]: 1/15 s[ND8 (–3EV)]: 1/8 s[ND16 (–4EV)]: 1/4 s[ND32 (–5EV)]: 1/2 s

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

S

30 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Shutter speed• If [On] is selected for [LV Simulation], the eﬀects ofchanges to shutter speed can be previewed in thedisplay.

11 Take pictures.
• The camera requires a length of time equivalent to theselected shutter speed to produce [LV Simulation] results
similar to the ﬁnal image.
• The upper limit for [K ISO] during live ND photography is ISO 800. This also applies when[ISO Auto] is selected.
• Enabling the live ND ﬁlter sets the drive mode to ♥o.
• The following cannot be used:
HDR, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, intervaltimer photography, K ﬂicker scan, ﬂickerless photography, K subject tracking, andﬁsheye correction.
• Unlike physical ND ﬁlters, the live ND ﬁlter does not reduce the amount of light reaching theimage sensor, and consequently very bright subjects may be overexposed.

2%• [Live ND Shooting] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable the live ND ﬁlter. g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 199

Live View Exposure Preview(Live View Boost)

Exposure settings such as exposure compensation can be previewed during live
view. Alternatively, you can adjust brightness for ease of viewing under night skies
and in other dark environments. Settings can be adjusted separately for mode M,
long exposures, live composite photography, and the like.
Oﬀ

Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can be previewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time photography.

On1

Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted for ease of viewing. The brightnessof the preview diﬀers from the ﬁnal photograph.

On2

As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shots of the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview diﬀers from the ﬁnal photograph. Subject motion may
also appear slightly jerky.
• You can prioritize either the display rate or image quality according to the type ofsubject.

• The frame advance rate may slow when [On1] or [On2] is selected. Select [Oﬀ] to maintain aconsistent frame rate.

2 1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu Q (Disp/8/PC).

3

Highlight [Live View Boost] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.
• [Live View Boost] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight the desired mode using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
[Manual Shooting]: Mode M[Bulb/Time]:
Bulb/time[Live Composite]: Live composite[Others]:
All other modes

200 ENK 2-12 Metering and Exposure

5Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• [Oﬀ] is not available when [Bulb/Time] is selected.
• If you press the I button when [On2] is highlighted,
you will be prompted to choose whether to give priority
to display frame rate or display quality. Highlight [Frame
Rate Priority] or [Quality Priority] and press the OK
button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• If [Quality Priority] is selected for [On2], the display frame rate will drop when lighting is poor.
If [Frame Rate Priority] is selected, colors may be slightly oﬀ or display quality may drop.

2

K 2-12 Metering and Exposure

EN 2012-13 Color and Quality
This section is primarily devoted to features that aﬀect the color and ﬁnal look ofphotographs. Covered are white balance, picture mode, and other items that aﬀect
color balance and features (such as High Res Shot) for shooting high-resolution
pictures.

Adjusting Hue(K WB)White balance makes white objects look white. Although [AUTO] works well inmost situations, you can choose other options if [AUTO] fails to make white objects
appear white or if instead you wish to deliberately lend white objects a color cast.

2• This setting can be accessed via:
- The WB button (P. 203)
- The LV super control panel (P. 204)
Color
temperature

Choose for

AUTO

—

Most normal scenes (scenes containing objects
that are white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in mostsituations.
• You can opt to preserve the colors seen
under incandescent lighting (P. 205).

White balance mode

Auto whitebalance

Preset whitebalance- The menus (P. 204)- Live controls (P. 204)55300 K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, ﬁreworks

N

7500 K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shadeO

6000 K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies

1

3000 K

Subjects under incandescent lighting>

4000 KU—

n5500 K

Light sources with the same color temperature
as ﬂash lighting

One touch whitebalance

P/Q/
W/X

Value selected
for one-touch
white balance

Situations in which you want to set whitebalance for a speciﬁc subject• Color temperature is set to a value meteredfrom a white object under the lighting what
will be used in the ﬁnal photograph (P. 207).

Custom whitebalance

CWB

2000 K –14000 K

202 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Subjects under ﬂuorescent lighting
Underwater photography

Situations in which you can identify theappropriate color temperature• Choose a color temperature.

Access via the WB Button

1

Press the WB button.

WB button• [K WB] options will be displayed.

[K WB] options

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.

2• Pressing the INFO button when [AUTO] is highlighted
displays [KW Keep Warm Color] options (P. 205).
• One-touch white balance (P. 207) and custom whitebalance options can be viewed by pressing the INFO
button.
• You can also rotate the front or rear dial while pressing
the WB button.

%• At default settings, white balance is assigned to the WB button. [K WB] can however
be assigned to other controls if desired. Use [K Button Function] in G Custom Menu J(P. 463).

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 203Access via the LV Super Control PanelWhite balance can be selected using the LV super control panel.
OK button[K WB]

Use the front dial to choose an option• [KW Keep Warm Color] options can be adjusted after you highlight [AUTO] in the[K WB] menu and press the OK button (P. 205).
• To access settings for one-touch white balance (P. 207) or custom white balance, press the
OK button to display [K WB] options and then press the INFO button.
• When custom white balance ([CWB]) is selected, you canhighlight the color temperature in the LV super control panel
and choose a value by rotating the front dial.

Color temperatureMenu Access

2

Adjust white balance using [K WB] in G Custom Menu
X.
MENU button
G tab
X tab
on the arrow pad to choose an option[K WB]Use FG
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [K WB] in the live controls and use HI on
the arrow pad to choose an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

K WB

204 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Preserving Warm Colors(KW Keep Warm Color)

If desired, auto white balance can be adjusted to preserve the warm colors seen
under incandescent lighting. White balance would normally be adjusted to makewhite colors appear white, but this feature can be used to preserve the ambiancecreated by incandescent lighting.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The WB button- The menus- The LV super control panel- Live controls• To access this option via the WB button, the LV super control panel, or live controls, select[WB Auto] and press the INFO button.


Access via the WB Button
INFO button

Select [WB Auto]

Select [On]
Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Highlight [K WB]
OK button
buttonSelect [On]Highlight [WB Auto] in the [K WB] menu

INFO

2


Menu Access
MENU button

Select [KW Keep Warm Color] in G Custom Menu X

Select [On]
Access via Live Controls• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live Controls” (P. 68).
Highlight [K WB]
Select [WB Auto]
INFO button
Select [On]K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 205Fine-Tuning White Balance (K White Balance Compensation)
Fine-tune white balance. Separate values can be selected for each white balance
option. Adjust settings as described below.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
A A (amber–blue) axis

- The menus

Positive values add a red cast, negative values a blue cast.

G G (green–magenta) axis Positive values add a green cast, negative values a magenta cast.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K WB] in the LV super control panel andchoose a white balance option.

2

K WB

2

Highlight [A±0] or [G±0] using the arrow pad andhighlight the desired value using the front dial.

White balance ﬁne-tuning

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

%• White balance ﬁne-tuning can be applied simultaneously to all white balance options.
g [K All x] (P. 545)Menu Access
MENU button
G (Custom Menu) tab
X (K/WB/Color) tab[K WB]
Highlight
a white balance option and press I on the arrow pad
Highlight A±0 or G±0 using the HI
buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a value (when [CWB] is selected, press the I
button one more time and choose a value using the FGHI buttons)• Press the R (movie) button in the A or G ﬁne-tuning display to preview the eﬀect in theshooting display. Press the R button again to return to live view.

206 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Metering White Balance(One-Touch White Balance P/Q/W/X)
Set white balance to a value measured under the lighting that will be used in theﬁnal photograph. Use this option to ﬁne-tune white balance when you ﬁnd it hard to
obtain the desired results with white balance compensation or preset white balance
options such as 5 (sunlight) or O (overcast). The camera stores the meteredvalue for quick recall as required.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The WB button- The LV super control panel (P. 209)
P/Q/W/X- The menus (P. 209)
- Live controls (P. 209)

Measure and store up to four values for one-touch white balance.

Access via the WB Button

1

Press the WB button.

2

WB button• [K WB] options will be displayed.

[K WB] options

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option
from P to X.
• You can also choose a setting by holding the WB button
and rotating the rear dial. Release the button to selectthe setting and return to the shooting display.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 207

3

Press the INFO button.
• One-touch white balance measurement options will be
displayed.

4

Frame a sheet of uncolored (white or gray) paper inthe center of the display and release the shutter.
• Be sure the subject is free of shadows.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed.

5

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The camera will store the setting as the value for theselected one-touch white balance option and exit to theshooting display.
• To exit without measuring white balance, highlight [No]and press the OK button. Repeat the process from
Step 3.

2

Using the One-Touch White Balance Button[k] can be assigned to a control. At default settings, it is assigned to the one-touch
white balance button (XY).

1

Frame a sheet of uncolored (white or gray) paper inthe center of the display.

2

Hold the one-touch WB button and press
the shutter button all the way down.
• You will be prompted to choose the onetouch white balance option that will be used
to store the new value.

+

One-touch white balance
button (XY)3

Highlight a one-touch white balance setting using
FG on the arrow pad and press the OK button.
• The new value will be saved as the value for the selected
setting and the camera will exit to the shooting display.

208 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality
Access via the LV Super Control Panel
One-touch white balance can be selected using the LV super control panel.
[K WB]
OK button
white balance

Highlight P to X using the front dial

INFO button

Meter• Press the shutter button to meter white balance as described in “Access via the WB Button”(P. 207).


Menu Access
The menus can be used only to recall previously-metered values for one-touch
white balance.
MENU button
G (Custom Menu) tab
X (K/WB/Color) tab
option from P to X using FG on the arrow pad[K WB]

Select anAccess via Live Controls
One-touch white balance can be metered using live controls.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live Controls” (P. 68).

2

[K WB]
Highlight an option from P to X
OK button
using HI on the arrow pad

K WB• To view the white balance metering display and measure a new value for the currentlyselected one-touch white balance option, press the INFO button.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 209

High-Resolution Photos(High Res Shot)

Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes aseries of shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create asingle high-resolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would
not be visible even at high zoom ratios.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The menus (P. 210, 212)
- The #jY button (P. 212)

- The LV super control panel (P. 212)
- Live controls (P. 212)

• Pictures are recorded in JPEG (IF or JF) or RAW + JPEG format. In RAW + JPEG
format, the camera will record both the high-resolution picture and an unprocessed RAW
image (extension “*.ORI”). Select High Res Shot before adjusting [KK]. g “High Res
Shot Image Quality (KK)” (P. 213)
• Unprocessed RAW (ORI) images can be viewed using the latest version of Olympus
Workspace.

2

High Res Shot(Oﬀ, 0 – 30 sec)

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the shutter
button is pressed all the way down. Use this option to prevent blur causedby the camera moving when the shutter button is pressed. Select [Oﬀ] todisable High Res Shot.

#Charge Time

Choose how the long the camera waits for the ﬂash to charge for HighRes Shots taken with the ﬂash.
[Tripod]:

Shooting Method

12Take photos with the camera on a tripod or otherwise
secured. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of
80 megapixels (10400 × 7792).
• The ﬂash sync speed is 1/50 s.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 1600.
[Handheld]: Take hand-held shots. The camera takes slightly longer
to record pictures. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of
50 megapixels (8200 × 6132).
• The ﬂash is disabled.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 6400.

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress I on the arrow pad.
• [High Res Shot] options will be displayed.

210 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

3

Highlight the desired item and press the I button.

4

Press the OK button when settings are complete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• Press the OK button after adjusting each of:[High Res Shot]: Highlight [0 sec] using the G buttonand press the I button. Choose await time.
[#Charge Time]: Choose a time.
[Shooting Method]: Select [Tripod] or [Handheld].

• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.

• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will ﬂash if thecamera is not steady. The icon stops ﬂashing when thecamera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the LV
super control panel.

1

100%

ISO-A
200

h
IF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Camera readying for HighRes Shot (ﬂashes)

6

2

Take pictures.
• The h will ﬂash to warn that shots may be blurred bycamera shake. Keep the camera steady.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears
from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite
image when shooting is complete. A message will be
displayed during this process.

• [S-IS Oﬀ] is automatically selected for [K Image Stabilizer] when [Tripod] is chosen for[Shooting Method], [S-IS AUTO] when [Handheld] is selected.
• The maximum wait time for [Shooting Method] > [Handheld] is 1 second.
• There is no need to choose an option for [#Charge Time] when using a compatible ﬂash
unit. During RC ﬂash photography, the maximum ﬂash wait time is 4 s and the ﬂash control
mode is ﬁxed at MANUAL.
• High Res Shot is not available in mode B.
• The following cannot be used:interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, ﬁsheye
correction, and the live ND ﬁlter.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art ﬁlter selected for picture mode will be recorded in[Natural] mode.
• If the camera is unable to record a composite image due to blur or other factors and [JPEG] isselected for image quality, a single JPEG image will be recorded. If [RAW+JPEG] is selected,
both a RAW (ORF) and a JPEG image will be recorded.
• Mottling may be visible in pictures taken under ﬂuorescent or LED lighting or other similar
light sources.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 211High Res Shot can also be selected using the #jY button, the LV super control
panel, and live controls. If High Res Shot does not appear in the drive mode list, it
can be added using the menus (P. 210).


Access via the #jY Button
Press the #jY button and rotate the rear dial
to select h.

#jY button• To view [Shooting Method] options, press the INFO button.

2
Access via the LV Super Control PanelHigh Res Shot can also be accessed via the LV supercontrol panel.
OK button
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer)
and press the OK button
Select hj/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [j/Y] (sequential shooting/self-timer) in thelive controls and use HI on the arrow pad to choose an
option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)
Access via the Menus
MENU button

212 ENW (Shooting Menu 1) tab

K 2-13 Color and Quality[j/Y/i][j/Y]Select h

High Res Shot Image Quality(KK)

Enabling High Res Shot automatically sets image quality to an option compatible
with the higher resolution. Before shooting, be sure to check the option selected forimage quality.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 214)

- Live controls (P. 214)IF

High Res Shots are saved in JPEG [Fine] format at a size of 50 megapixels(8160 × 6120).

JFHigh Res Shots are saved in JPEG [Fine] format at a size of 25 megapixels(5760 × 4320).

IF+RAW

High Res Shots are saved in RAW and JPEG [Fine] formats at a size of
50 megapixels (8160 × 6120).

JF+RAW

High Res Shots are saved in RAW and JPEG [Fine] formats at a size of
25 megapixels (5760 × 4320).

• RAW pictures are recorded at a size of 8200 × 6132 when [Handheld] is selected for[Shooting Method] and at a size of 10400 × 7792 when [Tripod] is selected.

2
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Enable High Res Shot before proceeding.

1

100%

ISO-A
200

h
IF
4K

30p

P

2

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Choose the [KK] setting for Slot 1 (5) or Slot 2(4) in the LV super control panel.
• Each slot has its own image quality option. When [DualIndependent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] is selected
for [K Save Settings] (P. 72), a diﬀerent setting canbe used for each slot. Otherwise, the selected setting will
apply to both Slot 5 and Slot 4.
K image quality

3

Highlight an option using the front dial.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 213

4

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the LV supercontrol panel.

• The option selected for image quality may change if you choose a diﬀerent option for[K Save Settings] (P. 72) or insert a memory card with space remaining; before shooting,be sure to check the option selected for image quality. In particular, image quality will require
readjustment after [Dual Independent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] is selected.

Menu Access
Image quality can be adjusted via the menus. Use [KK] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
options

W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[KK]

Press I on the arrow pad to view
Access via Live Controls
Image quality can be adjusted using live controls.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live Controls” (P. 68).

2

OK button
options[KK]

Press HI on the arrow pad to view

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

h
4:3
IF
+RAW

8160×6120

P

F
IF JF +RAW
I

JF
+RAW

4K

30p

1023

K image quality

214 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Image Enhancement(Picture Mode)

Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, andother properties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or
artistic intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately
for each mode. You can also add artistic eﬀects using art ﬁlters. Art ﬁlters give you
the option of added frame eﬀects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters
are stored separately for each picture mode and art ﬁlter.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Standard Picture Modes
A i-Enhance

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results according to
the type of subject (P. 226).

B Vivid

Choose for vivid colors.

C Natural

Choose for natural colors.

D MutedChoose for pictures that will later be retouched.

E Portrait

Enhance skin tones.

J Monochrome

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color ﬁlter eﬀects andchoose a tint (P. 224).

K Custom

Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a
selected picture mode.

v e-Portrait

Smooth complexions.

F Underwater

Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
• We recommend choosing [Oﬀ] for [#+WB] (P. 540) when this option
is selected.

c Color Creator

Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (P. 229).

2

Art Filters
e Pop Art

Enhance the beauty of colors.

f Soft Focus

Use soft tones for an airy, dreamlike eﬀect.

Pale&Lightg ColorDiﬀuse light throughout the image, increasing exposure slightly andsetting your subject adrift in a soft glow.

h Light Tone

Soften highlights and shadows for a reﬁned, serene eﬀect.

i Grainy Film

Choose for the forceful, bold eﬀect typical of black-and-white ﬁlm.

j Pin Hole

Reduce peripheral illumination for the eﬀect of a photo taken with an old
toy camera.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 215

k Diorama

Increase saturation and contrast and blur out-of-focus areas to makethe picture look like a photo of a miniature.

l ProcessChoose for an edgy, surrealistic eﬀect. Choose Cross Process 2 for acolor balance that exaggerates magenta.

m Gentle Sepia

Choose for a peaceful, reﬁned eﬀect that softens the image overall,creating serene pictures with clearly-deﬁned shadows.

Cross

n Dramatic Tone Selectively enhance contrast to further diﬀerentiate light from dark.
o Key Line

Enhance edges for a photo-illustration eﬀect.

p Watercolor

Dramatically brighten shadows to give the eﬀect of a scene painted inbright pastel colors on white canvas, and add soft outlines for warm,
bright results.

q Vintage

Mimic the eﬀects of a discolored and faded vintage print for a nostalgic,
slice-of-life eﬀect.

r Partial Color

Enhance the impression created by your subject by recording only
selected hues in color while the rest of the picture is in black-and-white.

v Bypass

The “bleach bypass” eﬀect, which you may recognize from motion
pictures and the like, can be used to great eﬀect in shots ofstreetscapes or metal objects.

9 Instant Film

A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typical of ﬁlm.

Bleach2• Art ﬁlters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
• Depending on the scene, the eﬀects of some settings may not be visible, while in othercases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
%• You can choose the picture modes displayed using [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 520) in
G Custom Menu P.

216 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Choosing a Picture Mode
This setting can be accessed via:
• The LV super control panel• Live controls• The menus (P. 218)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2Highlight an option using the front dial.

Picture mode

• Depending on the option selected, picture modeparameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 220 – 226).

2
Changes depending on
mode selected

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

Access via Live Controls
Picture mode can be accessed via live controls.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

WB
AUTO

o
4:3

YF

Natural

P

4K

30p

J

K

Picture mode
OK button[Picture Mode]
Press I on the arrow pad to view options• When [Color Creator] (P. 229) or the [Partial Color] art ﬁlter (P. 231) is selected, you canpress the INFO button and adjust saturation and hue using the dials.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 217Menu AccessUse [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W tab[Picture Mode]
Use FG on the arrow pad to selectthe I button to view picture mode parameters or ﬁlter eﬀects

Press• You can adjust the individual parameters for each picture mode. You can also adjust
parameters in the LV super control panel. Changes to parameters in the LV super control
panel also apply to the menus.
Picture mode

Available parameters

A

i-Enhance[Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Gradation]/[Eﬀect]

B

Vivid

C

Natural

D

Muted

E

Portrait

J

Monochrome

K

Customv

e-PortraitcColor Creator (P. 229)

F

Underwater2/ 2

Pop Artf

Soft Focus

1/ 2

Pale&Light ColorhLight Tone

/ 2

Grainy Film

1

1

1

/ 2 / 3 Pin Hole1

/ 2

Diorama1/ 2

Cross Processm

Gentle Sepia

1

/

2

Dramatic Tone

1

/

2

Key Line

1

/

2

/

2

/

3

Vintage

1

/

2

/

3

Partial Color (P. 231)

1

/

9

218 EN

Watercolor

12

Bleach Bypass
Instant Film

K 2-13 Color and Quality[Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Gradation][Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Color Filter]/[Monochrome
Color]/[Gradation]—[Add Eﬀects]
The options available vary with the ﬁlter selected.
[Soft Focus Eﬀect]/[Pin Hole Eﬀect]/[White Edge Eﬀect]/[Frame Eﬀect]/[Star Light Eﬀect]/[Blur Eﬀect: Top andBottom]/[Blur Eﬀect: Left and Right]/[Shade Eﬀect: Top
and Bottom]/[Shade Eﬀect: Left and Right]/[Color Filter]/[Monochrome Color]Creating Custom Picture Modes(K Custom Picture Mode)

Create custom picture modes by editing the parameters for exiting modes. Custom
picture modes can be created using [i-Enhance], [Vivid], [Natural], [Muted],[Portrait], and [Monochrome].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Custom] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.
• Custom picture mode options will be displayed.

2
4

Adjust settings using the FG buttons.
• Choose a [Picture Mode] and adjust [Sharpness],[Contrast], [Saturation], [Gradation], [Eﬀect], [Color
Filter], and [Monochrome Color].
• Highlight items using the FG buttons and press the I
button to view settings. After adjusting settings, press the
OK button to return to the [Custom] menu.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6

To use the custom settings, select [K Custom] for
picture mode.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 219Adjusting Sharpness(Sharpness)

Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

Hi (+)

Increase sharpness. Outlines are more sharply deﬁned.

Lo (−)

Lower sharpness. Outlines are less sharply deﬁned.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Sharpness] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Sharpness

2
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust sharpness using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture modeusing FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Sharpness] using the FG
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

220 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Adjusting Contrast(Contrast)

Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the diﬀerence between
bright and dark areas for a harder, more well-deﬁned picture. Settings are stored
separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

Hi (+)

Increase contrast. Pictures are harder and more well-deﬁned.

Lo (−)

Lower contrast. Pictures are softer.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Contrast] in the LV super control panel.

Contrast22
3Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust contrast using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture mode
Highlight [Contrast] using the FG
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 221

Adjusting Vividness(Saturation)

Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings
are stored separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
Hi (+)

Increase saturation. Colors are more vivid.

Lo (−)

Lower saturation. Colors are softer.

- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Saturation] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Saturation

2
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust saturation using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture modeusing FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Saturation] using the FG
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

222 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Adjusting Shading(Gradation)

Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by,for example, brightening the entire picture. Settings are stored separately for each
picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menusz Auto(Shadow Adj)

Brightness is adjusted separately for every detail. A good choice forhigh-contrast images where shadows or highlights might otherwise be
lost.

z Normal(Gradation Normal)

Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.

z High (Gradation
High Key)

Suited to bright subjects.

z Low (Gradation
Low Key)

Suited to dark subjects.

2Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Gradation] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Gradation

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust shading using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture modeusing FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Gradation] using the FG
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 223

Color Filters for Black-and-White Photography(Color Filter)

Color ﬁlter eﬀects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 215). Depending on the color of the subject, color ﬁlter eﬀects can make subjects
brighter or enhance contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

N:NoneNo ﬁlter eﬀect.

Ye:Yellow

White clouds stand out clearly against natural-looking skies.

Or:Orange

Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.

R:Red

Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.

G:GreenAdds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green ﬁlter also emphasizes thereds in lipstick.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

2

This option is available when [Monochrome] is selected for [Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Color Filter] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Color ﬁlter

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose a ﬁlter using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [Monochrome]
Highlight [Color Filter] using the FG
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

224 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Monochrome Tints(Monochrome Color)

Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 215).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
N:NormalShoot in black and white.

S:Sepia

Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.

B:BlueShoot in blue-tinted monochrome.

P:Purple

Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.

G:GreenShoot in green-tinted monochrome.

- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel
This option is available when [Monochrome] is selected for [Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Monochrome Color] in the LV supercontrol panel.

Monochrome Color2

23Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose a tint using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [Monochrome]
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Monochrome Color] using
the FG buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 225

Adjusting i-Enhance Eﬀects(Eﬀect)Choose the strength of the eﬀect for [i-Enhance].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
3Low (Eﬀect: Low)

Eﬀect reduced.

3Standard(Eﬀect: Standard)Standard eﬀect.

3High (Eﬀect: High)Eﬀect heightened.

- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel
This option is available when [i-Enhance] is selected for [Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Eﬀect] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Eﬀect

2

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose the strength of the eﬀect using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [i-Enhance] using
FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Eﬀect] using the FG buttons
and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

226 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Choosing a Tone Curve(Highlight&Shadow Control)

Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain
greater control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone.
You can selectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.

Adjusting shadows

Adjusting mid-tones

Adjusting highlights(The illustrations above show the display when the highlight and shadow control isaccessed via a button and the LV super control panel.)• This setting can be accessed via:
- The F button- The LV super control panel (P. 228)


Access via the F Button

1

2

Press the F button.
• Exposure compensation will be highlighted in the display.

F button2

Press the INFO button.
• A tone curve icon will be displayed.
• Press the INFO button to cycle from shadows to midtones to highlights and back to exposure compensation
again.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

-3

P

+2

30p

+7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023(Highlight andshadow control)3

Select the desired setting using HI on the arrowpad.
• Choose from values between −7 and +7.
• To reset, press and hold the OK button.

4

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 227

%• Exposure compensation, and with it highlight and shadow control, can be assigned tocontrols other than the F button. Use [K Button Function] (P. 463) in G Custom Menu
J.
• Assigning [Multi Function] to the control gives you direct access to [Highlight&Shadow
Control]. g “Multi-Function Button Options (Multi Function)” (P. 470)


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Highlight&Shadow Control] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• A tone curve will be displayed.

Highlight & shadow control

2

2

Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.
• The tone range changes each time the button is pressed.

Selected tone range

3

Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the OK button to restore the default
curve.

4

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

228 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

Hue and Saturation(Color Creator)

The camera permits intuitive adjustments to color saturation and hue. Choose from30 hues and 8 levels of saturation. The results can be previewed in the display.
[Color Creator] is a picture mode option. Settings can be accessed directly using[Multi Function]. Assign [Multi Function] to a button using [K Button Function](P. 463) in G Custom Menu J.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 230)

- Live controls (P. 230)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

Picture mode22

Highlight [Color Creator] using the front dial.
• A [c Color/Vivid] option will be displayed in the LV supercontrol panel.

c Color/Vivid

3

Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the OK button.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 2294

Adjust saturation and hue.

1

100%

Color

• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• Press and hold the OK button to restore default settings.

ViVid±0
Reset

5

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

Menu Access
The color creator can also be accessed via the menus. Saturation and hue,
however, cannot be adjusted via the menus. The menus can be used to recall
previously-saved values only.
MENU button

2

W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode][Color Creator]
Access via Live Controls
The color creator can be accessed using live controls.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

Picture mode
[Picture Mode]
Press HI on the arrow pad to highlight [Color Creator]
OK button
Press the INFO button and adjust saturation and hue• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for [KK] will be recorded using [RAW+JPEG] instead.
• The color creator is not available during HDR or multiple-exposure photography. If [Color
Creator] selected for picture mode when either option is enabled, the camera will select[Natural] instead.

230 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

“Leave Color” Eﬀects(Partial Color)

Shoot in black-and-white while capturing objects of a selected hue in color. For
example, you can shoot in black-and-white while leaving only reds in color. The
results can be previewed in the display.
[Partial Color] is an art ﬁlter option. Settings can be adjusted when it is selected for
picture mode. Choose from three “leave color” ﬁlters (1 through 3).

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2Highlight [ART141], [ART142], or [ART143] using
the front dial.

Picture mode2

• [R Color] and [Eﬀect] options will be displayed in the LV
super control panel.

Eﬀect

R Color3

Highlight [R Color] using FG on the arrow padand press the OK button.

1

100%

Color
ISO
Auto

• A color ring will be displayed.

WB
Auto

#

ART141
Color Effect Off# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o



YF
YF

P

4
5

A±0
G±0
S-AF
p

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:031023

Select a color using the dials.
Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

K 2-13 Color and Quality

EN 231

Choosing a Color Space(Color Space)

Choose a color space to ensure accurate color reproduction when photos are
output to a printer or external display.
sRGB

The established color space standard for Windows systems. It is widely
supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer applications.
This setting is recommended in most circumstances.

AdobeRGB

A color space standard deﬁned by Adobe Systems Inc. It can reproduce a wider
gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color reproduction is available only with
software and devices (displays, printers, and the like) that support this standard.

1

Highlight [Color Space] in the LV super control
panel.

Color space

2 2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
The color space can be selected via the menus.
MENU button
X (K/WB/Color) tab
choose an option[Color Space]

Use FG on the arrow pad to• [AdobeRGB] is not available in art ﬁlter picture modes or with HDR photography. [sRGB] isselected automatically.

232 ENK 2-13 Color and Quality

2-14 Effects
This section deals with multiple exposure, zoom, and other features used tomanipulate the image during shooting. It also covers features such as exposure
bracketing, which varies exposure over a series of pictures, and focus stacking.

2

Aspect Ratio(Image Aspect)

Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of[4:3], the camera oﬀers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 234)
- The menus (P. 234)

- Live controls (P. 234)

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 233Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Image Aspect] in the LV super control
panel.

Image aspect23Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access2

Aspect ratio can be selected using [Image Aspect] in
W Shooting Menu 1.

MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab
to choose an option[Image Aspect]

Use FG on the arrow padAccess via Live Controls
Highlight [Image Aspect] in the live controls and use HI
on the arrow pad to choose an option.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

o
4:3

YF

5184×3888

P

4:3

16:9

3:2

1:1

4K

30p

3:4

Image aspect• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same size as
the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the aspectratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images areplayed back.

234 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

Zoom(Digital Tele-converter)

This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as thesize option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to ﬁll the display.
The zoom ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’maximum focal length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch
lenses or ﬁnd it diﬃcult to get any closer to your subject.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

2

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2×and a H icon is displayed. Pictures will be recorded at
the new zoom ratio.

Digital teleconverter
1100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023• The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation, or
ﬁsheye correction.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, a frameshows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image during
playback.
• During zoom, the size of the AF targets increases and their number decreases.
%
The digital teleconverter can be assigned to a camera control using [K Button Function] in
G Custom Menu J, allowing the digital teleconverter to be turned on or oﬀ at the touch of abutton (P. 463).

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 235

Varying Settings Little-by-Little over a Series of
Shots(Bracketing)
Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balanceover a series of shots. Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine
several diﬀerent forms of bracketing. Use bracketing if you are unsure what settings
to use or lack the time needed to change settings during shooting. You can also
store bracketing settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The BKT button (P. 240)
- The menus (P. 241)• Flash bracketing cannot be used in combination with:
HDR photography, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, multiple exposure,High Res Shot, or ﬁsheye correction.
• Exposure, ﬂash, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.
• Bracketing will not start if there is not enough space on the memory card for all the shots inthe bracketing sequence.

2

AE BKT (Exposure Bracketing)
Vary exposure over a series of shots. You choose the amount of variation and thenumber of shots. The camera takes a shot at a new exposure setting each time
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Bracketing ends after the selected
number of shots has been taken. In burst shooting modes, the camera will takepictures while the shutter button is pressed all the way down, ending when theselected number of shots has been taken.
The following options are available:• Bracketing amount: 0.3, 0.7, or 1.0 EV• Number of shots: 2, 3, 5, or 7

A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence havebeen taken. The ﬁrst shot is taken at current exposure settings, followed ﬁrst by the
shots with reduced exposure and then by the shots with increased exposure.
The settings used to alter exposure vary with the shooting mode.
P (program AE)

Both aperture and shutter speed

A (aperture-priority AE)

Shutter speed

S (shutter-priority AE)

Aperture

M (manual)• Shutter speed (option other than [AUTO] selected for [K ISO])• ISO sensitivity ([AUTO] selected for [K ISO])• If exposure compensation is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary exposurearound the selected value.
• Changing the option selected for [EV Step] (P. 530) in G Custom Menu T changes theoptions available for bracketing amount.
• Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with ﬂash or focus bracketing.

236 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

WB BKT (White Balance Bracketing)
The camera varies white balance to record a series of pictures. You choose thecolor axis, the amount, and the number of shots.
Shooting ends after a single shot. The camera takes one picture when the shutter
button is pressed all the way down and automatically processes it to record theselected number of shots.
The following options are available:• Color axis:
A-B (amber–blue) and G-M (green–magenta)• Bracketing amount: 2, 4, or 6 steps• Number of shots: 3 pictures are created from a single shot

The ﬁrst copy is recorded at current white balance settings, the second using anegative value for compensation, and the third using a positive value.
• If white balance ﬁne-tuning is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary whitebalance around the selected value.
• White balance bracketing cannot be combined with art ﬁlters or focus bracketing.

FL BKT (Flash Bracketing)2

The camera varies ﬂash level (output) over a series of shots. You choose theamount of variation and the number of shots. The camera takes a shot at a new
ﬂash level each time the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Bracketingends after the selected number of shots has been taken. In burst shooting modes,
the camera will take pictures while the shutter button is pressed all the way down,
ending when the selected number of shots has been taken.
The following options are available:• Bracketing amount: 0.3, 0.7, or 1.0 EV• Number of shots: 3

A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence havebeen taken. The ﬁrst shot is taken at current ﬂash settings, followed ﬁrst by the shotwith reduced ﬂash output and then by the shot with increased ﬂash output.
• If ﬂash compensation is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary ﬂash output
around the selected value.
• Changing the option selected for [EV Step] (P. 530) in G Custom Menu T changes theoptions available for bracketing amount.
• Flash bracketing cannot be combined with exposure or focus bracketing.
• Flash bracketing is not available in mode B.

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 237

ISO BKT (ISO Sensitivity Bracketing)
The camera varies ISO sensitivity to record a series of pictures. You choose theamount and the number of shots. Shooting ends after a single shot. The camera
takes one picture when the shutter button is pressed all the way down andautomatically processes it to record the selected number of shots.
The following options are available:• Bracketing amount: 0.3, 0.7, or 1.0 EV• Number of shots: 3

The ﬁrst copy is recorded at the current ISO sensitivity setting, the second withsensitivity reduced by the selected amount, and the third with ISO sensitivity
increased by the selected amount.

2• If shutter speed or aperture have been changed to modify exposure from the value selectedby the camera, the camera will vary ISO sensitivity around the current exposure value.
• The maximum sensitivity selected for [K ISO-Auto Set] does not apply.
• During silent photography, the ﬂash sync speed is set to 1/20 s.
• Changing the option selected for [ISO Step] (P. 530) in G Custom Menu T does notchange the options available for bracketing amount.
• ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with art ﬁlters or focus bracketing.

ART BKT (Art Filter Bracketing)
The camera applies multiple art ﬁlters to a single photo. You choose the ﬁlter types.
The camera takes one picture when the shutter button is pressed all the way down
and records multiple copies, each with a diﬀerent ﬁlter applied.
Filters are chosen from a menu where selected ﬁlters are marked with a check (v).
In addition to art ﬁlters, you can also have the option of selecting picture modes
such as [Vivid], [Natural], and [Muted].
• The time needed to record each shot increases with the number of ﬁlters selected.
• With the exceptions of exposure and ﬂash bracketing, art ﬁlter bracketing cannot be
combined with other forms of bracketing.

238 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

Focus BKT (Focus Bracketing)
The camera varies focus over a series of pictures. You choose the amount and thenumber of shots. The entire series is shot with a single press of the shutter button.
Each time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera takes theselected number of shots, varying focus with each shot. The pictures are taken insilent mode using the electronic shutter.
The following options are available:• [Set number of shots]: Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence• [Set focus diﬀerential]: Choose the amount the camera varies focus with each shot
Choose how long the camera waits for the ﬂash to charge between• [#Charge Time]:shots when using a ﬂash unit not speciﬁcally designated for use withthe camera.

Focus stacking ([Focus Stacking], P. 243) can be used to create a single picturefrom a series of shots taken using focus bracketing. This option is available onlywith lenses that support focus stacking. See the Olympus website for information oncompatible lenses.
• Once the shutter button has been pressed all the way down, shooting will continue until theselected number of shots has been taken. To interrupt bracketing, press the shutter button all
the way down a second time.
• The camera varies the focus distance with each shot. Shooting will end if the focus distancereaches inﬁnity.
• Shooting will end if focus or zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all
the way down to start bracketing.
• Focus bracketing is not available with Four Thirds system lenses.
• Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
• The ﬂash sync speed is set to 1/50 s. Selecting a value over ISO 8000 for [K ISO] sets theﬂash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Focus bracketing is not available in mode B.

K 2-14 Eﬀects

2

EN 239
Access via the BKT Button

Use the BKT to choose the bracketing type and adjust settings. Settings for [ARTBKT] or [Focus BKT] must be adjusted in the menus beforehand.

1

Hold the BKT and rotate the front or rear
dial a small amount.

+
BKT button• The camera will list bracketing types andoptions.
• Bracketing settings can also be displayed bypressing and holding the BKT button.

2

Bracketing type
1

100%

AE
BKT

WB BKT

A-B

WB BKT

G-M

FL
BKT

ISO
BKT

ART
BKT

Focus

BKT

AE BKT

Off

P

2F
2F
2F
2F
3F
3F
Off 0.3EV
0.5EV 0.7EV 1.0EV 0.3EV 0.5EV

Bracketing options

2
3

Rotate the front dial to highlight a bracketing type.
Rotate the rear dial to highlight the desired bracketing settings.
• The settings available vary with the bracketing type selected.
AE BKTWB BKT: A-B
WB BKT: G-M

Choose the white balance compensation amount.

FL BKT

Choose the amount ﬂash level changes with each shot.

ISO BKT

Choose the amount exposure changes with each shot.

ART BKT
Focus BKT

4

Choose the number of shots and the amount exposure changes
with each shot.

Enable or disable art ﬁlter or focus bracketing.

Press the OK button to select the highlighted options.
• Bracketing settings will clear from the display.
• You can also exit by pressing the shutter button halfway.

240 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

5Press the BKT once to enable bracketing.

BKT button• A t icon will be displayed.
• Bracketing turns on or oﬀ each time the BKT button ispressed.

t icon
1

100%

BKT

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

6

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1

BKT

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• During exposure and ﬂash bracketing, theicon will
be displayed in green until all shots in the sequence
have been taken.

100%

S-IS AUTO

2

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Menu Access

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 241

4Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display bracketing options for theselected bracketing type.

5

Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or abracketing program.
• AE BKT
Highlight the number of shots (for example, 2f) and pressthe I button to view bracketing amounts. Use the FG
buttons to highlight an amount and press OK to selectthe highlighted option and return to the previous display.

• WB BKTYou will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or
G–M). Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and theFG buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press
the OK to return to the previous display when settings
are complete.

2• ART BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu
of picture modes and art ﬁlters. Use the FG buttons
to highlight the desired ﬁlters and press the OK button
to select (selected ﬁlters are indicated by check marks).
Press the MENU button to return to the previous display
when settings are complete.
• Focus BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus
bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlighta setting and press the I button. Options will be
displayed; use the FG buttons to highlight an option
and press the OK button to return to the setting menu.
Press the OK button again to return to the bracketingmenu when settings are complete. The [Focus BKT]
menu is also used for [Focus Stacking] settings(P. 243).

6

With [On] selected, press the OK button to savechanges and exit.

7

Conﬁrm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] andpress the OK button.
• To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the
MENU button or highlight [Oﬀ] and press the OK button.

242 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

Increasing Depth of Field(Focus Stacking)Combine multiple images for a depth of ﬁeld greater than can be obtained with asingle shot. The camera takes a series of shots at focus distances both in front ofand behind the current focus position and creates a single image from the areasthat are in focus in each shot.
Choose this option if you want all areas of the subject in focus in photographs taken
at short ranges or wide apertures (low f-numbers). The pictures are taken in silent
mode using the electronic shutter.
• The composite image is recorded in JPEG format, regardless of the option selected forimage quality.
• The composite image is enlarged 7% horizontally and vertically.
• Shooting will end if focus or zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all
the way down to start focus stacking photography.
• If focus stacking fails, the camera will record the selected number of photos without creating
a composite image.
• This option is available only with lenses that support focus stacking. See the Olympus
website for information on compatible lenses.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art ﬁlter selected for picture mode are recorded in[Natural] mode.
• Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.

2• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Focus BKT] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.
• You wil be prompted to turn focus bracketing on or oﬀ.

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 243

5Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• [Focus BKT] settings will be displayed.

6

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
Highlight [On] and press the OK
button.
[Set number of shots]: Choose the number of shots. Choose
from values of from 3 to 15.
[Set focus diﬀerential]: Choose the amount the camera
varies focus with each shot andpress the OK button.
Choose how long the camera waits[#Charge Time]:
for the ﬂash to charge between
shots when using a ﬂash unit not
speciﬁcally designated for use withthe camera.
[Focus Stacking]:

2
7

Press the OK button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• Conﬁrm that bracketing is on and press the MENU
button.

• A t icon will be displayed.
• Picture mode will be set to [Natural].
• A frame indicating the ﬁnal crop will be shown in thedisplay. Compose the shot with your subject in the frame.

t icon
1

100%

BKT

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

8

Take pictures.
• The camera will automatically take the selected numberof shots when the shutter button is pressed all the way
down.

244 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

9Press the BKT button to end bracketing.

• To take more pictures at the same bracketing settings, press the BKT button.

• The ﬂash can only be used if [Allow] is selected for [Silent s Mode Settings] (P. 167) >[Flash Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2.
• The ﬂash sync speed is set to 1/50 s. Selecting a value over ISO 8000 for [K ISO] sets theﬂash sync speed to 1/20 s.
%• We recommend using a remote cable to reduce blur caused by camera shake. In anti-shockor silent mode, you can use [Anti-Shock r] (P. 160) or [Silent s] (P. 163) to choose howlong the camera will wait to release the shutter after the shutter button is pressed all the way
down.

2

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 245

Overlaying Pictures(Multiple Exposure)Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take a shotand combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.
The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW
pictures can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image. If
you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then selectit for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2
and press I on the arrow pad.

2 3Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• Highlight the desired option and press the OK button.
Number of
Frames[Oﬀ]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.
[2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.

Auto Gain[On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.
[Oﬀ]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in themultiple exposure.

Overlay[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Oﬀ]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
• [Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number ofFrames].

4

If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will be prompted
to choose a picture for the multiple exposure.
• Highlight a picture using the arrow pad (FGHI) andpress the OK button.
• Only RAW images can be selected.

5

Press the OK button in the multiple exposure menu
to save the selected settings.
• The shooting menu will be displayed.

246 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

6Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A a icon will be displayed.
• If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will bevisible superimposed on the view through the lens.

a icon
1

100%

ISO-A
200

P

7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• The ﬁrst shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previouslychosen photograph) will be visible superimposed on theview through the lens as you compose the next shot.
• The a icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after thesecond shot is taken.
• Pressing the  button allows you to retake the ﬁrst shot.
• If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional
pictures that will be overlaid on the previously-chosenphotograph.

8

2

Press the MENU button or press the I button toend multiple exposure photography.
• If you end multiple exposure photography by pressing
the MENU button, [Oﬀ] will be selected for [Number ofFrames] in the multiple exposure menu.
• The a icon clears from the display when multiple
exposure photography ends.

• The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
• Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in eﬀect at the time the photograph was taken.
• Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in eﬀect.
• Performing any of the following operations after the ﬁrst shot is taken ends multiple exposure
photography:
turning the camera oﬀ, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a diﬀerent shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when thebattery is exhausted.
• The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs taken withRAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
• Live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) is not available in mode B.
• The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, the live ND ﬁlter,and ﬁsheye correction.
• Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 247

Keystone Eﬀects/Enhancing Perspective(Keystone Comp.)
Keystone distortion due to the inﬂuence of lens focal length and proximity to thesubject can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the eﬀects of perspective.
Keystone compensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The
corrected image is created from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the eﬀective
zoom ratio.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2
and press I on the arrow pad.

2 3
4Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and z icon be displayed.

Keystone compensation
1

100%

P

5

Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation
while viewing your subject in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments andthe rear dial to make vertical adjustments.
• Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while
viewing your subject in the display.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The
direction in which the crop can be moved is shown by anarrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the OK button.

248 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

250 F5.6

6

To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and othershooting settings, press the INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A z icon is displayed while keystone compensation isenabled. The icon is displayed in green if adjustments
have been made to keystone compensation settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in
Step 5, press the INFO button repeatedly.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• To end keystone compensation photography, select [Oﬀ]for [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2.

• Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged whencropped and whether the crop can be moved.
• Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
• Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g, h,i, or j icon in the display.
• Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,the live ND ﬁlter, ﬁsheye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art ﬁlter picturemodes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.
• Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
• Keystone compensation for lenses for which the focal length or lens data have been saved
using [K Image Stabilizer] is performed in accord with the data provided. Be sure to provide[K Image Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four Thirds or Micro Four Thirds
family (P. 510).

2%• [Keystone Comp.] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable keystone compensation. g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 249Correcting Fisheye Distortion(Fisheye Compensation)
Correct distortion caused by ﬁsheye lenses to give photos the appearance ofpictures taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selectedfrom three diﬀerent levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion inphotos taken under water.
• This option is only available with compatible ﬁsheye lenses.
As of January 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO.

2

Angle

When ﬁsheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped to eliminate
blacked-out areas. Choose from three diﬀerent crops.

j/i Correction

Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu b (K Utility).

3

Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• [Angle] and [j/i Correction] will be displayed.

5

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Oﬀ] for[j/i Correction].
• [Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed

250 ENK 2-14 Eﬀects

6Press the OK button repeatedly to exit to the custom
menu.
• After conﬁrming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye
Compensation], press the MENU button to exit themenus.
• When ﬁsheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.

Fisheye compensation
1

100%

1

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

7

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Take pictures.
• To end ﬁsheye compensation, select [Oﬀ] for [Fisheye
Compensation] in G Custom Menu b.

• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
• Focus peaking is not available in the ﬁsheye compensation display.
• AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure, thelive ND ﬁlter, keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art ﬁlter picturemodes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.

2%• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable ﬁsheye correction. g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

K 2-14 Eﬀects

EN 2512-15 Flash Photography
When using an optional ﬂash unit designed for use with the camera, you canchoose the ﬂash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the ﬂash. See
the documentation provided with the ﬂash unit for information on ﬂash features andtheir use.

2

Compatible Flash Units
Choose a ﬂash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors
as the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flashunits designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of ﬂash modes,
including TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot
shoe or connected using a cable (available separately) and ﬂash bracket. The
camera also supports the following wireless ﬂash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes
The camera controls one or more remote ﬂash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which ﬂash units can be placed increases. Flash units cancontrol other compatible units or be ﬁtted with radio commander/receivers to allow
the use of units that do not otherwise support radio ﬂash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode
The camera controls one or more remote ﬂash units by means of optical signals.
The ﬂash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 254).

252 ENK 2-15 Flash Photography
Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit
FL-700WR

Supported ﬂash control
modes
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL,
MULTI, RC, SL MANUAL

GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100)

Supported wirelesssystems

GN 42 (150 mm *1)
GN 21 (24 mm *1)

CMD, #CMD, RCV,X-RCV, RC

GN 58 (200 mm *1)
GN 27 (24 mm *1)

RC

GN 36 (85 mm *1)
GN 20 (24 mm *1)

RC

FL-600R

TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL,
MULTI, RC, SL AUTO,
SL MANUAL

STF-8

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL, RC *2

GN 8.5

RC *2

FL-LM3

Varies with camera settings.

GN 9.1 (24 mm *1)

RC *2

FL-900R*1 Maximum lens focal length (35 mm format equivalent) at which unit can provide ﬂash
coverage.
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

2

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 253

Choosing a Flash Mode(#Flash Mode)

When taking pictures with a ﬂash unit designed for use with the camera, you canselect a ﬂash mode using camera controls. Turning an attached ﬂash unit on
automatically limits the fastest available shutter speed.

Flash Modes

2#

Fill In

Enable the ﬂash.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected for[#Slow Limit] (P. 261) and [#X-Sync.] (P. 260) in G Custom
Menu W.

$

Flash Oﬀ

Disable the ﬂash.
• The ﬂash will not ﬁre even if the unit is on.

0

RedeyeReduce “red-eye” in portrait photos. In other respects, the ﬂash
functions as it does in # (ﬁll in) mode.

2

Slow (slowfront-curtain
sync)

Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
• Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value meteredby the camera and is not restricted by the option selected for[#Slow Limit].

1

Red-EyeSlow

2 (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The ﬂash is
timed using front-curtain sync.

M

Slow2 (slowrear-curtainsync)

As for 2 (slow sync).
• The ﬂash ﬁres immediately before the
shutter closes. Moving objects appear toleave trails of light behind them.

3, 4, Manual Value The ﬂash ﬁres at the selected level.
etc.

• The ﬂash level is selected manually (P. 257).

• Super FP high-speed sync must be conﬁgured using ﬂash controls.
• In [0] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter is released approximately one second after theﬁrst red-eye reduction ﬂash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
• [0] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.

254 ENK 2-15 Flash PhotographyFlash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the ﬂash mode. The range ofavailable speeds can be further restricted using the options in the G custom menu.
g [#X-Sync.] (P. 260), [#Slow Limit] (P. 261)
Exposure
mode

P/A

S/M

B*

LV supercontrol panel

Flash mode#

Fill ﬂash

0Red-eye$Flash oﬀ

1

Red-eye slow

2

Slow front-curtain sync

M

Slow rear-curtain sync#

Fill ﬂash

0Red-eyeFlash timing

Shutter speed

Front-curtain sync

30 – 1/250 s——

Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s

Rear-curtain sync
Front-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s$

Flash oﬀ——

M

Slow rear-curtain sync

Rear-curtain sync

60 – 1/250 s#

Fill ﬂash

0Red-eyeFront-curtain sync—$

Flash oﬀ——

M

Slow rear-curtain sync

Rear-curtain sync—2

* Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] is selected (P. 108).
• The fastest shutter speed available when the ﬂash ﬁres is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds inpictures taken with the ﬂash may be overexposed.
• The ﬂash sync speed for silent modes (P. 163), tripod-mounted High Res Shot (P. 210),
and focus bracketing (P. 239) is 1/50 s. Setting [K ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 whenusing an option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus
bracketing) sets the ﬂash sync speed to 1/20 s. The ﬂash sync speed is also set to 1/20 s
during ISO bracketing (P. 238).
• Even the minimum available ﬂash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [K ISO].
• There is no limit on the fastest shutter speed available when an FP mode (FP TTL AUTO or
FP MANUAL) is selected using ﬂash controls.

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 255


Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external ﬂash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to
the FL-LM3.
• Conﬁrm that both the camera and ﬂash unit are oﬀ. Attaching or removing a ﬂash unit while
either the camera or ﬂash unit is on could damage the equipment.

1

Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the ﬂash.
• Slide the ﬂash in until the foot clicks into place at theback of the shoe.

Hot shoe cover2
2

Position the ﬂash head for bounce-ﬂash photography
or direct lighting.
• The ﬂash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that ﬂash output may be insuﬃcient for correct
exposure when bounce ﬂash lighting is used.

3

256 EN

Rotate the ﬂash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the ﬂash is
not in use.

K 2-15 Flash Photography

ON/OFF lever
Removing Flash Units

1

Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide theﬂash unit from the hot shoe.

UNLOCK button

2

1


Accessing Flash Settings via the #jY (Flash/Sequential
Shooting/Self-timer) Button

1

Press the #jY button.

Flash mode options• Flash mode options will be displayed.

232

Rotate the front dial to highlight an option.
If manual ﬂash control is selected, press the INFO button.
• Rotate the front dial to highlight the desired ﬂash output.

4

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option and exit to the shooting
display.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control
panel. If [#Manual] (manual mode) is highlighted, press
G to select [#FULL]. Rotate the front dial to choose thedesired ﬂash output.

Flash mode

Flash output

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 257


Access via Live Controls
Flash settings can be accessed via live controls.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 68).

#Flash ModeOK button[#Flash Mode]

Press HI on the arrow pad to choose an option• To choose a level for manual ﬂash output, highlight 3 (Full) and press the INFO button.

2258 ENK 2-15 Flash Photography

Adjusting Flash Output(x)Adjust ﬂash output. Use this option to adjust ﬂash level if the ﬂash is too brighteven in auto mode or if the value selected by the camera leaves your subject
underexposed.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than [# Manual] (manual).

1

Highlight [x] in the LV super control panel.

Flash compensation

2
3

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

2• The ﬂash compensation value selected with the camera is added to that selected withcompatible ﬂash units.

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 259

Choosing a Flash Sync Speed(#X-Sync.)

Choose the fastest shutter speed available for ﬂash photography.
Shutter speeds faster than the chosen value cannot be selected even when thesubject is brightly lit.
Available options2

1/60 – 1/250 s

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu W (#Custom).

3

Highlight [#X-Sync.] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• The ﬂash sync speed for silent modes (P. 163), High Res Shot (P. 210), and focus
bracketing (P. 239) is 1/50 s. The ﬂash sync speed drops to 1/20 s at [K ISO] values overISO 8000 or when ISO bracketing (P. 238) is enabled.

260 ENK 2-15 Flash Photography

Setting a Slow Shutter Speed Limit (#Slow Limit)
Choose the slowest shutter speed available for ﬂash photography.
The shutter speed chosen automatically by the camera will not exceed this valueeven when the subject is poorly lit. This limit does not apply in slow sync ﬂash
modes (2, M, or 1).
Available options

Values from 30 s to up to but not including the limit selected for[#X-Sync.]

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu W (#Custom).

3

Highlight [#Slow Limit] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 261

Wireless Remote Flash Control
Wireless ﬂash photography is available with compatible ﬂash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote ﬂash units are controlled via a unit
mounted on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for thecamera-mounted unit and units in up to three other groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote ﬂash units.

Enabling RC Mode

2

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu W (#Custom).

3

Highlight [#RC Mode] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• An q icon will be displayed.

q icon1

RC

100%

S-IS AUTO

#

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

5

Press the OK button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. The display will change eachtime the INFO button is pressed.

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

1

100%

A ModeTTL
ManualOff
TTL

P

250 F5.6

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

Low
1

1:02:031023

RC mode super control
panel

262 ENK 2-15 Flash Photography

6

Adjust ﬂash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the rear dial to choose settings.
Flash control mode

Flash mode

1

100%

A ModeTTL
Manual
Off
TTL

Group

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

Low
1

ChannelFlash compensation
P

7

Optical signal strength

250 F5.6

1:02:03

1023

Group

Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units inthe selected group. Choose Q to adjust settings for the unit
mounted on the camera.

Flash control mode

Choose a ﬂash mode.

Flash compensation

Adjust ﬂash output. When [Manual] is selected for ﬂash mode,
you can a value for manual ﬂash output.

Optical signal
strength

Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the ﬂash units. Choose [HI] if you have placed ﬂash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.

Flash mode/
ﬂash level

Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the ﬂash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.

ChannelChoose the channel used for ﬂash control. Change thechannel if you ﬁnd that other light sources in the area areinterfering with remote ﬂash control.

2

Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL-LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.

Positioning Remote Flash Units

1

Set the wireless RC ﬂash units to RC mode.

2

Position the ﬂash units.

• After turning compatible ﬂash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC mode.
• Choose a group for each of the compatible ﬂash units using ﬂash controls and matchthe channel to that selected with the camera.
• Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.

3

Take pictures after conﬁrming that the remote units and the unit on the camera
are charged.

K 2-15 Flash Photography

EN 263
Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The ﬂash control range varies with thetype of ﬂash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
30°
60°

30°

7m
50°
100°

2

50°

5m

• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 ﬂash units.
• Wireless ﬂash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera. Thiscan be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera ﬂash, for example by using adiﬀuser.

Third-Party Flash Units
Third-party ﬂash units can be mounted on the hot shoe or connected via a sync
cable. Be sure to replace the cap on the external ﬂash connector when it is not inuse. Observe the following precautions when mounting a third-party ﬂash unit on
the hot shoe:• The camera X contacts (hot shoe and external ﬂash connector) are not polarized. Note,however, that older ﬂash units requiring voltages over about 250 V must not be used, as they
could damage the connectors.
• Attaching ﬂash units with connectors that do not conform to Olympus speciﬁcations could
cause product malfunction.
• When using a third-party ﬂash unit, select shooting mode M, choose a shutter speed no
faster than the ﬂash sync speed, and choose a setting other than [AUTO] for [K ISO].
• When adjusting ﬂash output using ﬂash controls, you will need to supply the ﬂash withinformation on the ISO sensitivity and aperture selected with the camera. Be sure to set ISO
sensitivity or aperture appropriately when adjusting ﬂash output.
• Use a ﬂash that covers the angle of the lens. Be aware that coverage is typically stated using
35 mm format equivalent focal lengths.

264 ENK 2-15 Flash Photography

2-16 Working with Saved Images
Pictures are saved to the memory card and can be viewed in the camera monitor.
You can rotate or delete pictures or retouch them using many of the same functions
used when they were recorded. You can also quickly select pictures for later upload
to a smartphone.

Choosing the Information Displayed
Choose the information displayed during playback.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

2

15

Press the INFO button.
• The information displayed changes each time the button
is pressed.

INFO button
1

×10

100%

INFO

48kHz

1

×10

100%

48kHz

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

A+4
ISO 400

G+4
sRGB

WB
AUTO

INFO

1

100%

Natural5184×3888
HDR1

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Basic info

15

HDR1

4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

1/8

YF 100-0015

15

Full info

Info hidden

INFO• You can also hold the INFO button and rotate the front or rear dial to choose theinformation displayed.
• You can add histogram, highlight and shadow, light box, and ﬁeld sensor info items
to the playback information display. Use G Custom Menu P > [G/Info Settings](P. 515) > [qInfo] to choose items displayed.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 265

The Playback Info Display
Basic Info

Full Info

2 3 4
w1

1

5

6

k

7 8 90a1

100% w1

×10

l

m

no

1

100% w1

48kHz

×10

48kHz

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

WB
AUTO

A+4
ISO 400

G+4sRGB
Natural5184×3888
HDR1

j

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

15

b
c

ihg f e d
ND8

2

d

HDR1

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

B

Azyx

15

w

HDR1

1 Battery level ...................................... P. 44
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................... P. 584, 600
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
4 Active connection to computer........ P. 600
5 Wireless LAN connection........................................ P. 592, 596, 597
6 GPS data indicator.......................... P. 570
7 “Print” icon
Number of prints ............................. P. 291
8 Audio indicator ................................ P. 281
9 “Share” icon .................................... P. 277
0 “Protected” icon .............................. P. 270
a “Selected” icon ................................ P. 279
b File number ..................................... P. 548
c Frame number
d Playback slot..................................... P. 57
e K Image quality .............................. P. 78
f Aspect ratio ..................................... P. 233
g HDR ................................................ P. 195
h Composite picture createdusing focus stacking ....................... P. 243

i Live ND ﬁlter ................................... P. 197
j Date and time ................................. P. 455
k Aspect frame................................... P. 233
l AF target display ....................... P. 53, 123
m Shooting mode..........................P. 93 – 113
n Shutter speed ...........................P. 94 – 102
o Exposure compensation ................. P. 180
p Aperture ....................................P. 94 – 102
q Focal length ...................................... P. 39
r Flash compensation........................ P. 259
s White balance ﬁne-tuning ............... P. 206
t Color space..................................... P. 232
u Picture mode................................... P. 215
v Compression ratio............................. P. 81
w Image size (in pixels) ........................ P. 82
x K ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 181
y K White balance ........................... P. 202
z AF ﬁne-tuning ................................. P. 492
A Metering .......................................... P. 186
B Histogram ......................................... P. 84* The ﬁeld sensor info display contains the following indicators. g [G/Info Settings](P. 515)
Latitude/longitude, heading, temperature, altitude, and barometric pressure

266 EN

1/8

p
q
r
s
t
u
v

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Zooming In(Playback Zoom)

You can zoom in on pictures during playback. Use zoom to examine photos in themonitor. You can scroll the picture to view areas not currently visible in the display.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the rear dial to a.

15

1

100%

• The camera will zoom in on the current picture (playbackzoom).
• Use the multi selector to scroll the image. You can also
use the arrow pad (FGHI).
2x

Playback zoom

2

• You can choose a memory card for playback by:- Pressing the CARD button and then rotating the front or rear dial
- Holding the q button and rotating the front or rear dialThis does not change the option selected for [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) > [q Slot] in
G Custom Menu Y.

Using the Zoom Frame
You can also press the multi selector and use the zoom frame to zoom in on aselected area. The zoom frame can also be displayed by pressing the control towhich [a] (magnify) or [Multi Fn] has been assigned using [K Button Function].
g [K Button Function] (P. 463)
• Touch controls can be used for zoom via the zoom frame. g “Taking Photos with Touch
Controls” (P. 54)

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 267

Finding Pictures Quickly(Index and Calendar Playback)“Index playback” lists the pictures on the memory card as small “thumbnail” images
so that you can view multiple pictures at once. This makes it easier to ﬁnd thepicture you want. You can also switch to a calendar display and search for picturesby date of recording.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the rear dial to G.
• Thumbnails will be displayed.
• Highlight a picture using the multi selector and thenpress the multi selector to view the highlighted picture
full frame.
• You can also use the front dial or the arrow pad(FGHI).

2

3

Without leaving the index display, rotate the rear dial
to G again.
• Calendar playback will start. The number of thumbnails
in the index display can be chosen using [G/Info
Settings] (P. 515) > [G Settings] in G Custom Menu
P. If more than one type of display is selected, you may
have to rotate the rear dial to G more than once to start
calendar playback.
• Highlight a date using the front dial or arrow pad andpress the OK button. The ﬁrst picture recorded on theselected date will be displayed.
• Rotate the rear dial to G or a to cycle between fullframe, index, and calendar playback.

15

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00

20

Index playback
1

2019.4

100%

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calendar playback• You can choose a memory card for playback by:- Pressing the CARD button and then rotating the front or rear dial
- Holding the q button and rotating the front or rear dialThis does not change the option selected for [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) > [q Slot] in
G Custom Menu Y.

268 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Sat

31

Rotating Pictures(Rotate)Rotate pictures for display. Use this option to view pictures taken in portrait (“tall”)
orientation without rotating the camera.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

15

Press the OK button.
• A menu of edit options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [Rotate] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

4

Press the F button to rotate the picture
counterclockwise, the G button to rotate itclockwise.

2• You can also rotate pictures by pressing the rear dial.

5

Press the OK button to save changes and exit.
• The picture will be saved to the memory card in the selected orientation.
• Protected images cannot be rotated.

%• The camera can be conﬁgured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g q playback menu > [R] (P. 283)
[Rotate] is not available when [Oﬀ] is selected for [R].

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 269

Protecting Pictures(0)

Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Protected pictures cannot be deletedusing options that delete multiple pictures, but they will be deleted if the memory
card is formatted.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The 0 button- The menus (P. 271)

Access via the 0 (protect) Button

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2 2

3

15

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toprotect.

Press the 0 button.
• A 0 (“protected”) icon will be
displayed.
• Press the 0 button again to remove
protection.
• When an unprotected image isdisplayed, you can hold the 0
button and rotate the front or rear dial
to protect all images displayed while
0 button
the dial is rotated. Any previouslyprotected images displayed while thedial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the
0 button and rotate the front or rear dial to remove
protection from all images displayed while the dial isrotated. Any previously-unprotected images displayed
while the dial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

270 ENYF 100-0015

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images“Protected” icon
1

100%

4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

YF 100-0020

20

Menu AccessDisplay a picture and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[0]
to remove protection

OK button
Press F or G on the arrow pad once to protect, again
Press the OK button to save changes and exit

Removing Protection from All Pictures(Reset Protect)

Remove protection from all existing pictures on the memory card in the current
slot. Use this option if you have protected multiple pictures and want to remove
protection from all images at once.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset Protect] in the q playback menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

2
3Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

%
This operation can also be applied to multiple selected pictures. g “Selecting Multiple
Pictures (0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/Share Order Selected)” (P. 279)

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 271

Copying Pictures Between Cards(Copy)

To copy a picture from one memory card to the other when two memory cards areinserted:1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want tocopy.
• To copy a picture from the other card, change to theother slot.

2 3

Press the OK button.
• A menu of edit options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Copy] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.
• [Assign Folder to Copy to] options will be displayed.

5

To choose whether the picture is copied to aselected folder, highlight one of the following options
and press the OK button.
[Assign]:

Copy the picture to a new folder or to aselected existing folder. Proceed to Step 6.
[Do not assign]: Copy the picture to the current folder on thedestination memory card.

272 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

YF 100-0015

15

6

If you selected [Assign] in Step 5, choose thedestination folder.
• Highlight [New Folder] or [Existing Folder] using theFG buttons and press the OK button.
[New Folder]:Choose the desired folder number
using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
[Existing Folder]: Highlight an existing folder using theFG buttons and press the OK button.
• If the chosen folder is unavailable, the camera will returnto the previous display; repeat the process as required.

7

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

%
This operation can also be applied to multiple selected pictures. g “Selecting Multiple
Pictures (0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/Share Order Selected)” (P. 279)

2

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 273

Copying All Pictures(Copy All)

When two memory cards are inserted, you can copy all pictures from one card to
the other in a single operation.
7

Copy all pictures from the memory card in Slot 1 to the card in Slot 2.

8

Copy all pictures from the memory card in Slot 2 to the card in Slot 1.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Copy All] in the q playback menu andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [7] or [8] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

4

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

2• Copying will start. The playback menu will be displayedwhen copying is complete.
• To end the operation before all pictures have been
copied, press the MENU button.
• Copying ends when the destination card is full.
• Depending on the number of pictures and the type of memory card, copying may take sometime.

274 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Deleting Pictures(Erase)Delete pictures from the memory card one at a time.
• Pictures can be deleted via:
- The menus- The  button
Deleting Pictures via the  Button

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want todelete.
• To delete a picture from the other card, change to theother slot.

3

15

2

Press the  button.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be
displayed.
 button

4

Highlight [Yes] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

Deleting Pictures via the Menus
Display a picture and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[Erase]OK button
Highlight [Yes] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button to select the highlighted option%• You can opt to skip the conﬁrmation dialog when deleting images. g G Custom Menu
Z > [Quick Erase] (P. 551)
• In the case of pictures recorded with RAW + JPEG selected for image quality, the camera
can be conﬁgured to delete only the JPEG copy, only the RAW copy, or both the RAW and
JPEG copies. g G Custom Menu Z > [RAW+JPEG Erase] (P. 551)
• This operation can also be applied to multiple selected pictures. g “Selecting Multiple
Pictures (0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/Share Order Selected)” (P. 279)

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 275

Deleting All Pictures(All Erase)

Delete all pictures from the memory card. Protected pictures will not be deleted.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Card Setup] in the e setup menu andpress I on the arrow pad.
• If memory cards are inserted in both slots, you will beprompted to choose a slot. Select Slot 1 or Slot 2 andpress the OK button.

3

Highlight [All Erase] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• If there are no pictures on the card in the selected slot,
the only option displayed will be [Format]. Choose adiﬀerent slot.

2

4Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The camera will begin the process of deleting all pictureson the card in the selected slot.
• The camera will return to the shooting display whendeletion is complete.

276 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order)

Smartphones running the OI.Share smartphone app can download pictures fromthe camera. Pictures marked for download on the camera can be downloaded
automatically when the camera is oﬀ.
For information on establishing a connection between the camera and smartphone,see “6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 584).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The h button- The menus (P. 278)Access via the h (Share) Button

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

15

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toshare.
• To select a picture on the other card, change to the other
slot.

3

Press the h button.

“Share” icon

• A h (“share”) icon will be displayed.
• Press the h button again to remove
share marking.
• When an unmarked image isdisplayed, you can hold the hbutton and rotate the front or rear
dial to mark for sharing all images
displayed while the dial is rotated.
h buttonAny previously-marked images
displayed while the dial is rotated will
be unaﬀected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the
h button and rotate the front or rear dial to remove
share marking from all images displayed while the dialis rotated. Any previously-unmarked images displayed
while the dial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

1

48kHz

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

15

EN 277Menu AccessDisplay a picture and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[Share Order]
OK button
Press F or G on the arrow pad once to select,again to deselectPress the OK button to save changes and exit
• You can mark up to 200 pictures for sharing on each card.

Removing Share Marking from All Pictures(Reset Share Order)
Remove share marking from all pictures on the card in the current slot.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset share Order] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

2%This operation can also be applied to multiple selected pictures. g “Selecting Multiple
Pictures (0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/Share Order Selected)” (P. 279)

278 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Selecting Multiple Pictures(0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/
Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple pictures for protection, copying, deletion, or sharing.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

15

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toshare.

2
3

Press the H button.

“Selected” icon

• A v (“selected”) icon will be
displayed.
• Press the H button again to deselectthe picture.
• When an unmarked image isdisplayed, you can hold the H button
and rotate the front or rear dial toselect all images displayed while the
H buttondial is rotated. Any previously-marked
images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaﬀected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the
H button and rotate the front or rear dial to deselectall images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unmarked images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

1

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

15

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images21

EN 279

4

After selecting pictures, press the OK button.

5

Highlight the operation you want to perform on
the selected pictures ([0], [Copy Select], [Erase
Selected], or [Share Order Selected]) and press the
OK button.

• To exit without proceeding to Step 5, press the MENU
button.

• The selected operation will be applied to all pictures
marked with a v icon.
• If you selected [Copy Select] or [Erase Selected],additional options will be displayed; follow the menus tocomplete the operation.
• Exiting playback or turning the camera oﬀ deselects all selected pictures.

2

280 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Adding Audio to Pictures(K)

You can record audio and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple
replacement for written notes about the pictures.
• Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.

1

Press the q button.

1

100%

• The most recent picture will be displayed. Display a
picture to which you wish to add audio.

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

15

Press the OK button.
• A menu of edit options will be displayed.

2
3Highlight [K] using FG on the arrow pad and press
the OK button.

4

Highlight [K Start] and press the OK button to start
recording.
• To pause recording, select [No].
• To delete an existing recording, highlight [Erase] andpress the OK button.

5

Press the OK button to end recording.

Menu Access
You can also use the menus to record audio.
MENU buttonq (playback menu) tabpress the OK button to view options[K][Edit][Sel. Image]

Select a picture and• Audio cannot be added to protected images.
• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons and indicators showing the recording rate.
%• Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using [Movie K](P. 413) in the n video menu.
K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 281
Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust thevolume:1
2

Press the q button to display a picture.
Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.

2282 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

1

100%

Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation
Pictures for Playback(R)

Choose whether pictures shot in portrait orientation are automatically rotated for
display on the camera.
On

Pictures are automatically rotated for display during playback.

Oﬀ

Pictures are not automatically rotated for display during playback.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [R] in the q playback menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images2

EN 283

Retouching Pictures(Edit)Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust
the settings in eﬀect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance andpicture mode (art ﬁlters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits
such as cropping and resizing.
Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG format. The following
options are available:[Current]:
RAW Data
Edit

JPEG Edit

2

Save the picture at the settings currently selected with thecamera.
[Custom1]/[Custom2]: Adjust settings while previewing the results in the display.
The settings are saved as [Custom1] or [Custom2].
[ART BKT]:The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image,
one for each art ﬁlter selected. Select one or more ﬁlters
and apply them to one or more images.
Retouch JPEG pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG format (P. 287).

Retouching RAW Pictures(RAW Data Edit)[RAW Data Edit] can be used to adjust the following settings. These are also thesettings applied when you select [Current].
• Image quality• Picture mode
• White balance• Exposure compensation• Shadows• Mid-tones• Highlights• Aspect ratio• High ISO noise reduction• Color space• Keystone compensation• [Color Space] is ﬁxed at [sRGB] when an art ﬁlter is selected for picture mode.
• RAW pictures cannot be retouched if:
there is not enough space on the memory card or if the picture was created with a diﬀerent
camera1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Edit] in the q playback menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

284 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

3Highlight [Sel. Image] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• The pictures on the memory card will be displayed.

4

Using the HI buttons, select a picture you want toretouch and press the OK button.

1

100%

• Retouch options will be displayed.
• If the current picture is not a RAW image, [RAW Data
Edit] will not be displayed. Select a diﬀerent image.
4:3

YF
+RAW

2019.04.01 12:30:00

515Highlight [RAW Data Edit] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Edit options will be displayed.
To apply current camera settings, highlight [Current] andpress the OK button. Current settings will be applied.
For [Custom1] or [Custom2], highlight the desired option
and press the I button, then edit settings as follows:- An edit menu will be displayed. Highlight items using
the FG buttons and use the HI buttons to choose
settings. Repeat until all the desired settings havebeen chosen. Press the R button to preview theresults.
Highlighting [ART BKT] and pressing the I button
displays a list of art ﬁlters. Highlight art ﬁlters and press
the OK button to select or deselect; selected ﬁlters aremarked with a v. Press the MENU button to returnto the previous display once all the desired ﬁlters havebeen selected.

6100-0015

2

Press the OK button when settings are complete.
• The selected settings will be applied.

7

Press the OK button again.

• Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the OK
button to save the retouched copy.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 2858

To create additional copies from the same original,
highlight [Reset] and press the OK button. To exit
without creating more copies, highlight [No] andpress the OK button.
• Selecting [Reset] displays the retouch menu. Repeat theprocess from Step 5.

• You can also edit selected pictures during playback.
q button
Display a picture you want to retouch[RAW Data Edit]

2286 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Press the OK button to view options

Retouching JPEG Pictures(JPEG Edit)

The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.
Shadow Adj.

Brighten back-lit subjects.

Red-eye Fix

Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a ﬂash.

P

Crop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dial and position it with thearrow pad.

AspectChange the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2], [16:9], [1:1], or [3:4].
After choosing an aspect ratio, use the arrow pad to position the crop.

Black & WhiteCreate a black-and-white copy of the current picture.

Sepia

Create a sepia copy of the current picture.

Saturation

Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can be previewed in the display.

Q

Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240 pixels in size.
Pictures with an aspect ratio other than the standard 4:3 are resized todimensions as close as possible to the selected option.

e-Portrait

Smooth complexions. The desired eﬀect may not be achieved if no faces aredetected.

• Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results with some pictures.
• Retouch is not available:with pictures that were taken with another camera or edited on a computer or if the space
available on the memory card is insuﬃcient.
• [Q] cannot be used to resize pictures to dimensions larger than their original size.
• [P] and [Aspect] are available only with pictures with the standard 4:3 aspect ratio.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Edit] in the q playback menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Sel. Image] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

2• The pictures on the memory card will be displayed.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 287

4

Using the HI buttons, select a picture you want toretouch and press the OK button.

1

100%

• Retouch options will be displayed.
• If the current picture is not a JPEG image, [JPEG Edit]
will not be displayed. Select a diﬀerent image.
4:3

2019.04.01 12:30:00

5

YF
+RAW

100-0015
15

Highlight [JPEG Edit] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• An edit menu will be displayed.

6

Highlight items using FG and press the OK
button.
• The eﬀect can be previewed in the display. If multiple
options are listed for the selected item, use the FG
buttons to choose the desired option.
• When [P] is selected, you can size the crop using thedials and position it using the arrow pad or multi selector.
• When [Aspect] is selected, you can position the cropusing the arrow pad or multi selector.

2
7Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button• The new copy will be saved at the selected settings andthe camera will return to the playback display.

• You can also access retouch options when a JPEG picture is displayed during playback:Display a picture you want to retouch
Press the OK button to view options
q button[JPEG Edit]

288 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Combining Pictures(Image Overlay)

Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modiﬁed by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each
picture.
• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays created with[RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using theimage quality option selected for [K2] (P. 542).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Edit] in the q playback menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

2
3Highlight [Image Overlay] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

4

Choose the number of pictures to be included in theoverlay and press the OK button.

5

Select RAW pictures using the arrow pad(FGHI) and press the OK button.
• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,press the OK button again.
• Once you have selected the number of images chosen in
Step 4, the overlay dialog will be displayed.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 289

6

Adjust gain for the pictures in the overlay.
• Use the HI buttons to select pictures and the FG
buttons to choose a value.
• Choose from values of from 0.1 to 2.0. Check the resultsin the display.

7

Press the OK button to display a conﬁrmation
dialog.
• Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

• You can also access overlay options when a RAW picture you want to include in an overlay
displayed during playback:Press the OK button to view options[Image Overlay]
q button

2

290 ENK 2-16 Working with Saved Images

Selecting Pictures for Printing(< — DPOF)

You can select pictures for printing and choose the number of copies and theinformation printed on each picture. The pictures can be printed at print shops that
support the Digital Print Order Format (DPOF). A digital print order is stored on thememory card.
The information to be printed on the pictures can be chosen from:No

No information will be included on the prints.

Date

Each print will include the date the picture was taken.

Time

Each print will include the time the picture was taken.

Adding Pictures to the Print Order

12

Press the OK button during playback and select [<].
Highlight [<] or [<ALL] and press the OK button.
[<]:• Press HI on the arrow pad to display a picture youwant to add to the print order and press the FG
buttons to choose the number of prints.
• Repeat this step to select additional pictures. To exit,
press the OK button.

2[<ALL]:• Highlight [<ALL] and press the OK button.

3

Highlight the information you want printed with each
picture and press the OK button.
• The chosen option applies to all pictures in the print
order.

4Highlight [Set] and press the OK button.
• The selected settings are applied to the pictures on thecurrent memory card.

• The camera cannot be used to edit print orders created with other devices. Creating a print
order deletes print orders created with other devices.
• RAW pictures cannot be selected for inclusion in the print order.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

EN 291
Removing All or Selected Pictures from the Print Order
You can remove all or selected pictures from the print order.

1
2

Press the OK button during playback and select [<].

3

Press HI on the arrow pad to display a picture you want to remove from theorder.

Highlight [<] and press the OK button.

• To remove all pictures from the print order, highlight [Reset] and press the OK button.
To proceed without removing all pictures from the print order, highlight [Keep] and press
the OK button.
• You can also remove all pictures from the print order by selecting [<ALL] and choosing[Reset].

• Press the FG buttons to set the number of prints to zero. Repeat this step to remove
additional pictures from the order and press the OK button when you are done.

42

Highlight the information you want printed with the remaining pictures andpress the OK button.
• The selected settings apply to all the remaining pictures.
• The selected settings apply to the pictures on the current memory card.

5292 EN

Highlight [Set] and press the OK button.

K 2-16 Working with Saved Images

3

Shooting andViewing Movies
Read this chapter for information on using the camera
to record movies. This chapter also covers the featuresneeded to record movies and view them on the camera.

3

EN 293

3-1

Basic Recording and Playback

The R (movie) button can be used for basic movie recording even in still
photography modes. The camera also oﬀers a dedicated n (movie) mode foradvanced movie recording. Basic recording and playback operations are the samein either case.

An Introduction to Movie Recording
You can ﬁlm movies using the camera’s dedicated n (movie) mode or performbasic recording operations without ending still photography.
In both cases, shots can be framed in the viewﬁnder or monitor. Use the monitor
if you want to focus by touching your subject in the display or reposition the focus
target during shooting. Movies are recorded using the R (movie) button.
Movie-related options and indicators can be displayed by rotating the mode dial toselect n (movie) mode.
Mode dial

3n (movie) mode
A dedicated movie mode. You can choose
settings unavailable in or diﬀerent fromthose that apply in still photography modes.
Choose this mode if you will primarily beﬁlming movies.

Still photography modes
Movies are ﬁlmed using program AE.
Choose these modes to ﬁlm movies during
still photography.
* Some settings are the same as in still
photography.

This chapter focuses primarily on ﬁlming movies in n (movie) mode.

294 ENn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

Recording Movies
Holding the Camera• Keep your ﬁngers or objects such as the camera strap awayfrom the lens.

Recording Movies with the Touch Screen
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), the movie recording display willappear in the monitor. You can ﬁlm movies using touch controls.

1

Rotate the mode dial to n.
• Movie recording info will be displayed.
• Movies can also be ﬁlmed in modes P, A, S, and M. In
this case, photo shooting info will be displayed.

3
2

Position the AF frame over your subject.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF• At default settings, [C-AF] is selected for [n AF Mode](P. 345) and the camera will continually adjust focus forchanges in the distance to the subject in the AF frame.

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

AF frame3

To focus on a subject in a diﬀerent area of the frame
without changing the composition, touch the display.
• The camera will focus on the selected location, indicatedby a green border (AF target).
• To return the AF target to the center of the frame, press
and hold the OK button.
• Press the OK button again. The camera will focus on theselected location and the AF target will disappear.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

AF targetn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

EN 295

4

Press the R (movie) button to start recording.
• The camera will start the recording count and display therecording time.
• You can tap the display at any time during recording toshift focus to a new location.

R (movie) button
1

L

T

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

REC 00:12

0:29:47

Recording time5

3

Press the R button again to end recording.

• Do not touch the display with your ﬁngernails or pointed objects.
• Touch controls may not function as expected if you are wearing gloves or the monitor iscovered with a protective sheet.
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target selection. The area covered by the
AF target can be chosen in the AF-target selection display (P. 352). The AF frame is not
displayed when q (all targets) is chosen for AF-target selection.
• Touch controls are not available in some circumstances, including:in the one-touch WB white balance metering display and while camera buttons or dials arein use.
• Movies cannot be recorded:in B (bulb) mode or using interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, ﬁsheye
correction, or the live ND ﬁlter• Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple ﬁles (depending on shooting conditions,the camera may start recording to a new ﬁle before the 4 GB limit is reached). The ﬁles canbe played back as a single movie. g “Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size” (P. 301)
• CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling shutter”
eﬀect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion is a physicalphenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved during
shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
• When the camera is used continuously for extended periods, the temperature of the image
sensor will rise and noise and color splotches may be visible in the display. Should thisoccur, turn the camera oﬀ and wait for it to cool. Noise and color splotches are particularly
likely to occur at high ISO sensitivities. If the temperature of the sensor increases further, thecamera will turn oﬀ automatically.
• The camera may be unable to compensate for excessive shake.

296 ENn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback%• You can select diﬀerent options for [n AF Mode] (P. 345).
• You can zoom in on the AF target (P. 364). Use this feature for greater precision when
focusing using manual focus (MF).
• You can conﬁgure the display so that it does not automatically switch from the monitor to theviewﬁnder. g [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 553)
• Touch controls can be disabled. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 559)

Remote Photography
You can use remote photography when the camera is on a tripod or in othersituations in which you wish to avoid camera blur caused by operating the shutter
button. You can either use an optional RM-CB2 remote cable or take pictures
remotely via a wireless connection using the OI.Share smartphone app.

Using a Remote Cable
Open the remote cable terminal cover and connect the remote cable.

3• Before using the remote cable to record movies, you will need to select [RREC] for[n Shutter Function] (P. 423).

Using OI.Share
The camera must be conﬁgured for use with a smartphone. Install OI.Share on yoursmartphone before proceeding. g “6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi”(P. 584)

n 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

EN 297

Touch Screen Options
When touch controls are enabled, you can touch your subject in the display to focus
or to position or zoom in on the AF target.

1

Tap V in the monitor to choose an option.
• The option selected changes each time you tap V.

1
8 R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF
L

U Touch controls disabled.
V

ISO-A
200

Tap to position the AF target and focus. You
can resize or position the AF frame with yourﬁngers. Press the R (movie) button to shoot.

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

Focus Zoom

1

Slider1

123minM-IS 1

5
C-AF

Off

3

n

S

2

After adjusting the size of the target with the slider,tap Y to zoom the target in.

1:02:03(V)

Tap your subject.
• An AF target is displayed.
• Adjust the size of the target using the slider.
• To hide the target, tap S.

M-IS 1C-AF

3x

250 F5.6 0.0

Y1

123min• While zoom is in eﬀect, you can slide your ﬁnger toscroll the display.
• To exit zoom, tap Z.
5xZ• Touch controls are not available in some circumstances, including:in the one-touch WB white balance metering display and while camera buttons or dials arein use.
%• Touch controls can be disabled. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 559)
• Focus zoom can be assigned to a camera control. Assign [a] to the desired control using
the [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button Function] (P. 417) option in the n video menu. At
default settings, focus zoom is assigned to the XZ (preview) button.

298 ENn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

Using the Viewﬁnder
Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns it on and turns the monitor oﬀ.

1

Rotate the mode dial to n.
• Movie recording info will be displayed.
• Movies can also be ﬁlmed in modes P, A, S, and M. In
this case, photo shooting info will be displayed.

2

Position the AF frame over your subject.

L
R

M-IS 1

TC 00:00:00:00 DF• The camera will automatically focus on the subject in the
AF frame.
At default settings, [C-AF] is selected for [n AF Mode](P. 345) and the camera will continually adjust focus forchanges in the distance to the subject in the AF frame.

C-AF

4K

30p

1
123minn

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

1:02:03

AF frame

3

Press the R (movie) button to start recording.
• The camera will start the recording count and display therecording time.

3
R (movie) button
L
R

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

TC 00:00:00:12 DF

C-AF

4K

30p

1
123minn

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

REC 00:12

0:29:47

Recording time4

Press the R button again to end recording.

%• You can position the AF target using the multi selector. g [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
• You can position the AF target using monitor touch controls while framing the shot in the
viewﬁnder. g [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 486)

n 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

EN 299Viewing Movies
View movies stored on the memory cards.

1

Press the q button.
• The most recent picture will be displayed (single-frame
playback).
• Use the multi selector (T) or front dial (k) or HI on
the arrow pad to view other pictures.
• To return to the shooting display, press the shutter button
halfway.

1

48kHz

123minP
4K

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4Single-frame playback(movie)View previous picture

View next picture

Front dialMulti selector

3
Arrow padq button

2

Rotate the rear dial (j) to cycle through the playback displays.
• Cycle through the displays as follows:
1

p

48kHz

123minp

1

123min1

2019.4123minSun

nP
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4Single-frame playbackq2019.04.01 12:30:00

20

q

Index playback

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calendar playback

S (center of multiselector)

S (center of multi selector) or OK• To return to single-frame playback from the index playback display, press the multiselector.
• To return to single-frame playback from the calendar playback display, press the OK
button.
• You can choose the number of pictures in the index playback display using [G/Info
Settings] (P. 515) > [G Settings] in G Custom Menu P.

300 ENn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

3

Display a movie and press the OK button.
• Movie playback options will be displayed.
• If the movie exceeds 4 GB in size, a list options will be displayed. g “Viewing Movies
over 4 GB in Size” (P. 301)

4

Highlight [Play Movie] and press the OK button.
• Playback will start.
• Use the HI buttons to rewind or fast-forward. To pause
playback, press the OK button again. While playback ispaused, you can press the F button to return to the ﬁrst
frame or the G button to skip to the last frame. Use the
HI buttons or the front dial (k) to rewind or advancea frame at a time. To end playback, press the MENU
button.

Playback Volume
To adjust the volume for movie playback.

1

Press the q button to display a picture.

2

Press F or G on the arrow pad.

1

123min• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.

3
TC 00:00:00:02 DF

00:00:02/00:00:14

Viewing Movies over 4 GB in SizeLong movies may exceed 4 GB in size. Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded overmultiple ﬁles. The ﬁles can be played back as a single movie.

1

Press the q button.
• The most recent picture will be displayed.

2

Display a long movie you want to view and press the
OK button.
• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: View the entire movie.
[Play Movie]:
View only the current ﬁle.
Delete the entire movie.
[Delete entire n]:[Erase]:Delete only the current ﬁle.

n 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

EN 301

Choosing a Memory Card
When two memory cards are inserted, you can switch slots without leaving
playback.

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

WB
AUTO

100-0004

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

4

Hold the CARD (card select) button, rotate
the front or rear dial to choose a card slot,
and then release the CARD button.

CARD button• The number of the slot currently selected is shown in the
playback display.

1

48kHz

123min3P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4

Current slot
• You can also switch slots using the q button. Press the q button and rotate the front orrear dial to choose a slot during playback.

302 ENn 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

Playback Using Touch Controls
Movies can be viewed using touch controls.

1

Press the q button to view pictures.

2

Touch the monitor and slide your ﬁnger left or right.

1

123min• Flick left to view the next picture, right to view theprevious picture.

3

Tap the display.

1

123min• A touch-sensitive menu will be displayed. Tap P toview thumbnails. To return to single-frame playback, tap
R.

4

Press the OK button to display movie options.
• Highlight [Play Movie] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button. Movie playback will start.

3

n 3-1 Basic Recording and Playback

EN 3033-2

Shooting Settings

The camera oﬀers many recording-related functions. Settings can be adjusted using
any of the following methods; choose a method according to shooting conditions
and how often the setting is accessed.
Direct buttons

Exposure compensation, white balance, and other frequently-used settings
are assigned to buttons. Press the buttons to access the settings directly.

LV supercontrol panel

This panel lists shooting settings. Highlight settings in the panel and choose
options. Current settings are also listed.

Live controls

Like the super control panel, live controls list shooting settings. Use live
controls to adjust settings while previewing your subject in the display.

Menus

Use the menus for settings that cannot be accessed by other means or
to customize the camera for ease of use. The menus also contain items
pertaining to camera operation and camera controls.

3

304 ENn 3-2 Shooting Settings

Direct Buttons
Frequently-used shooting functions are assigned to the camera’s buttons, dials, andother controls. These are referred to as “direct buttons”. Included are the controls
listed below, which can be used for basic shooting settings.
Direct button

Assigned function

Y (one-touch white
Focus peaking
balance button) button1

Z (preview) button

Zoom

Fn button

N (AF-target selection)

AEL/AFL button

AEL/AFL

Arrow pad

N (AF-target selection)

F button

Exposure compensation

ISO button

ISO sensitivity

WB button

White balance

AFp button

AF/metering modeu (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewﬁnder)
selection

R buttonMovie recording

3

Press the desired button.
• The camera will display options for the chosen function.

Options2

Rotate the front or rear dial to select the desired
option.
• In some cases additional options can be displayed bypressing the INFO button.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 305

Touch Controls(Silent Controls)

Frequently-used options can be accessed via touch
controls. This prevents the sound of the buttons being
recorded with movies. By default, a silent control tab isdisplayed when you select n (movie) mode; if it is not, it
can be displayed using the menus. The following controls
are listed:

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Silent control tab

3

Y (power zoom)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out.

P (headphone volume)

Adjust volume when using headphones.

R (recording level)

Choose the recording level.

SS (shutter speed)

Adjust shutter speed when S (shutter-priority AE) or M
(manual) is selected for [n Mode] (P. 332).

FNo (aperture)

Adjust aperture when A (aperture-priority AE) or M (manual) is
selected for [n Mode] (P. 332).

F (exposure compensation)

Adjust exposure compensation. If M is selected for [n Mode](P. 332), exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is
selected for [n ISO] (P. 369).

ISO (n ISO sensitivity)

Adjust [n ISO] (P. 369). This option is available when M is
selected for [n Mode] (P. 332).

• Silent controls are not available during high-speed movie recording (P. 339).

306 ENn 3-2 Shooting Settings
Using Silent Controls
Using silent controls prevents the sound of the buttons being recorded with movies
and helps reduce blur caused by camera shake.

1

Tap the silent control tab in the display.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF• Silent controls will be displayed.
• To hide silent controls, tap the silent control tab again.

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Silent control tab

2

Tap the desired control.

1

123min

L
R

T

W
28 mm

T
W

M-IS 1P• Options will be displayed.
ISO-A
200

SS
FNo
4K

30p

n

3

250 F5.6 0.0

ISO
1:02:03

Choose an option.
• Tap yzwx to choose an option.
• To return to the silent control tab and select a diﬀerent
control, tap v.
• The highlighted option will be selected automatically if nooperations are performed for 8 seconds.

4

1:02:03

3

Tap the silent control tab to hide silent controls.
• The silent control tab will close.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 307


Displaying the Silent Control Tab
Use the menus to hide or display the silent control tab. When the tab is not
displayed, it can be displayed using the menus.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight the n (video menu) tab using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight [n Display Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight [n Info Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button, then highlight [Custom1] or[Custom2] and press the I button.

3• A list of available shooting indicators will be displayed.

5

Highlight [Silent G Operation] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• Selected options are marked with a v. To deselect,press the OK button again.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• The silent control tab will appear in the n (movie) modeshooting display.
• If the silent control tab is not displayed, press the INFO
button repeatedly until it appears.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Silent control tab• The [Custom 2] display is hidden by default. It can be displayed using [n Display Settings] >[n Info Settings] in the n video menu. g [n Info Settings] (P. 429)

308 ENn 3-2 Shooting Settings

The LV Super Control Panel
Access shooting settings via the list displayed in the LV super control panel. You
can also check current settings. The panel lists settings for both still photography
and movie recording.
• The settings listed in still photography modes diﬀer from those displayed in n (movie)
mode. g “Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel” (P. 65)
1

LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

OK

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

1

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Select n mode and press the OK button.

Cursor• The LV super control panel will be displayed.

2

3

Rotate the rear dial or tap to selecta setting in display.
• The selected setting will behighlighted.
• You can also highlight settings using
the multi selector or arrow pad(FGHI).

3

Rotate the front dial to change thehighlighted setting.

4

Press the shutter button halfway to accept current
settings and exit the LV super control panel.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 309Additional Options
Pressing the OK button in Step 2 displays options for thehighlighted setting. In some cases, additional options canbe viewed by pressing the INFO button.

INFO button

OK button

OK

INFO

[n Image Stabilizer]• Touch controls can be used in place of the OK button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice todisplay options.

3

310 ENn 3-2 Shooting Settings
Settings Available in the LV Super Control Panel
e

1

f

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

g
h
i
j

9

0 ab c d

1 Option currently selected
2 n ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 369
3 n AF mode .................................... P. 345
AF-target mode ....................... P. 120, 349
4 Flash mode *1
5 Flash compensation *1
6 K image stabilization *1 ................. P. 176
7 n image stabilization..................... P. 376
8 K storage options (n save slot)................................................ P. 316, 319
9 Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer) *1
0 K image quality *1 ........................... P. 78
a Metering mode ................................ P. 367
b I face priority ................................ P. 360
c n image quality ..................... P. 321, 339
d Aspect ratio
e n white balance ............................ P. 380
n white balance compensation ..... P. 384
n color temperature *2 ................... P. 380

f Picture mode................................... P. 388
g N Sharpness.................................. P. 396
u Contrast ..................................... P. 397
t Saturation .................................. P. 398
z Tone gradation........................... P. 399
x Color ﬁlter .................................. P. 400
y Tint............................................. P. 401
3 Eﬀect.......................................... P. 402
R Color *3 ....................................... P. 407
c Color/Vivid *4 ............................... P. 405
Eﬀect *5............................................ P. 407
h Color spacei Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 403
j Control assignment ......................... P. 417

3*1 For still photography only. See “2 Taking and Viewing Photographs” (P. 51).
*2 Displayed when CWB (custom white balance) is selected for n white balance.
*3 Displayed when “Partial Color” is selected.
*4 Displayed when “Color Creator” is selected.
*5 Displayed when an art ﬁlter is selected.
• The following settings cannot be adjusted in n (movie) mode:
drive mode, metering, ﬂash mode, ﬂash compensation, aspect ratio, and color space.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 311

Using Live Controls
Live controls are used to view and adjust settings during live view. The eﬀects ofthe selected settings can be previewed in the live view display. At default settings,
live controls can be accessed from the LV super control panel. If you are unable toaccess live controls, their display can be enabled in the menus.

1

Select n mode and press the OK button.
• The LV super control panel will be displayed.

2

Press the INFO button.
• Live controls will be displayed.

INFO button

3 3Live controls

Highlight a setting using FG on the arrow pad, then highlight an option using
the HI buttons and press the OK button to select.
• Settings can also be adjusted using the dials. Use the rear dial to highlight a setting
and the front dial to choose an option.
• The highlighted option will be selected automatically if no operations are performed forabout 8 seconds.
• Live controls will be displayed when next you press the OK button.

Viewing Live Controls
If live controls are not displayed when you press the INFO button in the LV supercontrol panel, their display can be enabled from the menus.

1
2

312 EN

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight the n (video menu) tab using FG on thearrow pad and press the OK button.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

3

Highlight [n Display Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight [n Control Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button, then highlight [LiveControl] and press the OK button again.
• A check (v) will appear next to [Live Control].
• To exit the menus, press the MENU button repeatedly orpress the shutter button halfway.


Available Live Controls
1

123minM-IS 1WB
AUTO

o

Settings

C-AFP

Naturalnn image stabilization .......................... P. 376
Picture mode ........................................ P. 388
n white balance .................................. P. 380
Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer) *........................................................ P. 151
n image quality ........................... P. 321, 339

3

4K

30p

J

K

Options

n mode (movie exposure mode) ........ P. 332
n AF mode.......................................... P. 345
n ISO sensitivity ................................. P. 369
I face priority ...................................... P. 360
K movie audio ...................................... P. 413* For still photography only. Not available in movie mode.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 313

Using the Menus
Items not listed in the control panels can be found in the menus, including items foradjusting shooting and playback settings and customizing the camera for ease ofuse.
Tab name

Tab

Tab

3

Item (setting)

Tab name

Description

W

Shooting Menu 1 *1

Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting oraccess basic photo settings.

X

Shooting Menu 2 *1

Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.

nVideo Menu

Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.

q

Playback Menu

Playback- and retouch-related items.

G

Custom Menu

Items for customizing the camera.

e

Setup Menu

Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.

P

My Menu *2

A customizable menu containing only items you select.
g “Creating a Personalized Menu (My Menu)” (P. 477)

*1 W Shooting Menu 1 and X Shooting Menu 2 are for still photography. See “2 Taking andViewing Photographs” (P. 51).
*2 “My Menu” contains no items at shipment. Use “My Menu” to store and organize frequentlyused items from other menus. Select items for addition to “My Menu” from the camera
menus (P. 477).

314 ENn 3-2 Shooting Settings

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
11

Tool tip2

On-screen guides
Press the MENU button to exit to
the previous display

Press the OK button to select thehighlighted item

• Tool tips are displayed for roughly 2 seconds after an item is highlighted. Press the
INFO button to view or hide tool tips.

2

Highlight a tab using FG on the arrow pad and press the OK button.
• Selecting the G Custom Menu tab displays group tabs.
Highlight a group tab using the FG buttons and press
the OK button to select.

Group tabs

3

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press the OK button to view
options.
Item3

Current setting

OK

4

Highlight options using the FG buttons and press the OK button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the multi selector or the front or rear dials in place of
the arrow pad.

n 3-2 Shooting Settings

EN 315

3-3

Card-Related Settings

This section describes memory-card–related settings. In movie mode, you canchoose the card used to store movies. You can also choose the folder used to store
movies.
For information on the memory cards that can be used for movie recording, see“Memory Cards” (P. 37).

3
Choosing a Card for Movies(n Save Slot)

Choose the memory card used to store movies when two memory cards areinserted.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 317)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Save Settings] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.

K save settings

316 ENn 3-3 Card-Related Settings

2

Highlight [n Save Slot] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight an option using the rear dial or the FG
buttons.
[5]: Movies are recorded to the card in Slot 1.
[4]: Movies are recorded to the card in Slot 2.

4
5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menu.


Menu Access
Choose a setting using [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) > [n Save Slot] in G Custom
Menu Y.
MENU button
G (custom menu) tab
Y tab[Card Slot Settings][n Save Slot]
Press I on the arrow pad to view options
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

n 3-3 Card-Related Settings

3

EN 317

Storage Slot Selection
When two memory cards are inserted, the card used to store new pictures can beselected using the CARD (card select) button.

1

Press the CARD button.
• In n (movie) mode, the camera will display [n SaveSlot] options.

CARD button

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to choose the desiredslot.
[5]: Record pictures to the card in Slot 1.
[4]: Record pictures to the card in Slot 2.

3

3

Press the OK button to exit.
• The icon for the selected card will be displayed.

1

LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Save slot

318 ENn 3-3 Card-Related Settings

Storage Folder Selection(Assign Save Folder)

Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored. This option isavailable even when only one memory card is inserted.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
New Folder- The menus (P. 320)

Create a new folder as the destination for subsequent pictures.

Existing Folder Choose an existing folder.
• A new folder cannot be created if a folder with the same name exists on either card.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [K Save Settings] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.
• [Card Slot Settings] options will be displayed.

K save settings

2

Highlight [Assign Save Folder] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight [Assign] using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.

n 3-3 Card-Related Settings

3

EN 3194Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[New Folder]:Choose the desired folder number andpress the OK button.
[Existing Folder]: Highlight an existing folder using the FG
buttons and press the OK button. The
camera will display the ﬁrst two photos andthe last photo in the selected folder.

5
6

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Menu Access
Choose a setting using [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) > [Assign Save Folder] in
G Custom Menu Y.
MENU button
G (custom menu) tab
Y tab
Folder]Press I on the arrow pad to view options
option3

320 ENn 3-3 Card-Related Settings[Card Slot Settings][Assign Save
Use the FG buttons to choose an3-4Movie File Settings

Choose the frame size and frame rate at which movies are recorded. The camera
can store multiple user-selected combinations of frame size and rate for quick recall
via the LV super control panel or live controls. The camera also records time codesthat can be used, for example, when editing movies.

3
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression(nK)

Choose the image quality options available for movie recording. When choosing
an option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you planning toprocess it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The camera canstore multiple combinations of frame size, rate, and compression from which you
can select according to your goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed movie
options are also available. g “Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- andFast-Motion Movies)” (P. 342) and “Filming High-Speed Movies (nK)” (P. 339)
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 323)
- The menus (P. 323)
Option- Live controls (P. 323)

Description

Setting 1, 2, 3, or 4 Choose frame size, rate, and compression settings.
CustomChoose frame size, rate, and compression settings and slow/fast motion
options.

High speed

Choose the frame rate.

• Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format.

n 3-4 Movie File Settings

EN 321

The Movie Quality Icon
Changes to settings are reﬂected in the [nK] icon as shown below.
Frame size
FHD Full HD *1

1920 × 1080

HD

HD *1

1280 × 720

4K

4K *1

3840 × 2160

C4K

4K Digital Cinema *1

4096 × 2160

Compression/bit rate
A-I

All Intra *2

SF

Super Fine

F

Fine

N

Normal• Not available when [4K] or [C4K] is
selected for [Movie Resolution].

Frame rate

360p

60p: 59.94 fps

50p

50p: 50.00 fps

30p

30p: 29.97 fps

25p

25p: 25.00 fps

24p

24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)• [60p] and [50p] are not available
when:- [FHD] is selected for [Movie
Resolution] and [A-I] is selected
for bit rate
- [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [Movie
Resolution]• Selecting [C4K] for [Movie Resolution]
ﬁxes [Frame Rate] at [24p].

Movie typen

Setting 1, 2, 3, or 4:
Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, andcompression for later use.

G

Custom:Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You canalso shoot fast- or slow-motion movies (P. 342).

—

High-speed movie g “Filming High-Speed Movies (nK)”(P. 339)*1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format. Individual movie ﬁles can be up to 4 GB insize. Continuous shots can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
*2 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases
ﬁle size.
• Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
• Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
• Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspect ratioof 17:9.

322 ENn 3-4 Movie File Settings
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [nK] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.
• Movie quality options will be displayed.

n image quality

2

Choose a movie quality option using the front dial.

• You can adjust settings for the selected mode. Press the
INFO button to position the cursor in the setting menu.
Highlight settings using HI on the arrow pad and use
the FG buttons to choose the values.

3Menu AccessMovie image quality settings can also be accessed via the menus. Choose settings
using [nK] in the n video menu.
MENU buttonn (video) tab
arrow pad to view options[n Speciﬁcation Settings][nK]

Press I on theAccess via Live Controls
OK button[nK]
choose an option

Press HI on the arrow pad ton image quality

n 3-4 Movie File Settings

EN 323

Time Codes(Time Code Settings)

Adjust time code settings. Time codes are used to synchronize picture and soundduring editing and the like. Choose from the following options.
Choose a time code recording option. Use time codes where precise timing isrequired.
Time Code
Mode[Drop Frame]: Drop-frame time codes. The time code is adjusted tocompensate for deviations from the recording time.
[Non-DF]:
Non-drop-frame time codes. The time code is not adjusted tocompensate for deviations from the recording time.
Choose how the time count is incremented.

Count Up

[Rec Run]: The count is incremented only during recording.
[Free Run]: The count is incremented continuously, including when recording
is not in progress or the camera is oﬀ.
Choose the starting time code.

Reset the time code to 00:00:00
Starting Time [Reset]:[Current Time]: Set the time code to the current time, frame 00.
[Manual Input]: Enter the time code manually.

3

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Time Code Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

324 ENn 3-4 Movie File Settings

5

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• If you selected [Starting Time], choose from [Reset],[Manual Input], and [Current Time] and press the OK
button. If you selected [Manual Input], choose a value
using the arrow pad.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3n 3-4 Movie File Settings

EN 325

3-5

The Viewfinder and Monitor
Displays

The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the monitor
and viewﬁnder displays. The monitor live view display and viewﬁnder also show
information on camera settings. Options are available for controlling display
switching and choosing the information shown.
Framing movies in the monitor

Framing movies in the viewﬁnder
Put your eye tothe viewﬁnder

Monitor1

ViewﬁnderLR

123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

L
R

M-IS 1

C-AF

M-IS 1

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

C-AF

ISO-A
200

3

4K

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Live view in monitor shooting display

30p

1
123minn

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

1:02:03

Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns
the viewﬁnder on. The monitor turns oﬀ
while the viewﬁnder is on.

• Display switching and viewﬁnder display options are available in the menus. g [EVF Auto
Switch] (P. 553), [EVF Style] (P. 554)

326 ENn 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

Choosing the Information Displayed
Choose the indicators shown in the shooting display.

1

Press the INFO button repeatedly.

• The information displayed changes each time the INFO button ispressed.
1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

INFO

M-IS 1

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

C-AF

C-AF

ISO-A
200

ISO-A
200

M-IS 1

4K

INFO button

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Basic info
(Custom Display 1)

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Custom Display 2

1

123minINFO

INFO

Info hidden• At default settings, the basic info display shows the indicators selected for Custom
Display 1. Custom Display 2 is hidden. These settings can be changed via the menus.
You can also display data from GPS and other sensors. Use [n Display Settings] >[n Info Settings] (P. 429).
• You can also hold the INFO button and rotate the front or rear dial to choose theinformation displayed. The displays can be cycled in either direction.

3

Histograms
Histograms graph the distribution of brightness
in an image. The horizontal axis showsbrightness, the vertical axis the number ofpixels. During shooting, pixels brighter than theupper limit are shown in red and pixels darker
than the lower limit in blue.

Many
Few
Dark

Bright

The Level Gauge
The level gauge shows camera tilt. Pitch is shown by the vertical bar, roll by thehorizontal bar. The level gauge is intended as a guide only.

n 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 327

Display Selection Options(EVF Auto Switch)

Choose how the camera selects the display used for live view.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The u button- The menusUsing the u (LV) Button

1

Press and hold the u button.
• The [EVF Auto Switch] menu will be displayed.

u button2

Highlight an option using FG on the arrow pad and press the OK button.
[On]: The display switches to the viewﬁnder when you put your eye to the viewﬁnder andto the monitor when you take your eye away.
[Oﬀ]: Press the u button to switch back and forth between the monitor and viewﬁnder.

3

Menu Access
Adjust settings using [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 553) in G Custom Menu a.
MENU button
G (custom menu) taba tab[EVF Auto Switch]arrow pad to view options and use the FG button to choose an option

328 ENn 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

Press I on theThe Shooting Display
The following indicators are displayed when the camera is in n (movie) mode. The
indicators displayed can be chosen in the menus.
1 2 3 4

5

w1

6

7

±0 P 8BAzy1

p T cW d
28 mm
8 90ab

L

BT.
709

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

off

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1
WB
AUTO

C-AF
ISO-A
200

e
f
g
h

1

B
TO

M

x
w
v
u

M
4K

-3

n

250 F5.6 +2.0
t sr

1 Memory card access indicator .......... P. 37
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................... P. 584, 600
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
4 Active connection to computer........ P. 600
5 Wireless LAN connection........................................ P. 592, 596, 597
6 Audio recording level *1 ................... P. 424
7 Headphone volume *1 ..................... P. 424
8 Audio recording level meter ............ P. 413
9 Digital teleconverter .........................P. 411
0 a view assist ............................... P. 395
a Face priority .................................... P. 360
b Movie audio recording .................... P. 413
c Zoom direction/focal lengthd Internal temperature warning .......... P. 639
e n image stabilization..................... P. 376
f Picture mode................................... P. 388
g n white balance ............................ P. 380
h Drive mode (single-frame only) *2
i n mode (movie exposure mode) ... P. 332

+2

30p

+7
● REC 00:12

0:29:47

qp

o

i
j
k

K

C

l

n m

j n Image quality ............................. P. 321
k Time elapsed (displayed during
recording)........................................ P. 295
l Time available................................. P. 655
m n save slot .................................... P. 316
n Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 403
o Exposure compensation ................. P. 367
p Level gauge .................................... P. 327
q Exposure compensation value........ P. 367
r Aperture value ........................P. 334 – 338
s Shutter speed .........................P. 334 – 338
t Histogram ....................................... P. 327
u Shooting mode..........................P. 93 – 110
v Log status ....................................... P. 571
w GPS status...................................... P. 570
x Touch controls................................. P. 298
y n ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 369
z n AF mode .................................... P. 345
A Time code ....................................... P. 324
B Battery level ...................................... P. 44
C Silent control tab ............................. P. 306

3*1 Displayed during adjustments to [K VOL] and [P VOL]. g “Touch Controls (Silent
Controls)” (P. 306) and [n Dial Function] (P. 424)
*2 Drive mode selection is not available in movie mode.

n 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 329Viewﬁnder (Movie Recording)
L
R

BT.
709

off

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

C-AF

o
M
4K

30p

1
123min1

2

1
123minn

9d

0 a b c
w1

AEL

n

AEL

3

250 F5.6 +2.0

4

Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6

5250 F5.6 +2.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

6
Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6

REC 00:12

0:29:47

7 8
WB ISO-A
AUTO 200e

REC 00:12

0:29:47
f

g
h

WB
AUTO

+2.0
i

3

• This is the default display style ([Style 2]). The display style can be selected using G Custom
Menu a > [EVF Style] (P. 554). To display the same information as appears in the monitor,choose [Style 3] for [EVF Style].
1 In-focus indicator ............................ P. 345
2 Exposure lock ................................. P. 373
3 Shutter speed .........................P. 334 – 338
4 Aperture value ........................P. 334 – 338
5 Exposure compensation value........ P. 367
6 Highlight & shadow control ............. P. 403
7 n white balance ............................ P. 380
8 n ISO sensitivity ........................... P. 369
9 Battery level/bay number .................. P. 44
0 Memory card access indicator .......... P. 37
a Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................... P. 584, 600

b Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
c Active connection to computer........ P. 600
d Shooting mode................................ P. 294
e Exposure compensation ................. P. 367
f n save slot .................................... P. 316
g Time elapsed (displayed during
recording)........................................ P. 295
h Time available................................. P. 655
i Level gauge * .................................. P. 556* Displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway. g [V Half Way Level] (P. 556)

330 ENn 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

Restoring Default Settings(Reset)Reset the camera to factory default settings. You can opt to reset almost all settings
or only those directly related to photography.
• This option applies in both still photography and movie modes.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Reset] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[Full]:

Reset all settings with a few exceptions, such as theclock and language.
[Basic]: Reset photography-related settings only.

5

3

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.
• The [Reset / Custom Modes] menu will be displayed.

6

Press OK in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.
• The [Reset] menu will be displayed.

7

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• Settings will be reset.

n 3-5 The Viewﬁnder and Monitor Displays

EN 331

3-6

Movie Recording Options

Adjust shutter speed and aperture to suit your subject. You can exploit depth ofﬁeld and motion blur just as you would when taking photos. You’ll also ﬁnd it easy
to record slow- and fast-motion movies and to ﬁlm at extremely high frame rates forultra-clear slow-motion playback.

3
Choosing an Exposure Mode(n Mode)Adjust aperture and shutter speed to suit your artistic intent. The selected settings
only take eﬀect when the mode dial is rotated to n. Movies shot in still photography
modes are ﬁlmed using program AE.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The menus (P. 333)
- Live controls (P. 333)
• See the page numbers listed below for more information.

332 ENP Program AE (P. 334)

The camera controls aperture and shutter speed.

A Aperture-priority AE (P. 335)

Use aperture to control depth of ﬁeld.

S Shutter-priority AE (P. 336)

Adjust shutter speed according to subject motion andthe movie frame rate.

M Manual exposure (P. 337)

Freely adjust both aperture and shutter speed.

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options


Menu Access

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) using
the FG buttons and press the I button.
• [n Mode] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight the desired mode using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• The video menu will be displayed.

5

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

Access via Live Controls
The exposure mode for movies can be selected using live
controls.

n ModeOK button
an option[n Mode] (movie exposure mode)

Press HI on the arrow pad to choose

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 333

Letting the Camera Choose Aperture and Shutter Speed(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness. This option can be combined with exposure compensation.

1

Focus and check the display.
• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.

2

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

Record movies.

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Aperture
Shutter speed
Adjusting Settings in Mode P
The front and rear dials can be used for exposurecompensation. g “Adjusting Exposure (Exposure
Compensation)” (P. 367)

3

• The F button can also be used for exposure compensation.
Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial. You canalso adjust exposure compensation by pressing the F button
and using HI on the arrow pad.

• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g n video menu >[n Dial Function] (P. 424)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g n video menu > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426)

334 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options

(A: Aperture-Priority AE)

Choosing an Aperture

In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automaticallysets the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower
aperture values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be
in focus (depth of ﬁeld), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller
apertures) increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of andbehind the subject.
Lower aperture values…

F2.8

F4.0

Higher aperture values…

F5.6…reduce depth of ﬁeld and increase
blur.

1

F8.0

…increase depth of ﬁeld.

Choose an aperture.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating therear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.
• You can adjust exposure compensation (P. 367). At
default settings, exposure compensation can be adjusted
using the front dial.

2

F11

Record movies.

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

A
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Aperture
Shutter speedn mode3Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 367)
Rear dial: Aperture• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
You can also adjust exposure compensation by pressing the
F button and using HI on the arrow pad.
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g n video menu >[n Dial Function] (P. 424)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g n video menu > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426)

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 335

(S: Shutter-Priority AE)

Choosing a Shutter Speed

In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets
aperture for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Choose a shutter
speed according to subject motion and movie frame rate. If subject motion seems
jerky, choosing a slow shutter speed will smooth the subject’s apparent motion.
Slower shutter speeds…

24

1

Faster shutter speeds…

30

60

125

Choose a shutter speed.
• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
the rear dial. Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24 to
1/32000 s.
• The aperture selected automatically by the camera willappear in the display.
• You can adjust exposure compensation (P. 367). At
default settings, exposure compensation can be adjusted
using the front dial.

2

3

Record movies.

250
1

32000
L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

S
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Aperture
Shutter speedn mode• The slowest shutter speed available varies with the frame rate selected for movie image
quality.

Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 367)
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
You can also adjust exposure compensation by pressing the
F button and using HI on the arrow pad.
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g n video menu >[n Dial Function] (P. 424)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g n video menu > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby ﬂicker from ﬂuorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be conﬁgured to reduce
the eﬀects of ﬂicker during live view or movie recording. g [Flicker reduction] (P. 190),[n Flicker Scan] (P. 374)

336 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options

Choosing Aperture and Shutter Speed(M: Manual Exposure)In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. Shooting at a ﬁxed
aperture and shutter speed makes any changes in the brightness of the subject or
the scene readily apparent.

1

Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

1• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front dialand shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24–1/32000 s. Valuesof ISO 200–6400 are available using the [n ISO]
manual sensitivity control options.
• The display shows the diﬀerence between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will ﬂash if the diﬀerence exceeds ±3 EV.

2

Record movies.

LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO
200

M
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

Diﬀerence from optimal
exposuren mode• If subject motion seems jerky, choosing a slow shutter speed will smooth the subject’s
apparent motion.
• The slowest shutter speed available varies with the frame rate selected for movie image
quality.

Adjusting Settings in Mode M

3

Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g n video menu >[n Dial Function] (P. 424)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g n video menu > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426)

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 337

Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for[n ISO]. Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO
sensitivity, exposure can be adjusted without changing shutter speed or aperture.
g “Adjusting ISO Sensitivity (n ISO)” (P. 369)
When [On] is selected for [b ISO-Auto], [n ISO] can be set to [AUTO].
g [b ISO-Auto] (P. 372)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F button. Hold the F button and rotate
the front or rear dial.
123• Exposure compensation is included in the deviation from
M-IS
TC 00:00:00:00 DF
optimal exposure shown by the exposure indicator in the
C-AFdisplay.
1

min

L
R

1

ISO
200

M
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

Exposure compensation
Deviation from optimal exposure(includes exposure compensation)3• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby ﬂicker from ﬂuorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be conﬁgured to reduce
the eﬀects of ﬂicker during live view or movie recording. g [Flicker reduction] (P. 190),[n Flicker Scan] (P. 374)

338 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options

Filming High-Speed Movies(nK)

Film at high frame rates. Movies are ﬁlmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps.
Stretching playback to double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is
selected as the playback frame rate) lets you view in slow motion movements that inreal life took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are reﬂected in the movie quality icon as shown.
Frame size
FHD

Full HD (1920 × 1080)

Movie type
HS

High speed (120 fps)

Playback frame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed

50p

50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed

30p

30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed

25p

25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed

24p

24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 341)

3

- Live controls (P. 341)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [nK] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.
• Movie quality options will be displayed.

n image quality

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 3392

Highlight
front dial.

(high-speed movie recording) using the• To use the options currently selected for high-speed
movie recording, press the OK button. The camera willexit the menu with the current options selected.

3

To edit current settings, press the INFO button in
Step 2.
• This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie
options.

4

Choose the playback frame rate.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to highlight the desired
playback frame rate.

5

3

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option
and exit.

• Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
• Sound is not recorded.
• The picture angle is slightly reduced.
• Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
• Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
• Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
• Filming ends when the movie ﬁle reaches 4 GB in size.
• High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
• [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
• [Movie H] cannot be used.
• [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art ﬁlter picture modes are not available.
• [Gradation] is ﬁxed at [Gradation Normal].
• High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera isconnected to a smartphone.

340 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options


Menu Access
High-speed movie recording can also be accessed via the menus. Choose settings
using [nK] in the n video menu.
MENU buttonn (movie) tab
the arrow pad to view options[n Speciﬁcation Settings][nK]

Press I on
Access via Live Controls
OK button
options[nK]

Press HI on the arrow pad to viewn image quality3n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 341

Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)
Film slow- or fast-motion movies. Choose a recording rate faster than the playback
rate for slow-motion movies or slower than the playback rate for fast-motion movies.
Slow- and fast-motion recording are available as custom movie image quality
options.
Changes to settings are reﬂected in the movie quality icon as shown.
Frame size
FHD

Full HD

HD

HD

1920 × 1080
1280 × 720

4K

4K

3840 × 2160

C4K

4K Digital Cinema

4096 × 2160

Compression/bit rate

3

A-I

All Intra

SF

Super Fine

F

Fine

N

NormalFrame rate
60p

60p: 59.94 fps

50p

50p: 50.00 fps

30p

30p: 29.97 fps

25p

25p: 25.00 fps

24p

24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)

Movie typeG

CustomSlow/fast motion *×0.96 or lessSlow motion

OFF

Normal playback speed

×1.04 or more

Fast motion* The icon does not indicate the option selected.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 343)
- Live controls (P. 344)

342 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options- The menus (P. 344)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [nK] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.
• Movie quality options will be displayed.

n image quality

2

Highlight G (custom) using the front dial and pressthe INFO button.
• Options will be displayed and the cursor will bepositioned in the options list.

3

Select items using HI on the arrow pad and use
the FG buttons to choose a setting.
• The options available for [Slow or Fast Motion] varywith the settings chosen for frame size and rate. Only
fast-motion options are available when [C4K] and [4K]
are selected.

4

3Press the OK button to save changes and exit.

• Sound is not recorded.
• Art ﬁlter picture modes are disabled.
• Depending on the option selected for [nK], slow- and/or fast-motion recording may not be
available.
• Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available varies
with the option selected for [Frame Rate].

n 3-6 Movie Recording Options

EN 343Access via Live Controls
OK button[nK]
Select G (custom)
Press theINFO button, select [Slow or Fast Motion] and choose thedesired settingsn image qualityMenu AccessSlow- and fast-motion movie recording can also be accessed via the menus.
Choose settings using [nK] in the n video menu.
MENU buttonn (movie) tab[n Speciﬁcation Settings]
the arrow pad
Highlight G (custom) and press the I button
to choose settings

3344 ENn 3-6 Movie Recording Options[nK]
Press I on
Use the FGHI buttons

3-7

Focus

Focus can be adjusted automatically (autofocus) or manually (manual focus).
Autofocus features options for focusing on selected points or for tracking focus
on a moving subject. Settings can be customized according to the subject orshooting conditions, allowing you to ﬁlm a greater variety of subjects. This section
describes the settings available and how they can be combined to get the most from
autofocus.

Focus Mode(n AF Mode)

Choose the focus mode for auto or manual focus.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The AFp button (P. 347)
- The LV super control panel (P. 347)

- Live controls (P. 348)
- The menus (P. 348)

Single AF (S-AFb and S-AF)
Choose for photographs of subjects that are stationary or not moving away fromor toward the camera. The camera focuses once each time the shutter button ispressed halfway.
• When the camera focuses, the in-focus indicator and theactive AF target will be displayed. These indicators are notdisplayed while recording is in progress.

3

In-focus indicator
1

LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

S-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

AF target• After focusing in [S-AFb] mode, you can adjust focus
manually by rotating the focus ring.

Minimum focus
distance)

Focus ringn 3-7 Focus

EN 345

Continuous AF (C-AF)
Track focus on subjects whose distance to the camera is continuously changing.
The camera focuses continuously before and during recording.
Manual Focus (MF)
Focus manually.
• Rotate the lens focus ring to focus.
• If the lens is equipped with an MF clutch, you can rotate thelens focus ring to engage manual focus regardless of the
focus mode selected with the camera. g “Lens MF Clutch(Manual Focus Clutch)” (P. 355)

Minimum focus
distance)

Focus ring

Tracking AF (C-AF+TR)
Track focus on a speciﬁc subject while keeping the composition roughly the same.
Touch your subject in the display to start tracking.
• Tracking starts when recording begins.
• An AF target is displayed while tracking is in progress. The
target turns red if the camera can no longer track the subject.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:12 DF

T

W
28 mm

M-IS 1

C-AF+TR
ISO-A
200

3

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

REC 00:12

0:29:47

Target displayed while
tracking is in progress.

Preset MF (PreMF)
Select [PreMF] to focus at a preset distance. g “Focusing at a Preset Distance(Preset MF)” (P. 357)%
• The default behavior of the AF target is described. Its behavior can be changed in thecustom menu. g [AF Area Pointer] (P. 486)
• You can conﬁgure the camera to automatically zoom in on the focus target when the lensfocus ring is rotated or to highlight outlines that are in focus. g [MF Assist] (P. 495)
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 349), and [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426) in the n video
menu.

346 ENn 3-7 Focus


Access via the AFp Button

1

Press the AFp button.

AFp button• [n AF Mode] options will be displayed.

[n AF Mode] options

2

Rotate the rear dial.
• You can also rotate the dial while pressing the button.

3
3

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), focus
settings can also be adjusted in the LV super control
panel.

n AF mode
Press the OK button[n AF Mode]

Rotate the front dial to choose an option

n 3-7 Focus

EN 347


Access via Live Controls
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), focus
settings can also be adjusted using live controls.
Highlight [n AF Mode] in the live controls and use HI
on the arrow pad to choose an option.

n AF modeMenu Access
The focus mode can be selected using [n AF/IS Settings] in the n (video) menu.
MENU buttonn (video menu) tab
FG buttons to choose an option

3348 ENn 3-7 Focus[n AF/IS Settings][n AF Mode]Use theChoosing an AF Target Mode

(AF Target Mode)

The point or area in the frame on which the camera focuses is call the “AF target”.
[AF Target Mode] is used to choose the number of AF targets used and the size ofthe area covered. Reducing the number of targets restricts focus to a small areaof the frame, while increasing the number expands focus to a larger area. Choose[Single Target] for subjects that are easy to track, [Target Group] or [All Targets] formore elusive subjects.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The multi selector (P. 350)

- The LV super control panel (P. 351)

M: Single Target

1

123minSelect a single focus target.

M

r: 9-Target Group (3 × 3)
Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.

s: 25-Target Group (5 × 5)
Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within theselected group.

q: All Targets (11 × 9)

1

123min3

r

1

123mins

1

123minThe camera chooses from all 99 targets.
q• Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 411) reduces the number of targets available.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 349
Access via the Multi Selector

1

Keep the multi selector pressed while rotating the front or rear dial.

+Multi selector• The camera cycles through AF target modes as shown.
1

123min

q

M

1

3

2

1

123min1

123min123minsr

Release the multi selector when the desired mode is displayed.
• AF target mode options will no longer be displayed.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the control to be
used for AF-target selection. Press the FGHI buttons to view the AF target display. Use
the front dial to choose a target. N (AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow pad bydefault.
%• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 349), and [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426) in the n videomenu.
• Settings can also be adjusted by ﬁrst pressing a button and then using the front dial.
Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been assigned
via [n Button Function]. You can then adjust settings by rotating the front dial. At default
settings, [N] is assigned to the Fn button. g [n Button Function] (P. 417)

350 ENn 3-7 Focus


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), the AF target mode can also be
selected in the LV super control panel.

1

Highlight [AF Area] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.

AF area• AF-target selection will be displayed.

1

123minr2

Rotate the front dial to choose an AF target mode.
• You can choose the roles played by the front and reardials or arrow pad during AF-target selection. Use[N Select Screen Settings] (P. 488) in G Custom
Menu K. At default settings, the front dial is used tochoose the AF target mode.

3

3

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 351

Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point)

When an option other than [All Targets] is selected for AF target mode, you canposition the target or targets over the subject on which you wish to focus. At default
settings, the multi selector is used to position the AF target. The target can be
moved while ﬁlming is in progress.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The multi selector- The LV super control panel (P. 353)

Access via the Multi Selector

1

Use the multi selector to position the AF target.

Multi selector• The AF target is displayed in green at the start of theoperation.
• If the AF target is moved during recording, only themoving target will be displayed.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector orpress and hold the OK button.

3

1

123minAF target

2

Take pictures.
• AF target mode options clear from the display when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• The AF frame is displayed in place of the selected AF
target.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the arrow pad to be
used for AF-target selection. Press the FGHI buttons to view the AF target display anduse the rear dial to choose a target. N (AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow padby default.
• If you assign [N] to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 417), you can press thecontrol and then position the AF target using the multi selector or arrow pad. This option is
assigned to the Fn button by default.

352 ENn 3-7 Focus

%• When [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad], you can reposition the AF target using monitor
touch controls while framing your subject in the viewﬁnder. g [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 486)
• You can disable the use of the multi selector in the shooting display. g [T Direction Key](P. 499)• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 349), and [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426) in the n video
menu.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), the AF target can also be selected in
the LV super control panel.

1

Highlight [AF Area] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.

AF area• AF-target selection will be displayed.
• The number of targets available varies with the AF target
mode.

3

1

123minr

2

Use FGHI on the arrow pad to position the AF
target.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector orpress and hold the OK button.
• You can choose the roles played by the front and reardials or arrow pad during AF-target selection. Use[N Select Screen Settings] (P. 488) in G Custom
Menu K. At default settings, the front dial is used tochoose the AF target mode.

3

1

123minr

AF target

Press the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.

• Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 411) reduces the number of targets available.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 353

%• You can disable the use of the multi selector in the shooting display. g [T Direction Key](P. 499)• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 349), and [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426) in the n video
menu.

3

354 ENn 3-7 Focus

Lens MF Clutch(Manual Focus Clutch)

The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used
to switch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the focus ring before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

MF

AF/MF

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 1116

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

AF/MF

16

Focus distances visible

Focus ringMF

• Selecting [MF] or [PreMF] for focus mode on the camera disables autofocus even when thefocus ring is in the AF/MF position.

3n 3-7 Focus

EN 355

Disabling the MF Clutch(MF Clutch)

Disable the manual focus clutch, which is found on some lenses. This can prevent
autofocus being disabled by the clutch engaging accidentally.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Select G Custom Menu I (AF/MF).

3

Highlight [MF Clutch] using FG on the arrow padand press the I button.

4

Use the FG buttons to highlight an option.
[Operative]: The camera responds to the position of thelens focus ring.
[Inoperative]: The camera focuses according to the option
selected for [n AF Mode], regardless of theposition of the lens focus ring.

3
5

Press the OK button to select the highlighted option.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.

• Manual focus using the lens focus ring is not available when [Inoperative] is selected for [MFClutch], even if the lens focus ring is in the manual focus position.

356 ENn 3-7 Focus

Focusing at a Preset Distance(Preset MF)

Quickly focus at a previously-stored distance. This can be used, for example, tofocus quickly at inﬁnity. The focus distance can be set using auto or manual focus or
by entering the focus distance directly.
If the lens is equipped with a focus limiter, disable it before proceeding.
• The ﬁgures displayed are intended as guides only.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- Live controls (P. 359)
- The AFp button- The menus (P. 359)
- The LV super control panel (P. 359)%
• [PreMF] (preset MF) can be assigned to a camera control using [n Button Function] in then video menu, allowing you to focus at a preset distance at the touch of a button (P. 417).
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode], [AF Target Mode] (P. 349), and [AF Target Point] (P. 352)
The Fn lever can be conﬁgured using [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426) in the n video
menu.

3


Access via the AFp Button

1

Press the AFp button.

AFp button• [n AF Mode] options will be displayed.

[n AF Mode] options

n 3-7 Focus

EN 357

2

Highlight [Preset MF] using the rear dial.

3

Press the INFO button.
• You will be prompted to choose the focus distance for[Preset MF].

4

Choose a focus distance.
• To choose a focus distance using autofocus:
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on a subject at
the desired distance.

• To choose a focus distance using manual focus:
Rotate the lens focus ring and check the distance in thedisplay.

3

5

Press the OK button to accept the selected focus
distance.
• To focus at the distance selected for [Preset MF
distance], select [Preset MF] for [n AF Mode] (P. 345).
• The camera also focuses at the preset distance:- when turned on and- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.

358 ENn 3-7 Focus


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), preset manual focus can also be
selected in the LV super control panel.
Highlight [n AF Mode] > [PreMF] in the LV super control
panel, press the OK button, and then press the INFO
button to display options. You can then press the shutter
button halfway to focus on a subject at the desired
distance, or choose the focus distance manually byrotating the focus ring.
• The camera will focus at the selected distance whenever you
select [PreMF] for [n AF Mode].

n AF mode
Access via Live Controls
When the mode dial is rotated to n (movie), preset MF can also be accessed via
live controls.
Select [n AF Mode] > [PreMF] in the live controls and press the INFO button todisplay the preset focus distance. You can then press the shutter button halfway tofocus on a subject at the desired distance, or choose the focus distance manually
by rotating the focus ring.

3

INFO

PreMF n AF modeMenu Access
Choose a focus distance using [Preset MF distance] in
G Custom Menu I.
• [Preset MF distance] can be used to select the units for thefocus distance display; choose from [m] or [ft].
• To focus at the distance selected for [Preset MF distance],
select [Preset MF] for [n AF Mode] (P. 345).
MENU buttonview options

G tab
I tab
[Preset MF distance]
Press I on the arrow pad to
Use the FG buttons to choose a focus distancen 3-7 Focus

EN 359

Face Priority AF
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces of portrait subjects.
Exposure is weighted according to the value metered for the face.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- Live controls

I (face priority on)
J (face priority oﬀ)- The menus (P. 361)

The camera detects and focuses on faces.
Face priority AF oﬀ.

K (face and eye priority)(face and right eye

L priority)M(face and left eye
priority)

In n (movie) mode, these options function in the same way as

I (face priority on).


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [I Face Priority] in the LV super control
panel and press the OK button.

3
I face priority

2
3

Highlight an option using HI on the arrow pad.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

• Assigning N (AF-target selection) to the arrow pad or Fn button allows the arrow pad to be
used for AF-target selection. Press the FGHI buttons and use the rear dial to choose atarget. N (AF-target selection) is assigned to the arrow pad by default.

360 ENn 3-7 Focus


Access via Live Controls
Face priority AF options can also be accessed byhighlighting [I Face Priority] in the live controls andselecting an option using HI on the arrow pad.
• You can also select face priority by rotating the rear dial in the
AF-target selection display.
I face priority

Menu AccessUse [I Face Priority] in G Custom Menu L.
MENU button
G tab
L tab
[I Face Priority]
options
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

Press I on the arrow pad to view%
These settings can also be accessed using the following methods.
• Highlight [AF Area] in the LV super control panel and press the OK button. You can thenadjust settings by rotating the rear dial.
• Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been assigned
via [n Button Function]. You can then adjust settings by rotating the rear dial. At default
settings, [N] is assigned to the Fn button.

3

Using Face Priority AF

1

Point the camera at your subject.
• Faces detected by the camera are indicated by whiteborders.
• A white border is also displayed if a face is detectedduring manual focus. Exposure will be set according to
the value metered for the center of the face.

2

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Press the R (movie) button to start recording.

• The camera may fail to detect some subjects.
• The white border is not displayed during recording.
• The camera may be unable to detect the subject depending on the settings selected for the[Picture Mode] art ﬁlter options (ART1–ART16).
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 361

C-AF Tracking Sensitivity(n C-AF Sensitivity)

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] selected for [n AF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.
• Choose from three levels of tracking sensitivity.
• Select +1 for increased sensitivity. Choose this option for subjects that are moving toward oraway from the camera or changing speed unpredictably or for subjects that suddenly enter
the frame.
• Select −1 for reduced sensitivity. Choose this option to prevent the camera refocusing when
the subject is brieﬂy obscured by other objects or to prevent the camera focusing on the
background when you are unable to keep the AF target positioned over a quickly-moving
subject.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n AF/IS Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n C-AF Sensitivity] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

3• [n AF/IS Settings] options will be displayed.

5362 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-7 Focus

C-AF Focus Speed(n C-AF Speed)

Choose how quickly the camera responds to changes to the distance to subject
when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for focus mode. This can be used to adjust
the time the camera takes to refocus when, for example, you switch subjects.
• Choose from three focus speed levels.
• Refocusing is quicker at +1 and slower at −1. Choose −1 to refocus slowly when shifting to a
new subject.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n AF/IS Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n C-AF Speed] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

3
4Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• [n AF/IS Settings] options will be displayed.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 363

Zoom Frame/Focus Zoom AF
The camera can focus on the area indicated by a zoom frame. For more accurate
focus, you can zoom in on the zoom frame. The zoom frame can be moved while
recording is in progress.
Focus zoom can be accessed via buttons or touch controls. The former requiresthat you assign [a] (Magnify) to a button using [n Button Function].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- Touch controls- The a button (P. 365)
• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not aﬀected.

Access via Touch Controls
You can zoom in on a point selected by touching the display. You can also viewother areas of the frame using touch controls.

1

Tap the desired location in the frame.
• A zoom frame, slider, and a icon will be displayed.
• The camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.
• The slider and a can be redisplayed at any time bytapping the display again.
• Tap anywhere in the display to move the zoom frame tothe selected location.
• Touch the slider and slide it up or down to adjust the sizeof the zoom frame.

3

Slider1

123minM-IS 1

5
C-AF

Off

3x

n

250 F5.6

Zoom framea icon2

Tap the a icon in the display.
• The camera will zoom in on the zoom frame.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.

1

123min5x364 ENn 3-7 Focus

3

Slide a ﬁnger over the display to zoom in or out.
• Use the multi selector or arrow pad (FGHI) to scroll
the display.
• When [M] (manual) is selected for [n Mode], you canpress the INFO button during zoom to choose apertureor shutter speed.
• Press the OK button or tap the Z icon to end focus
zoom.

1

123min250 F5.6

Exposure adjustment
display when [M] isselected for [n Mode]

4Start recording to restore the previous display.
• To hide the zoom frame, press the OK button.

Button AccessTo access focus zoom using a button, assign a (magnify) to a control. The [a](magnify) option can be accessed via [n Button Function].
Assigning a (Magnify) to a Control
Assign [a] (magnify) to a control. To make the assignment via the LV super control
panel:

1

3

Highlight [n Button Function] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• [n Button Function] options will be displayed.

n button function

2

Using FG on the arrow pad, highlight the control towhich [a] (magnify) will be assigned and then press
I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Magnify] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

n 3-7 Focus

EN 365

4

Press the OK button again.
• The menu will clear from the display.

5

Press the button to which [a] is assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.
• The frame is displayed in the same position as the target
most recently used for autofocus.
• Use the multi selector or arrow pad to position the frame.
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector or press
and hold the OK button.

6

To choose the size of the zoom frame, press the
INFO button.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

Off
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031

123min• Use the FG buttons or the front or rear dial to choose
the size of the zoom frame.
• Press the OK button to proceed.
5x

7Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to ﬁll thedisplay.
• Use the multi selector to scroll the display.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• When [M] (manual) is selected for [n Mode], you canpress the INFO button and adjust aperture or shutter
speed.
• Press the OK button to restore the previous display.

3

1

123min5x
1

123min250 F5.6

Exposure adjustment
display when [M] isselected for [n Mode]

8Start recording to exit zoom.


Menu Access
The menus can be used to choose the roles played by camera controls. Use[n Button Function] in the n video menu.
MENU buttonn tab[n Button/Dial/Lever][n Button Function]
ChoosePress I on the arrow pad to view options
Use the FG buttons to selecta button[Magnify]

366 ENn 3-7 Focus

3-8

Metering and Exposure

The camera meters subject brightness and adjusts exposure accordingly. The
camera can be conﬁgured to raise ISO sensitivity automatically when lighting ispoor. You can also reduce ﬂicker when shooting under artiﬁcial light.
Exposure for movie mode is metered using p (digital ESP) metering. Digital ESP
metering is suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The camera meters
324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal exposure taking into consideration
the nature of the scene. The camera can also be conﬁgured to detect and set
exposure for faces.

3
Adjusting Exposure(Exposure Compensation)

The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit yourartistic intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values tomake them darker. Exposure can be adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- Touch controls (P. 368)
- The F button (P. 368)
- The dials (P. 368)
• Exposure compensation is available when [P], [A], or [S] is selected for [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode). To enable exposure compensation when [M] is selected for [n Mode],
select [On] for [b ISO-Auto] (P. 372) and choose [AUTO] for [n ISO].
• During recording, exposure compensation can be adjusted using the front or rear dial or
touch controls.

Negative value

0

Positive value

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

EN 367


Access via the F Button
Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
Alternatively, you can press the F button and then use
the HI buttons on the arrow pad.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 +1.3

1:02:03

Exposure Exposurecompensation bar• To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the OK button.
%• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. Use [n Button/Dial/Lever] >[n Button Function] (P. 417) in the n video menu.

Access via the Dials
When [P], [A], or [S] is selected for [n Mode], exposure compensation can be
adjusted using the front dial. To use the front or rear dial in mode [M], select [F] for[n Dial Function] (P. 424).

3

Access via Touch Controls (Silent Controls)
Exposure compensation can be adjusted using touch controls. g “Touch Controls(Silent Controls)” (P. 306)
Tap the silent control panel to view silent controls
Use yzwx to choose a setting

Tap [F]

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Silent control tab

368 ENn 3-8 Metering and ExposureAdjusting ISO Sensitivity(n ISO)

Adjust ISO sensitivity when [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
Higher values let you photograph darker scenes but also increase image “noise”(mottling). Select [AUTO] to let the camera adjust sensitivity according to lighting
conditions. [AUTO] is the only option available when [P], [A], or [S] is selected for[n Mode].
• ISO sensitivity can be adjusted while recording is in progress. Use the front or rear dial or
touch controls.
• Manual ISO sensitivity adjustment is available only when [M] is selected for [n Mode].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The ISO button (P. 370)
- The LV super control panel (P. 371)
- Touch controls (P. 371)
- Live controls (P. 371)

AUTO

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions. The
camera adjusts sensitivity in the range ISO 200–6400. In [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode) [M] (manual), this option is available when [On] is selected for[b ISO-Auto] (P. 372).

200–6400(manual)Choose a value for [n ISO]. ISO 200 oﬀers a good balance between noise anddynamic range. This option is available when [M] is selected for [n Mode].

• The range of sensitivities available when [AUTO] is selected varies with the options chosen
for [nK] and [Picture Mode].
• The following restrictions apply when [M] is selected for [n Mode]:[Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] selected for art ﬁlter:- The upper limit for [AUTO] is ISO 1600.
[l OM-Log400] selected for picture mode:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 400–3200.
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 50p or 60p, [AUTO] is restricted to sensitivities of
ISO 400–6400.
- The lowest value that can be selected manually is ISO 200.
Other picture modes:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 200–3200.

3%• You can choose the maximum and standard ISO sensitivity values available to auto ISO
sensitivity control when [AUTO] is selected and [M] is chosen for [n Mode]. g [b ISOAuto Set] (P. 372)

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

EN 369
Access via the ISO Button
ISO sensitivity for movie recording can only be adjusted when [M] is selected for[n Mode]. [AUTO] is available only when [On] is selected for [b ISO-Auto] in then video menu (P. 372).

1

Press the ISO button.

ISO button• [n ISO] options will be displayed.

[n ISO] options

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.

3• You can also rotate the dials while pressing the ISO
button.

%• ISO sensitivity can be assigned to other controls. Use [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button
Function] (P. 417) in the n video menu.

370 ENn 3-8 Metering and ExposureAccess via Touch Controls (Silent Controls)
When [M] is selected for [n Mode], ISO sensitivity can be adjusted using touch
controls. g “Touch Controls (Silent Controls)” (P. 306)
Tap the silent control panel to view silent controls
Use yzwx to choose a setting

Tap [ISO]

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO
200

M
4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

Silent control tab
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [n ISO] in the LV super control panel.

n ISO sensitivity

2
3

3Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

Access via Live Controls
Highlight [n ISO] in the live controls and use HI on
the arrow pad to choose an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 312).

n ISO sensitivity

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

EN 371

Auto ISO Sensitivity Control(b ISO-Auto Set)

[AUTO] can be selected for [n ISO] in [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) [M](manual). This allows the camera to respond to changes in brightness without you
having to adjust aperture or shutter speed. Exposure compensation can also be
used.
b ISO-Auto[AUTO] is available for [n ISO] when [M] is selected for [n Mode]. Auto ISO
sensitivity control settings can be adjusted using [Upper Limit / Default].

Upper Limit /Default

Choose the maximum and standard ISO sensitivity values available to auto
ISO sensitivity control when [AUTO] is selected for [n ISO] in [n Mode](movie exposure mode) [M].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Speciﬁcation Settings] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3 3Highlight [b ISO-Auto Set] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.
[Upper Limit / Default]: Highlight items using the HI
buttons and use the FG buttons
to change. Press the OK button to
return to the [b ISO-Auto Set]
display. The options available varywith the picture mode (P. 388).
Highlight [On] or [Oﬀ] using the FG[b ISO-Auto]:
buttons.

5372 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

Locking Exposure(AE Lock)

Lock exposure at the metered value. Use this option when you want to set focus
and exposure separately.
Exposure lock is performed using a button. Exposure lock ([AEL/AFL]) must
therefore be assigned to a button using [n Button Function] (P. 417). At default
settings, it is assigned to the AEL/AFL button.

1

Compose the shot to meter the subject for which you
want to set exposure and press the AEL/AFL button
once.

AEL/AFL button• Press the AEL/AFL button once to lock exposure; anu icon will appear in the display.

1

L
R

123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

AEL

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:033

u icon2

To end exposure lock, press the AEL/AFL button again.
• The u icon will clear from the display.

• Operating the mode dial or the MENU or OK buttons also ends exposure lock.

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

EN 373

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(n Flicker Scan)
Banding may occur in movies ﬁlmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This option is in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

1
2
3

Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (P. 332).

4

Highlight [n Flicker Scan] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

5

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

1

123min• A P icon is displayed when ﬂicker scan is enabled.

n

250.0

Flicker Scan

P icon374 ENn 3-8 Metering and Exposure

7

Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the
FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is nolonger visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P icon will no longer be displayed. You can adjust
aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the ﬂicker
scan display.

8

1

123minn

250.0

Flicker Scan

Shutter speed

Begin ﬁlming when settings are complete.

• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the ﬂicker
scan display. To view these items, ﬁrst press the INFO button to exit the ﬂicker scan display.
%• [n Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable
ﬂicker scan. g n video menu > [n Button Function] (P. 417)

3

n 3-8 Metering and Exposure

EN 375

3-9

Image Stabilization, Color,
and Quality

The features described in this section reduce blur and noise compensate for thecolor of the light source. This section also covers picture mode options that can beused to control exactly how your pictures turn out.

3
Reducing Camera Blur(n Image Stabilizer)

Reduce blur caused by the camera shake that commonly occurs, for example,
when the subject is poorly lit or in photos taken at high zoom ratios. You will need toprovide the lens focal length when using image stabilization with lenses that are notpart of the Four Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 377)
- The menus (P. 377)

- Live controls (P. 377)

M-IS OFF (oﬀ)

Image stabilization disabled.

M-IS1 (omni-directional)

Electronic image stabilization combined with VCM-controlled
image sensor movement.

M-IS2 (omni-directional)

VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.

• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion. Use a tripodin these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in eﬀect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.

376 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality
Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [n Image Stabilizer] in the LV supercontrol panel.

n image stabilizer

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose an option using [n AF/IS Settings] > [n Image
Stabilizer] in the n video menu.

3
MENU buttonn tab[n AF/IS Settings]
buttons to choose an option[n Image Stabilizer]

Use the FG
Access via Live Controls
Highlight [n Image Stabilizer] in the live controls andselect an option using HI on the arrow pad.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 312).

n image stabilizer$ Non-Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds Lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will needto specify the lens focal length. Press I on the arrow pad in the menu where you select an
option, then use the FGHI buttons to highlight a value and press the OK button. If thelens information saved with [Lens Info Settings] (P. 550) is used, the saved focal length will beapplied.
• Choose from values of from 0.1 mm to 1000.0 mm.
• Use the value printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 91) > [Reset](basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 377

Image Stabilization Options
Choose the amount of image stabilization applied.
+1

Choose for static hand-held shots.

±0

Recommended in most situations.

−1

Choose for hand-held panning, tilting, or tracking shots.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n AF/IS Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n IS Level] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3378 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality(n IS Level)

High ISO Noise Reduction Options(n Noise Filter)
Reduce image artifacts (“noise”) in footage ﬁlmed at high ISO sensitivities. Thiscan help reduce “graininess” in footage ﬁlmed under low light. You can choose theamount of noise reduction performed.
Oﬀ

Noise reduction disabled.

Low/Standard/High

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Speciﬁcation Settings] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Noise Filter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

3
4Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 379Adjusting Hue(n WB)White balance makes white objects look white. Although [AUTO] works well in mostsituations, you can choose an option suited to the light source if [AUTO] fails to
make white objects appear white or if instead you wish to deliberately lend white
objects a color cast.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The WB button (P. 381)
- The LV super control panel (P. 382)
Color
temperature

Choose for

AUTO

—

Most normal scenes (scenes containing objects
that are white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in mostsituations.
• You can opt to preserve the colors seen
under incandescent lighting (P. 383).

White balance mode

Auto whitebalance3- The menus (P. 382)
- Live controls (P. 382)

55300 K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, ﬁreworks

N

7500 K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shadeO

6000 K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies

1

3000 K

Subjects under incandescent lighting>

4000 KU—

n5500 K

Light sources with the same color temperature
as ﬂash lighting

One touchwhite balance

P/Q/
W/X

Value selected
for one-touch
white balance

Situations in which you want to set whitebalance for a speciﬁc subject• Color temperature is set to a value meteredfrom a white object under the lighting
what will be used in the ﬁnal photograph(P. 386).

Custom whitebalance

CWB

2000 K –14000 K

Preset whitebalance

380 EN

Subjects under ﬂuorescent lighting
Underwater photography

Situations in which you can identify theappropriate color temperature• Choose a color temperature.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality
Access via the WB Button

1

Press the WB button.

WB button• [n WB] options will be displayed.

[n WB] options

2

3

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option.
• Pressing the INFO button when [AUTO] is highlighted
displays [nW Keep Warm Color] options (P. 383).
• One-touch white balance (P. 386) and custom whitebalance options can be viewed by pressing the INFO
button.
• You can also rotate the front or rear dial while pressing
the WB button.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit.

%• At default settings, white balance is assigned to the WB button. [n WB] can however be
assigned to other controls if desired. Use [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button Function](P. 417) in the n video menu.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 381
Access via the LV Super Control PanelWhite balance can be selected using the LV super control panel.
OK button[n WB]

Use the front dial to choose an option• To access [nW Keep Warm Color] options, press the INFO button after highlighting[AUTO] in the [n WB] menu and pressing the OK button (P. 383).
• To choose a color temperature or measure a new value for white balance when one-touch(P. 386) or custom white balance is selected, press the INFO button after pressing the OK
button and displaying the [n WB] menu.
• When custom white balance ([CWB]) is selected, you canhighlight the color temperature in the LV super control panel
and choose a value by rotating the front dial.

Color temperatureMenu Access
Adjust white balance using [n Speciﬁcation Settings] >[n WB] in the n video menu.

3
MENU buttonn tab
to choose an option[n Speciﬁcation Settings][n WB]

Use the FG buttons

Access via Live Controls
Highlight [n WB] in the live controls and use HI on thearrow pad to choose an option.
• For information on displaying live controls, see “Using Live
Controls” (P. 312).

n WB

382 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Preserving Warm Colors(nW Keep Warm Color)
If desired, auto white balance can be adjusted to preserve the warm colors seen
under incandescent lighting. White balance would normally be adjusted to makewhite colors appear white, but this feature can be used to preserve the ambiancecreated by incandescent lighting.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus- The WB button- Live controls• To access this option via the WB button, the LV super live control panel, or live controls,
select [WB Auto] and press the INFO button.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [n WB] in the LV super control panel andpress the OK button.

n white balance mode2

3

Highlight [WB Auto] and press the INFO button.
• [nW Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [On] using HI on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.


Access via the WB Button
Select [WB Auto]

INFO button

Select [On]Menu Access
MENU
Color]n (video) menu[On][n Speciﬁcation Settings]

Select [nW Keep Warm
Access via Live Controls
Select [WB Auto]

INFO button

Select [On]n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 383

White Balance Compensation(n White Balance Compensation)
Fine-tune white balance. Separate values can be selected for each white balance
option. Adjust settings as described below.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menusA

A (amber–blue) axisG

G (green–magenta) axis Positive values add a green cast, negative values a magenta cast.

Positive values add a red cast, negative values a blue cast.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel1

3 2

Highlight [n WB] in the LV super control panel andchoose a white balance option.

n WB

Highlight [A±0] or [G±0] using the arrow pad(FGHI) and highlight the desired value using thefront dial.
• To view a white balance compensation display, press
the OK button. You can adjust white balance while
previewing the results in the display. Use the front dial
to select an axis (A or G) and the rear dial to choose avalue.

3

White balance ﬁne-tuning

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

%• White balance ﬁne-tuning can be applied simultaneously to all white balance options.
g [n All x] (P. 385)

Menu Access
MENU buttonn (video) tab[n Speciﬁcation Settings][n WB]
Highlight awhite balance option and press I on the arrow pad
Highlight A±0 or G±0 using the HI
buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a value (when [CWB] is selected, press the I
button one more time and choose a value using the FGHI buttons)

384 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Fine-Tuning White Balance(n All x)

Fine-tune white balance across the board. This item ﬁne-tunes all modes by thesame amount.
All SetFine-tune white balance for all modes. White balance can be ﬁne-tuned on the A(amber–blue) and G (green–magenta) axes.

All Reset Reset ﬁne-tuning for all modes to default values.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Speciﬁcation Settings] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n All x] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

3
4Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.
• If you selected [All Set] highlight A or G using the HI
buttons, use the FG buttons to choose a value, andthen press the OK button.
• If you selected [All Reset], highlight [Yes] or [No] using
the FG buttons and press the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 385

Metering White Balance(One-Touch White Balance P/Q/W/X)
Set white balance to a value measured under the lighting that will be used in theﬁnal photograph. Use this option to ﬁne-tune white balance when you ﬁnd it hard to
obtain the desired results with white balance compensation or preset white balance
options such as 5 (sunlight) or O (overcast). The camera stores the meteredvalue for quick recall as required.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The WB button- The LV super control panel (P. 387)
P/Q/W/X- Live controls (P. 387)
- The menus (P. 387)

Measure and store up to four values for one-touch white balance.

Access via the WB Button

1

Press the WB button.

3
WB button• [n WB] options will be displayed.

[n WB] options

2

Rotate the front or rear dial to highlight an option
from P to X.

3

Frame a sheet of uncolored (white or gray) paper inthe center of the display and press the INFO button.
• Be sure the subject is free of shadows.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed.

386 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

4

Highlight [Yes] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.
• The camera will store the setting as the value for theselected one-touch white balance option and exit to theshooting display.
• To exit without measuring white balance, highlight [No]and press the OK button. Repeat the process from
Step 3.

• You can also choose a setting by holding the WB button and rotating the rear dial. Release
the button to select the setting and return to the shooting display.
• One-touch white balance can be assigned to a control. To do so, use [n Button/Dial/
Lever] > [n Button Function] (P. 417).

Access via the LV Super Control Panel
One-touch white balance can be selected using the LV super control panel.
[n WB]
OK button
white balance

Highlight P to X using the front dial

INFO button

Meter


Access via Live Controls
One-touch white balance can be metered using live
controls.

3

OK button[n WB]
Press HI on the arrow pad andselect any of P through X

nWB• To view the white balance metering display and measure a new value for the currentlyselected one-touch white balance option, press the INFO button.

Menu Access
The menus can be used only to recall previously-metered values for one-touch
white balance.
MENU buttonn tab[n Speciﬁcation Settings]
P to X using FG on the arrow pad[n WB]

Select an option fromn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 387

Image Enhancement(Picture Mode)

Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, andother properties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or
artistic intent. You can also opt to make individual adjustments to parameters suchas contrast and sharpness. Art ﬁlters similarly give you the option of adding frame
eﬀects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored separately foreach picture mode.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Standard Picture Modes

A i-Enhance
B Vivid
C Natural
D MutedE Portrait

3

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results according to
the type of subject (P. 402).
Choose for vivid colors.
Choose for natural colors.
Choose for pictures that will later be retouched.
Enhance skin tones.

J Monochrome

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color ﬁlter eﬀects andchoose a tint (P. 400).

K CustomChanges to selected picture modes can be saved for later recall as
custom picture modes.

v e-Portrait
F Underwaterc Color Creator

Enhance skin tones.
Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (P. 405).

Art Filters

e Pop Artf Soft Focus

Enhance the beauty of colors.

Pale&Lightg ColorDiﬀuse light throughout the image, increasing exposure slightly andsetting your subject adrift in a soft glow.

h Light Tone
i Grainy Film

Soften highlights and shadows for a reﬁned, serene eﬀect.

Use soft tones for an airy, dreamlike eﬀect.

Choose for the forceful, bold eﬀect typical of black-and-white ﬁlm.

j Pin Hole

Reduce peripheral illumination for the eﬀect of a photo taken with an old
toy camera.

k Diorama

Increase saturation and contrast and blur out-of-focus areas to makethe picture look like a photo of a miniature.

Cross

l Process388 EN

Choose for an edgy, surrealistic eﬀect. Choose Cross Process 2 for acolor balance that exaggerates magenta.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

m Gentle Sepia

Choose for a peaceful, reﬁned eﬀect that softens the image overall,creating serene pictures with clearly-deﬁned shadows.

n Dramatic Tone Selectively enhance contrast to further diﬀerentiate light from dark.
Enhance edges for a photo-illustration eﬀect.
o Key Linep Watercolor

Dramatically brighten shadows to give the eﬀect of a scene painted inbright pastel colors on white canvas, and add soft outlines for warm,
bright results.

q Vintage

Mimic the eﬀects of a discolored and faded vintage print for a nostalgic,
slice-of-life eﬀect.

r Partial Color

Enhance the impression created by your subject by recording only
selected hues in color while the rest of the picture is in black-and-white.

v Bypass

The “bleach bypass” eﬀect, which you may recognize from motion
pictures and the like, can be used to great eﬀect in shots ofstreetscapes or metal objects.

9 Instant Film

A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typical of ﬁlm.

Bleach• Depending on the scene, the eﬀects of some settings may not be visible, while in othercases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
• Depending on the settings selected, the eﬀects may not be visible in live view.
%• You can choose the picture modes displayed using [Picture Mode Settings] in G Custom
Menu P (P. 520).
• You can also select a movie-only picture mode designed for movies that will be color-gradedor otherwise processed during post-production. g [n Picture Mode] (P. 393)

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

3

EN 389

Choosing a Picture Mode
This setting can be accessed via:
• The LV super control panel• Live controls• The menus (P. 391)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2Highlight an option using the front dial.

Picture mode

• Depending on the option selected, picture modeparameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 396 – 402).

3

Changes depending on
mode selected

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.

Access via Live Controls
Picture mode can be accessed via live controls.

1

123minM-IS 1

WB
AUTO

o
C-AF

P

Natural
n

4K

30p

J

K

Picture mode
OK button[Picture Mode]
Press HI on the arrow pad to view options• When [Color Creator] (P. 405) or the [Partial Color] art ﬁlter (P. 407) is selected, you canpress the INFO button and adjust saturation and hue using the dials.

390 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality
Menu AccessUse [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W tab[Picture Mode]
Use FG on the arrow pad to selectthe I button to view picture mode parameters or ﬁlter eﬀects

Press• You can adjust the individual parameters for each picture mode. You can also adjust
parameters in the LV super control panel. Changes to parameters in the LV super control
panel also apply to the menus.
Picture mode

Available parameters

A

i-Enhance[Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Gradation]/[Eﬀect]

B

Vivid

C

Natural

D

Muted

E

Portrait

J

Monochrome

K

Customv

e-PortraitcColor Creator

F

Underwater/ 2

Pop Artf

Soft Focus

1/ 2

Pale&Light ColorhLight Tone

/ 2

Grainy Film

1

1

1

/ 2 / 3 Pin Hole1

/ 2

Diorama1/ 2

Cross Processm

Gentle Sepia

1

/

2

Dramatic Tone

1

/

2

Key Line

1

/

2

/

2

/

3

Vintage

1

/

2

/

3

Partial Color

/

9

2

[Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Color Filter]/[Monochrome
Color]/[Gradation]—

3[Add Eﬀects]
The options available vary with the ﬁlter selected.
[Soft Focus Eﬀect]/[Pin Hole Eﬀect]/[White Edge Eﬀect]/[Frame Eﬀect]/[Star Light Eﬀect]*/[Blur Eﬀect: Top andBottom]/[Blur Eﬀect: Left and Right]/[Shade Eﬀect: Top
and Bottom]/[Shade Eﬀect: Left and Right]/[Color Filter]/[Monochrome Color]* Has no eﬀect in n (movie) mode.

Watercolor

1

1[Sharpness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Gradation]

Bleach Bypass
Instant Film

• Select K (custom) to access the parameters for saved picture modes.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 391Creating Custom Picture Modes(K Custom Picture Mode)

You can select one of the following picture modes, edit its parameters as desired,and save it as a custom picture mode.
Choose from [i-Enhance], [Vivid], [Natural], [Muted], [Portrait], and [Monochrome].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Custom] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.
• The camera will display a list of picture modes.

3

4

Adjust settings using the FG buttons.
• Choose a [Picture Mode] mode option and adjust[Sharpness], [Contrast], [Saturation], [Gradation], [Eﬀect],[Color Filter], and [Monochrome Color] parameters.
• Highlight parameters using the FG buttons andpress the I button to view settings. After adjusting
settings, press the OK button repeatedly to return to theparameter list.

5392 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Highlight&Shadow Control(n Picture Mode)
Choose a picture mode exclusively for movie recording. Priority is given to dynamic
range for a tone curve suitable for color grading and other post-processing
operations. These options are available for [Picture Mode] when [On] is selected for[n Picture Mode].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The menus- The LV super control panel (P. 394)

- Live controls (P. 394)

k FlatMovies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color grading.

l OM-Log400

Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom duringcolor grading.

• [Sharpness], [Contrast], [Saturation], and [Gradation] options are unavailable.
• [n ISO] is restricted to values of ISO 400 or above.

Menu AccessTo use these picture mode options, enable [n Picture Mode], which changes theoptions available in the [Picture Mode] menu.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Speciﬁcation Settings] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Picture Mode] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

3

EN 393

4Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6

Select [k Flat] or [l OM-Log400] for [PictureMode] in W Shooting Menu 1.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Movie picture mode options are available in the LV super control panel when [On] isselected for [n Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2

Select an option using the front dial.

Picture mode3
• Choose [k Flat] or [l OM-Log400].


Access via Live Controls
Picture mode can be selected using live controls.

Picture mode
OK button[Picture Mode]

Press HI on the arrow pad to choose an option%• LUT ﬁles are available for editing movies recorded using movie-only picture modes. Visit the
OLYMPUS website for details.

394 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Preview Options for Movie Picture Modes(a View Assist)
The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when a movie-only picture mode
option ([k Flat] or [l OM-Log400]) is selected.
On

Adjust the picture for ease of viewing. The indicators in the display may change color.

Oﬀ

Do not adjust the picture for ease of viewing.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [a View Assist] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

3
4Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• This option applies only to the display, not to the actual movie ﬁles.
• This option does not apply when movies recorded using [k Flat] or [l OM-Log400] areplayed back on the camera. It also does not apply when the movies are viewed on a TV.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 395

Adjusting Sharpness(Sharpness)

Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

Hi (+)

Increase sharpness. Outlines are more sharply deﬁned.

Lo (−)

Lower sharpness. Outlines are less sharply deﬁned.

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

3

1

Highlight [Sharpness] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Sharpness

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust sharpness using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture mode
Highlight [Sharpness] using the FG
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

396 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Adjusting Contrast(Contrast)

Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the diﬀerence between
bright and dark areas for a harder, more well-deﬁned picture. Settings are stored
separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

Hi (+)

Increase contrast. Pictures are harder and more well-deﬁned.

Lo (−)

Lower contrast. Pictures are softer.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Contrast] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Contrast

3

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust contrast using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture modeusing FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Contrast] using the FG
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 397

Adjusting Vividness(Saturation)

Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings
are stored separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
Hi (+)

Increase saturation. Colors are more vivid.

Lo (−)

Lower saturation. Colors are softer.

- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel

3

1

Highlight [Saturation] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Saturation

Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust saturation using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight an item using FG
Highlight [Saturation] using the FG buttons andon the arrow pad and press the I buttonpress the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

398 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Adjusting Shading(Gradation)

Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by,for example, brightening the entire picture. You can also heighten dark tones or lighttones as appropriate to the distribution of tones in the original image. Settings are
stored separately for each picture mode.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menusz Auto(Shadow Adj)

Brightness is adjusted separately for every detail. A good choice forhigh-contrast images where shadows or highlights might otherwise be
lost.

z Normal(Gradation Normal)

Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Gradation] in the LV super control panel.

Gradation3
2
3

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Adjust shading using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight a picture modeusing FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Gradation] using the FG
Use the FG buttons to choose an option
buttons and press the I button

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 399Color Filters for Black-and-White Photography(Color Filter)
Filter eﬀects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 388). You can brighten subjects or enhance contrast according to the originalcolor of the subject. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more contrast thanorange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

N:NoneNo ﬁlter eﬀect.

Ye:Yellow

White clouds stand out clearly against natural-looking skies.

Or:Orange

Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.

R:Red

Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.

G:GreenAdds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green ﬁlter also emphasizes the reds
in lipstick.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
This option is available when [Monochrome] is selected for [Picture Mode].

3 1

2
3

Highlight [Color Filter] in the LV super control panel.

Color ﬁlter

Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose a ﬁlter using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [Monochrome]
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Color Filter] using the FG
buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

400 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Monochrome Tints(Monochrome Color)

Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 388).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus

N:NormalShoot in black and white.

S:Sepia

Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.

B:BlueShoot in blue-tinted monochrome.

P:Purple

Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.

G:GreenShoot in green-tinted monochrome.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
This option is available when [Monochrome] is selected for [Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Monochrome Color] in the LV supercontrol panel.

Monochrome color

323Highlight an option using the front dial.
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose a tint using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [Monochrome]
using FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Highlight [Monochrome Color] using
the FG buttons and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 401

Adjusting i-Enhance Eﬀects(Eﬀect)Choose the strength of the eﬀect for [i-Enhance].
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel
3Low (Eﬀect: Low)

Eﬀect reduced.

3Standard(Eﬀect: Standard)Standard eﬀect.

3High (Eﬀect: High)Eﬀect heightened.

- The menusAccess via the LV Super Control Panel
This option is available when [i-Enhance] is selected for [Picture Mode].

1

Highlight [Eﬀect] in the LV super control panel.

2
3Highlight an option using the front dial.

Eﬀect

3
Press the shutter button halfway to select thehighlighted option and exit the LV super control
panel.


Menu Access
Choose the strength of the eﬀect using [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab[Picture Mode]
Highlight [i-Enhance] using
Highlight [Eﬀect] using the FG buttons
FG on the arrow pad and press the I button
Use the FG buttons to choose an option
and press the I button

402 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Choosing a Tone Curve(Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain
greater control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone.
You can selectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.

Adjusting shadows

Adjusting mid-tones

Adjusting highlights(The illustrations above show the display when the highlight and shadow control isaccessed via a button and the LV super control panel.)• This setting can be accessed via:
- The F button- The LV super control panel (P. 404)

Access via the F Button

1

3

Press the F button.
• Exposure compensation will be highlighted in the display.

F button2

Press the INFO button.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF• A tone curve will be displayed.
• Press the INFO button to cycle from shadows to midtones to highlights and back to exposure compensation
again.

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

-3

n

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03(Highlight andshadow control)3

Select the desired setting using HI on the arrowpad.
• Choose from values between −7 and +7.
• Press and hold the OK button to reset the curve.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 403

4

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

%• Exposure compensation, and with it highlight and shadow control, can be assigned tocontrols other than the F button. Use [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button Function](P. 417) in the n video menu.
• Assigning [Multi Function] to the control gives you direct access to [Highlight&Shadow
Control]. g “Multi-Function Button Options (Multi Function)” (P. 470)


Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Highlight&Shadow Control] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• A tone curve will be displayed.

Highlight&Shadow Control

2

3

Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.
• The tone range changes each time the button is pressed.

Selected tone range

3

Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the OK button to restore the default
curve.

4

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

404 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

Hue and Saturation(Color Creator)

The camera permits intuitive adjustments to color saturation and hue. Choose from30 hues and 8 levels of saturation. The results can be previewed in the display.
[Color Creator] is a picture mode option. Settings can be accessed directly using[Multi Function]. Assign [Multi Function] to a button using [n Button/Dial/Lever] >[n Button Function] (P. 417) in the n video menu.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel- The menus (P. 406)

- Live controls (P. 406)

Access via the LV Super Control Panel

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2Highlight [Color Creator] using the front dial.

Picture mode3

• A [c Color/Vivid] option will be displayed in the LV supercontrol panel.

c Color/Vivid

3

Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the OK button.

4

Adjust saturation and hue.

1

123min• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• Press and hold the OK button to restore default settings.

Color

ViVid±0Reset

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 405

5

Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

Menu Access
The color creator can also be accessed via the menus. Saturation and hue,
however, cannot be adjusted via the menus. The menus can be used to recall savedvalues only.
MENU button
W (Shooting Menu 1) tab
FG on the arrow pad to choose options[Picture Mode][Color Creator]

Press


Access via Live Controls
The color creator can be accessed using live controls.

Picture Mode

3

[Picture Mode]
Press I on the arrow pad to highlight [Color Creator]
OK button
Press the INFO button and adjust saturation and hue

406 ENn 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

“Leave Color” Eﬀects(Partial Color)

Shoot in black-and-white while capturing objects of a selected hue in color. For
example, you can shoot in black-and-white while leaving only reds in color. The
results can be previewed in the display.
[Partial Color] is an art ﬁlter option. Settings can be adjusted when it is selected for
picture mode. Choose from thee “leave color” ﬁlters (1 through 3).

1

Highlight [Picture Mode] in the LV super control
panel.

2Highlight [ART141], [ART142], or [ART143] using
the front dial.

Picture mode

• A [R Color] and [Eﬀect] options will be displayed in the
LV super control panel.

3
Eﬀect

R Color3

Highlight [R Color] using FG on the arrow padand press the OK button.

1

123min

Color
ISO
Auto

• A color ring will be displayed.

WB
Auto

#

ART141
Color Effect Off# ± 0.0

S-IS Auto
M-IS

o
YF
YF

n

4
5

A±0
G±0
C-AF
p

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

Select a color using the dials.
Press the OK button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

n 3-9 Image Stabilization, Color, and Quality

EN 407

3-10 Effects
The camera oﬀers simple eﬀects that can be added during ﬁlming. Instead of
waiting to edit the movie on a computer or other device, you can view the eﬀects
in real time while recording is in progress. Some eﬀects can be saved to display
settings or direct buttons.

Power Zoom(n Elec. Zoom Speed)

Choose the zoom speed for power zoom lenses. This can be used for slow zooms
on your subject and other eﬀects. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and [High].

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Elec. Zoom Speed] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3408 ENn 3-10 Eﬀects

Adjusting Zoom During Filming(Movie H)

You can zoom in on a selected area of the frame for movie recording without usinglens controls. Use for instant close-ups or cuts to wider angle. Buttons or touch
controls can be used to choose the zoom location and cut to close ups or wide
angles during ﬁlming.
[Movie H] is a [n Button Function] option. It turns on or oﬀ with a button and somust be assigned to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 417).
• This feature is not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [nK] > [Movie Resolution].
• This feature cannot be used to ﬁlm high-speed movies.
• [Movie H] cannot be combined with [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 411).


Button Access

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3
3Highlight [n Button Function] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Using the FG buttons, highlight the control you
want to use for digital zoom and press the I button.

5

Highlight [Movie H] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-10 Eﬀects

EN 409
Using [Movie H]

1

Press the button to which [H] is assigned.
• A frame will appear in the center of the display.

1

L

R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

2

250 F5.6 0.0

Position the frame as desired.
• Position the frame using touch controls, the multiselector, or the arrow pad (FGHI).
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector once orpress and hold the OK button.
Multi selector

3

Press the button to which [H] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to ﬁll thedisplay.
• To return to the zoom frame, press the button to which[H] is assigned a third time.

3 4

To end zoom, press the OK button once, or press
and hold the button to which [H] is assigned.

410 ENn 3-10 Eﬀects

1:02:03

Filming at a Higher Zoom Ratio(Digital Tele-converter)
This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as thesize option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to ﬁll the display.
The zoom ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’maximum focal length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch
lenses or ﬁnd it diﬃcult to get any closer to your subject.
• [Digital Tele-converter] cannot be combined with [Movie H] (P. 409).
• The digital teleconverter cannot be turned on or oﬀ while movie recording is in progress.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

• When [On] is selected, the display in the monitor iszoomed in by 2× and H appears in the display. Movies
are recorded at this zoom ratio.

3

Digital teleconverter
1

LR
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

4

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

%• [Digital Tele-converter] can be assigned to a camera control using [n Button/Dial/Lever] >[n Button Function] (P. 417) in the n video menu, allowing you to turn it on or oﬀ and thetouch of a button.

n 3-10 Eﬀects

EN 411

3-11 Audio Recording
The camera is equipped with a microphone. The camera by itself is equal to thetask of recording movies with sound. You can adjust the recording level and use
features such as wind noise reduction. There are also microphone and headphone
options for use that can be employed for high-level cinematography using an
external recorder.
If desired, the optional Olympus IC recorder (LS-100) can be used in tandem withthe camera to record sound.

3

412 ENn 3-11 Audio Recording

Sound Recording Options(Movie K)

Adjust settings for recording sound during ﬁlming. You can also access settings foruse when an external microphone or recorder is connected.
Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for the built-in
and external microphones.
Recording Volume[Built-In K]: Adjust the sensitivity of the built-in microphone.
[MIC K]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connected tothe microphone jack.

K Volume Limiter

Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record sound.
Use this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds above acertain volume.

Wind Noise
Reduction

Reduce wind noise during audio recording.
Choose an audio recording format.

Recording Rate

[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.
Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and other devices
that draw power from the camera.

K Plug-in Power[Oﬀ]: For devices that do not require power from the camera (generalpurpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).

3

Adjust settings for use with external IC recorders. Record a slate toneor choose whether camera controls can be used to start and stop
recording when using an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder.
PCM Recorder K
Link[Camera Rec. Volume]: Choose [Operative] to record sound at thelevel selected with the camera, [Inoperative]
to record sound at the level selected with therecorder.
[Slate Tone]:
Enable or disable slate tone recording.
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Choose whether audio recording begins andends at the same time as movie recording.

Headphone Volume Adjust the volume of audio output to the headphones.
• Sounds made by the lens or camera controls may be recorded during ﬁlming. For reduced
noise, select [S-AF], [MF], or [PreMF] for [n AF Mode] (P. 345) and use camera controls
as little as possible.
• Sound is not recorded:with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when k (diorama) is selected for
picture mode.
• O is displayed when [Oﬀ] is selected.
• Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [Recording Rate].

n 3-11 Audio Recording

EN 413

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Movie K] in the n video menu and press
I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• Movie audio recording options will be displayed.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• The following options are available:[Recording Volume]:
Select [Built-In K] or [MIC K] and choose the recording level.
Select [Oﬀ] or [On].
[K Volume Limiter]:[Wind Noise Reduction]: Choose from [Oﬀ], [Low], [Normal], and [High].
[Recording Rate]:
Choose from [96kHz/24bit] and [48kHz/16bit].
Select [Oﬀ] or [On].
[K Plug-in Power]:[PCM Recorder K Link]: Adjust settings as desired (P. 413).
[Headphone Volume]: Choose from settings between 16 and 1.

3• Press the OK button to return to the [n Audio Record Settings] menu after choosing asetting for each option.

5

Press the OK button when settings are complete.

• Press the OK button repeatedly to return to the n video
menu. Conﬁrm that [On] is selected for [Movie K].

6

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

%• Silent controls can be used to adjust the recording level during ﬁlming. g “Touch Controls(Silent Controls)” (P. 306)
• If the Fn lever is conﬁgured to allow the dials to be used to change camera settings,[Recording Volume] and [Headphone Volume] can be adjusted using the dials. The recordinglevel can then be changed during ﬁlming. g [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426), [n Dial
Function] (P. 424)

414 ENn 3-11 Audio Recording

Using the Olympus LS-100 IC Recorder
When recording audio with an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder, you can use camera
controls to record slate tones or to start and stop recording.
Connect the LS-100 using the USB cable and a third-party stereo mini-jack cable.
Use a “no resistance” cable.
• Additional information is available in the documentation provided with the LS-100. Be sure
the recorder ﬁrmware has been updated to the latest version.

1

Connect the IC recorder.
• When the LS-100 is connected via USB, a message will be displayed prompting you tochoose a connection type. Select [PCM Recorder].
• If no message is displayed, adjust menu settings as follows:
MENU button
G (custom menu) tab
S tab[USB Mode]
Select [Auto]or [PCM Recorder]

Third-party stereo mini-jack cable3
USB adapter (supplied with
LS-100)USB cable (supplied with E-M1X)

2

Adjust [PCM Recorder K Link] settings:• MENU buttonn (video) menu
Press I on the arrow pad[On][Movie K][Camera Rec. Volume]: Select [Inoperative].
[Slate Tone]:
Select [On].
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Select [On].
After adjusting settings, check that [On] is selected for[Movie K] and press the MENU button repeatedly to exit
the menus.

n 3-11 Audio Recording

EN 415

3

Start ﬁlming.
• The LS-100 will begin recording audio.
• To record a slate tone, press and hold the OK button.

4

End ﬁlming.
• The LS-100 will stop recording audio.

%• You can choose how long you have to keep the button pressed to record a slate tone.
g [Press-and-hold Time] (P. 558)
• Disconnect the USB cable when the camera is oﬀ or the recorder is not in use.

3416 ENn 3-11 Audio Recording3-12 Customizing Camera Controls
The camera is equipped with “direct” buttons that can be used for direct adjustments
to settings such as ISO sensitivity and white balance, and controls such as thedials and Fn lever that can be assigned diﬀerent roles. These controls can becustomized for ease of use. Buttons can be assigned movie-related functions foraccess during ﬁlming.

3
Assigning Roles to Buttons (n Button Function)
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing roles. Menu items
and the like can be assigned to buttons for quick access during movie recording.
The functions assigned to controls using this item are available only in n (movie)
mode. The functions assigned in the G custom menu take eﬀect in modes P, A, S,
M, and B (still photography modes).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 421)

- The menus (P. 422)

Customizable Controls
Icon

Button (orientation)

Default role

XF

F (exposure compensation) button Exposure compensation

XK

ISO button

ISO sensitivity

XR

R (movie) button

Movie recording

Xuu (LV) button

Display selection

XF

Fn button

AF-target moden 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

EN 417

Icon

Button (orientation)

Default role

Xt

AEL/AFL button

XL

WB button

White balance

Xd

Arrow padAF-target selection

XD

Arrow pad I (right) *Oﬀ (X)

XE

Arrow pad G (down) *Oﬀ (WB)XY

One-touch white balance button

Focus peaking

XZ

Preview button

Zoom

YF

Vertical-use F (exposurecompensation) button

Oﬀ

YK

Vertical-use ISO button

Oﬀ

Yt

Vertical-use AEL/AFL button

Oﬀ

YY

Vertical-use one-touch whitebalance button

Oﬀ

YZ

Vertical-use preview button

Oﬀl

L-Fn (lens focus function buttons)

Lens Fn buttons (autofocus stop)

Exposure lock* To use I and G on the arrow pad in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for[Xd] (arrow pad).

3

Available Roles
Role

Function

AF Stop

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while thecontrol is pressed. Applies only to lens L-Fn buttons.

AEL/AFL (t)Lock exposure. Press once to lock exposure; exposure remains locked
until the button is pressed a second time.

RREC (movie
recording)

The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.
Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The following
roles can be assigned:

Direct Function(n)

H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: X (power zoom)
G button: WB (white balance)• Use XD and XE to assign roles respectively to the I and G
buttons.

418 ENn 3-12 Customizing Camera ControlsRole

Function

AF Area Select(N)

Adjust AF-target settings.
You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 349) and position (P. 352)
and adjust settings for face-detection AF (P. 360). Press the control toview the AF-target selection display. Use the front or rear dial to choose
AF-target mode and face-detection settings and the multi selector orarrow pad to position the AF target.

G Lock (touch
control lock)

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock. The I and G buttons must ﬁrst be
assigned a function using [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom
(X)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use thearrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom in
and G or H to zoom out. The I and G buttons must ﬁrst be assigned
a function using [Direct Function].

MF (AF/MF toggle)

Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected byholding the button and rotating a dial. You can switch between AF and
MF during ﬁlming. This option is unable when [mode2] is selected for[n Fn Lever Function].
Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front or reardial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings and thenrotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with the movie exposure
mode:

Exposure F (F)3[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M]: Hold the button and adjust exposure compensation using the frontor rear dial.

Digital Teleconverter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or oﬀ (P. 411). Press once to zoom inand again to zoom out.

Movie H (H)Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 409). Press thecontrol once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Pressthe control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press andhold the control. Use the multi selector, touch controls, or the arrow pad(FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

EN 419Role

3

Function

Magnify (a)Focus on the subject in the zoom frame (P. 364). Press the control
once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Press the control
a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press and holdthe control. Use the multi selector, touch controls, or the arrow pad(FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

ISO

Adjust [n ISO] settings (P. 369). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow
pad to adjust settings.

WB (white balance)

Adjust [n WB] settings (P. 380). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow
pad to adjust settings.

k (one-touch
white balance)

Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 386). Frame a pieceof white paper or other reference object in the display and press thecontrol. Select a destination for the new value when prompted.

Multi Fn (multi
Function)Conﬁgure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 470).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the function
performed. The selected function can be performed by pressing thecontrol.

Peaking (PEAK)

Toggle focus peaking on or oﬀ (P. 525). Press the control once to turnpeaking on and again to turn it oﬀ. When peaking is on, peaking options(color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO button.

V Level Disp(R)

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewﬁnder functions as a level gauge. This option takes eﬀect when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style] in G Custom Menu a.

u View
Selection (display
selection)

Switch between the monitor and viewﬁnder ([Oﬀ] selected for [EVF
Auto Switch], P. 553). Press and hold the control to display [EVF Auto
Switch] options.

IS Mode (IS)Toggle [n AF/IS Settings] (P. 376) > [n Image Stabilizer] in then video menu on or oﬀ. Press once to select [Oﬀ] and again to turnimage stabilization on. Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial
to access [n Image Stabilizer] options.

420 ENn 3-12 Customizing Camera ControlsRole

Function

Toggle [n AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or oﬀ (P. 357). Press the control
once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous focus mode.
Alternatively, you can choose the [n AF Mode] by holding the control
Preset MF (PreMF)
and rotating a dial. You can press the button to toggle the focus mode
during recording. Focus-mode selection using custom controls is notavailable when [mode2] is chosen for [n Fn Lever Function].
Lens Info Settings(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data. Recall saved data for the current
lens after changing lenses or the like.

S-AF

Focus using [S-AF]. Press the control to focus. Focus will lock while thecontrol is pressed.

Flicker Scan
(P)

Press the control to select [On] for [n Flicker Scan]. Adjust shutter
speed until ﬂicker is no longer visible. Press the control again to view orhide shooting information. Press and hold the control to exit. This option
is available when [S] or [M] is selected for [n Mode]. See page 374
for more on [n Flicker Scan].

Oﬀ

The control is not used.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Select n (movie) mode before using the LV super control panel to access[n Button Function]. In modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes), the LV
super control panel can be used to access [K Button Function] (P. 463).

1

3Highlight [n Button Function] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• [n Button Function] options will be displayed.

n button function

2

Highlight the desired control using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight a function using the FG buttons andpress the OK button to assign it to the selected
control.
• Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to assign functions to additional
controls.

4

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the LV supercontrol panel.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

EN 421
Menu Access

3

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Button Function] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired control using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

5

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6422 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

Choosing a Role for the Shutter Button(n Shutter Function)
Conﬁgure the shutter button as a R (movie record) button. A release cable canthen be used to start or stop recording when the mode dial is rotated to n (movie).
w

The button functions as a shutter button. It can be used to initiate autofocus. It
cannot be used to take pictures.

RREC

Press the shutter button all the way down to start or stop movie recording.
• The R button cannot be used for movie recording when [RREC] is selected.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Shutter Function] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

3

EN 423

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials(n Dial Function)
Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials in n (movie) mode.
The roles played by the front and rear dials vary with the position of the Fn lever,and you can choose the functions assigned to them in each position. You canreverse the roles of the dials or reassign them for ease of use or as required byshooting conditions. Diﬀerent assignments can be made for each [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode).
The roles assigned to the dials using this item take eﬀect in n (movie) mode. In
addition, [mode1] must be selected for [n Fn Lever Function]. In P, A, S, M, andB (still photography) modes, the dials perform the roles selected in the G custom
menu.
Diﬀerent assignments can be made for each n (movie exposure) mode.
Exposure mode
Function

P

A

S

M

Shutter

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—





FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—



—



F

Adjust exposure compensation.









Role

3

ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.

—

—

—



WB

Adjust white balance.









CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when CWB(custom) is selected for white balance.









KVOL

Adjust the recording level.









PVOL

Adjust headphone volume.









Oﬀ

None.









1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

424 ENn 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

3Highlight [n Dial Function] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired mode and press the I button.
• Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG
buttons to choose a role.
• Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
• Press the OK button when settings are complete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• When [K VOL] or [P VOL] is assigned to the front or reardial, the recording level or headphone volume is shown in thedisplay when the dials are rotated.

Recording level
1±0 R
123min
TC 00:00:00:00 DF
L

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO-A
200

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

1:02:03

3

EN 425Customizing the Fn Lever (n Fn Lever Function)
Choose the role played by the Fn lever in n (movie) mode.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and rear dials or to recall
focus settings.
The role assigned to the Fn lever using this item takes eﬀect in n (movie) mode.
In P, A, S, M, and B (still photography) modes, the Fn lever performs the roleselected in the G custom menu.
Oﬀ

Changing the position of the Fn lever has no eﬀect.

mode1

Changing the position of the Fn lever reverses the roles of the dials (P. 424).

mode2

Focus settings change with the position of the Fn lever. Choose settings for [AFMode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].

• This option is not available when:- [mode3] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 475) in G Custom Menu J- [Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 501) in G Custom
Menu J

3

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Fn Lever Function] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Pressing the I button when [mode2] is highlighted
displays focus settings, allowing you to choose thesettings recalled with the Fn lever.
[AF Mode]:
S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: Single, all, etc.
[AF Target Point]: AF-target position

5426 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls[n Fn Lever Function] > [mode2]
When [mode2] is selected for [n Fn Lever Function], the camera will store
separate focus settings for Positions 1 and 2.
• The [MF] and [Preset MF] options assigned to controls using [n Button Function] cannot be
used.

1

Rotate the Fn lever to Position 1.

Fn lever• The camera can store the settings selected for:
[AF Mode]:
S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: Single, all, etc.
[AF Target Point]: AF-target position2

Repeat the process for Position 2.

3
3

Rotate the lever to the desired position to recall the
saved settings.

n 3-12 Customizing Camera Controls

EN 427

3-13 Display Settings
Adjust display settings for movie recording.
You can choose whether to display on-screen controls in the form of the LV supercontrol panel or live controls. You can also choose the indicators displayed in themonitor during ﬁlming. Choose options that suit your shooting style.

Viewing On-Screen Controls (n Control Settings)
View or hide on-screen controls during shooting.
Use this option to hide on-screen controls (live controls and the LV super control
panel) so that they cannot be displayed via the INFO button.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Control Settings] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Select the desired controls.

3• Use the FG buttons to highlight options and press
the OK button to select or deselect. Items marked witha check can be displayed during shooting; those notmarked with a check are hidden.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

• The INFO button cannot be used to toggle on-screen controls if it can be used to display
options for the item currently selected in the live control display. Select a diﬀerent item before
using the INFO button to toggle the display.

428 ENn 3-13 Display Settings

Shooting Indicators(n Info Settings)

Choose the indicators listed in the shooting display.
You can display or hide shooting setting indicators or view GPS or other sensor data
(ﬁeld sensor info). Use this option to choose the icons that appear in the display.
You can choose from two custom displays containing the indicators you select and athird display showing ﬁeld sensor info.
• You can choose the items listed in the [Custom1] and [Custom2] displays. You cannot
choose the contents of the [Field Sensor Info] display.
Display
Indicator

Custom1/Custom2

Field Sensor Info

u



—

Level Gauge

—

Image Stabilizer

Picture Mode





WB





AF Moden Mode





K





ISO





Time Code

Silent G Operation



—

Grid





Altitude—

Heading—Longitude and latitude—

Temperature—Barometric pressure

—



3

: Can be displayed or hidden.

n 3-13 Display Settings

EN 429

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Info Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight options using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Selected items will
be displayed. To deselect the current item, press the OK
button again.
• To choose the items displayed in the [Custom1] and[Custom2] displays, highlight the desired option andpress the I button. Highlight items using the FG
buttons and press the OK button to select or deselect.
Selected items will be displayed.

3
5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Choosing a Display
Press the INFO button during shooting to cycle through the selected displays.
g “Choosing the Information Displayed” (P. 327)

430 ENn 3-13 Display Settings

Battery Level Display Options(8 Display Pattern)Choose a format for the battery level display. Battery level can be displayed as apercentage or as the amount of shooting time remaining.
• The shooting time display is intended as a guide only.
%

Battery level is shown as a percentage.

min

Battery level is shown as the shooting time remaining. In still photography modes, thebattery level is displayed only while photos are being recorded.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [8 Display Pattern] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3n 3-13 Display Settings

EN 431

3-14 HDMI Devices
The camera can output video signals to HDMI devices. You can view the contents ofthe camera display in a monitor during shooting or use an HDMI recorder to record
footage captured with the camera. This section describes settings for use when thecamera is connected to an HDMI device.
Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to theconnectors when an HDMI cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors”(P. 29)3
HDMI Output(n HDMI Output)

Adjust settings for output to HDMI devices. Options are available for controlling
HDMI recorders from the camera or adding time codes for use during movie editing.

Output Mode

[Monitor Mode]: The HDMI device functions as an external monitor. The
camera outputs both images and indicators to the display.
Output settings can be adjusted using the [HDMI] option in
G Custom Menu S (P. 434).
[Record Mode]: The HDMI device functions as an external recorder. Only
images are output to the device. Frame size and soundsettings are adjusted using camera controls.
• The camera functions in [Monitor Mode] in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still
photography modes), during playback, and when menus are displayed.

REC Bit

The camera and the external device start and stop recording at the same time.
• This option is only available with compatible devices.

Time Code

Output time codes to the external device. Time code settings can be adjusted
using [n Display Settings] > [Time Code Settings] (P. 324).

432 ENn 3-14 HDMI Devices

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n HDMI Output] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight the desired item using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3n 3-14 HDMI Devices

EN 433External Monitor Display Options(HDMI)

Choose the signal output to external monitors connected via HDMI. Adjust the frame
rate, movie frame size, and other settings according to monitor speciﬁcations.
Choose the type of signal output to the HDMI connector.
[C4K]:
Output Size

The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096 × 2160)
format.
[4K]:
If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 × 2160).
[1080p]:If possible, the signal is output in Full HD (1080p).
[720p]:
If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).
[480p/576p]: The signal is output in 480p/576p format.

HDMI Control

Selecting [On] allows the camera to be controlled using a remote that
supports HDMI control.

Output Frame Rate

Choose the signal frame rate according to whether the device supports
NTSC (60p) or PAL (50p).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/PC).

3

Highlight [HDMI] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the I button.

4

Highlight the desired item using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

3434 ENn 3-14 HDMI Devices

5

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as necessary.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3n 3-14 HDMI Devices

EN 435

3-15 Working with Saved Movies
Movies are saved to the memory card and can be viewed in the camera monitor.
Movies can be deleted or lightly edited using camera controls. You can also selectmovies for quick upload to a smartphone.

Choosing the Information Displayed
Choose the information displayed during playback.

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.
• Movies are indicated by a representation of a piece ofﬁlm stock in the background at the top and bottom of thedisplay.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4Single-frame playback

3

2

Press the INFO button.
• The information displayed changes each time the button
is pressed.

INFO button
1

1

48kHz

123minP
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

123minWB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Indicators displayed

436 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

4

Indicators hidden

The Movie Playback Info Display
2 3 4
w1

1

5

6

7 8 901

123min w1

48kHz

P

i
h

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4g
1 Battery level ...................................... P. 44
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................... P. 584, 600
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ........ P. 586
4 Active connection to computer........ P. 600
5 Wireless LAN connection........................................ P. 592, 596, 597
6 Movie indicator................................ P. 436
7 Movie audio .................................... P. 413
8 “Share” icon .................................... P. 446
9 “Protected” icon .............................. P. 439

a
b
c
d
e

f

0 “Selected” icon ................................ P. 448
a n mode (movie exposure mode) .. P. 332
b n white balance ............................ P. 380
c Picture mode................................... P. 388
d File number ..................................... P. 548
e Frame number
f Current card slot ............................. P. 302
g n movie quality ............................. P. 321
h Date and time ................................. P. 455
i Time code ....................................... P. 324

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

3

EN 437

Finding Movies Quickly(Index and Calendar Playback)“Index playback” lists the pictures on the memory card as small “thumbnail” images
so that you can view multiple pictures at once. This makes it easier to ﬁnd the movie
you want. You can also switch to a calendar display and search for movies by dateof recording.

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P

WB
AUTO

100-0004

4K

TC 00:00:00:00 DF

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the rear dial to G.
• Thumbnails will be displayed.
• Highlight a picture with the multi selector. Press the multiselector to view the highlighted picture full frame.
• You can also use the front dial or the arrow pad(FGHI).

3

4

1

123minn

2019.04.01 12:30:00

20

Index playback

3

Without leaving the index display, rotate the rear dial
to G again.
• Calendar playback will start. The number of thumbnails
in the index display can be chosen using [G/Info
Settings] (P. 515) > [G Settings] in G Custom Menu
P. If more than one type of display is selected, you may
have to rotate the rear dial to G more than once to start
calendar playback.
• Highlight a date using the front dial or arrow pad andpress the OK button. The ﬁrst picture recorded on theselected date will be displayed.
• Rotate the rear dial to G or a to cycle between fullframe, index, and calendar playback.

1

2019.4123min
Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Calendar playback• You can choose a memory card for playback by:- Pressing the CARD button and then rotating the front or rear dial
- Holding the q button and rotating the front or rear dialThis does not change the option selected for [Card Slot Settings] (P. 547) > [q Slot] in
G Custom Menu Y.
• Photographs recorded to the current card will also be displayed.

438 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

Sat

31

Protecting Movies(0)Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Protected pictures cannot be deletedusing “delete all” but will be deleted if the memory card is formatted.
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The 0 button- The menus (P. 440)

Access via the 0 (protect) Button

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

WB
AUTO

100-0004

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toprotect.

3

Press the 0 button.

4

3“Protected” icon

• A 0 (“protected”) icon will be
displayed.
• Press the 0 button again to remove
protection.
• When an unprotected image isdisplayed, you can hold the 0
button and rotate the front or rear dial
to protect all images displayed while
0 button
the dial is rotated. Any previouslyprotected images displayed while thedial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the
0 button and rotate the front or rear dial to remove
protection from all images displayed while the dial isrotated. Any previously-unprotected images displayed
while the dial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

1

48kHz

123minP
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4

EN 439Menu AccessDisplay a movie and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[0]
to remove protection

OK button
Press F or G on the arrow pad once to protect, again
Press the OK button to save changes and exit

Removing Protection from All Pictures(Reset Protect)

Remove protection from all pictures on the memory card in the current slot. Use thisoption if you have protected multiple pictures and want to remove protection from all
images at once.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset Protect] in the q playback menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3440 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

Copying Pictures Between Cards(Copy)

To copy a picture from one memory card to the other when two memory cards areinserted:1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want to
copy.

3

Press the OK button.

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4• A menu of edit options will be displayed.

3
4Highlight [Copy] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.
• [Assign Folder to Copy to] options will be displayed.

5

To choose whether the picture is copied to aselected folder, highlight one of the following options
and press the OK button.
[Assign]:

Copy the picture to a new folder or to aselected existing folder. Proceed to Step 6.
[Do not assign]: Copy the picture to the current folder on thedestination memory card.

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

EN 441

6

If you selected [Do not assign] in Step 5, choose thedestination folder.
• Highlight [New Folder] or [Existing Folder] using theFG buttons and press the OK button.
[New Folder]:Choose the desired folder number andpress the OK button.
[Existing Folder]: Highlight an existing folder using theFG buttons and press the OK button.
• If the chosen folder is unavailable, the camera will returnto the previous display; repeat the process as required.

7

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

3442 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

Copying All Pictures(Copy All)

Copy all pictures from one memory card to the other when two memory cards areinserted.
7

Copy all pictures from the memory card in Slot 1 to the card in Slot 2.

8

Copy all pictures from the memory card in Slot 2 to the card in Slot 1.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Copy All] in the q playback menu andpress I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [7] or [8] using FG buttons andpress the OK button.

4

Highlight [Yes] using FG buttons and press the
OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

3• Copying ends when the destination card is full.

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

EN 443

Deleting Pictures(Erase)Delete pictures from the memory card one at a time.
• Pictures can be deleted via:
- The menus- The  button
Deleting Pictures via the  Button

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

WB
AUTO

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

3 3

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want todelete.

Press the  button.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be
displayed.
 button

4

Highlight [Yes] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

Deleting Pictures via the Menus
Display a picture and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[Erase]OK button
Highlight [Yes] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button to select the highlighted option%• You can opt to skip the conﬁrmation dialog when deleting images. g G Custom Menu
Z > [Quick Erase] (P. 551)

444 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

4Deleting All Pictures(All Erase)

Delete all pictures from the memory card. Protected pictures will not be deleted.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Card Setup] in the e setup menu andpress I on the arrow pad.
• If memory cards are inserted in both slots, you will beprompted to choose a slot. Select Slot 1 or Slot 2 andpress the OK button.

3

Highlight [All Erase] using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• If there are no pictures on the card in the selected slot,
the only option displayed will be [Format]. Choose adiﬀerent slot.

4

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The camera will begin the process of deleting all pictureson the card in the selected slot.
• The camera will return to the shooting display whendeletion is complete.

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

3

EN 445

Selecting Movies for Sharing(Share Order)

Smartphones running the OI.Share smartphone app can download movies fromthe camera. Pictures marked for download on the camera can be downloaded
automatically when the camera is oﬀ.
For information on establishing a connection between the camera and smartphone,see “6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 584).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The h button- The menus (P. 447)

Access via the h (Share) Button

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

WB
AUTO

100-0004

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toshare.

3

Press the h button.

3• A h (“share”) icon will be displayed.
• Press the h button again to remove
share marking.
• When an unmarked image isdisplayed, you can hold the hbutton and rotate the front or rear
dial to mark for sharing all images
displayed while the dial is rotated.
h buttonAny previously-marked images
displayed while the dial is rotated will
be unaﬀected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the
h button and rotate the front or rear dial to remove
share marking from all images displayed while the dialis rotated. Any previously-unmarked images displayed
while the dial is rotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

446 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

4“Share” icon
1

48kHz

123minP
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4

Menu AccessDisplay a picture and press the OK button to view options.
OK button[Share Order]
OK button
Press F or G on the arrow pad once to select,again to deselectPress the OK button to save changes and exit
• You can mark up to 200 pictures for sharing on each card.

Removing Share Marking from All Pictures(Reset Share Order)
Remove share marking from all pictures on the card in the current slot.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Reset share Order] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

3

EN 447

Selecting Multiple Pictures(0/Copy Select/Erase Selected/
Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple pictures for protection, copying, deletion, or sharing.

1

Press the q button.

1

48kHz

123min• The most recent picture will be displayed.

P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

WB
AUTO

100-0004

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Rotate the front dial to display a picture you want toshare.

3

Press the H button.

3• A v (“selected”) icon will be
displayed.
• Press the H button again to deselectthe picture.
• When an unmarked image isdisplayed, you can hold the H button
and rotate the front or rear dial toselect all images displayed while the
H buttondial is rotated. Any previously-marked
images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaﬀected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the
H button and rotate the front or rear dial to deselectall images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unmarked images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaﬀected.
• The same operations can be performed during playbackzoom or when a picture is selected in the index display.

4“Selected” icon
1

48kHz

123minP
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4

1

123minn

2019.04.01 12:30:00

448 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

204After selecting pictures, press the OK button.

5

Highlight the operation you want to perform on
the selected pictures ([0], [Copy Select], [Erase
Selected], or [Share Order Selected]) and press the
OK button.

• To exit without proceeding to Step 5, press the MENU
button.

• The selected operation will be applied to all pictures
marked with a v icon.
• If you selected [Copy Select] or [Erase Selected],additional options will be displayed; follow the menus tocomplete the operation.

1

123minn

2019.04.01 12:30:00

20• Exiting playback or turning the camera oﬀ deselects all selected pictures.

3

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

EN 449

Editing Movies(Movie Edit)

Simple edit options are available for existing movies. Trim unwanted footage orcreate a movie still from a selected frame.

Trimming Movies(Movie Trimming)

Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create ﬁlescontaining only footage you want to preserve.

1

Press the q button, display the desired movie, andpress the OK button.

1

48kHz

123min• A menu of edit options will be displayed.
P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2Highlight [Movie Edit] using FG on the arrow padand press the OK button.
• Movie edit options will be displayed.

33Highlight [Movie Trimming] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• You will be prompted to choose how you want to savethe edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new ﬁle.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]:
Exit without trimming the movie.

4Highlight the desired option and press the OK
button.
• You will be presented with an edit display.

5

Trim the movie.
• Use the F button to skip to the ﬁrst frame and the G
button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial, select the ﬁrst frame of the
footage you want to delete and press the OK button.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the
footage you want to delete and press the OK button.

450 ENn 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

4K

30p

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4

6Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select diﬀerent footage, highlight [No] and press the
OK button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted tochoose whether to trim additional footage from themovie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue]and press the OK button.

Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture)

Save a still copy of a selected frame.
• This option is available only with movies recorded at a frame size of [4K].

1

Press the q button, display the desired movie, andpress the OK button.

1

48kHz

123min• A menu of edit options will be displayed.
P
TC 00:00:00:00 DF

4K

30p

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2Highlight [Movie Edit] using FG on the arrow padand press the OK button.
• Movie edit options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [In-Movie Image Capture] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.

4

Rotate the front or rear dial or use the FGHI
buttons to display the desired frame and press the
OK button.

WB
AUTO

100-0004
4

3• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to go back 2 seconds and the G
button to skip ahead 2 seconds.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

n 3-15 Working with Saved Movies

EN 451MEMO

452 EN

4

Customizing the
CameraCustomize camera buttons and dials to suit your shooting
style. You can also customize camera menus.

4

EN 453

4-1

Basic Camera Settings(the e Setup Menu)

Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language
selection and monitor brightness. The setup menu also
contains options used during the initial setup process.

4

Formatting Memory Cards and Deleting All
Photos and Movies(Card Setup)
Ready memory cards for use in the camera. Format cards before recording photos
or movies.
FormatFormat the memory card. All data on the card will be deleted (P. 38).

All Erase

Delete all image data recorded with the camera. Protected ﬁles will not bedeleted (P. 276, 445).

MENU buttone (setup menu) tab
the arrow pad and press the I button
the OK button

454 EN[Card Setup]
Highlight a card slot using FG on
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press

4-1 Basic Camera Settings (the e Setup Menu)

Setting the Camera Clock(X Settings)

Set the camera clock. You can also update the clock automatically via GPS. This
option applies in both still photography and movie modes.
X

Set the clock (P. 45).

Time Zone

Choose a time zone. Although the time zone is selected after the clock isset, you can change it later using this option. You can also turn daylightsaving time on or oﬀ.

Auto Time
Adjust

The camera updates the clock using accurate time and date information
provided by the GPS system. This option will only work if the time zone isset correctly. The clock does not update while the camera is oﬀ.
[Oﬀ]: The clock is not updated automatically.
[On]: The clock is updated automatically to the time provided by GPS.

• The clock cannot be set if the camera’s internal memory contains an unsaved sensor log.
g “Field Sensor Logs” (P. 571)
e (setup menu) tab
MENU button
the arrow pad, and press the I button[X Settings]
Highlight an option using FG on
Adjust settings

Choosing a Language(W Language)

4

Choose a language for camera menus and tool tips.
MENU buttone (setup menu) tab
Highlight [W] (language) and press I on the arrowpad
Choose a language using the FGHI buttons
1

1

Setup Menu

100%

W

100%

1

Card Setup

HrvatskiýHVN\Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ

2

X Settings

Dansk

EnglishNederlands

Eesti

Suomi

Français

W

Englishs

j±0 k±0

DeutschǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ

Off

Indonesia

Italiano

日本語

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settingsଛ˯ߪ

Latviski/LHWXYLǐN

FirmwareNorsk

PolskiPortuguês(Pt)Rec View

Back

Set

Back

1

0DJ\DU

Set

W

100%

RomanianEspañolɊɭɫɫɤɢɣ

SrpskiSlovensky

6ORYHQãþLQD

SvenskaTürkçeɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ

The next or previous page is displayedwhen you pass the ﬁrst or last option on
the current page.

Viet Nam

Inapoi

Setare4-1 Basic Camera Settings (the e Setup Menu)

EN 455

Monitor Brightness and Hue(s)Adjust monitor brightness, color temperature, and hue. This option applies in bothstill photography and movie modes.
Color temperature (j) Adjust color temperature. Choose from settings between +7 and −7.
Brightness (k)Adjust brightness. Choose from settings between +7 and −7.

Hue

Adjust hue. Choose from [Vivid] and [Natural].

• In mode B, monitor brightness is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time Monitor].
g G Custom Menu U [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 534)
MENU buttone (setup menu) tab
Highlight [s] and press I on the arrow pad
Highlight [Color temperature (j)] or [Brightness (k)] using the HI buttons and use theFG buttons to choose a value
Press the INFO button and choose an option for [Hue]4

Post-Shooting Display Time

(Rec View)

Pictures are displayed immediately after shooting. This gives you a chance toquickly review the shot. You can choose how long pictures are displayed or disable
photo review altogether. To end photo review and resume shooting at any time,press the shutter button halfway (P. 90).
• This item is for still photography.
0.3–20 sec

Choose how long photos are displayed.

Oﬀ

Photo review disabled. The camera continues to display the view through thelens after shooting.

Auto q

Switch to playback after shooting. You can delete images and use otherplayback functions.

MENU buttone (setup menu) tab
select options

456 EN

Highlight [Rec View] and press I on the arrow pad

4-1 Basic Camera Settings (the e Setup Menu)

Wireless LAN Options(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)

Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Take pictures and view picturesusing a computer, or leave the camera oﬀ and view pictures on your smartphone
while on the road. For information on establishing a connection and using thesefeatures, see “6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 584) or “6-3Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi” (P. 600).
Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®, forexample in settings in which their use is prohibited, without changing
network settings.

Availability

Connection Password Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® password.
Power-oﬀ Standby

Choose whether the camera will connect to smartphones while oﬀ.

Reset Settings

Restore defaults for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings].

Wi-Fi MAC Address

Display the camera MAC address, which is sometimes needed
when adjusting wireless network settings.

MENU buttone (setup menu) tab[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings]
Highlight an option
using FG on the arrow pad, and press the I button
Adjust settings

Viewing the Firmware Version(Firmware)

4

View the versions of the ﬁrmware for the camera and any lenses or otherperipherals currently connected. You may need this information when contacting
customer support or performing ﬁrmware updates.
MENU buttone (setup menu) tab

Highlight [Firmware] and press I on the arrow pad

4-1 Basic Camera Settings (the e Setup Menu)

EN 457

4-2

Custom Shooting Modes

Functions and custom settings can be saved to a selected position on the mode dial
as a custom shooting mode. Multiple settings can be recalled simultaneously just byrotating the mode dial. The camera can store settings for four custom modes, one
for each of positions C1 through C4 on the mode dial.
Settings recalled by selecting a custom mode can be adjusted as required. The
stored settings recalled simply by rotating the mode dial.

4

Saving Settings to the Mode Dial
(Assign to Custom Mode)
Current settings, including the shooting mode, can be saved to positions C1through C4 on the mode dial. At default settings, these modes are equivalent to thedefault settings for mode P (program AE). For information on the settings that canbe saved, see “7-4 Default Settings” (P. 640).

1

Rotate the mode dial to P, A, S, M, or B and adjust
settings as desired.
• See the menu list (P. 640) for information on thesettings that can be stored.

2458 EN

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

4-2 Custom Shooting Modes

3

Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Assign to Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Assign to Custom Mode] options will be displayed.

5

Highlight C1, C2, C3, or C4 using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display [Custom Mode] options for theselected mode.

6

Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• Current settings will be saved to the selected mode andthe camera will return to the [Assign to Custom Mode]display.
• Existing settings for the selected custom mode will beoverwritten.
• To reset the selected custom mode to default settings,
highlight [Reset] and press the OK button.

7

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

4-2 Custom Shooting Modes

EN 459

Using Custom Modes(C1/C2/C3/C4)

Custom settings can be recalled using the mode dial, which restores all saved
settings, or via the menus, which restores all settings except the shooting mode.
You can choose the settings restored when a custom is selected. The saved
settings will be restored when you next select the custom mode.


Access via the Mode Dial
Rotate the mode dial to whichever custom mode (C1,C2, C3, or C4) was originally used to store the settings.
• The settings saved to the selected custom mode will be
restored.

Menu Access
In modes other than n (movie), you can use the menus to recall settings saved to
selected custom modes. The shooting mode remains that currently selected withthe mode dial.

1Choose the shooting mode in which you wish to use
the saved settings.

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

4 3Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Recall from Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Recall from Custom Mode] options will be displayed.

5

460 EN

Highlight the desired custom mode using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4-2 Custom Shooting Modes

6

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• W Shooting Menu 1 will be displayed.

7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.


Recalling Settings via the Fn Button
Custom settings can be recalled using a control to which [Recall from Custom
Mode] has been assigned. This allows custom settings to be recalled at the touchof a button. You can also save and recall the shooting mode. Press the control once
to recall saved settings, a second time to restore the settings previously in eﬀect.
g G Custom Menu J > [K Button Function] (P. 463)

44-2 Custom Shooting Modes

EN 461

4-3

Customizing Buttons andDials

The camera is equipped with dials and variety of buttons used to adjust settings.
Each of these controls has a default function. Each of these functions sees frequentuse. Depending on your shooting style, you may nevertheless ﬁnd yourself using
other functions more frequently still. It is for just such situations that the camera has
been provided with a variety of options for customizing controls.
Buttons that provide direct access to settings, such as the
ISO and WB buttons, are referred to as “direct” buttons.
You can choose the functions assigned to these buttons.
Depending on your subject or shooting style, you may
ﬁnd yourself frequently accessing settings in the menus.
Such settings can also be assigned to direct buttons.

4462 ENThe front and rear dials, which are normally used toadjust exposure settings, can instead be used to adjust
such settings as white balance and ISO sensitivity. The
roles played by the dials can be selected using the Fnlever.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions. Menu
items can be assigned to buttons for quick access during shooting.
[K Button Function] is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls
using this item are available only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography
modes). The functions assigned using [n Button Function] in the n video menu
take eﬀect in n (movie) mode (P. 417).
• This setting can be accessed via:
- The LV super control panel (P. 468)

- The menus (P. 469)

Customizable Controls
Icon

Button (orientation)

Default role

XF

F (exposure compensation) button Exposure compensation

XK

ISO button

ISO sensitivity

XR

R (movie) button

Movie recording

Xuu (LV) button

Display selection

XF

Fn button

AF-target mode

Xt

AEL/AFL button

Exposure/focus lockXL

WB button

White balance

Xd

Arrow padAF-target selection

XD

Arrow pad I (right) *Oﬀ (#)

XE

Arrow pad G (down) *Oﬀ (j/Y)XY

One-touch white balance button

One-touch white balance

XZ

Preview button

Preview

YF

Vertical-use F (exposurecompensation) button

Exposure compensation

YK

Vertical-use ISO button

ISO sensitivity

Yt

Vertical-use AEL/AFL button

AEL/AFL

YY

Vertical-use one-touch whitebalance button

One-touch white balance

YZ

Vertical-use preview button

Previewl

L-Fn (lens focus function buttons)

Lens Fn buttons (autofocus stop)

4* To use I and G on the arrow pad in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for[Xd] (arrow pad).

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

EN 463
Available Roles
Role

Function

AF Stop

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while thecontrol is pressed. Applies only to lens L-Fn buttons.

AEL/AFL (t)Lock focus and/or exposure (P. 141). When used for exposure lock,the control locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock whenpressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selectedusing [K AEL/AFL] in G Custom Menu J.

RREC (movie
recording)

The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.
Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The following
roles can be assigned:

Direct Function(n)

H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: # (ﬂash)
G button: j/Y (drive mode)• Use XD and XE to assign roles respectively to the I and G
buttons.

4

Preview (z)Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview depthof ﬁeld. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value while thebutton is pressed. Preview options can be selected using [z Settings]
in G Custom Menu Q (P. 524).

k (one-touch
white balance)

Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 207). Frame areference object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display,then press and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of
one-touch white balance options will be displayed, from which you canchoose the location to which the new value will be saved.

AF Area Select(N)

Adjust AF-target settings.
You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 120) and position (P. 123)
and adjust settings for face/eye priority AF (P. 133). Press the control
to view the AF-target selection display. Use the front or rear dial tochoose AF-target mode and face/eye priority AF settings and the multiselector or arrow pad to position the AF target.

N Home(AF home position)

Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF Target
Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall saved settingsand press it again to restore the settings previously in eﬀect. Home
position settings are saved using [N Set Home] in G Custom Menu
K (P. 487).
• You can save separate home positions for landscape and portrait
orientations using [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 489) in
G Custom Menu K.

464 EN

4-3 Customizing Buttons and DialsRole

Function

MF (AF/MF toggle)

Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to returnto the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected by holding
the button and rotating a dial. This option has no eﬀect when [mode2] isselected for [K Fn Lever Function].

RAW K(RAW quality)

Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KK] settings. Press thecontrol to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting by holding
the button and rotating a dial.

Test Picture(K TEST)

Take a test shot. You can view the eﬀects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will not
be saved to the memory card.

Custom Mode
C1–C4

Recall settings for the selected custom mode. Press the control once torecall saved settings, a second time to restore the settings previouslyin eﬀect (P. 111, 460). The control continues to perform this function
when a custom mode is selected with the mode dial.
Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front or reardial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings and thenrotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with the shooting mode:

Exposure F (F)[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposurecompensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M]: Use the front dial or FG on the arrow pad for shutter speed. Use
the rear dial or the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use FG on the arrow pad to switch between bulb/time and live
composite photography. Use the rear dial or HI buttons to choose
the aperture.

Digital Teleconverter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or oﬀ (P. 235). Press once to zoom inand again to zoom out.

Keystone Comp.
(D)

Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 248).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.

Fisheye
Compensation(A)

Enable ﬁsheye correction (P. 250). Press once to enable ﬁsheye
correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the frontor rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

4

EN 465Role

4Function

Magnify (a)Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in(P. 136). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom
frame, press and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch controls,or the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.

HDR (M)

Enable HDR. Press once to enable HDR (P. 195). Press again todisable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.

BKT (N)

Enable bracketing. Press once to enable bracketing (P. 236). Pressagain to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial toadjust [Call BKT Settings] settings.

ISO

Adjust [K ISO] settings (P. 181). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow
pad to adjust settings.

WB (white balance)

Adjust [K WB] settings (P. 202). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow
pad to adjust settings.

Multi Fn (multi
Function)Conﬁgure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 470).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the function
performed. The selected function can be performed by pressing thecontrol.

Peaking (PEAK)

Toggle focus peaking on or oﬀ (P. 525). Press the control once to turnpeaking on and again to turn it oﬀ. When peaking is on, peaking options(color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO button.

V Level Disp(R)

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewﬁnder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes eﬀect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF
Style] (P. 554) in G Custom Menu a.

u View
Selection (display
selection)

Switch between viewﬁnder photography and live view. If [Oﬀ] is selected
for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 553), the display will switch between the
viewﬁnder and the monitor. Press and hold the control to display [EVF
Auto Switch] options.

S-OVF (n)Enable [S-OVF] (P. 89). Press once to turn OVF simulation on. Pressagain to turn it oﬀ.

466 EN

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

Role
AF Limiter(AF Limit)

Function
Enable the AF limiter (P. 143). Press once to enable [AF Limiter]. Pressagain to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial tochoose from three stored settings.

Toggle [K AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or oﬀ (P. 129). Press thecontrol once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous
focus mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [K AF Mode] by holding
Preset MF (PreMF)
the control and rotating a dial. Focus-mode selection using custom
controls is not available when [mode2] is chosen for [K Fn Lever
Function] (P. 475).
Lens Info Settings(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 550). Recall saved data for thecurrent lens after changing lenses or the like.

IS Mode (IS)Toggle [K Image Stabilizer] on or oﬀ (P. 176). Press once to select[Oﬀ] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control and rotate
the front or rear dial to access [K Image Stabilizer] options.

Flicker Scan(P)

Adjust settings for [K Flicker Scan] (P. 193). Press the control toselect [On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while viewing
banding in the display. Press the control again to display shooting
information and access other settings. Press and hold the control toselect [Oﬀ] for [K Flicker Scan].

G Lock (touch
control lock)

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock. The I and G buttons must ﬁrst be
assigned a function using [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom
(X)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use thearrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom in
and G or H to zoom out. The I and G buttons must ﬁrst be assigned
a function using [Direct Function].

Flash Mode (#)

Adjust ﬂash settings (P. 252). Press once to display ﬂash options andagain select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings using thefront or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad. The I and G buttons mustﬁrst be assigned a function using [Direct Function].

j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)

Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 151). Press
once to display drive mode options and again select the highlighted
option and exit. Highlight settings using the front or rear dial or HI on
the arrow pad. The I and G buttons must ﬁrst be assigned a function
using [Direct Function].

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

4

EN 467

Role

FunctionLive ND Shooting(O)

Enable the live ND ﬁlter (P. 197). Press once to enable [Live ND
Shooting]. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front orrear dial to adjust [Live ND Shooting] settings.

Oﬀ

The control is not used.


Access via the LV Super Control Panel
Select mode P, A, S, M, or B before using the LV super control panel to access[K Button Function]. In n (movie) mode, the LV super control panel can be used
to access [n Button Function] (P. 417).

1

Highlight [K Button Function] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.

K button function

2

Highlight the desired control using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight a function using the FG buttons andpress the OK button to assign it to the selected
control.

4• Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to assign functions to additional
controls.

4468 EN

Press the shutter button halfway to exit the LV supercontrol panel.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials


Menu Access

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu J (Button/Dial/Lever).

3

Highlight [K Button Function] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired control using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

5

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

EN 469

Multi-Function Button Options(Multi Function)

Assign multiple roles to a single button.
Assigning [Multi Function] (multi-function) to a control turns it into a multi-function
button.
The multi-function button can be used to:Highlight&Shadow Individually adjust the brightness of highlights, shadows, and mid-tones
Control(P. 227, 403).
Color Creator

Adjust saturation and hue. This also selects the [Color Creator] picture
mode.

ISO

Display ISO sensitivity options (P. 181, 369).

WB

Display white balance options (P. 202, 380).

Magnify

Display the zoom frame. You can use super spot AF (P. 136, 364).

Image Aspect

Display aspect ratio options (P. 233).

S-OVF

Expand the dynamic range of the viewﬁnder display. Press again torestore the previous display (P. 89).

Peaking

Enable focus peaking. Press the control again to restore the previous
display (P. 525).

• You can choose the options displayed. g “Choosing the Settings Available via Multi-Fn”(P. 472), [Multi Function Settings] (P. 521)

4


Assigning [Multi Function] to a Control
Before a control can be used as a multi-function button, it must be assigned
the [Multi Function] role. The assignment for modes P, A, S, M, and B (still
photography modes) is made using [K Button Function] (P. 463) in G Custom
Menu J and that for n (movie) mode using [n Button Function] (P. 417) in then video menu. Here’s how the assignment can be made using the LV super control
panel.

1Highlight [K Button Function] in the LV supercontrol panel and press the OK button.
• In modes P, A, S, M, and B, [K Button Function]

options will be displayed, while in n mode [n Button
Function] options will be displayed.
K button function

470 EN

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

2Highlight the desired control using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

3

Highlight [Multi Function] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Depending on the control selected, [Multi Function] may
not be available. Select a diﬀerent control.

4

Press the OK button to exit when settings are complete.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display.

Using Multi-Function Buttons

1

Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.

2

Press the button to which [Multi Function] is
assigned.

3

Adjust settings.

4

Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO
Highlight&Shadow
button to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or midControl
tones).
Color CreatorISO
WB

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust
saturation.
Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

Magnify

The zoom frame will be displayed.

Image Aspect

Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

S-OVF
Peaking

Press the button to turn the feature on or oﬀ.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

EN 471
Choosing the Settings Available via Multi-Fn
Choose the settings that can be accessed via multi-function buttons. The selection
is made from a menu.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Choose the settings that can accessed via multi-Fn.

4

Press the MENU button when settings arecomplete.

5

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

Display G Custom Menu P (Disp/8/PC), highlight[Multi Function Settings], and press I on the arrowpad.

• Press the OK button to select items; selected items aremarked with a v and can be accessed via multi-Fn.
• If you do not intend to use the item, press the OK button
again to remove the v and deselect the item.

• G Custom Menu P will be displayed.

• Highlight and shadow control is always available via multi-Fn.

4472 EN

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials(K Dial Function)
Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials. You can also choose thefunction selected using the Fn lever (P. 475). You can also choose the operations
performed during playback or when menus are displayed.
The functions assigned to controls using this item are available only in modes P,
A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The functions assigned using [n Dial
Function] in the n video menu take eﬀect in n (movie) mode (P. 424).
The roles that can be performed by the dials in photo shooting and q playback
modes are listed below. You can choose separate options for Positions 1 and 2 on
the Fn lever.
Shooting modeRole
Ps (program shift)

Function
Program shift.

P

A

S

M

B



—

—

—

—

Shutter

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—





*

FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—



—





F

Adjust exposure compensation.











x

Adjust ﬂash compensation.











ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.











WB

Adjust white balance.











CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when
CWB (custom) is selected for whitebalance.











Oﬀ

None.











A/Value (move cursor
up or down)Move the cursor up or down whilemenus are displayed.

B (move cursor left or
right)

Move the cursor left or right whilemenus are displayed.

Ga (index/playback
zoom)

Zoom in or out or switch to the index
display during playback.

Prev/Next

View the next or previous image during
playback.

4——* Switch between bulb, time, and live composite.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

EN 473

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu J (Button/Dial/Lever).

3

Highlight [K Dial Function] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired mode and press the I button.
1
2

If you selected [P], [A], [S], or [M/B]:• Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG
buttons to choose a role.
• Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
• Press the OK button when settings are complete.

4

If you selected [Menu] or [q]:• Choose a role using the FG buttons and press the OK
button.

5474 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2

Customizing the Fn Lever(K Fn Lever Function)

Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and rear dials or to recall
focus settings. It can also be used to select movie mode.
This setting takes eﬀect in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The
option selected using [n Fn Lever Function] in the n video menu take eﬀect in n(movie) mode (P. 426).
mode1

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1 and 2
conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 473).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode], [AF Target
Mode], and [AF Target Point].

mode3

Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode without rotating themode dial.

Oﬀ

Changing the position of the Fn lever has no eﬀect.

• This option is not available when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected for [Fn Lever/Power
Lever] (P. 501) in G Custom Menu J.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu J (Button/Dial/Lever).

4

3

Highlight [K Fn Lever Function] using FG on thearrow pad and press the I button.

4

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Pressing the I button when [mode2] is highlighted
displays focus settings, allowing you to choose the focus
settings selected with the Fn lever.
[AF Mode]:
S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: Single, all, etc.
[AF Target Point]: AF-target position

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

EN 475

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

[K Fn Lever Function] > [mode2]
When [mode2] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function], the camera will store
separate focus settings for Positions 1 and 2.
• The [MF] and [Preset MF] options assigned to controls using [K Button Function] cannot be
used.

1

Rotate the Fn lever to Position 1.

Fn lever• The camera can store the settings selected for:
[AF Mode]:
S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: Single, all, etc.
[AF Target Point]: AF-target position2

Repeat the process for Position 2.

3

Rotate the lever to the desired position to recall the
saved settings.

4476 EN

4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials

4-4“My Menu”

The camera menus contain a profusion of items fordiﬀerent subjects and shooting styles. Quickly ﬁnd theitems you need when, for example, choosing menu
options during shooting.

Creating a Personalized Menu

(My Menu)

4

You can use “My Menu” to create a personalized menu tab containing only items
you select. “My Menu” can contain up to 5 pages of 7 items each. You can delete
items or change the page or item order.
At purchase, “My Menu” contains no items.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight an item for inclusion in “My Menu”.
• Items that can be added to “My Menu” are indicated by a
P icon at the top right corner of the display.

Item can be added to“My Menu”

4-4 “My Menu”

EN 477

3

Press the R (movie) button.

R (movie) button• You will prompted to choose a page. Use FG on thearrow pad to choose the “My Menu” page to which theitem will be added.

4

Press the OK button to add the item to the selected
page.
• The camera will display a message stating that the item
has been added to “My Menu”.

• Items that have been added to “My Menu” are indicatedby a yellow P.
• The next available page will be displayed once theseventh item is added to the current page.
• Items marked with a P can be removed from “My Menu”
by pressing the R button. A conﬁrmation dialog will be
displayed; to proceed, highlight [Yes] and press the OK
button.
• Items saved to “My Menu” are added to the P (“MyMenu”) tab.

4

P (“My Menu”) tab

5

478 ENTo access "My Menu", select the P (“My Menu”)
tab.

4-4 “My Menu”

Managing “My Menu”
You can reorder items in “My Menu”, move them between pages, or remove themfrom “My Menu” altogether.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display the “My Menu” page you want to edit andpress the R (movie) button.

R (movie) button• The options below will be displayed.
[Rearrange Order]:Change the order or items
or pages. Use the arrow pad(FGHI) to choose the newlocation.
[Remove this item]:Remove the highlighted item from“My Menu”. Highlight [Yes] andpress the OK button.
[Remove this P tab]: Remove from “My Menu” all itemson the current page. Highlight[Yes] and press the OK button.

44-4 “My Menu”

EN 479

4-5

Customizing Camera
Functions

The camera features many menus for customizing
camera functions according to your subject or shooting
style. Fine-tuning such functions as autofocus, drivemode, or exposure helps you get the most from yourcamera. These menus may be found under the G(custom) menu.

Focus-Related Items(Custom Menus J, K, L, and I)
These menus oﬀer a variety of focus-related items.

J Focus Mode

(K AF Mode)

Choose the focus mode for auto or manual focus.
• This item is for still photography. See page 115 for more information.

4

S-AFb */S-AF(single AF)

Choose for photographs of subjects that are stationary or not
moving away from or toward the camera. The camera focuses once
each time the shutter button is pressed halfway.

C-AFb */C-AF(continuous AF)

Choose to track focus on subjects whose distance to the camera iscontinuously changing. The camera focuses continuously while the
shutter button is pressed halfway.

MF (manual focus)

Focus manually by rotating the lens focus ring.

C-AF+TRb */C-AF+TR (tracking AF)

Choose to track focus on a speciﬁc subject while keeping thecomposition roughly the same. On detecting the subject, the camera
will continue to track it while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Preset MF (preset MF)

Focus at a preset distance.

* When [On] is selected for [K AF+MF], you can manually adjust focus using the lens focus
ring after focusing via autofocus. g “J Combined Auto and Manual Focus (K AF+MF)”(P. 481)J tab

480 EN[K AF Mode]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

J Combined Auto and Manual Focus(K AF+MF)

After focusing using autofocus, you can adjust focus manually by keeping the
shutter button pressed halfway and rotating the focus ring.
Focus can be adjusted manually using the lens focus ring. Switch from auto to
manual focus at will or ﬁne-tune focus manually after focusing with autofocus. The
procedure varies with the AF mode selected. [Oﬀ] is selected by default (P. 640).
• This item is for still photography. See page 115 for more information.
Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. b is displayed next to [S-AF],[C-AF], or [C-AF+TR].
After focusing using single AF, you can keep the shutter
button pressed halfway and adjust focus manually.
Alternatively, you can switch to manual focus by rotating the
focus ring while the camera is focusing. Focus can also be
adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
C-AFb/C-AF+TRb: You can switch to manual focus by rotating the focus ring
while the camera is focusing in continuous AF and continuous
tracking AF modes. Press the shutter button halfway asecond time to refocus using autofocus. Focus can also be
adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
S-AFb:On

Oﬀ

Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.

• Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g [K AEL/AFL] (P. 141)
• The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro Four
Thirds PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit the OLYMPUS website.
• In B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time Focusing].

J tab[K AF+MF]

4

Use FG to select [On] or [Oﬀ]

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 481

J Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button(K AEL/AFL)
Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or AEL/
AFL button is pressed. The camera normally focuses and locks exposure when the
shutter button is pressed halfway, but this can be changed according to the subject
or shooting conditions.
• This item is for still photography. See page 141 for more information.
mode1/mode2/
mode3/mode4

Choose the combination of metering and/or focus performed when the
AEL/AFL button is pressed or the shutter button is pressed halfway or all
the way down.
Choose whether the camera focuses if the shutter button is pressed halfway
when autofocus is assigned to the AEL/AFL button in focus modes [S-AF],[S-AFb], [C-AF], and [C-AFb].

Half Way AF

J tab

4

[Operative]: The camera focuses when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
[Inoperative]: The camera does not focus when the shutter button ispressed halfway.

[K AEL/AFL]

Choose an option

J C-AF Lens Scanning(AF Scanner)

Choose whether the camera performs a focus scan. If the camera is unable tofocus, it will scan for the focus position by cycling the lens from the minimum focus
distance to inﬁnity. You can limit the scanning operation if desired.
• This item is for still photography. See page 146 for more information.
• The selected option takes eﬀect when [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], [C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] ischosen for [K AF Mode] (P. 115).
mode1

The camera will not scan if unable to focus. This prevents focus changing to suchan extent that you lose sight of your subject when attempting to track small objects
and the like.

mode2

When unable to focus, the camera scans only once at the start of the focus
operation. The camera will not scan again as long as the focus operation continues.

mode3

The camera scans when unable to focus, cycling focus as often as necessary if itloses track of the subject during the focus operation.

J tab[AF Scanner]

482 EN

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

J C-AF Tracking Sensitivity(K C-AF Sensitivity)

Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
during focusing. This can help prevent the camera refocusing when you are unable
to track a quickly-moving subject or when an object passes between the subject andthe camera.
• This item is for still photography. See page 145 for more information.
• The selected option takes eﬀect when [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], [C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] ischosen for [K AF Mode] (P. 115).
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects thatsuddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent the camera
refocusing when the subject is brieﬂy obscured by other objects or to prevent the camera
focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF target.

J tab[K C-AF Sensitivity]

Choose an option

J C-AF Starting Focus Target(K C-AF Center Start)

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] focus on the center of the selectedgroup only during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera will focus using
the surrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target mode that covers awide area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.

4• This item is for still photography. See page 147 for more information.

J tab[K C-AF Center Start]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Center start is enabled in modes indicated by a v.
• Center start does not take eﬀect when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 148) is enabled.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 483

J C-AF Center Target Priority(K C-AF Center Priority)

When focusing using group- or custom-target AF in [C-AF] and [C-AFb] modes,
the camera always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for arepeated series of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using
the center focus target will it focus using the surrounding targets in the selectedfocus group. This helps you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively
predictably. C-AF center priority is recommended in most situations.
• This item is for still photography. See page 148 for more information.

J tab[K C-AF Center Priority]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Center priority is enabled in modes indicated by a v.

4484 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

K Hiding AF Target Modes(KNMode Settings)

Choose the target modes displayed during AF-target mode selection (P. 120).
Hiding unused modes speeds target-mode selection.
• This item is for still photography.

1Highlight [KNMode Settings] in the K (AF/MF)
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight an AF target mode you wish to havedisplayed.

3

Press the OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit whensettings are complete.

• Selected items are marked with a v.

• Only items marked with v will be available during AFtarget mode selection.
%• The custom AF-target mode is hidden by default. Select the custom mode to enable custom
AF-target selection. g [t Target Mode Settings] (P. 125)

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

4

EN 485

K AF Target Display Mode

(AF Area Pointer)

In autofocus mode, the position of the subject on which the camera has focused isshown by a green focus target. This item controls the display of the focus target.
Oﬀ

The focus target is not displayed.

On1

The focus target is displayed only brieﬂy after the camera focuses.

On2

After the camera focuses, the focus target will be displayed while the shutter button ispressed halfway.

K tab[AF Area Pointer]

Choose an option• [On2] is not available in movie mode.
• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb], [C-AF], or [C-AFb] ischosen for [K AF Mode] (P. 115), select [On2] for [AF Area
Pointer] (P. 486). The camera will display AF targets for all
areas that are in focus.

4

K Touch AF Target Selection for Viewﬁnder Photography(AF Targeting Pad)
Use touch controls in the monitor to select the AF target during viewﬁnder
photography. Glide a ﬁnger over the monitor to position the focus target while
viewing your subject in the viewﬁnder.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

Monitor touch controls cannot be used for AF-target selection during viewﬁnder
photography.

On

Monitor touch controls can be used for AF-target selection during viewﬁnder
photography. Gently tap the monitor twice to enable or disable touch AF-target
selection. When the target reaches the edge of the display, you can lift and then glide
your ﬁnger again to enable q (all target) mode.

• When [On] is selected, touch controls can also be used to position the zoom frame (P. 136).

K tab

486 EN[AF Targeting Pad]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

K Choosing the AF Home Position(N Set Home)

Choose the home position for the [N Home] feature.
The [N Home] feature lets you recall a previously-saved “home position” forautofocus at the touch of a button. This item is used to choose the home position.
To access [N Set Home], assign it to a control using [K Button Function](P. 463). You also have the option of assigning it to the multi selector using[S Center Button] (P. 499). If [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 489) is active, thecamera will store separate home positions for landscape (wide) and portrait (tall)orientations.
• This item is for still photography.
AF ModeChoose the home position autofocus mode.

AF Target Mode

Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for[KNMode Settings] are available.

AF Target Point

Choose the home position focus target.

1

Highlight [NSet Home] in the K (AF/MF) menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home
position and press the OK button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Items marked witha v are included in the home position.

3

4

Press I on the arrow pad to display options for thehighlighted setting.
• Choose settings for the home position.
• When [K Orientation Linked N] is active, you will beprompted to select landscape or portrait (camera rotatedleft/camera rotated right) orientation before pressing the
I button to display options.

4

Press the OK button to save changes when settings
are complete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit whensettings are complete.

• The settings list will be displayed.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 487

K AF-Target Selection(N Select Screen Settings)

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF target
selection. The controls used can be selected according to how the camera is usedor personal taste. You can choose up to two combinations.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

Available Controls
Front dial, rear dial, FG on the arrow pad, the HI buttons.
Available Roles[6Pos]: Position the AF target[NMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., all, small, or group).
Adjust settings for face/eye detection AF.
[I]:[N Select Screen Settings]
Choose a set *K tab
Choose a role
(front or rear dials or arrow pad)Choose a control* If you select [Set 2], the options in the [N Select Screen Settings] menu will be checked(v). [Set 2] can be recalled by pressing the INFO button in the AF-target selection display.

4

K AF Target Size and Positioning(t Target Mode Settings)
Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves during
AF-target selection. Targets can be larger than group targets or sized for subjects
whose motion can be predicted. You can also increase the distance between
available targets for faster target selection. The camera can store up to four diﬀerent
combinations of settings.
• This item is for still photography. See page 125 for more information.
Size

Choose the target size. Target width and height can be set separately. Choose from
options of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.

Step

Choose the number of steps the target moves during target selection. The horizontal
and vertical step sizes can be set separately; choose from steps of 1, 2, and 3.

K tab[t Target Mode Settings]

Choose an option• If the AF-target or step size is altered from the default value, a v will appear next to thecustom target option in [KNMode Settings] (P. 485).

488 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

K Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera Orientation(K Orientation Linked N)
The camera can be conﬁgured to change the AF-target position and AF-target mode
automatically when it detects that it has been rotated between landscape (wide)or portrait (tall) orientations. Rotating the camera changes the composition andconsequently also the position of the subject in the frame. The camera can store the
AF target mode and AF target position separately according to camera orientation.
When this option is active, [N Set Home] (P. 487) can be used to store separate
home positions for landscape and portrait orientations.
• This item is for still photography.
AF Target Mode

Choose separate AF target modes (e.g., all, small, or group) forlandscape and portrait orientations.

AF Target Point

Choose separate AF targets for landscape and portrait orientations.

1

Highlight [K Orientation Linked N] in the K (AF/MF) menu and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight a setting you wish saved separately andpress the OK button.
• Selected items are marked with a v.

4
3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit whensettings are complete.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

4

Choose the AF target mode or target position withthe camera ﬁrst in one orientation and then theother.
• Separate settings are stored for landscape orientation,
portrait orientation with the camera rotated to the right,
and portrait orientation with the camera rotated to theleft.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 489

L Lens Focus Range(AF Limiter)

Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is eﬀective insituations in which an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera
during the focus operation, causing drastic changes in focus. You can also use it toprevent the camera focusing on foreground objects when shooting through a fence,
window, or the like.
• This item is for still photography. See page 143 for more information.
Distance settings

Choose the range of focus distances available. The camera can store
up to three settings for diﬀerent situations. Distances are approximate
and intended as guides only.

Release Priority

The shutter can still be released if the camera is unable to focus when[On] is selected for [AF Limiter].

L tab[AF Limiter]

Choose an option%[AF Limiter] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to limit
focus range. Hold the button and rotate a dial to choose from the three stored settings.
g [K Button Function] (P. 463)

4

L AF Illuminator Autofocus Assist(AF Illuminator)

The AF illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.
On

The illuminator lights during autofocus if the subject is poorly lit.

Oﬀ

The illuminator does not light even if the subject is poorly lit.

L tab

[AF Illuminator]

Choose an option• To use the AF illuminator during silent photography, you will need to change the option
selected for [Silent s Mode Settings] (P. 167).

490 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

L Face/Eye Priority AF(I Face Priority)

The camera detects faces automatically. Depending on the option selected, it
can detect and focus on faces or eyes. In either instance, exposure is weighted
according to the value metered for the face.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. See pages 133 and360 for more information.

I(face priority on)

The camera detects and focuses on faces.

J (face priority oﬀ)

Face priority AF oﬀ.

K

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eye closest
to the camera.

(face and eye priority)

L (face and right eye priority)

The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.

M (face and left eye priority)

The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

L tab

[I Face Priority]

Choose an option

L Tracking Focus on Selected Subjects(K Tracking Subject)
The camera can detect and track subjects of speciﬁc types when focusing using[C-AF+TR] or [C-AF+TRb]. You may ﬁnd it hard to focus on the driver or cockpit
of a fast-moving subject such as a race car or airplane. This feature detects andfocuses speciﬁc elements of such subjects.

4• This item is for still photography. See page 149 for more information.
Motorsports

The camera detects cars or motorcycles. It tracks focus on such elements as
the chassis (chieﬂy of types used in motor sports) or driver.

Airplanes

The camera detects planes and helicopters. It tracks focus on such elements
as the fuselage or cockpit.

Trains

The camera detects trains. It tracks focus on such elements as the cars or
driver’s compartment.

Oﬀ

Tracking subject selection disabled.

L tab[K Tracking Subject]

Choose an option• Selecting an option other than [Oﬀ] automatically sets face/eye detection to [Oﬀ].
• The following cannot be used while photography is in progress:
the live ND ﬁlter, interval-timer or HDR photography, keystone compensation, ﬁsheye
correction, High Res Shot, focus bracketing, or Pro Capture High

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 491

L Fine-Tuning Autofocus(AF Focus Adj.)

Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus. Focus can be ﬁne-tuned by up to ±20 steps.
• This item is for still photography.
• Normally there is no need to ﬁne-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-tuning focus may
prevent the camera focusing normally.
• Focus ﬁne-tuning has no eﬀect in [S-AF] and [S-AFb] modes.
Oﬀ

Fine-tuning disabled.

Default Data

Fine-tune focus for all lenses.

Lens Data

Save ﬁne-tuning values on a lens-by-lens basis. The camera can store
ﬁne-tuning values for up to 20 lenses. Focus for individual lenses can be
ﬁne-tuned in speciﬁc areas of the frame. In the case of zoom lenses, separate
values can be stored for long and short focal lengths.

1

Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in the L (AF/MF) menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight [Default Data] or [Lens Data] and press the
I button.
• If you selected [Default Data], proceed to Step 5.
• To disable ﬁne-tuning, highlight [Oﬀ] and press the OK
button.

43Highlight [Create Lens Data Set] and press the OK
button.
• You will be prompted to choose the area of the frame forwhich focus will be ﬁne-tuned.

4

Use the FGHI buttons to choose an area of theframe and then press the OK button.
• With zoom lenses, you can press the INFO button tochoose between long (telephoto) and short (wide) focal
lengths.

492 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

5

Choose a ﬁne-tuning value using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• The selected value will be saved. If you chose [Default
Data], the options shown in Step 2 will be displayed.
• If you chose [Lens Data], the dialog shown in Step 3 will
be displayed. The display will show the name of the lensfor which the ﬁne-tuning value was saved.
• Rotate the rear dial to zoom in and check focus.
• Before pressing the OK button, press the shutter button
to take a test shot and check focus.
• To save another ﬁne-tuning value for the current lens,press the I button and repeat the process from Step 4.

6

To ﬁne-tune focus for the same lens but in a diﬀerent
area of the frame, highlight the lens name using theFG buttons and press the I button.
• Repeat the process from Step 4.

7

When the process is complete, press the MENU
button repeatedly to exit the menus.


Deleting Saved Values

1Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in the L (AF/MF) menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

42Highlight [Lens Data] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

3

Use the FG buttons to highlight the name of thelens you wish to delete from the ﬁne-tuning list andthen press the I button.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 493

4Highlight [Delete] using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed.

5

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• The dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Conﬁrm
that the lens name has been deleted.

• To disable AF ﬁne-tuning without deleting the entries for the current lens, select [Oﬀ] for [AFFocus Adj.].
$• The camera can store multiple values for each lens.


Enabling Fine-Tuning
Display the lens data list and place checks (v) next to the items you wish to use.
[AF Focus Adj.][Lens Data]
L tabbuttons and press the OK button

4

Highlight items using the FG

I Choosing a Focus Distance for Preset MF(Preset MF distance)

Quickly focus at a previously-stored distance. An example of a situation in which thisoption might eﬀective is astronomical photography featuring the moon or stars, when
you want to focus quickly at inﬁnity.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. See pages 129 and357 for more information.

I tab[Preset MF distance]

Choose a value• If the lens is equipped with a focus limiter, disable it before proceeding.
• The ﬁgures displayed are intended as guides only.

494 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

I Manual Focus Assist(MF Assist)

This feature is used to assist manual focus. You can set the camera to automaticallyzoom in on the view through the lens or highlight in-focus areas in color when thelens focus ring is rotated.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Magnify

The display automatically zooms in on the view through the lens when the lensfocus ring is rotated.

Peaking

In-focus areas are highlighted in color when the lens focus ring is rotated.

• The highlight color and other peaking settings can be adjusted using the [Peaking Settings]
item in G Custom Menu R (P. 525).
• Focus zoom is not available during movie recording or when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] isselected for focus mode.

1

Highlight [MF Assist] in the I (AF/MF) menu andpress I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight [Magnify] or [Peaking] and press the I
button.

4
3Choose an option using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.

4

When settings are complete, press the MENU
button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• When manual focus is in eﬀect, you can:- Rotate the front or rear dial to zoom in or out during focus zoom.
- Display focus peaking options by pressing the INFO button during focus peaking.
Highlight options using the front dial or HI buttons and use the rear dial or FG
buttons to choose settings. You can adjust [Peaking Color], [Highlight Intensity], and[Image Brightness Adj.].

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 495

I Disabling the MF Clutch(MF Clutch)

Disable the manual focus clutch. This can prevent autofocus being disabled by the
clutch engaging accidentally.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. See pages 128 and356 for more information.
Operative

The camera responds to the position of the lens focus ring.

Inoperative

The camera focuses according to the option selected for [K AF Mode] or[n AF Mode], regardless of the position of the lens focus ring. Manual focus is
not available even when the focus ring is in the manual focus position.

I tab

4

[MF Clutch]

Choose an option

I Lens Focus Direction(Focus Ring)

Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to adjust focus.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
V Rotate the ring counterclockwise to increase the focus distance.
U Rotate the ring clockwise to increase the focus distance.

I tab

496 EN[Focus Ring]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

I Adjusting Focus During Long Exposures(Bulb/Time Focusing)

You can change focus position manually when using bulb photography for a longexposure. This allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the
exposure. This option takes eﬀect in mode B.
• This item is for still photography. See page 107 for more information.
Oﬀ

The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.

On

The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.

I tab[Bulb/Time Focusing]Choose an option

I Resetting the Lens Position at Shutdown(Reset Lens)

You have the option of not restoring the lens to the reset focus position when thecamera is turned oﬀ. This lets you turn the camera oﬀ without changing the focus
position.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

The lens focus position is not reset when the camera is turned oﬀ. Power zoom lenses
also return to the zoom position they were in before the camera was turned oﬀ.

On

The lens focus position is reset when the camera is turned oﬀ.

I tab[Reset Lens]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 497

Control-Related Items(Custom Menus J and K)
These menus contain items used to customize camera buttons, dials, the multiselector, and switches.

J Assigning Roles to Buttons(K Button Function)

Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing roles. Menu items
can be assigned to buttons for quick access during shooting.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls using this item areavailable only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes).
• For more information, see “Assigning Roles to Buttons (K Button Function)” (P. 463) in“4-3 Customizing Buttons and Dials”.
• The functions assigned using [n Button Function] (P. 417) in the n video menu takeeﬀect in n (movie) mode.

Customizable Controls

4

Icon

Control (orientation)

Icon

Control (orientation)

XF

F (exposure compensation)
buttonXY

One-touch white balance button

XK

ISO button

XZ

Preview button

XR

R (movie) button

YF

Vertical-use F (exposurecompensation) button

Xu

u (LV) button

YK

Vertical-use ISO button

XF

Fn button

Yt

Vertical-use AEL/AFL button

YY

Vertical-use one-touch whitebalance button

YZ

Vertical-use preview buttonl

L-Fn (the Fn buttons on the
lens)

Xt

AEL/AFL button

XL

WB button

Xd

Arrow pad

XD

Arrow pad I (right)

XE

Arrow pad G (down)

J tab[K Button Function]
Select a control using FG on the arrow pad
Select a role using FG on the arrow pad

498 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

J Multi Selector Press(S Center Button)

Choose the operation performed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector
can then function as a button.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

No role assigned. Pressing the multi selector has no eﬀect.

N (AF target selection)

Press the multi selector to adjust settings for AF target selection,
AF target mode, or face priority AF. The arrow pad or front and reardials can be used according to the setting selected for [N Select
Screen Settings] (P. 488) in G Custom Menu K.

The multi selector functions as a [N Home] button. This option
Np (AF area HOME) applies in still photography modes only. g [K Button Function](P. 463)

J tab[S Center Button]

Choose an option

J Multi Selector Tilt

(T Direction Key)

Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector. The multi selector is
normally used to position the AF target, but this function can be disabled to prevent
unintended operation.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

Pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right has no eﬀect.

N (AF-target selection)

The multi selector can be used to position the AF-target (P. 123,
352).

J tab

[T Direction Key]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 499

J Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials(K Dial Function)

Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials. You can also choose thefunction selected using the Fn lever. You can also choose the operations performed
during playback or when menus are displayed.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls using this item areavailable only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). See page 473 formore information. The functions assigned in the n video menu take eﬀect in n (movie)
mode (P. 424).

Available Roles• Ps (program shift)• Shutter speed• Aperture• Exposure compensation• Flash compensation• ISO sensitivity• WB mode

J tab

4

[K Dial Function]• CWB color temperature• Oﬀ• A/Value (move cursor up or down)• B (move cursor left or right)• Ga (index/playback zoom)• Frame advance/rewind

Select a mode

Select a role

J Changing the Dial Direction(Dial Direction)

Choose the direction in which the dials are rotated to set exposure.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Exposure

Choose the direction the dials are rotated to set aperture and shutter speed in
A, S, M, and B modes.

Ps

Choose the direction the dials are rotated for program shift (mode P).

J tab

500 EN[Dial Direction]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose a setting

J Assigning a Role to the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)
Choose the role performed by the Fn lever.

• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls using this item areavailable only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). See page 475 formore information. The functions assigned in the n video menu take eﬀect in n (movie)
mode (P. 426).
mode1

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1 and 2
conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 473).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode], [AF Target
Mode], and [AF Target Point].

mode3

Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode without rotating themode dial.

Oﬀ

Changing the position of the Fn lever has no eﬀect.

J tab[K Fn Lever Function]

Highlight an option and press the OK button.

• When [mode2] is highlighted, you can press I on the arrow pad to display AF settings.
• Available AF target modes are indicated by check marks (v).
• The option selected for [n Fn Lever Function] does not take eﬀect in [mode3].

J Turning the Camera On or Oﬀ with the Fn lever(Fn Lever/Power Lever)4

The Fn lever can be used as an on/oﬀ lever. Use this feature if you would like to use
your right hand to turn the camera on or oﬀ during shooting.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Fn

The lever functions according to the options selected for [K Fn Lever Function]and [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 426).

Power 1The lever functions as an on/oﬀ lever. Position 1 is on and Position 2 is oﬀ.

Power 2The lever functions as an on/oﬀ lever. Position 1 is oﬀ and Position 2 is on.

J tab[Fn Lever/Power Lever]Choose an option• The ON/OFF lever cannot be used to turn the camera oﬀ when [Power 1] or [Power 2] isselected. [K Fn Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever Function] are similarly unavailable.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 501

K Power Zoom Lenses(K Elec. Zoom Speed)

Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in or out when the zoom
ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it is so quick that you ﬁnd it hard to frame yoursubject. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and [High].
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n Elec. Zoom Speed] in then video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie) mode (P. 408).
Low

Slow zoom. A good choice when precise adjustments are needed.

NormalNormal zoom speed.

High

Fast zoom.

K tab[K Elec. Zoom Speed]

4502 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose an option

K Conﬁguring the Lock Lever(C-LOCK Settings)

Choose the controls locked when the lock lever on theback of the camera is set to C-LOCK. The lock lever canbe used to lock controls and prevent them being used.
In the C-LOCK position, you can choose the controls
locked.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie
recording.
• The controls that can be locked with the lock lever are listed below. The items in the LOCK
column cannot be changed. The items in the C-LOCK column can be changed using thisoption.
LOCKControl

C-LOCK

Front dial—Rear dial—F (BKT, AFp, and ﬂash/sequential shooting/self-timer)
buttons—Multi selector—

Fn lever—

Arrow pad—OK button—

Touch screen—Vertical-use shutter buttonVertical-use front dialVertical-use rear dialVertical-use exposure compensation buttonVertical-use ISO buttonVertical-use AEL/AFL buttonVertical-use multi selector





4

• The selected control is locked not only during shooting but also while settings are being
adjusted, for example in the menus or LV super control panel.
• The role selected for the Fn lever cannot be changed while controls are locked.
• The lock does not apply to the Fn lever if it has been conﬁgured to act as an on/oﬀ leverusing [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 501).

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 503

1

Highlight [C-LOCK Settings] in the K (Button/Dial/
Lever) menu and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight controls you want locked when the locklever is the C-LOCK position and press the OK
button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Selected items will
be locked.

3

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit whensettings are complete.

4504 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Release-Related Items(Custom Menus N and O)

These menus contain items used to customize features related to the shutter
release, including burst shooting options.

N Choosing the Operation Performed If Focus Fails with
[S-AF] Selected for [K AF Mode] (S-AF Release Priority)
Choose whether the camera will take a photograph if unable to focus with [S-AF] or[S-AFb] selected for [K AF Mode].
• This item is for still photography.
OnA photo will be taken when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, even if thecamera is unable to focus.

Oﬀ

No photo will be taken when the shutter button is pressed all the way down unless thecamera is able to focus. If a ﬂash is used, the shutter will not be released until the ﬂash
has charged.

N tab[S-AF Release Priority]

Choose an option

N Choosing the Operation Performed If Focus Fails with
[C-AF] Selected for [K AF Mode] (C-AF Release Priority)

4

Choose whether the camera will take a photograph if unable to focus with [C-AF],[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for [K AF Mode].
• This item is for still photography.
OnA photo will be taken when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, even if thecamera is unable to focus.

Oﬀ

No photo will be taken when the shutter button is pressed all the way down unless thecamera is able to focus. If a ﬂash is used, the shutter will not be released until the ﬂash
has charged.

N tab[C-AF Release Priority]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 505

N [Sequential Low] Frame Rates and Burst Limits(jL Settings)
Customize settings for [Sequential Low], [jL Anti-Shock r], [jL Silent s], and[Pro Capture Low] modes.
• This item is for still photography. For more information, see the pages listed below.
j/j(sequential low/anti-shock
sequential low)♥j(silent sequential low)

Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots (P. 155).
[Max fps]:
1–10 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots (P. 155).
[Max fps]:
1–10, 15, or 18 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Choose the frame rate, the maximum number of shots taken
before the shutter button is pressed all the way down, andmaximum total shots (P. 168).

J (Pro Capture low)

[Max fps]:
10, 15, or 18 fps[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 0–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording
begins.

1

Highlight [jL Settings] in the N (Release/j/
Image Stabilizer) menu and press I on the arrowpad.

2Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

3

Highlight a sub-option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4506 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

4

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• When choosing the [Frame Count Limiter] for [J],highlight a value and press the I button. When
prompted to choose the maximum number of shots,
highlight a value using the FGHI buttons and press
the OK button.

5

When settings are complete, press the MENU
button repeatedly to exit the menus.

N [Sequential High] Frame Rates and Burst Limits(jH Settings)
Customize settings for [Sequential High], [jH Silent s], and [Pro Capture High]modes.

4• This item is for still photography. For more information, see the pages listed below.

j (sequential high)♥j (silent sequential high)Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots(P. 155).
[Max fps]:
10–15 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots(P. 155).
[Max fps]:
15, 20, 30, or 60 fps[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Choose the frame rate, the maximum number of shots taken
before the shutter button is pressed all the way down, andmaximum total shots (P. 168).

J (Pro Capture high)[Max fps]:
15, 20, 30, or 60 fps[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 0–99, Oﬀ (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording
begins.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 5074

1Highlight [jH Settings] in the N (Release/j/
Image Stabilizer) menu and press I on the arrowpad.

2Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

3

Highlight a sub-option using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• When choosing the [Frame Count Limiter] for [J],highlight a value and press the I button. When
prompted to choose the maximum number of shots,
highlight a value using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

5508 EN

When settings are complete, press the MENU
button repeatedly to exit the menus.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

N Release Timing(Flicker Reduction)

When shooting under ﬂuorescent or other artiﬁcial workplace or outdoor lighting,you may notice ﬂicker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken atfast shutter speeds. This item reduces these eﬀects.
• For more information on ﬂicker reduction, read the explanation on page 190.
Reduce ﬂicker under ﬂuorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if
ﬂicker makes the display diﬃcult to view.

Anti-Flicker LV

Anti-Flicker
Shooting

N tab[Auto]: The camera detects and reduces ﬂicker.
[50Hz]: Reduce ﬂicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered byalternating current with a frequency of 50 Hz.
[60Hz]: Reduce ﬂicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered byalternating current with a frequency of 60 Hz.
[Oﬀ]: Flicker reduction oﬀ.
The camera automatically detects the frequency of the ﬂicker and times the
shutter release appropriately. This item is for still photography. It applies tophotos taken with the mechanical shutter.

[Flicker reduction]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• Enabling [Anti-Flicker Shooting] disables functions that use the electronic shutter, including
silent mode, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture.
• Flicker detection may fail under some conditions. In this case, normal release timing will be
used.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling [Anti-Flicker Shooting] may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rateduring burst photography.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

4

EN 509

O Reducing Camera Blur

(K Image Stabilizer)

Reduce blur caused by the camera shake that commonly occurs, for example, when
the subject is poorly lit or in photos taken at high zoom ratios.
• This item is for still photography. See page 176 for more information. The option selected
for [n AF/IS Settings] > [n Image Stabilizer] (P. 376) in the n video menu takes eﬀect inn (movie) mode.
S-IS Oﬀ

Image stabilization disabled. Select this option when using a
tripod.

S-IS AUTO (auto)

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes. If panningmotion is detected, the camera will automatically suspend image
stabilization on that axis.

S-IS1 (multi-directional)

Image stabilization applies to all camera motion.

S-IS2 (vertical)

Image stabilization applies to motion at right angles to the camera
base. Use when panning the camera horizontally.

S-IS3 (horizontal)

Image stabilization applies to motion parallel to the camera base.
Choose when panning left or right with the camera in portrait (tall)orientation.

• When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will needto specify the lens focal length. Press I on the arrow pad in the menu where you select an
option, then use the FGHI button to highlight a value and press the OK button. If thelens information saved with [Lens Info Settings] (P. 550) is used, the saved focal length will
be applied.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.

4%• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway. g G Custom Menu O > [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 178)O tab

510 EN[K Image Stabilizer]

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose an option

O Burst Mode Image Stabilization(j Image Stabilization)

Choose the type of image stabilization applied during burst shooting.
To maximize the eﬀects of image stabilization during burst shooting, the camera
centers the image sensor for every shot. This slightly reduces the frame advancerate.
• This item is for still photography. See page 174 for more information.
IS Priority

Priority is given to image stabilization. The frame advance rate drops slightly.

Fps Priority

Priority is given to the frame advance rate. Image stabilization may be slightly
less eﬀective under some conditions.

O tab[j Image Stabilization]

Choose an option

O Half-Press Image Stabilization(Half Way Rls With IS)

Choose whether image stabilization applies while the shutter button is pressedhalfway. An example of a situation in which you might want to suspend image
stabilization would be when using the level gauge to keep the camera level while
framing photographs.

4• This item is for still photography. See page 178 for more information.
On

Image stabilization is performed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Oﬀ

Image stabilization is not performed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

O tab[Half Way Rls With IS]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 511O Image Stabilization for IS Lenses(Lens I.S. Priority)

When using a third-party lens with an on-board image stabilizer, choose whether
image stabilization gives priority to the camera or the lens. This option has no eﬀect
if the lens is equipped with an IS switch that can be used to enable or disable image
stabilization.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
On

Priority is given to lens image stabilization.

Oﬀ

Priority is given to camera image stabilization.

O tab[Lens I.S. Priority]

Choose an option

4

512 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Display-, Sound-, and Connection-Related Items(Custom Menus P, Q, R, and S)
These menus contain items pertaining to the information displayed in the monitor
and viewﬁnder to aid shooting, the choice of on-screen controls, the settings used
for connection to external devices, and the like.

P Viewing On-Screen Controls(K Control Settings)

View or hide on-screen controls during shooting.
Use this option to hide on-screen controls (live controls and the LV super control
panel) so that they cannot be displayed via the INFO button.
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n Display Settings] > [n Control
Settings] in the n video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie) mode. See page 428 for more
information.
• For more information, see the section for each of the on-screen controls.
Live Control

Live controls are used to view and adjust core shooting settings during live
view. The eﬀects of the selected settings can be previewed in the live view
display. For more information, see page 68.

Live SCPThe LV super control panel is used to list and adjust shooting settings. It canalso be used to view current settings. For more information, see page 62.

12Highlight [K Control Settings] in the P (Disp/8/
PC) menu and press I on the arrow pad.

4

Highlight items using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Selected items will
be displayed.

3

When settings are complete, press the MENU
button repeatedly to exit the menus.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 513


Displaying On-Screen Controls

1

Press the OK button during live view in P, A, S, M, or B mode.
• The LV super control panel will be displayed.
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

OK

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

2

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Press the INFO button to display live controls.

• The on-screen controls displayed change each time the INFO is pressed.

INFO

3

After adjusting settings, press the OK button to exit the on-screen controls.
• Pressing the OK button will in future display the last on-screen controls used.

• The INFO button cannot be used to toggle on-screen controls if it can be used to display
options for the item currently selected in the live control display. Select a diﬀerent item before
using the INFO button to toggle the display.

4

514 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

P Choosing the Information Displayed with the INFO
Button(G/Info Settings)

The INFO button is used to select the content and type of the information displayed
during shooting or playback. This option is used to choose the items displayed.
• This item applies during still photography and playback. The option selected for [n Info
Settings] in the n video menu applies in n (movie) mode (P. 429).
Choose the info displayed during playback. Press the INFO button to cycle
the displays in the chosen order when viewing photos.

q Info[Image Only]:
Display images only.
[Overall]:
Display a histogram and shooting info.
Superimpose a histogram on the playback display.
[&]:[Highlight&Shadow]: Use tints to indicate over- and under-exposed areas.
[Field Sensor Info]: Display GPS and other sensor data.
[Light Box]:
Display two images side-by-side.
Choose the [a] (magnify) display for playback zoom.

qa Info[Magnify Frame]: Display the zoom frame.
[Magnify Scroll]: Scroll the playback zoom display.
[Select Frame]: Display other images during playback zoom.
Choose the info shown in the live view shooting display. Available items include
not only the level gauge and histogram, but also GPS and other sensor data.
Customize the display to suit your preferences. g “Choosing the Information
Displayed” (P. 84)

LV-Info

LV OFF-Info[Image Only]:
Info hidden.
[Custom1]/[Custom2]: Enable or disable the [&], [Highlight&Shadow],
and [Level Gauge] displays. You can choose the
combination of indicators available.
[Field Sensor Info]:
Display GPS and other sensor data.

4

Display sensor data in the monitor in place of the LV super control panel.
[Field Sensor Info]: Display GPS and other sensor data.
Choose the number of thumbnails displayed per page or enable the calendar
display during index playback.

G Settings[A4]/[B9]/[C25]/[C100]: Choose the number of images displayed.
[Calendar]:
Enable calendar playback.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 515

1

Highlight [G/Info Settings] in the P (Disp/8/PC)
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

2

Highlight an item and press the I button.

3

Highlight the items you wish displayed press the OK
button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Selected items will
be displayed.
• To choose the information displayed when the shutter
button is pressed halfway, select [LV-Info], highlight[Image Only] and press the I button.
[On]: Shooting info is displayed while the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
[Oﬀ]: Shooting info is not displayed while the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
Highlight the desired item and press the OK button to
return to the [LV-Info] menu.
• Pressing the I button when [Custom1] or [Custom2]
is highlighted lists the displays available; highlight thedesired items and press the OK button.

44516 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit whensettings are complete.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

q Info: Available Displays
The displays corresponding to the diﬀerent options are shown below. Press the
INFO button to cycle the display during playback.
Basic Info

1

×10

100%

48kHz

Display a limited amount of shooting info.
• Basic info is displayed at all times, regardless of the option
selected (P. 266).
HDR1

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Image Only

15

1

100%

Only images are displayed.

Overall

1

×10

100%

Display all shooting settings, the histogram, and otherinformation (P. 266).

48kHz

P 250

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

-18

+1.0

WB
AUTO

A+4
ISO 400

G+4sRGB
Natural5184×3888
HDR1

4:3

& (Histogram)

1/8

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

15

1

100%

A histogram is superimposed on the playback display(P. 84).

415Highlight&Shadow

1

100%

Tints are added to show over- and under-exposed areas
during playback (P. 84).
Shadow Highlight

Field Sensor Info

15

1

×10

100%

48kHz

Display GPS and other sensor data (P. 574).
N 35°39’31” E 139°44’44”
25.0°C 10m 1012hPa

HDR1

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Light Box

15

1

100%

Compare two images side-by-side. g “q Info: The LightBox Display” (P. 518)
1x

15

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

15

EN 517

q Info: The Light Box Display
Compare two images by displaying them side-by-side and zooming in and out.

1

Press the q button.

1

×10

100%

48kHz

• A picture will be displayed.

HDR1

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

2

Press the INFO button repeatedly until the light box
is displayed.
• Two images will be displayed side-by-side.
• The picture that serves as the standard for comparison(the “base picture”) is displayed on the left, the currentlyselected picture on the right.

3

Display the desired picture in the right box (the basepicture).

15

1

100%

1x

15

Base picture

16

Current
picture• Rotate the front dial until the desired picture is displayed
and press the OK button. The picture will appear in theleft box.

4

Choose the picture displayed in the right box.

1

100%

• Rotate the front dial until the desired picture is displayed.
• To use the picture currently selected in the right box as
the base picture, press the OK button.

4

1x

5

Press the Fn button to enable scrolling for thecurrent picture (the picture in the right box).
• Use the arrow pad or the multi selector to scroll thecurrent picture.
• Press the Fn button again to allow both pictures to be
scrolled simultaneously.
• Use the rear dial to zoom both pictures in or out.

15

16

15

16

15

16

1

100%

1x
1

100%

2x

• The current picture (in the right box) can be selected (v), protected, or marked for sharing
using the same operations as in single-frame playback.

518 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions


qa Info: Playback Zoom
A playback info settings option. It is used to choose the operations available during
playback zoom. It also determines the behavior of the button to which [a] (magnify)
has been assigned using the [K Button Function] (P. 463) option.
Magnify Frame

Pressing the multi selector or the control to which [a] (magnify) is assigned
displays the zoom frame. If [Magnify Frame] is not checked (v), thecamera will instead zoom in without ﬁrst displaying the zoom frame.

Magnify Scroll

Scroll the image in the playback zoom display.

Select Frame

View other images during playback zoom.
S or a

1

100%

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

S or a

1

100%

2x

15

Playback display

Use the multiselector or front
dial to view otherimages withoutleaving zoom

1

100%

2x

15

Zoom frame

Playback zoom
scroll display
OK• If no options are selected, zoom will not be available via the rear dial or the control to which[a] (magnify) is assigned.


G Settings: Index Playback
Adjust settings for the index display, which is activated by rotating the rear dial
toward G during playback. Choose the number of thumbnails displayed or enable
calendar playback (P. 268).
The display changes each time the rear dial is rotated toward G.

p
1

p

p
1

1

100%

1

100%

100%

4

2019.4

100%

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00

4:3

20

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Single-frame
playback

15

q2019.04.01 12:30:00

4 frames20

q2019.04.01 12:30:00

20

9, 25, or 100 framesq

Calendarplayback

Index playbackOK• If no options are selected, index and calendar playback using the rear dial will be disabled.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 519

P Picture Mode Selection(Picture Mode Settings)

Limit the choice of picture modes to include only those you require. This applies todisplays such as the live controls and LV super control panel.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• See the relevant sections for information on the picture modes available for still photography(P. 215) and movie recording (P. 388).

P tab[Picture Mode Settings]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Items indicated by check marks (v) are displayed in picture mode menus.
• [Natural] is always available.

4

P Drive Mode Selection(j/Y Settings)

Limit the choice of drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) modes to include only thoseyou require. This applies to displays such as the live controls and LV super control
panel.
• This item is for still photography.
• For information on drive modes, see the explanation on page 151.

P tab

[j/Y Settings]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Items indicated by check marks (v) are displayed in drive mode menus.
• [o] (single frame) mode is always available.
• [Anti-Shock r] (P. 160) and [Silent s] (P. 163) must be enabled or disabled using [AntiShock r/Silent s].

520 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

P Multi Fn Display Options(Multi Function Settings)

Choose the functions available when accessing the multi-function feature.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• For information on the multi-function feature, see the explanation on page 470.

P tab[Multi Function Settings]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Items indicated by check marks (v) are accessible via the multi-function toggle.
• [Highlight & Shadow Control] is always displayed.

Q Live View Exposure Preview(Live View Boost)

Exposure settings such as exposure compensation can be previewed during live
view. You can instead adjust brightness for ease of viewing under night skies andin other dark environments. Settings can be adjusted separately for mode M, longexposures, live composite photography, and the like.
• This item is for still photography.
• For information on live boost, see the explanation on page 200.
Oﬀ

Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can be previewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time photography.

On1

Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted for ease of viewing. The brightnessof the preview diﬀers from the ﬁnal photograph.

On2

As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shots of the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview diﬀers from the ﬁnal photograph. Subject motion may
also appear slightly jerky.
• You can prioritize either the display rate or image quality according to the type ofsubject.

Q tab[Live View Boost]

Choose a mode

4

Choose options• To view additional options when [On2] is highlighted, press I on the arrow pad.
• The display rate slows if dark subjects are photographed with [Quality Priority] selected for[On2]. If [Frame Rate Priority] is selected, colors may be aﬀected and the quality of the display
will be reduced.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 521

Q Art Filter Preview(Art LV Mode)

You can preview the eﬀects of art ﬁlters in the monitor or viewﬁnder during
shooting. Some ﬁlters may cause subject movement to appear jerky, but this can be
minimized so as to not inﬂuence photography.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

4

mode1

The eﬀects of art ﬁlters can be previewed during shooting.

mode2

While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera gives priority to maintaining
the display rate and reduces the eﬀects of art ﬁlters on the preview display. Motion
is smooth.

Q tab[Art LV Mode]

Choose an option

Q Viewﬁnder Display Rate

(Frame Rate)

Choose the viewﬁnder display refresh rate. Choose a high frame rate to smooth the
motion of fast-moving subjects.
• This item is for still photography.
• For information on the display rate, see the explanation on page 175.
NormalThe standard frame rate. This is the preferred choice in most situations.

High

Smooth the motion of fast-moving subjects. Fast-moving subjects are easier totrack. This setting reverts to [Normal] automatically if the internal temperature of thecamera rises during shooting.

Q tab[Frame Rate]

522 EN

Choose a mode

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose options

Q Zoom AF Display Options(LV Close Up Settings)

Choose display options for use with focus zoom.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• For information on live view zoom options, see the explanation on page 139.
Choose what happens if the shutter button is pressed halfway during focus
zoom.
LV Close Up
Mode[mode1]: Focus zoom ends. You can check the composition after focusing
using focus zoom.
[mode2]: Focus zoom remains in eﬀect while the camera focuses. Compose
the shot before focusing, then zoom in for precise focus and take apicture without ever ending zoom.
Choose whether the display brightens during focus zoom.
[On]: The area in the zoom frame brightens for ease of viewing. Use for aclearer focus display during macro photography or the like.
[Oﬀ]: Display brightness does not change. Exposure can be previewed during
focus zoom.

Live View
Boost• This option is available when [Oﬀ] is selected for [Live View Boost](P. 521) in G Custom Menu Q.

Q tab[LV Close Up Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting

Q Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio(qa Default Setting)4

Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
• This item applies during still photography and playback.
Recently

Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.

Equally Value

Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A
monitor.

×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14

Choose the starting zoom ratio.

Q tab[qa Default Setting]icon appears in the

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 523

Q Depth-of-Field Preview(z Settings)

Choose the behavior of the control used for depth-of-ﬁeld preview and adjust settings
for the depth-of-ﬁeld preview display.
• This item is for still photography.
Choose the behavior of the control used for depth-of-ﬁeld preview.
[Oﬀ]: Aperture stops down while the control is pressed.
[On]: Aperture stops down when the control is pressed; to end depth-of-ﬁeld
preview, press the control a second time.

z LockAdjust settings for the depth-of-ﬁeld preview display.
[Oﬀ]: The display uses the value metered for exposure before aperture wasstopped down for the depth-of-ﬁeld preview. You can preview changes
to exposure that result from changes to aperture while depth-of-ﬁeld
preview is in eﬀect.
[On]: The display brightens for ease of viewing. The added brightness makes
it easier to see how changes to aperture aﬀect depth of ﬁeld.

Live View
Boost• This option is available when [Oﬀ] is selected for [Live View Boost](P. 521) in G Custom Menu Q.

Q tab

4

[z Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting

R Framing Guide Options(Grid Settings)

Guides can be displayed to assist composition. Select guide color and transparency
and choose whether guides are shown in the viewﬁnder.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Display Color

Adjust guide color and transparency. The camera can store up to two
combinations of settings.

Displayed Grid

Select the type of guides displayed. Choose from:• [w], [x], [1], [y], [X], and [x]• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9 movie frame
when movies are shot in still photography mode. Depending on theoption selected for [KK], the guides may be displayed with an
aspect ratio of 17:9.

Apply Settings
to EVF

Choose whether the option selected for [Displayed Grid] is reﬂected in the
viewﬁnder display. The option selected for [EVF Grid Settings] in G Custom
Menu a (P. 556) has no eﬀect.

R tab[Grid Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• Use FG on the arrow pad to choose a setting for [Display Color].
• The framing grid selected here is not displayed during focus stacking (P. 243).

524 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

R Focus Peaking Options(Peaking Settings)

Highlight objects using color outlines. This makes objects that are in focus easier tosee during manual focus and the like.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Peaking Color

Choose the focus peaking color.

Highlight Intensity

Choose the focus peaking level.

Image Brightness Adj. Adjust background brightness to make focus peaking easier to see.
• When [On] is selected for [Image Brightness Adj.], the live view display may be brighter or
darker than the ﬁnal photograph.

R tab[Peaking Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting

Using Focus Peaking
The following options are available for using focus peaking.
• Assigning [Peaking Settings] to a control using [K Button Function] or [n Button
Function]:
Focus peaking can be assigned to a control by selecting [Peaking] for [K Button Function](P. 463) or [n Button Function] (P. 417). Pressing the button enables focus peaking.
[Peaking] can also be selected for [Multi Function] (P. 470). In n (movie) mode, [Peaking]is assigned to the XY (one-touch white balance) button by default.
• Using [Peaking] for [MF Assist]:
If [Peaking] is selected for [MF Assist], focus peaking will activate automatically when thelens focus ring is rotated. Press the INFO button to view peaking options. g [MF Assist](P. 495)

4

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 525

R Histogram Exposure Warning(Histogram Settings)

Choose the brightness levels that the histogram shows as overexposed (highlights)
or underexposed (shadows). These levels are used for exposure warnings in thehistogram displays during shooting and photo playback.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• The areas shown in red or blue in the monitor and viewﬁnder [Highlight&Shadow] displays
are also selected according to the values chosen for this option.
Highlight

Choose the minimum brightness for the highlight warning.

Shadow

Choose the maximum brightness for the shadow warning.

R tab

4

[Histogram Settings]

Choose values using FG on the arrow pad

R Shooting Mode Selection Help

(Mode Guide)

Choose whether the camera displays help text when you rotate the mode dial toselect a shooting mode.
On

Help is displayed.

Oﬀ

Help is not displayed.

R tab[Mode Guide]

526 EN

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

R Selﬁe Assist(Selﬁe Assist)

Choose the display used when the monitor is reversed for self-portraits.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
On

When reversed for self-portraits, the monitor shows a mirror image of the view throughthe lens.

Oﬀ

The display does not change when the monitor is reversed.

R tab[Selﬁe Assist]

Use FG to select [On] or [Oﬀ]

S Disabling the Focus Beep

(8)

Disable the beep that sounds when the camera focuses.
On

A beep sounds after successful autofocus operations. The beep sounds only when thecamera ﬁrst focuses using [C-AF].

Oﬀ

A beep does not sound after successful autofocus operations.

S tab

[8]

4

Choose an option• You may need to adjust settings in the [Silent s Mode Settings] menu in order to enable thefocus beep (P. 167).

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 527

S External Monitor Display Options(HDMI)

Choose the signal output to external monitors connected via HDMI. Adjust the frame
rate, movie frame size, and other settings according to monitor speciﬁcations.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. See the relevant
sections for details. g “External Monitor Display Options (HDMI)” (P. 434),“6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI” (P. 626)
Choose the type of signal output to the HDMI connector.
[C4K]:
Output Size

The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096 × 2160)
format.
[4K]:
If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 × 2160).
[1080p]:If possible, the signal is output in Full HD (1080p).
[720p]:
If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).
[480p/576p]: The signal is output in 480p/576p format.

HDMI Control

Selecting [On] allows the camera to be controlled using a remote that
supports HDMI control.

Output Frame
Rate

Choose the signal frame rate according to whether the device supports
NTSC or PAL.

S tab

[HDMI]

Choose an option

4528 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose a setting

S Choosing a USB Connection Mode(USB Mode)

Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Auto

You will be prompted to choose a connection mode each time a USB cable
is connected.

Storage

The camera functions as an external storage device. The data on thecamera memory card can be copied to the computer.

MTP

The pictures on the memory card can be viewed or copied to the computer
using standard software supplied with Windows Vista or later.

0

The camera can be controlled from the computer, while pictures shotusing OLYMPUS Capture can be downloaded as they are taken. For more
information, see “6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB” (P. 620).

PCM Recorder

The camera can be connected to and control PCM recorders. For more
information, see “Using the Olympus LS-100 IC Recorder” (P. 415) in“3-11 Audio Recording”.

USB PDThe camera can be powered by external devices connected via USB. For
more information, see “6-6 Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power
Delivery)” (P. 625).

S tab[USB Mode]

Choose an option

4

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 529

Exposure-Related Items(Custom Menus T, U, and V)
These menus contain exposure-related items. Included are items for customizing
ISO sensitivity, bulb photography, and other functions.

T EV Steps for Exposure Control(EV Step)

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting shutter speed, aperture,
exposure compensation, and other exposure-related settings. Choose from 1/3, 1/2,
and 1 EV.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

T tab

4

[EV Step]

Choose an option

T EV Steps for ISO Sensitivity Control(ISO Step)

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting ISO sensitivity. Choose
from 1/3 and 1 EV.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.

T tab

530 EN[ISO Step]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

T [K ISO] > [AUTO] Control Range(K ISO-Auto Set)

Choose the range of ISO sensitivity values selected by the camera and the shutter
speed at which auto ISO sensitivity control takes eﬀect when [AUTO] is selected for[K ISO].
• This item is for still photography. See page 183 for more information.
• The option selected for [b ISO-Auto Set] in the n video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie)
mode (P. 372).

Upper Limit /Default

Lowest S/S
Setting

T tab[High Limit]: Choose the maximum sensitivity selected automatically by thecamera.
[Default]: Choose the default sensitivity.
• The maximum is 6400. Sensitivity may drop below the default value if
optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the current aperture and shutter
speed.
Choose the shutter speed at which the camera will start to raise ISO sensitivity
when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO]. This option takes eﬀect in modes P
and A. Select [Auto] to let the camera choose the minimum shutter speed
automatically.

[K ISO-Auto Set]

Choose an option

Choose a setting

T [K ISO] > [AUTO] Availability(K ISO-Auto)

Choose the shooting modes in which auto ISO sensitivity control will take eﬀect
when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO]. Choose whether auto ISO sensitivity control
is available in modes P, A, S, and M or only in modes P, A, and S.

4• This item is for still photography. See page 185 for more information.
P/A/S[K ISO] > [AUTO] takes eﬀect only in modes P, A, and S. If [AUTO] is in eﬀect whenmode B is selected, [K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.

All

[K ISO] > [AUTO] takes eﬀect only in modes P, A, S, and M.

T tab[K ISO-Auto]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 531

T High [K ISO] Noise Reduction Options (K Noise Filter)
Reduce image artifacts (“noise”) in pictures taken at high ISO sensitivities. This canhelp reduce “graininess” in photos shot under low light. You can choose the amountof noise reduction performed.
• This item is for still photography.
• The option selected for [n Noise Filter] in the n video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie)
mode (P. 379).
Oﬀ

Noise reduction is not performed.

Low/Standard/High

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed.

T tab

4

[K Noise Filter]

Choose an option

T Image Processing Options(K Low ISO Processing)Choose the type of processing applied to photographs taken at low ISO sensitivities.
• This item is for still photography.
Drive Priority

Image processing is adapted so as not to curtail the number of pictures thatcan be taken in a single burst.

Detail Priority

Image processing prioritizes image quality.

T tab

532 EN[K Low ISO Processing]

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose an option

T Long Exposure Noise Reduction Options (Noise Reduct.)
Choose whether to process photos taken at slow shutter speeds to reduce image
artifacts (“noise”). At slow shutter speeds, noise is caused by the heat generated fromthe camera itself. After each photo is taken, the camera captures a second image fornoise reduction, causing a delay equal to the selected shutter speed before the next
photo can be taken.
• This item is for still photography.
Oﬀ

Noise reduction not performed.

On

Noise reduction is performed at all shutter speeds.

Auto

Noise reduction is performed automatically when the camera’s internal temperature iselevated.

• During noise reduction, the camera displays the time remaining until the process is complete.
• During sequential shooting, [Oﬀ] is selected automatically and noise reduction is not
performed.
• Noise reduction may not produce the desired eﬀects depending on the subject and shooting
conditions.

T tab[Noise Reduct.]

Choose an option

U Choosing the Maximum Time for Long Exposures(Bulb/Time Timer)

4

Choose the maximum exposure time for B (bulb) mode. The shutter will close
automatically when the selected limit is reached.
• This item applies during still photography when [BULB] or [TIME] is selected in mode B(bulb).
• Choose from the following options:
1 minute/2 minutes/4 minutes/8 minutes/15 minutes/20 minutes/25 minutes/
30 minutes

U tab[Bulb/Time Timer]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 533

U Long Exposure Display Brightness(Bulb/Time Monitor)

Choose the brightness of the monitor when shooting in B (bulb) mode. The
monitor can be brightened for ease of viewing in the dark conditions typical of bulb
photography.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode.
• Choose from values between −7 and +7.

U tab

4

[Bulb/Time Monitor]

Choose an option

U Live Bulb Update Frequency(Live Bulb)

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb
photography in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval
while live bulb photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in thedisplay.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page 104 for more
information on live bulb photography.

U tab[Live Bulb]

Choose an option• [Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [BULB] or[LIVE BULB] photography.

534 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

U Live Time Update Frequency(Live Time)

Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time
photography in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval
while live time photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in thedisplay.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page 104 for more
information on live time photography.

U tab[Live Time]

Choose an option• [Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [TIME] or[LIVE TIME] photography.

U Composite Photography Shutter Speed(Composite Settings)

4

Choose the shutter speed for composite photography in B (bulb) mode. Composite
photography combines multiple photographs. This item is used to choose the
shutter speed.
• Live composite photography can continue for up to three hours.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page 110 for more
information on composite photography.

U tab[Composite Settings]

Choose an option• [Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button in [LIVECOMP] mode.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 535

U Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(K Flicker Scan)

Adjust shutter speed while viewing the display to eliminate banding under LED
lighting.
Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan]
to optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro
Capture photography.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.
• This item is for still photography. See page 193 for more information. The option selected
for [n Flicker Scan] in the n video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie) mode (P. 374).

U tab

4

[K Flicker Scan]

Choose an option

V Exposure Metering(Metering)

Choose the method used to measure subject brightness.
• This item is for still photography. See page 186 for more information.
• [p] (digital ESP metering) is used in n (movie) mode.
p (digital ESP
metering)

The camera sets exposure based on metering data from 324 areas of
the frame.

B (center-weighted
averaging)

The camera sets exposure based on the average light level for the entire frame
while assigning the greatest weight to the area in the center.

C (spot metering)

The camera meters a small portion (approximately 2%) of the frame.

D (spot highlightmetering)

Brightens the spot metering area, brightening highlights.

E (spot shadow
metering)

Darkens the spot metering area, darkening shadows.

V tab[Metering]

Choose an option• Metering can also be selected via a direct button (the AFp button), live controls, or the LV
super control panel.

536 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

V AE Lock Exposure Metering(AEL Metering)

Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when exposure is locked
using the AEL/AFL button. This allows you to use metering method when exposure
is locked by pressing the shutter button halfway and another when exposure islocked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.
• This item is for still photography. For more information on AE lock, see page 188.
Auto

Exposure is metered using the method selected for [Metering](P. 536).

B (center-weighted
averaging)

The camera sets exposure based on the average light level for theentire frame while assigning the greatest weight to the area in thecenter.

C (spot metering)

The camera meters a small portion (approximately 2%) of the frame.

D (spot highlightmetering)

Brightens the spot metering area, brightening highlights.

E (spot shadow
metering)

Darkens the spot metering area, darkening highlights.

V tab[AEL Metering]

Choose an option

V Metering the Focus Target(N Spot Metering)

Choose whether the camera meters the current AF target when [C] is selected for[Metering]. Settings can be adjusted separately for spot, spot highlight, and spot
shadow metering.

4• This item is for still photography.
• [I Face Priority] turns oﬀ automatically.
• The selected option takes eﬀect when M (single target) or o (small target) is selected
as the AF-target mode (P. 120).
• The camera zooms in on the selected AF target during focus zoom (P. 136).

V tab[N Spot Metering]

Choose an option• Highlight the desired metering method and press the OK button. Selected methods aremarked with a v.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 537

V Fine-Tuning Exposure(Exposure Shift)Fine-tune exposure. Use this option if you want the results of auto exposure to beconsistently brighter or darker.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Fine-tuning is not normally required. Use only as necessary. In normal circumstances,
exposure can be adjusted using exposure compensation (P. 180, 367).
• Fine-tuning exposure reduces the amount of exposure compensation available in the
direction (+ or −) exposure was ﬁne-tuned.
• Exposure ﬁne-tuning can be applied to the following metering methods.
Metering

Fine-tuning amountp (digital ESP)
B (center-weighted averaging)−1 to +1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV

C (spot)

V tab[Exposure Shift]

Choose an option

4538 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose a value

Flash-Related Items(Custom Menu W)

This menu contains ﬂash-related items. It includes ﬂash sync settings and options
for remote ﬂash photography in RC mode.

W Choosing a Flash Sync Speed(#X-Sync.)

Choose the fastest shutter speed available for ﬂash photography.
Choose the fastest shutter speed available for ﬂash photography, irrespective of
subject brightness.
• This item is for still photography. See page 260 for more information.

W tab[#X-Sync.]

Choose an option

W Choosing the Minimum Shutter Speed(#Slow Limit)

Choose the slowest shutter speed available for ﬂash photography.

4This item is used to select the slowest setting available to the camera whenselecting the shutter speed automatically during ﬂash photography, regardless of
how dark the subject may be. It does not take eﬀect in slow-sync (#Slow, #Slow2,
and !Slow) modes.
• Available values: 30 s to value selected for [#X-Sync.]• This item is for still photography. See page 261 for more information.

W tab[#Slow Limit]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 539W Flash and Exposure Compensation(x+F)

Choose whether exposure compensation is added to the value for ﬂash
compensation. For information on ﬂash compensation, see page 259.
• This item is for still photography.
Oﬀ

Flash and exposure compensation are set independently.

On

The value for exposure compensation is added to the value for ﬂash compensation.

W tab

4

[x+F]

Choose an option

W Flash White Balance(#+WB)

Choose the white balance used for photos taken with a ﬂash. Instead of using asetting adapted to ﬂash lighting, you can opt to prioritize the value selected for nonﬂash photography. Use this option to automatically switch from one white balancesetting to another when you ﬁnd yourself frequently enabling and disabling the ﬂash.
• This item is for still photography.
Oﬀ

The camera uses the value currently selected for white balance.

W

The camera uses auto white balance ([Auto]).

n

The camera uses ﬂash white balance ([n]).

W tab

540 EN[#+WB]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

W Wireless Remote Flash Control(#RC Mode)

Adjust settings for wireless remote ﬂash control. Remote control is available with
optional ﬂash units that support wireless remote control (“wireless RC ﬂash”). For
information on using wireless remote ﬂash control, see page 262.
• This item is for still photography.
Oﬀ

Wireless remote ﬂash control disabled.

On

Wireless remote ﬂash control enabled. The camera displays settings for wirelessremote ﬂash control.

W tab[#RC Mode]

Choose an option• Selecting [On] displays the RC mode LV super control panel in the camera monitor. To viewthe regular LV super control panel, press the INFO button.

44-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 541

Image Quality, White Balance, and Color-Related
Items(Custom Menu X)
This menu contains image-enhancement items, including options for ﬁne-tuning
white balance and for selecting image quality and size.

X Image Quality and Size

(K Set)Choose the image size and compression (quality) options
available in the [KK] menu (P. 78). The camera
can store up to four image quality and size combinations([K1] to [K4]).
• This item is for still photography. See page 81 for more
information.
Image
size

Compression
ratio

The following options are available.
Image Size (Pixels)

4Compression Ratio

Y (Large)

5184 × 3888

SF (Super Fine)

X (Medium) *3200 × 2400

F (Fine)

1/2.7
1/4

W (Small) *1280 × 960

N (Normal)

1/8* The values for [X] and [W] are defaults and can be changed using G Custom Menu X >[Pixel Count] (P. 82).

X tab

542 EN[K Set]Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

X Choosing Values for [X] and [W] Sizes(Pixel Count)

Choose the size, in pixels, of the [X] (Xiddle) and [W] (Wmall) [KK] options(P. 78).
• This item is for still photography. See page 82 for more information.

The sizes available for the [X] and [W] options are:Xiddle (medium)

3200×2400, 1920×1440

Wmall (small)

1280×960, 1024×768

X tab[Pixel Count][Xiddle] or [Wmall]

Choose a setting

X Peripheral Illumination(Shading Comp.)

Compensate for the drop in brightness at the edges of the frame due to the opticalcharacteristics of the lens. Some lenses may exhibit a drop in brightness at theedges of the frame. The camera can compensate for this by making the edges
brighter.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

Shading compensation disabled.

On

The camera detects and compensates for reduced peripheral illumination.

• [On] has no eﬀect when a teleconverter or extension tube is attached.
• Noise may be more noticeable at the edges of the frame at high ISO sensitivities.

X tab[Shading Comp.]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 543

X Adjusting Hue(K WB)

Compensate for changes in color due to the color of the light source. White balance
makes white objects look white. Although [Auto] works well in most situations, you
can choose an option suited to the light source if [Auto] fails to make white objects
appear white or if instead you wish to deliberately lend white objects a color cast.
• This item is for still photography. See page 202 for more information. The option selected
for [n WB] in the n video menu takes eﬀect in n (movie) mode (P. 380).
Color
temperature

White balance mode
Auto whitebalance

Preset whitebalance4Choose for

Auto

—

Most normal scenes (scenes containing
objects that are white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in mostsituations.

55300 K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, ﬁreworks

N

7500 K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shadeO

6000 K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies

1

3000 K

Subjects under incandescent lighting>

4000 K

Subjects under ﬂuorescent lighting

U

—

n

5500 K

One-touch whitebalance

P/Q/
W/X

Custom whitebalance

CWB

Underwater photography
Flash photography

Subjects containing white or gray areas that
Value selected
can be used to measure white balance andfor one-touchthat are under mixed lighting or lit by a ﬂash
white balancewith unknown characteristics
2000 K –14000 K

Situations in which you can identify theappropriate color temperature• Fine-tuning is available for each mode. White balance can be ﬁne-tuned on the A (amber–blue) and G (green–magenta) axes.
• One-touch white balance can be used to choose from previously-selected values. For more
information on one-touch white balance, see page 207.
• Custom white balance oﬀers settings of from 2000 to 14000 K.

X tab[K WB]

Choose an option• When custom white balance (CWB) is highlighted, you can press I on the arrow pad anduse the FG buttons to choose the color temperature.
• To ﬁne-tune white balance, highlight an option, press the I button to display ﬁne-tuning
options, and then make the desired adjustments.
• Press the R (movie) button in the A or G ﬁne-tuning display to preview the eﬀect in themonitor. Press the R button again to return to the A or G ﬁne-tuning display.
• White balance can be adjusted using a direct button (the WB button), the LV super control
panel, or live controls. The same controls can be used to adjust white balance in n (movie)
mode.

544 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

X Fine-Tuning [K WB](K All x)

Fine-tune white balance across the board. White balance is set by choosing a modethat matches the light source; this item ﬁne-tunes all modes by the same amount.
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n All x] takes eﬀect in n mode
(P. 385).
All SetFine-tune white balance for all modes. White balance can be ﬁne-tuned on the A(amber–blue) and G (green–magenta) axes.

All Reset Reset ﬁne-tuning for all modes to default values.

X tab[K All x]

Choose an option• After selecting [All Set], ﬁne-tune white balance on the A and G axes. After selecting [AllReset], highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

X Preserving Warm Colors Under Incandescent Lighting(KW Keep Warm Color)

4

When [Auto] is selected for [K WB], you can opt to preserve the warm colors
seen under incandescent lighting. Although white balance will still be automaticallyadjusted for the light source, the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting will
be preserved.
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [nW Keep Warm Color] takes
eﬀect in n mode (P. 383).
On

Preserve warm colors under incandescent lighting.

Oﬀ

Do not preserve warm colors under incandescent lighting.

X tab[KW Keep Warm Color]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 545

X Choosing a Color Space(Color Space)

Choose a color space to ensure accurate color reproduction when photos are
output to a printer or external display.
• This item is for still photography. See page 232 for more information.
sRGB

A color space established as the standard for Windows computers. It is usedin standard displays, printers, digital cameras, and applications. This option isrecommended in most situations.

AdobeRGB

A color space standard deﬁned by Adobe Systems. It reproduces a wider
gamut of colors than sRGB. Compliant software and displays, printers, andother equipment that support this standard are required for accurate color
reproduction. An underscore (“_”) appears at the beginning of the ﬁle name(e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).

• [AdobeRGB] is not available in art ﬁlter picture modes or during HDR photography. [sRGB] isselected instead.

X tab[Color Space]

Choose an option

4546 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Storage- and Deletion-Related Items(Custom Menus Y and Z)
These menus contain items pertaining chieﬂy to the storage and deletion of theimage data recorded with the camera.

Y Card Slot Selection(Card Slot Settings)

The camera has slots for two memory cards. Choose a role for the card in each slot.
For more information, see “2-3 Card-Related Settings” (P. 71) and “3-3 CardRelated Settings” (P. 316).

K Save Settings

Choose how the camera saves photos when two memory cards areinserted. Choose standard, overﬂow, split, or backup storage. You can
opt to record each picture twice, once to each memory card and witheach of the two copies in a diﬀerent format, or to record pictures to only
one card at a time, switching to the remaining card automatically when
the ﬁrst card is full (P. 72).

K Save Slot

Choose the card used to record photos when two cards are inserted(P. 74). This option is available when [y] (Standard) or [z] (AutoSwitch) is selected for [K Save Settings].

n Save Slot

Choose the card used to record movies when two cards are inserted(P. 316).

q SlotChoose the card used for playback when two memory cards areinserted. Pressing the q button displays the images on the selectedcard (P. 57, 302). This option is not available if [y] (Standard) or [z](Auto Switch) is selected for [K Save Settings].

Assign Save
FolderChoose the folder used to store image data.
• This option is also available when only one card is inserted.
• This option applies to both photos and movies (P. 76, 319).

4• The card used for playback or to record new photos and movies can be chosen by:- Pressing the CARD button and then rotating the front or rear dial
- Holding the q button and rotating the front or rear dialThis does not change the option selected for [q Slot].
• The option selected for image quality may change if you switch cards by changing settings
or inserting or removing cards when [Dual Independent 1] or [Dual Independent 3] isselected for [K Save Settings]. Check the option selected for image quality before shooting.
• Settings other than [n Save Slot] and [Assign Save Folder] can only be accessed in still
photography modes.

Y tab[Card Slot Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• When [z] (Auto Switch) is selected for [K Save Settings], the camera will automaticallyswitch between the last picture on the ﬁrst card and the ﬁrst picture on the second card.
• In n (movie) mode, the slot selected for [n Save Slot] also serves as the [q Slot].

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 547

Y File Naming Options(File Name)

Choose how the camera names ﬁles when saving photos or movies to memory
cards. Filenames consist of a four-character preﬁx and a four-digit number. Use thisoption to choose how ﬁle numbers are assigned.
• When two cards are inserted, the camera may create new folders or fail to number ﬁlesconsecutively depending on the ﬁle and folder numbers currently in use on each card.

4

Auto

When a new memory card is inserted, ﬁle numbering continues from the last
number used. If the card already contains a ﬁle with the same or a higher number,numbering will continue from the highest number.

Reset

Folder numbering is reset to 100 and ﬁle numbering to 0001 when a new card isinserted. If the card already contains images, numbering will continue from thehighest number.

Y tab[File Name]

Choose an option

Y Naming Files(Edit Filename)

Choose how the camera names ﬁles when saving photos and movies to memory
cards. File names consist of a four-letter preﬁx followed by a four-digit ﬁle number.
You can change the preﬁx as desired. The editable portion varies with the option
selected for [Color Space] (P. 232).
[sRGB] selected for [Color Space]:
Pmdd0000.jpg — The “Pmdd” portion can be changed[AdobeRGB] selected for [Color Space] (photos only):_mdd0000.jpg — The “mdd” portion can be changed

Y tab[Edit Filename]

Choose an option• Select [Oﬀ] to use the default preﬁxes.

548 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Choose a setting

Y Output Resolution(dpi Settings)

Choose the output resolution information (in dots per inch, or dpi) stored with photo
image ﬁles. The selected resolution will be used when the images are printed.
• This item is for still photography.

Y tab[dpi Settings]

Choose the desired setting

Y Adding Copyright Information(Copyright Settings)

Choose the copyright information stored with photos when they are saved.
Copyright information is stored as Exif tags.
• This item is for still photography.
Olympus will not be held liable for any disputes or damages arising from use of the[Copyright Settings] feature. Use at your own risk.
Copyright Info.

Add Exif tags naming the photographer and/or copyright holder.

Artist NameEnter the name of the photographer.

Copyright NameEnter the name of the copyright holder.

Y tab
pad

[Copyright Settings]

Highlight an option and press I on the arrow• [Copyright Info.]: Highlight [Oﬀ] or [On] and press the OK button.
• [Artist Name]/[Copyright Name]: Highlight and press the I button to view the text entry
display.
Entering the Photographer/Copyright Holder Name
1) Highlight letters and press the OK button.
• The letters will appear in the text display area.
• To delete the current character, press the  button.
2) To delete previously-entered characters, press the INFO
button to position the cursor in the text display area.
• Highlight letters and press the  button to delete.
3) Highlight [END] and press the OK button when entry iscomplete.

4

Text display area

Keyboard area

Use the front or rear dial, arrow pad, or multi selector to position the cursor.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 549

Y Saving Lens Data

(Lens Info Settings)

Add user-speciﬁed lens data to image Exif data. You can add information asnecessary when using lenses that do not supply lens data to the camera. The
camera can store information for up to 10 lenses. These data also supply the focal
length used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features.
• This item is for still photography.
Create Lens
Information

Enter the desired information. You can specify the lens name, focal length,
and maximum aperture.

1–10

View previously-saved lens data.

Saving Lens DataY tab[Lens Info Settings]
on the arrow pad

Highlight [Create Lens Information] and press I• [Lens Name]: Highlight and press the I button to view the text entry display.
• [Focal Length]/[Aperture Value]: Highlight and press the I button to view options. Choose avalue using the arrow pad and press the OK button.

4

Entering Lens Names
1) Highlight letters and press the OK button.
• The letter will appear in the text display area.
• To delete the current character, press the  button.
2) To delete previously-entered characters, press the INFO
button to position the cursor in the text display area.
• Highlight letters and press the  button to delete.
3) Highlight [END] and press the OK button when entry iscomplete.

Text display area

Keyboard area

Use the front or rear dial, arrow pad, or multi selector to position the cursor.

Appending Lens Data to Image Information
If the camera is unable to obtain lens data from the current lens, you can instead
supply previously-saved lens data.
Y tab[Lens Info Settings]

Highlight the lens name and press the OK button• The selected lens is indicated by a v.
%
• [Lens Info Settings] can be assigned to a camera control using [K Button Function](P. 463) or [n Button Function] (P. 417). Lens info can be selected when, for example,
you change lenses.

550 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Z Disabling Deletion Conﬁrmation(Quick Erase)

If this option is enabled when the  button is pressed to delete photos or movies,
the camera will not display a conﬁrmation dialog but will instead delete the images
immediately.
Oﬀ

A conﬁrmation dialog is displayed when the  button is pressed.

On

No conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed when the  button is pressed.

Z tab[Quick Erase]

Choose an option

Z RAW+JPEG Deletion Options(RAW+JPEG Erase)

Choose operation performed when [RAW+JPEG] images are deleted one at time.
JPEG

Only the JPEG copy is deleted.

RAW

Only the RAW copy is deleted.

RAW+JPEG

Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted.

4• When [RAW+JPEG] pictures are erased using [All Erase] (P. 276) or [Erase Selected](P. 279), both the RAW and the JPEG copies will be deleted.

Z tab[RAW+JPEG Erase]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 551Z [Yes]/[No] Default(Priority Set)

Choose the option highlighted by default when a [Yes]/[No] conﬁrmation isdisplayed.
No[No] is highlighted by default.

Yes[Yes] is highlighted by default.

Z tab[Priority Set]

Choose an option

4552 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Viewﬁnder-Related Items(Custom Menu a)This menu contains items pertaining to the electronic viewﬁnder (EVF) display.
• “EVF” stands for “electronic viewfinder”.

a Automatic Display Selection(EVF Auto Switch)

Choose whether the camera switches automatically between the viewﬁnder andmonitor live view.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. For more information,
see “2 Taking and Viewing Photographs” (P. 51) and “3 Shooting and Viewing Movies”(P. 293).
On

The display switches automatically when you put your eye to the viewﬁnder.

Oﬀ

Press the u button to switch between the monitor and viewﬁnder.

a tab[EVF Auto Switch]

Choose an optiona Viewﬁnder Brightness and Hue(EVF Adjust)

Adjust viewﬁnder brightness and hue. The display switches to the viewﬁnder whilethese settings are being adjusted.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
EVF Auto
Luminance[On]: Viewﬁnder brightness and indicator contrast adapt automatically toambient lighting conditions. The [EVF Adjust] > k (brightness) option is
not available.
[Oﬀ]: Adjust settings using [EVF Adjust].

EVF Adjust

Adjust EVF display settings manually. Choose the display color temperatureand choose a setting for brightness of from +7 to −7.

a tab[EVF Adjust]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• After selecting [EVF Auto Luminance], highlight [On] or [Oﬀ] and press the OK button.
• The viewﬁnder turns on automatically when you select [EVF Adjust]. Highlight k(brightness) or j (color temperature) using HI on the arrow pad and use the FG buttons
to choose a value.

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 553

a Viewﬁnder Display Style(EVF Style)

Choose the viewﬁnder display style.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• For information on the display, see pages 83 (photo mode) and 326 (movie mode).
• For more information on the content of the viewﬁnder display, see “Viewﬁnder (Still
Photography)” (P. 88) or “Viewﬁnder (Movie Recording)” (P. 330).
Style 1
Similar to ﬁlm camera viewﬁnder displays.
Style 2
1100%

P250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

1:02:03

1023

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

Style 3The same as the monitor display.

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

a tab

[EVF Style]

Choose an option

4554 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

a Viewﬁnder Info Display Options(V Info Settings)

Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in the
viewﬁnder display.
Just as you can with the monitor, you can display a histogram or level gauge inthe viewﬁnder by pressing the INFO button. This item is used to choose the typesof display available. It takes eﬀect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF
Style].
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n Info Settings] takes eﬀect in nmode (P. 429).
• You can choose from two custom displays containing the indicators you select and a third
display showing ﬁeld sensor info.
Basic Information The camera displays icons and the like showing camera settings.
In addition to the base display, you can opt to view or hide:A histogram superimposed on the display in the
viewﬁnder.
[Highlight&Shadow]: Tints applied to over- and under-exposed areas.
[Level Gauge]:
The level gauge.

Custom1/
Custom2[&]:

Field Sensor Info

Display info from GPS and other sensors.

a tab[V Info Settings]

Highlight options and press the OK button• Items marked with a v appear in the viewﬁnder display.
• To choose the custom displays available in the viewﬁnder, highlight [Custom1] or [Custom2]
and press I on the arrow pad.

4

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 555

a Viewﬁnder Framing Grid Options(EVF Grid Settings)

Choose whether to display a framing grid in the viewﬁnder. You can also choose
guide color and transparency. This item takes eﬀect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] isselected for [EVF Style].
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• The option chosen for this item is ignored when [On] is selected for G Custom Menu R >[Grid Settings] > [Apply Settings to EVF].
Display Color

Adjust guide color and transparency. The camera can store up to two
combinations of settings.

Displayed Grid

Select the type of guides displayed. Choose from:• [w], [x], [1], [y], [X], and [x]• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9 movie frame
when movies are shot in still photography mode. Depending on theoption selected for [KK], the guides may be displayed with an aspectratio of 17:9.

a tab[EVF Grid Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• Use FG on the arrow pad to choose a setting for [Display Color].
• The framing grid selected here is not displayed during focus stacking (P. 243).

4

a Displaying the Level Gauge(V Half Way Level)

Choose whether the level gauge can be displayed in the
viewﬁnder by pressing the shutter button halfway when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style].

1
100%

P

250 F5.6 0.0

WB ISO-A
AUTO 200

1:02:03

1023

Display when shutter
button is pressedhalfwayOn

The level gauge is displayed in the viewﬁnder while the shutter button is pressedhalfway. The level gauge appears in place of the exposure bar.

Oﬀ

The level gauge is not displayed.

a tab[V Half Way Level]

556 EN

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

a Optical Viewﬁnder Simulation(S-OVF)

Increase the dynamic range of the viewﬁnder display, increasing the amount ofdetail visible in highlights and shadows in a manner similar to optical viewﬁnders.
Backlit subjects and the like are easier to see.
• The eﬀects of exposure, white balance, picture mode art ﬁlters, and other shooting settingscannot be previewed while optical viewﬁnder simulation is in eﬀect.
• This item is for still photography. See page 89 for more information.
Oﬀ

The eﬀects of exposure and other settings are visible in the viewﬁnder display. Choose
to preview the eﬀects of settings while shooting.

On

Dynamic range is increased. The eﬀects of exposure, white balance, and othershooting settings are not visible in the display.

a tab[S-OVF]

Choose an option%• [S-OVF] can be assigned to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 463). This allows
optical viewﬁnder simulation to be turned on or oﬀ at the touch of a button.

44-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 557Other Custom Settings(Custom Menus b, c, and Q)
These menus contain items related to touch-screen controls, batteries, and the like.
GPS-related items can also be found here, as well as an item for reducing distortionin pictures taken with ﬁsheye lenses.

b Image Processing Check(Pixel Mapping)

Check the image sensor and image processing functions simultaneously. For best
results, end shooting and playback and wait at least a minute before performing
proceeding.
• Be sure to perform the check again if you accidentally turn the camera oﬀ while the check isin progress.

b tab[Pixel Mapping]Highlight [Start] and press the OK buttonb Button Hold Options(Press-and-hold Time)

Choose how long buttons must be pressed to perform resets and other similarfunctions for various features. For ease of use, button hold times can be set
separately for diﬀerent features.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording. See the relevant
sections for more information on the features below.

Available Features• End LV a
• Reset LV a Frame• End H (movie teleconverter zoom frame
display)• Reset H Frame (movie teleconverterzoom frame position)• Reset F• Reset x (ﬂash compensation)• Reset W (highlight and shadow control)• Reset c (color creator)b tab

558 EN[Press-and-hold Time]

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions• Reset N• Call EVF Auto Switch• End qa
• Insert Slate Tone
• End D
• Reset D• Switch G Lock (touch controls)• Call BKT Settings• End Flicker Scan

Choose an option

Choose a setting

b Calibrating the Level Gauge(Level Adjust)Correct deviation in the level gauge. Calibrate the gauge if you ﬁnd it is no longer
truly plumb or level.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Reset

Reset the gauge to factory default settings.

AdjustChoose the reference (zero) point. Calibrate the level gauge after positioning thecamera appropriately.

b tab[Level Adjust]Highlight an optionb Disabling Touch Controls

Press OK

(Touchscreen Settings)

Enable or disable touch controls.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Oﬀ

Disable touch controls.

On

Enable touch controlsb tab[Touchscreen Settings]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 559b Storing the Cursor Position(Menu Recall)

The camera stores the current cursor position at the time you exit the menus andreturns to that position when next the menus are displayed.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
RecallThe camera stores the cursor position. The cursor appears in the saved position
the next time menus are displayed. The camera stores the position even when
oﬀ.

Reset

The camera does not store the cursor position. The W Shooting Menu 1 tab isdisplayed.

b tab

4

[Menu Recall]

Choose an optionb Reducing Fisheye Distortion(Fisheye Compensation)

Reduce distortion when shooting with ﬁsheye lenses for results similar to those
produced by extremely wide-angle lenses. You can choose from three diﬀerent
levels. You can also simultaneously reduce distortion when shooting under water.
• This item is for still photography. See page 250 for more information.
• This option is only available with compatible ﬁsheye lenses.
As of January 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO.
Angle

After correcting distortion caused by the lens, the image is cropped to
ﬁll the frame. The picture angle of the cropped image varies with thelens. Choose from three diﬀerent crops.

j/i Correction

In addition to [Angle], the camera simultaneously corrects for distortion
occurring under water.

b tab[Fisheye Compensation]press the OK button

Choose an option

Highlight a setting and• When ﬁsheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will be displayed together with theselected crop. To disable ﬁsheye correction, open the menu and select [Oﬀ].
• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. It can then be turned on or oﬀ simply
by pressing the button. The control can be assigned using the [K Button Function] item in
G Custom Menu J (P. 463).

560 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

c Battery Order and Status(Battery Settings)

View battery status and choose the order in which the batteries are used.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Battery Priority

Choose the battery the camera uses ﬁrst. Choose from [5 Battery] and[4 Battery].

Battery Status

View the status of the batteries inserted in the camera.

c tab[Battery Settings]

Choose an option

Choose a setting• To view battery status, highlight [Battery Status] and press I on the arrow pad.

c Dimming the Backlight(Backlit LCD)

Choose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims when no operations are
performed. Dimming the backlight reduces the drain on the battery.

4• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Choose from [Hold], [8sec], [30sec], and [1min]. The backlight will not dim if [Hold] isselected.

c tab[Backlit LCD]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 561

c Sleep (Power Saving) Options(Sleep)Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode when no operations are
performed. In sleep mode, camera operations are suspended and the monitor turnsoﬀ.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Choose from [Oﬀ], [1min], [3min], and [5min].
• The camera will not enter sleep mode if [Oﬀ] is selected.
• Normal operation can be restored by pressing the shutter button halfway or by using the
buttons or multi selector.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode:
while a multiple exposure is in progress or while connected to an HDMI device or via Wi-Fi
or USB to a smartphone or computer• Controls that are currently locked via the lock lever cannot be used to reactivate the camera(P. 503).
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-oﬀ Standby]. g “Connecting When the
Camera Is Oﬀ (Power-oﬀ Standby)” (P. 590)

c tab

4

[Sleep]Choose an optionc Auto Power Oﬀ Options(Auto Power Oﬀ)

The camera will turn oﬀ automatically if no operations are performed for a set timeafter it has entered sleep mode. This option is used to choose the delay before thecamera turns oﬀ automatically.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Choose from [Oﬀ], [5min], [30min], [1h], and [4h].
• The camera will not turn oﬀ automatically if [Oﬀ] is selected.
• To reactivate the camera after it has turned oﬀ automatically, turn the camera on using the
ON/OFF lever.

c tab

562 EN[Auto Power Oﬀ]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

c Reducing Power Consumption(Quick Sleep Mode)

Further reduce power consumption during viewﬁnder photography. The delay before
the backlight turns oﬀ or the camera enters sleep mode can shortened.
• This item is for still photography.
• Power saving is not available:
during live view photography, while the viewﬁnder is on, while multiple exposure or interval
timer photography is in progress, or while connected to an HDMI device or via Wi-Fi or
USB to a smartphone or computerOn

The camera is quick to enter power-saving mode. [Backlit LCD] and [Sleep] can be set
to shorter intervals than normal. q is displayed in the monitor while power-saving isin eﬀect.

Oﬀ

The camera does not enter power-saving mode.

c tab[Quick Sleep Mode]
Highlight [On] and press I on the arrow pad
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the I button
Use theFG buttons to choose a setting• Once settings are complete, press the OK button repeatedly to return to G Custom Menuc.


Reducing Power Consumption

1
2
3

Select [On] for [Quick Sleep Mode].
Select [On] for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 553).
Enable viewﬁnder photography.

q icon• At default settings, viewﬁnder photography can be
enabled by pressing the u (LV) button in live view.
• A q icon will appear in the display.

4

1

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0opS-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

ECO

Natural
±0

S ±0

±0

Normal

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

1:02:031023

EN 563

Q Enabling or Disabling GPS(Record GPS location)

Enable GPS. GPS co-ordinates are included in the information recorded withphotos, together with data from other sensors. For more information, see “5 Using
Field Sensor Data” (P. 567).
• This item is for still photography.
On

Enable GPS.

Oﬀ

Disable GPS.

Q tab

[Record GPS location]

Choose an option• To disable GPS completely, disable all three of the following options: [Record GPS location],[Field Sensor Logger] (P. 571), and [Auto Time Adjust] (P. 455).

4

Q GPS Receiver Options(GPS Priority)

Choose the GPS mode. You can prioritize accuracy over power saving or powersaving over accuracy. For more information, see “5 Using Field Sensor Data”(P. 567).
GPS accuracy

Prioritize accuracy over power saving. Power consumption increases.

Battery power

Reduce power consumption. The size of the error in the location data
increases slightly.

Q tab

564 EN[GPS Priority]

Choose an option

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

Q Sensor Info Options(Elevation/Temperature)

Choose the units in which information is displayed. You can also calibrate thealtitude display. For more information, see “5 Using Field Sensor Data” (P. 567).
Calibrate Elevation

Calibrate the altitude display. Use this option if you notice error in thealtitude display.

m/ft

Choose the units used for altitude.

° C/° F

Choose the units used for temperature.

Q tab[Elevation/Temperature]

Choose an option

Q Log Recording

Choose a setting(Field Sensor Logger)

Record a log and save it to a memory card. For more information, see “5 Using
Field Sensor Data” (P. 567).

4• Logging ends when:- The battery level falls below 15%- The camera can no longer store the log internallyStart Log

Start logging.

Stop Log

End logging. The log stored in the camera’s internal memory will be saved to amemory card. If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose the card used
to store the log.

Save Log

Copy the log data currently stored in the camera’s internal memory to a memory
card. If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose the card used tostore the log. This option is displayed if, for example, log recording has beensuspended.

Q tab[Field Sensor Logger]

Highlight an option

Press the OK button

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

EN 565

Q Viewing Certiﬁcates(Certiﬁcation)

Display the compliance certiﬁcates for some of the standards with which the camera
complies. The remaining certiﬁcates can be found on the camera itself or in thecamera manual.
Q tab[Certiﬁcation]

Press the OK button

4566 EN

4-5 Customizing Camera Functions

5

Using Field Sensor
Data
Read this chapter for information on using the GPS featureand the camera’s built-in sensors, including sensors fortemperature and barometric pressure.

5

EN 567

5-1

Notes on Field Sensors

The camera can log data on position, altitude, and heading acquired via GPS,as well as data from temperature and pressure sensors. These data can also berecorded with photographs. Logs can be viewed using the “OLYMPUS Image Track”(OI.Track) smartphone app.
For more information on OI.Track, visit:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/• The camera also supports the Quazi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) and GLONASS.
• The latitude and longitude are recorded with photos shot with location data enabled.
• The camera is not equipped for navigation.
• Use the latest version of OI.Track.

GPS and Other Data Displays
These displays are not intended for applications that require a high degree ofprecision, and the accuracy of the data (latitude and longitude, heading, altitude,
temperature, and the like) they provide is not guaranteed. The accuracy of these
displays may be also aﬀected by factors not under the control of the manufacturer.

GPS: Precautions for Use
Disable wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS in countries, regions, or locations inwhich their use is prohibited.

5

The camera is equipped with wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS. Use of thesefeatures in countries outside the region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations.
Further, some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data
without prior governmental permission. In some Olympus sales areas, the camera
may consequently ship with location data displays disabled.
Each country and region has laws and regulations you must obey when using
the camera abroad. Check the regulations for your destination before traveling.
Olympus assumes no liability for failure to observe local laws and regulations.
Disable Wi-Fi and GPS on airplanes and in other locations where their use isprohibited. g “5-3 Disabling GPS” (P. 580), “Ending the Connection” (P. 598)

568 EN

5-1 Notes on Field Sensors

Before Using GPS(A-GPS Data)

Depending on the status of the camera and communication, it may take timeto acquire the position information. When the A-GPS is used, the position
determination time can be shortened from a few seconds to a few tens of seconds.
The A-GPS data can be updated using the smartphone app “OLYMPUS Image
Track” (OI.Track) or the PC software “OLYMPUS A-GPS Utility”.
Make sure that the camera date is set correctly.
• A-GPS data must be updated every 4 weeks. The position information may have changed
when time has elapsed after updating the data. Use as new A-GPS data as possible.
• The provision of A-GPS data may be terminated without prior notice.

Updating the A-GPS Data Using a Smartphone
Before update, install the smartphone app “OLYMPUS Image Track” (OI.Track) on
your smartphone. Refer to the URL below for details on how to update the A-GPS
data.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/
Adjust Wi-Fi settings on the camera and establish a connection to the smartphone
before proceeding (P. 584). Select [Update GPS Assist Data] in the OI.Tracksettings dialog.
• If a connection error is displayed, you will need to re-establish the connection between thecamera and smartphone

Updating the A-GPS Data Using a PC
Download the OLYMPUS A-GPS Utility software from the URL below, and install it
on your PC.

5

http://sdl.olympus-imaging.com/agps/
Refer to “OLYMPUS A-GPS Utility Instruction Manual” on the website with above
URL for details on how to update the data.
• If you are using the GPS function for the ﬁrst time and the A-GPS has not been updated, orif the function has not been used for a long time, it may take a few minutes for the position
measurement to end.

5-1 Notes on Field Sensors

EN 569

5-2

Using Field Sensors

Recording Location Data

(Record GPS location)

With the exception of location data, data provided by camera sensors are recordedwith every picture. GPS must be enabled before location data will be recorded.
• Pictures with location data are indicated by a g icon during
playback.

g icon1

100%

N 35°39’31” E 139°44’44”
25.0°C 10m 1012hPa

4:3

YF 100-0015

2019.04.01 12:30:00

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Record GPS location] in G Custom Menu
Q (K Utility) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

15

5• A g icon is displayed when [On] is selected for [Record
GPS location].
• The g icon will ﬂash while the camera calculates its
position, stopping when the process is complete.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

g icon• Location data will not be recorded with pictures taken while the camera is calculating its
position.

570 EN

5-2 Using Field Sensors

1:02:031023

Field Sensor Logs
The camera records sensor and GPS data at regular intervals to create a log. Logs
can be viewed using the “OLYMPUS Image Track” (OI.Track) smartphone app. You
can see the route you traveled with your camera and the locations where pictures
were taken.
Use [Field Sensor Logger] in G Custom Menu Q to start logging sensor data.
Location data will be recorded if they can be acquired via GPS.

Logging Data

(Field Sensor Logger)

When logging starts, the camera records the data internally. The data are saved toa memory card when logging ends. Logging will continue even while the camera isoﬀ. Logging is available only if the camera clock is set. g [X Settings] (P. 455)
• Logging ends if:- The battery level falls below 15%- The camera can no longer record the log data internallyThe following options are available:
Start Log

Start logging.

Stop Log

End logging. The data recorded internally will be transferred to a memory card.
If two cards are inserted, you will be prompted to choose the card used to store
the log.

Save Log

Copy the current log from internal memory to a memory card. If two cards areinserted, you will be prompted to choose the card used to store the log. Saving
the log may take a few minutes.

• Logging cannot start or end while the camera is connected to a smartphone.
• A message will be displayed while the log is transferred to the memory card. Do not remove
the card while the message is displayed. Failure to observe this precaution could result inthe log being lost or in damage to the camera or card.
• Logs cannot be saved if the memory card is full or otherwise unusable. Delete unwanted
data or take such other steps as may be needed to save the log.
• Each memory card can store a maximum of 199 log ﬁles. A warning will be displayed as thislimit approaches (P. 637). Insert another memory card or delete log ﬁles after copying them
to a computer.
• Selecting [Full] for [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 91) > [Reset] in W Shooting Menu 1 does
not aﬀect the option selected for [Field Sensor Logger]. The log currently stored in thecamera’s memory is not deleted and logging continues without interruption.
• The current log may be deleted from the camera’s internal memory during ﬁrmware updates.
Be sure to save the log to a memory card before updating camera ﬁrmware.
• While the camera is oﬀ, the power needed to log data is drawn from whichever battery
currently has the greatest charge, regardless of the chosen battery order.

5-2 Using Field Sensors

5

EN 571

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Field Sensor Logger] in G Custom Menu
Q (K Utility) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Press the OK button when [Start Log] is displayed.
• The item displayed varies with log status. See “Menu
Items”, below.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• A m icon will appear when sensor data are viewed in
the information display (P. 429, 515).

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

N 35°39’31” E 139°44’44”
25.0°C 10m 1012hPa

P

250 F5.6 0.0

30p

1:02:031023

m iconMenu Items
The content of the [Field Sensor Logger] menu varies with the camera’s operational
status.

5

Camera status
Logging oﬀ

Item displayed[Start Log]: Start a new log.

Logging in progress [Stop Log]: End the current log and save it to the memory card.
y Paused

572 EN[Save Log]: Save the current log to the memory card.

5-2 Using Field Sensors

Warnings
The following table describes the steps to be taken when a warning is displayed.
Warningm(ﬂashes red)g

Problem

Solution

The number of log ﬁles stored on
the current card is approaching the
maximum.

Delete unwanted ﬁles after copying
the logs to a computer.

Log ﬁles cannot be saved to thecurrent card.

Insert a write-enabled card.

Logging paused, either because
the batteries are low or the built-in
memory the camera uses to store thecurrent log ﬁle is full.

Save the current log to a memory
card.

5

5-2 Using Field Sensors

EN 573

Viewing Sensor Data

(G/Info Settings)

GPS and other sensor data can be viewed in an electronic compass display.
Sensor data can be added to the displays available during live view photography.
An electronic compass display is available during viewﬁnder photography and onother occasions when live view is not available.
Electronic Compass (Viewﬁnder
Photography)

Sensor Data (Live View)
1

1

100%

1
2

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00

S-IS AUTO

N 35°39’31”
325.0 °C
10 m
1012 hPa

YF
4K

30p

N 35°39’31” E 139°44’44”
25.0°C 10m 1012hPaP
12 3

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0
4

5

1023

6

P

250 F5.6 0.0

2 Field sensor log statusm (green): Log in progressm (red): Log in progress (no memory
card available to store
current log or maximum log
ﬁle count approaching)
Logging suspended org:unsaved log remaining inmemory574 EN

5-2 Using Field Sensors

5
6
1:02:03

3 Heading
4 Temperature
5 Altitude
6 Barometric pressure
7 Location data (longitude/latitude)• Camera orientation is shown as follows:

Lens direction

4

7

1 Receiving GPS data
Steady: Position acquired
Flashing: Calculating position

5

7

E 139°44’44”

ISO-A
200

Orientation of camera top1023

• Location data are only shown in the sensor data display when GPS is enabled. GPS can be
enabled using any of the following items:- [Record GPS location] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 570)
- [Field Sensor Logger] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 571)
- [Auto Time Adjust] in the e setup menu (P. 455)

Enabling Sensor Data Display
Still Photography Modes (G/Info Settings)

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [G/Info Settings] in G Custom Menu P(Disp/8/PC) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight options using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• To enable the live view sensor data display: Select[LV-Info], then highlight [Field Sensor Info] and press
the OK button. The selected item will be marked with acheck (v).
• To enable the electronic compass display: Select [LV
OFF-Info], then highlight [Field Sensor Info] and press
the OK button. The selected item will be marked with acheck (v).

4

Press the MENU button when settings arecomplete.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

5• G Custom Menu P will be displayed.

• You can also exit the menus by pressing the shutter
button halfway.

5-2 Using Field Sensors

EN 575

6

Display sensor data or the electronic compass.
• Sensor data appear in the live view display. Press the INFO button repeatedly until
sensor data are displayed.
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

1

100%

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.01023

Basic info

INFO
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

Info hidden
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

INFO

ISO-A
200

INFO
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

N 35°39’31” E 139°44’44”
25.0°C 10m 1012hPaP

30p

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

P

1023

Sensor data

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

P

1023

Level gauge(Custom Display 2)

1:02:03

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

Histogram(Custom Display 1)• You can also hold the INFO button and rotate the front or rear dial to choose theinformation displayed. The displays can be cycled in either direction.
• The electronic compass is displayed when the monitor is not being used for live view.
Press the INFO button to toggle the information displayed.
1

1

100%

100%

2019.04.01 12:30:00
A±0
ISO
WB
Auto
Auto
G±0
#
S-AF
# ± 0.0opS-IS Auto
YF
M-IS
YF

P

2019.04.01 12:30:00

Natural
S ±0±0Normal±0

N 35°39’31”
E 139°44’44”
25.0 °C
10 m
1012 hPa

sRGB
4K

30p

250 F5.6 0.0

Super control panel

5

INFO

1:02:031023

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Electronic compass• To view sensor info in the viewﬁnder when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style],
select [Field Sensor Info] for [V Info Settings] in G Custom Menu a (P. 555).

576 EN

5-2 Using Field Sensors

Movie Mode (n Info Settings)

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [n Display Settings] in the n video menu
and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [n Info Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.

4

Highlight [Field Sensor Info] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• [Field Sensor Info] will be marked with a check (v).

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6

Press the INFO button repeatedly to view sensor
data in the shooting display.

5

5-2 Using Field Sensors

EN 577

Sensor Data Display Options(Elevation/Temperature)
Choose the units used for temperature and altitude in the sensor data display. You
can also calibrate altitude.
Calibrate
Elevation

Calibrate altitude when the current altitude and the value shown by the camera
do not match.

m/ft

Choose whether altitude is shown in meters (m) or feet (ft).

ºC/ºF

Choose whether the temperature is displayed in degrees Celsius (ºC) or
degrees Fahrenheit (ºF).

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Elevation/Temperature] in G Custom
Menu Q (K Utility) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.
• Options for the selected item will be displayed.

45Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• G Custom Menu Q will be displayed.

5578 EN

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

5-2 Using Field Sensors

GPS Options(GPS Priority)

Choose the GPS mode.
GPS accuracy Prioritize accuracy over power saving. Power consumption increases.
Battery power

Prioritize power saving over accuracy. The size of the error in the location
data increases slightly.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [GPS Priority] in G Custom Menu Q (KUtility) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• G Custom Menu Q will be displayed.

4

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

5

5-2 Using Field Sensors

EN 579

5-3

Disabling GPS

The use of GPS or Wi-Fi may be prohibited in some countries, regions, or locations.
To disable GPS, disable all the following settings as described below.
G Custom Menu Q > [Record GPS location] (P. 570)
Select [Oﬀ]
G Custom Menu Q > [Field Sensor Logger] (P. 571)
Conﬁrm that [Stop Log] is selected
e setup menu > [X Settings] (P. 455) > [Auto Time Adjust]Select [Oﬀ]Menu Access1
2

Q (K Utility) tab[Record GPS location] (P. 570)

[Oﬀ]

Q (K Utility) tabLog] is selected[Field Sensor Logger] (P. 571)

Conﬁrm that [Stop3e (setup menu) tab[X Settings] (P. 455)

5580 EN

5-3 Disabling GPS[Auto Time Adjust]

[Oﬀ]

6

Connecting the
Camera to External
Devices
Connect the camera to external devices such as computersor displays using cables or via wireless LAN.

6

EN 581

6-1

Connection Types andSoftware

A number of tasks can be accomplished by connecting the camera to an external
device such as a computer or smartphone. Choose a connection type and software
according to your goals.
Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi
With a direct Wi-Fi link to the camera, smartphones can be used to view thepictures on the camera and take pictures remotely. With a Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi
connection, you can view and download pictures using smartphone controls withouteven turning the camera on.
Connect using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) app.
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
Pictures can be automatically uploaded to a computer connected via a routeror access point. You can take pictures using the camera and view them on thecomputer.
Connect using “OLYMPUS Capture” computer software.
Connecting to Computers via USB
Connect the camera via USB to control it remotely and take pictures froma computer. You also have the option of uploading pictures to the computer
automatically. Computers can be used to both take and view pictures at the sametime.
Connect using “OLYMPUS Capture” computer software.
Photos and movies that have been uploaded to the computer can be edited ororganized using “Olympus Workspace”.

6

Connecting to External Displays
Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use
the television to display pictures to an audience. When connected to a television, thecamera can be controlled using the TV remote. No app or other software is required.
You can also connect the camera to HDMI monitors or video recorders. For more
information, see page 434.

582 EN

6-1 Connection Types and SoftwarePrecautions for Using Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
Disable wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS in countries, regions, or locations inwhich their use is prohibited.
The camera is equipped with wireless LAN, Bluetooth®, and GPS. Use of thesefeatures in countries outside the region of purchase may violate local wirelessregulations.
Some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data without
prior governmental permission. In some Olympus sales areas, the camera may
consequently ship with location data displays disabled.
Each country and region has its own laws and regulations. Check them before
traveling and observe them while abroad. Olympus assumes no liability for any
failure on the part of the user to observe local laws and regulations.
Disable Wi-Fi and GPS on airplanes and in other locations where their use isprohibited. g “5-3 Disabling GPS” (P. 580), “Ending the Connection” (P. 598)
• Wireless transmissions are vulnerable to interception by third parties. Use wireless featureswith this in mind.
• The wireless transceiver is located in the camera grip. Keep it as far away as practicablefrom metal objects.
• When transporting the camera in a bag or other container, be aware that the contentsof the container or the materials of which it is constructed may interfere with wirelesstransmissions, which can prevent the camera connecting to a smartphone.
• Wi-Fi connections increase the drain on the batteries. The connection may be lost during use
if the batteries are low.
• Devices such as microwave ovens and cordless phones that generate radio-frequency
emissions, magnetic ﬁelds, or static electricity may slow or otherwise interfere with wirelessdata transmission.
• Some wireless LAN features are unavailable when the memory card write-protect switch is in
the “LOCK” position.

6

6-1 Connection Types and Software

EN 583

6-2

Connecting to Smartphones
via Wi-Fi

Connect the camera and smartphone using a direct Wi-Fi link.
Use the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) smartphone app to connect to thecamera from a smartphone.
Once installed on your smartphone, OI.Share can be used to view the scene visible
through the camera lens and take pictures remotely.
OI.Share can also be used to view and download the photos and movies on thecamera memory card. Using Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi, you can operate the camera
using smartphone controls alone. You can also download previously-selectedpictures to the smartphone while the camera is oﬀ.

6

584 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

Installing Apps
To connect to the camera from your smartphone via Wi-Fi, use “OLYMPUS Image
Share” (OI.Share).
OLYMPUS Image Share
Use the smartphone to control the camera remotely and download pictures. For
more information, visit:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/
In addition to OI.Share, Olympus oﬀers the following apps for viewing sensor logs
and retouching pictures:• OLYMPUS Image TrackUse “OLYMPUS Image Track” (OI.Track) to view and manage ﬁeld sensor logs recorded withthe camera. For more information, visit:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/• OLYMPUS Image PaletteUse “OLYMPUS Image Palette” (OI.Palette) to retouch pictures downloaded to thesmartphone. Supported are such features as art ﬁlters, the Color Creator, and cropping
pictures. For more information, visit:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/

66-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 585

Connecting to Smartphones(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Adjust camera settings for connection to a smartphone. OI.Share is required.
Changes made using OI.Share apply to both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Install the appon the smartphone before proceeding.

Readying the Camera(Availability)

Enable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® on the camera. Note that this is not necessary atdefault settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled by default. The camera displays a w icon
when Wi-Fi is enabled.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

6
5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
• A V icon will be displayed.

V icon1

100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

586 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

Pairing the Camera and Smartphone
Follow the steps below when connecting the devices for the ﬁrst time.
• Adjust pairing settings using OI.Share, not the settings app that is part of the smartphone
operating system.

1

Launch the copy of the dedicated OI.Share app
previously installed on your smartphone.

2

Press the MENU button on the camera to display
the camera menus.

3

Highlight [T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [T Wi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

4Highlight [Device Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• A pairing guide will be displayed in the camera monitor.

5

Press the OK button after reading each page of instructions.
• Stop when you reach the following display.

6
Bluetooth local nameBluetooth passcode

QR codeWi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi password• The display lists the Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID andpassword, and a QR code.

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 587

6

Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OI.Sharedisplay.
• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.

7

Following the instructions displayed by OI.Share,scan the QR code to proceed with pairing.
• OI.Share will display a message when settings arecomplete.
• Smartphones that are unable to scan QR codes must be
conﬁgured manually. Tap [Can’t scan the QR code?] in
the OI.Share QR scan display and follow the on-screen
instructions.
• If the smartphone is currently connected via Wi-Fi
to another network or device, you will need to selectthe camera in the Wi-Fi connection section of thesmartphone settings app.
• w1 will be displayed when pairing is complete.

86588 EN

Once the devices are paired, tap [Import Photos]
in the smartphone OI.Share display to view thepictures on the camera memory card.
• To end the connection, press the camera MENU button
or tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.
• You can also end the connection by turning the camera
oﬀ from inside the OI.Share display.

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

QR コードを枠内に配置してください。

• You can change the connection password generated by the camera (P. 618).
• If the smartphone is unable to read the QR code, you will need to conﬁgure the device
manually following the instructions displayed by OI.Share.
Bluetooth®: In the OI.Share Bluetooth® settings dialog, select the local name displayed in
the camera monitor and enter the passcode.
Wi-Fi:
Display Wi-Fi settings in the smartphone settings app and enter the SSID andpassword displayed by the camera. For information on the settings app, see thedocumentation for your smartphone.

6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 589Connecting When the Camera Is Oﬀ(Power-oﬀ Standby)
The camera can be conﬁgured not to end the connection to the smartphonewhen turned oﬀ. The smartphone can then access the camera and automaticallydownload pictures while the camera is oﬀ.
• Before proceeding, conﬁrm that:- [On] is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] (P. 586),- the camera and smartphone are paired (P. 587), and- a memory card is inserted• The camera performs network-related processing while powering down with [On] (enabled)
selected for [Power-oﬀ Standby]. It may therefore require additional time to power on
immediately after having been turned oﬀ.
SelectWhen turning the camera oﬀ via the ON/OFF lever, you will be prompted to choose
whether the wireless connection to the smartphone remains active while the camera
is oﬀ.

Oﬀ

Turning the camera oﬀ ends the wireless connection to the smartphone.

On

The wireless connection to the smartphone remains active after the camera is turned
oﬀ. The smartphone can be used to download pictures from the camera or view thepictures on the camera memory card.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Power-oﬀ Standby] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.

4

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6590 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

[Select]
If you select [Select] for [Power-oﬀ Standby], a
conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed the next time thecamera is turned oﬀ. Highlight an option using FG on
the arrow pad and press the OK button.

Yes

The camera will turn oﬀ, leaving the wireless connection to the smartphone active.

No

The camera will end the connection to the smartphone before turning oﬀ.

• If no operations are performed about a minute after the conﬁrmation dialog is displayed, thecamera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn oﬀ automatically.
• The connection will end automatically under the conditions listed below. The connection will
be re-enabled when next you turn the camera on.
- 24 hours pass with no data being exchanged with the smartphone.
- The memory card is removed and reinserted.
- The batteries are replaced.

6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 591

Copying Pictures to Smartphones
Pictures on the camera memory card can be downloaded to a smartphone using
either of the following methods:• Use the smartphone to select pictures for download.
• Automatically download previously-selected pictures while the camera is oﬀ.

These methods are described below.

Downloading Pictures Selected with OI.Share
Use the smartphone to view the pictures on the camera and select pictures fordownload.

1

Launch the dedicated OI.Share app on thesmartphone.

2

Start the connection using camera menus or touch
controls.
• To start the connection from the menus: Highlight[T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback menu and press
I on the arrow pad. Highlight [Device Connection] andpress the OK button. w1 will be displayed when aconnection is established.

• To start the connection using touch controls:
Tap V in the camera monitor and tap [Device
Connection] when prompted. w1 will be displayedwhen a connection is established.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

6

592 ENP• If you have previously connected to the smartphone, thecamera will start the connection automatically.

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:03

1023

3

Tap [Import Photos] in OI.Share.
• OI.Share will list the images on the camera.
• The memory card can be selected using OI.Share.

4

Select pictures and tap the save button.
• Once download is complete, you can turn the camera oﬀ
from OI.Share.

• If the following options are selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e (setup) menu, youwill also be able to download pictures to the smartphone as described in Steps 3 and 4 while
the camera is oﬀ.
- [Availability]: [On]- [Power-oﬀ Standby]: [On]6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 593

Auto Download
Pictures previously marked for sharing on the camera can be downloaded
automatically when the camera is oﬀ.

1

Mark pictures for sharing.
• Display pictures and mark them for sharing. See “Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share
Order)” (P. 277) and “Selecting Movies for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 446) for more
information.
“Share” icon
• Press the h (share) button to markpictures for sharing during playback.
Pictures that have been selected forsharing are indicated by a h icon.
Press the button again to deselect.
• You can also press the OK buttonand select the desired option from a
YF 100-0015
menu.
2019.04.01 12:30:00
15
1

48kHz

100%

4:3

h button2

Choose the operation performed when the camera is oﬀ.
• Choose an option for [Power-oﬀ Standby]. See page 590 for details.
MENU buttone (setup menu)[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings][Power-oﬀ
Standby]Highlight [On] or [Select] and press the OK button

3

Turn the camera oﬀ.
• The selected photos and movies will be uploaded to the smartphone automatically. If
you are using an iOS device, launch OI.Share on the smartphone before turning thecamera oﬀ.
• If [Select] is chosen for [Power-oﬀ Standby], a conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed(P. 591). Highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.
• iOS devices will not connect to the camera automatically via a router or other wirelessaccess point. Use OI.Share to download pictures.
• Some smartphones may end download on entering sleep mode. Conﬁgure the smartphone
to not enter sleep mode.

6594 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

Removing Share Marking(Reset Share Order)

Remove share marking from all the pictures on the card in a selected slot. Sharemarking can be removed from multiple pictures in one operation. See “Selecting
Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 277) and “Selecting Movies for Sharing(Share Order)” (P. 446).
• MENU buttonq (playback menu) tabpress the OK button[Reset share Order]

Highlight [Yes] and6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 595

Remote Photography Using a Smartphone
Use OI.Share to control the camera remotely and take pictures from a smartphone.

1

Launch the dedicated OI.Share app on thesmartphone.

2

Tap V in the camera monitor and tap [Device
Connection] when prompted.
• If connection options are displayed, highlight [Device
Connection] and press the OK button.
• If you have previously connected to the smartphone,
the camera will start the connection automatically.
• To connect from the camera menus, highlight[T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback menu
and press I on the arrow pad. Highlight [Device
Connection] and press the OK button.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection isestablished.

3

Tap [Remote Control] in OI.Share.
• Remote control options will be displayed.

4

Tap the shutter button to take pictures.
• The pictures will be saved to the memory card.

6596 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Accessing Field Sensor Logs
Use OI.Share to view sensor logs created with the camera. g [Field Sensor
Logger] (P. 565)

1

Launch the dedicated OI.Share app on thesmartphone.

2

Tap V in the camera monitor and tap [Device
Connection] when prompted.
• If the camera prompts you to choose a connection,highlight [Device Connection] and press the OK
button.
• If you have previously connected to the smartphone,
the camera will start the connection automatically.
• To connect from the camera menus, highlight[T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback menu
and press I on the arrow pad. Highlight [Device
Connection] and press the OK button.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection isestablished.

3

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Tap [Add Geotag] in OI.Share.
• OI.Track will start.
• If OI.Track is not installed, install it as directed in the onscreen instructions.

4

Tap [Add Logs from Camera] in OI.Track.
• OI.Track will list the logs recorded by the camera. Tap alog to display it.

6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 597

Ending the Connection
End the connection to the smartphone. The camera uses Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
when connecting to smartphones. The use of these features may be prohibited insome countries or regions, in which case they should be disabled.

Ending the Current Connection

1

Use the [Power Oﬀ] slider in the OI.Share or
OI.Track settings dialog.
• Alternatively, you can press the camera MENU button
and tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.

E-M1X

MENU button

2

Disconnect

Select [Oﬀ] for [Power-oﬀ Standby] to disable the “auto upload while oﬀ”
feature.
• MENU button[Oﬀ]

e setup menu

[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings]

Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

6598 EN

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi[Power-oﬀ Standby]

4

Highlight [Oﬀ] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

6

6-2 Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi

EN 599

6-3

Connecting to Computers via
Wi-Fi

Connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi. Using Wi-Fi, the camera can connect
via a router to a computer on a household network or the like.
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” computer software to connect to the camera froma computer. Pictures taken with the camera are uploaded automatically to thecomputer, where you can view the results while shooting is in progress.
Using this feature requires that you install the software on the computer, pair thecomputer with the camera, and adjust camera settings for connection via the routeror access point.

6

600 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

Installing Software
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi.
OLYMPUS Capture
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures taken with acamera connected via Wi-Fi to the same network as the computer. To learn more or
to download the software, visit the website below. When downloading the software,be prepared to provide the camera serial number.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at the website above.

6

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

EN 601

Readying the Computer (Windows)
If Windows is unable to detect a camera connected via a router or access point,
follow the steps below to register the device manually.

Windows 8/Windows 10

1

Connect the camera and computer using a USB
cable.

2

Clickon the computer desktop to display[Windows Settings] options.

3

Click [Devices] to display options for [Bluetooth &other devices].

4

Click [Add Bluetooth or other devices].

5

Click [+ Everything else].
• An [Add a device] window will open and [E-M1X] will
be displayed after a short pause.

6

Click [E-M1X].
• When a message is displayed stating the preparation iscomplete, click [Done].

6


Windows 7

1

Connect the camera and computer using a USB cable.
• [E-M1X] will be displayed in Windows Explorer.

2

Right-click [E-M1X] and select [Install].
• A message will be displayed when device registration is complete.
• Check that the device is registered in the Device Manager.

602 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

Pairing the Computer with the Camera (New Link)
The camera and computer must be paired in order to connect. Up to four computers
can be paired with the camera at a time. To pair a computer with the camera,connect it via USB. Pairing need only be performed once per computer.

1

After conﬁrming that the camera is oﬀ, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
• Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to the connectors
when the USB cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)
USB connector
Small connector

USB port

USB cable• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.

2

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 529) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting to
a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

3

Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

6

EN 603

4

Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installed on
the computer.
• After starting up, “OLYMPUS Capture” will prompt you tochoose the connection type.
USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

5

Click [Create new link].
• If nothing happens, reconnect the camera.

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

[Create new link]• Enter the name that will be used on the camera to identify
the computer. The default is the computer’s “Computer
Name”.
• The name used on the camera can be up to 15 characterslong.

Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?

PC Name:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Settings

6

CancelClick [Settings] in “OLYMPUS Capture”.
• When a message is displayed stating that pairing iscomplete, disconnect the camera as instructed.

Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?

PC Name:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Settings

Cancel[Settings]• Repeat the above steps to pair the camera with each additional computer.
• The pairing information stored on the camera can be viewed and deleted using “OLYMPUS
Capture”.

6604 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings(T Wi-Fi Connect)

Adjust settings for connection to the network to which the paired computer belongs.
Before the camera can connect to the computer via Wi-Fi, it must be conﬁgured
for connection to the network via the Wi-Fi router or access point. Multiple network
proﬁles can be stored on the camera and recalled as desired. [T Wi-Fi Connect]settings can be adjusted via the following methods:
Conﬁgure the camera for automatic connection (P. 607).
To connect using a WPS router or access point, simply press the device’s
WPS button.
Connect by WPS[PBC Method]: Connect using only the router WPS button. The camera
connects automatically when the button is pressed.
[PIN Method]: The camera connects in PIN mode. Enter the camera
PIN on the router to connect.

Connect from
Access Point List

Choose the network from a list (P. 612).
The camera will search for available networks; to connect, select a
network from the list and enter the network password.

Connect manually

Adjust connection settings manually (P. 609).
To connect, enter the network name (SSID) and other settings.

• WPS connections require a WPS-compatible router or access point.
• Connecting via WPS in PIN mode requires that the router itself be connected to aadministrator computer from which the PIN can be entered.
• Manual connection requires that you have information on the network to which you areconnecting.
• The camera can connect via routers or access points of the following types:- Standard: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac- Band: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz- Security: WPA2
• The camera can store settings for up to eight networks. The camera will automaticallyconnect to networks to which it has previously connected.
• Each new connection after the eighth overwrites settings for the connection that has beenleft unused for the longest period of time.
• Adding a network proﬁle for an access point with the same MAC address as existing proﬁleoverwrites the settings for the existing proﬁle.
• For information on using routers or access points, see the documentation provided with thedevice.
• Network proﬁles are not reset when you select [Full] for [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 91) >[Reset] in W Shooting Menu 1. To reset network settings, use [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings](P. 457) > [Reset Settings] in the e setup menu.

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

6

EN 605

Enabling Camera Wi-Fi(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)

Before connecting to a network via Wi-Fi, you will need to enable Wi-Fi on thecamera. Note that this is not necessary at default settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled bydefault. Proceed to page 607.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6606 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

Connecting via WPS(Connect by WPS)

Connect using the WPS feature on the router or access point.

1

Press the MENU button on the camera to display
the camera menus.

2

Highlight [T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [T Wi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Connect by WPS] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

5

Highlight an option using the FG buttons andpress the OK button.
• If you selected [PBC Method], press the WPS button on
the router or access point.
• Press the camera OK button to start the connection.
• Some time may be required for connection after the
button is pressed.
• If you selected [PIN Method], the camera will display
a PIN; enter it on the router or access point. Press thecamera OK button when the router is ready to connect.

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

6

EN 607

6

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one
computer, you will be prompted to choose a computer
before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the OK
button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a diﬀerent computer, you must ﬁrst
terminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a message
to that eﬀect, followed by the options shown in Step 5.
Repeat Steps 5–6.

7

Press the OK button to exit to the shooting display.
• The camera will return to the standard shooting display.
A w icon will be displayed in the monitor.

w icon1

100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

6

608 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

Connecting Manually(Manual Connections)

Adjust network settings manually. You will need to provide:SSID

The network name (SSID).

Authentication

The type of security used on the network.

Password

The password for connection to a secured network.

IP Address Assign

Choose whether the camera IP address is assigned automaticallyby the network DHCP server.

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

These ﬁelds are required when the IP address is assigned
manually. The settings used vary with the network.

DNS

1

Press the MENU button on the camera to display
the camera menus.

2

Highlight [T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [T Wi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Connect manually] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

6

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

EN 6095Highlight items using the FG buttons and press
the OK button.
• Options for the selected item will be displayed.

SSID

Enter the network SSID.

Authentication

Select the type of security used on the network. Choose from
[None] and [WPA2].

Password

If you selected [WPA2] for [Authentication], enter the network
password.

Choose from [Auto(DHCP)] and [Manual]. Automatic IP address
IP Address Assign assignment requires a network with a DHCP server conﬁgured
to supply IP addresses automatically.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

These ﬁelds are required when [Manual] is selected for [IPAddress Assign].

DNS

6Highlight [Start Connection] using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.

7

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.

6

• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer,
you will be prompted to choose a computer before the
network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer using
the FG buttons and press the OK button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a diﬀerent computer, you must ﬁrst
terminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a message
to that eﬀect, followed by the options shown in Step 6.
Repeat Steps 5–6.

610 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

8

Press the OK button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w icon
will appear in the monitor.

w icon1

100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

6

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

EN 611

Choosing a Network from a List
(Connect from Access Point List)
The camera will search for available networks and display them in a list from which
you can choose the network to which you wish to connect.

1

Press the MENU button on the camera to display
the camera menus.

2

Highlight [T Wi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [T Wi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.

3Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Connect from Access Point List] using theFG buttons and press the OK button.
• A list of available networks will be displayed.

5

Highlight the desired network using the FG
buttons and press the OK button.

6• If the network is password-protected, you will beprompted to enter a password. Enter the password andpress the OK button.
• Press the I button to display [Detail Settings] for thehighlighted network. You can enter an IP address andadjust other settings manually.
• Press the R button to repeat the search and update the
network list.

612 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

6

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• Password-protected networks are indicated by a t icon.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one
computer, you will be prompted to choose a computer
before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the OK
button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a diﬀerent computer, you must ﬁrst
terminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a message
to that eﬀect, followed by the options shown in Step 5.
Repeat Steps 5–6.

7

Press the OK button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w icon
will appear in the monitor.

w icon1

100% w

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023$ Connecting to Previously-Selected Networks• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks when you select[Access Point Connection] via the V icon. You will not be required to supply a password.
• If multiple networks are available, the camera will connect ﬁrst to the most recently-usednetwork.
• Once the camera has connected, it will display a list of available networks with the current
network shown by a check mark v.
• To connect to a diﬀerent network, highlight it in the list and press the OK button.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer on the network, you will beprompted to choose a computer before the network list is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the OK button.

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

6

EN 613

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Take pictures and upload them to a computer on the same network as the camera.
Before proceeding, connect the camera and computer as described in “Pairing theComputer with the Camera (New Link)” (P. 603).

1

Launch “OLYMPUS Capture” on destination
computer.
• If prompted to choose a connection type, click [Wi-Fi
Connection].
• The computer will display the message, [Camera
connected] when the camera is detected.

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

Exit

[Wi-Fi Connection]• The camera will display the message shown at right whena connection is established.

2

Conﬁgure “OLYMPUS Capture” to automaticallydownload pictures as they are taken.
• Select the source card slot (1 or 2) and the type of
pictures (JPEG photos, RAW photos, or movies) to be
downloaded.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.

Select file types to export
Slot 1
Slot 2
Save in

Original
Files waiting

The “OLYMPUS Capture”
control window

3

6

Take pictures using camera controls.
• The pictures will be uploaded to the computer after they
are saved to the camera memory card.
• A p (“image upload”) icon will be displayed while upload
is in progress.
• The camera will upload only photos and movies recorded
while the camera and computer are connected. Any
pictures taken before Wi-Fi was enabled on the camera
will not be uploaded.

Image upload
1

100% wp

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

614 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

• While the camera is connected to a network:- Sleep mode is disabled- Interval-timer photography is not available- Some restrictions apply to the options available during playback• [PC connection ended] options will be displayed when the camera’s connection to the
network ends. Upload of any remaining data will resume when the connection is reestablished. Note, however, that remaining data will not be uploaded if:- The Wi-Fi connection is ended using camera controls- The camera is turned oﬀ- The source memory card is removed• The upload queue for each card can contain no more than 3000 pictures.
• If “OLYMPUS Capture” displays the message [This application is unable to ﬁnd a camera in
the camera control mode.], check:- that the camera has been paired with the computer,- that you selected the correct computer when connecting to the network, and- that the camera is registered with the computer (Windows only). g “Readying theComputer (Windows)” (P. 602)

6

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

EN 615

Ending the Connection
End the Wi-Fi connection. The use of Wi-Fi may be prohibited in some countries orregions, in which case Wi-Fi should be disabled.

Ending the Current Connection

1

Tap V in the camera monitor.

1

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023• You will be prompted to conﬁrm whether you wish to
disconnect.
• The network SSID is shown in the display.

2

Highlight [Disconnect] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the OK button.
• The camera will terminate the connection and exit to
the shooting display.
• A conﬁrmation dialog will be displayed if dataremain to be uploaded. To terminate the connection,highlight [Yes] and press the OK button.

3

6

To reconnect, tap V or select [T Wi-Fi
Connect] > [Access Point Connection] in theq playback menu and press the OK button.
• The camera will automatically reconnect topreviously-selected networks.

• To connect to a new network, highlight [Maintain] in Step 2 and press the OK button. Choose
from a list of available networks and adjust settings as described in “Choosing a Networkfrom a List (Connect from Access Point List)” (P. 612).
• If you turn the camera oﬀ while upload is in progress, you will be prompted to choose
whether to power the camera down and terminate the Wi-Fi connection immediately or to
power the camera down only after upload is complete.

616 EN

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight [Oﬀ] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

6

6-3 Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi

EN 617

6-4

Network Settings

Change the password used for Wi-Fi connections from a smartphone or restore
default Wi-Fi settings used for connection to a computer. The latter are not restored
when a camera reset is performed and can only be restored as described below.

Changing Passwords(Connection Password)

Generate new passwords for use when connecting to the camera from asmartphone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [Connection Password] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• The current password will be displayed.

4

Press the R (movie) button.
• The password changes each time the button is pressed.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords change.
• Press the OK button to exit the [Connection Password]
display.

6
5

Press the OK button again to exit the [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth Settings] menu.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• After changing the password, you will need to update
smartphone connection settings (P. 586).

618 EN

6-4 Network Settings

Restoring Default Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® Settings(Reset Settings)
Restore default Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® settings. All settings, including those forconnection via a router and pairing information for the computers on the network,
are reset.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.

3

Highlight [Reset Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• [Reset Settings] options will be displayed.

4

Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.
• Settings will be reset and the camera will exit to the[Reset Settings] display.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords will be reset.

5

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

6

6-4 Network Settings

EN 619

6-5

Connecting to Computers via
USB

Connect the camera to a computer using the USB cable.
Pictures can be uploaded to the computer as they are taken and the results viewed
while shooting is in progress. You can also control the camera from a computer,including taking pictures remotely while viewing camera settings in the computer
display. Note that dedicated “OLYMPUS Capture” software is required for remotecontrol of cameras connected via USB.
Pictures on the camera memory cards can be downloaded directly to the computer
via USB and organized using a computer application. Use Olympus Workspace tomanage your pictures.
You can also use the computer to download and perform ﬁrmware updates. Productﬁrmware updates can be performed using Olympus Workspace.
You can also treat the connected camera as a storage device and copy data fromcamera memory cards to the computer.

6

620 EN

6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB

Compatible Computers
Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable.
• Note that even if the computer is equipped with USB connectors, operation is not guaranteedwith:USB expansion ports, computers not running the operating system with which they
shipped, or homemade computers.
• The camera can be connected to computers that meet the following system requirements.
Windows: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Mac:
OS X versions 10.9 – 10.11, macOS versions v10.12 – v10.14

Installing Software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly tothe computer via USB.
OLYMPUS Capture
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures as they aretaken or control the camera remotely. To learn more or to download the software,
visit the website below. When downloading the software, be prepared to provide thecamera serial number.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at the website above.
Olympus Workspace
This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos andmovies recorded with the camera. It can also be used to update the camera
ﬁrmware. The software can be downloaded from the website below. Be prepared toprovide the camera serial number when downloading the software.

6

https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/

6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB

EN 621

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken(0)

Connect the camera to a computer via USB to upload pictures as they area taken.
You can take pictures using the controls on the camera body or while controlling thecamera remotely from the computer.

1

After conﬁrming that the camera is oﬀ, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
• Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to the connectors
when the USB cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)
USB connector
Small connector

USB port

USB cable• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.

2

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 529) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting to
a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

63622 EN

Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB

4

Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installed on
the computer.
• When prompted to choose the connection type, click[USB Connection].

USB Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link

Exit

[USB Connection]

5

Conﬁgure “OLYMPUS Capture” for download.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.

File Save Settings

Original

The “OLYMPUS Capture”
control window

6

Take pictures using camera or computer controls.
• The pictures will be downloaded to the computer according
to the options chosen.

• The computer cannot be used to change the camera shooting mode.
• The computer cannot be used to delete pictures from the memory cards inserted in thecamera.
• The camera display frame rate may drop if the view through the camera lens is displayed
simultaneously both on the computer and in the camera monitor.
• See online help for more information on using the software.
• The connection to the computer will end if you:- exit “OLYMPUS Capture”,- insert or remove memory cards, or- turn the camera oﬀ.

6

6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB

EN 623

Copying Pictures to the Computer(Storage)

When connected to a computer, the camera can function as external storage inmuch same way as a hard drive or other external storage device. Data can becopied from the camera to the computer.

1

After conﬁrming that the camera is oﬀ, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
• Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to the connectors
when the USB cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)
USB connector
Small connector

USB port

USB cable• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.

2

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 529) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting to
a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

3

Highlight [Storage] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the OK button.

4

The camera will connect to the computer as new storage device.

6• To use Windows Photo Gallery, select [MTP] in Step 3.
• Camera functions cannot be used while the camera is connected to the computer.
• To enable the use of camera functions while the camera is connected, select [0](P. 622).

624 EN

6-5 Connecting to Computers via USB

6-6Powering the Camera via USB(USB Power Delivery)

Mobile batteries or USB AC adapters conforming to the USB Power Delivery (USBPD) standard can be used to power the camera. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A• This feature cannot be used at battery levels of 10% or less.

1

After conﬁrming that the camera is oﬀ, use the USB cable to connect it to thedevice.
• Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to the connectors
when the USB cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)
USB connector
Mobile battery orother USB device

Type C

USB port

Type CUSB cable• The supplied USB cable (CB-USB11) cannot be used for USB Power Delivery (USBPD).
• The method used for connection varies from device to device. See the documentation
provided with the device for details.
• You may be unable to use USB Power Delivery (USB PD) with some USB devices. See
the manual supplied with the USB device.

2

Turn the camera on.

6• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 529) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the display will remain blank when the camera isconnected to the USB device. Be sure the batteries are charged.

3

Highlight [USB PD] using FG on the arrow padand press the OK button.
• The camera will draw power from the connected USB
device.

6-6 Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)

EN 625

6-7

Connecting to TVs or External
Displays via HDMI

Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use thetelevision to display pictures to an audience. The TV remote can be used to control
the display while the television is connected to the camera. No app or other softwareis required.

You can also ﬁlm movies while the camera is connected to an external monitor orvideo recorder via HDMI. For more information, see page 434.
• HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers. Use an HDMI-certiﬁed cable.

6626 EN

6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI

Viewing Pictures on a TV

(HDMI)

Photos and movies can be viewed on a high-deﬁnition TV connected directly to thecamera by means of an HDMI cable. A remote control can be used to operate thedisplay while it is connected to the camera.

HDMI Output
Choose the signal output to the HDMI device. You can adjust movie frame size andframe rate to match TV speciﬁcations and the video standards supported in yourcountry or region. Match output settings to the input settings on the TV.

Output Size

The format for the video signal output via the HDMI connector can bechosen from the options below.
• [C4K]: 4K Digital Cinema (4096 × 2160)• [4K]: 4K (3840 × 2160) priority• [1080p]: Full High Deﬁnition (1080p) priority• [720p]: High Deﬁnition (720p) priority• [480p/576p]: 480p/576p

HDMI Control

When the camera is in playback mode, it can be operated using the
television remote control (P. 630). Choose from [Oﬀ] and [On]. When[On] is selected, the camera can be used for playback only.

Output Frame Rate

Choose a frame rate for the signal output via the HDMI connector
according to whether the television supports NTSC (60p) or PAL (50p).

• [HDMI Control] and [Output Frame Rate] settings cannot be changed while the camera isconnected to another device via HDMI.
• Audio can be output only on devices that support the audio format selected with the camera.
• The options available via [HDMI Control] vary with the device connected. See the device
manual for details.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Display G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/PC).

6
3

Highlight [HDMI] using FG on the arrow pad andpress the I button.

6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI

EN 627

4Highlight an item using the FG buttons and pressthe I button.

5

Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the OK button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.

628 EN

6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI

6

Connecting the Camera to a TV
Connect the camera using an HDMI cable.

1

After conﬁrming that the camera is oﬀ, connect it to the TV using an HDMI
cable.
• Use the supplied cable protector and cable clip to prevent damage to the connectors
when an HDMI cable is connected. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 29)
Type D

HDMI connector

HDMI cable (connects to TV
HDMI connector)

Type A

2

Switch the TV to HDMI input and turn the camera on.
• The TV will show the contents of the camera monitor. Press the q button to view
pictures.

• If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 630), the camera monitor will turn oﬀ when an
HDMI cable is connected.
• For information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
• Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be
visible.
• HDMI cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• If [Record Mode] is selected for [n HDMI Output] (P. 432) > [Output Mode] in the n video
menu, the signal will be output at the current movie frame size. No image will be displayed if
the TV does not support the selected frame size.
• If [4K] or [C4K] is selected, 1080p priority format will be used during still photography.

6

6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI

EN 629

Using a TV Remote(HDMI Control)

When connected to a TV via an HDMI cable, the camera can be operated using the
television remote control.
• The television must support HDMI control. See the television manual for more information.
On

The television remote control can be used to operate the camera in playback mode.
The camera can be used for playback only.

Oﬀ

The television remote control cannot be used to operate the camera. Indicators appear
only in the TV display.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [HDMI] in G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/
PC) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Highlight [HDMI Control] using the FG buttons andpress the I button.

4

Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
OK button.

6 5
6Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit themenus.
Connect the camera and TV via HDMI.
• Play pictures back using the TV remote. Follow the guidedisplayed on the TV screen.
• In single-frame playback, use the “red” button to choose
the information displayed and the “green” button toswitch to the index display.

• Some functions may be unavailable on some televisions.
• The camera monitor turns oﬀ while the TV is used for playback.

630 EN

6-7 Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI

7

Technical Notes
This chapter covers such topics as camera maintenanceand provides a list of default settings that you can refer towhile using the camera.

7

EN 631

7-1

Storage and Maintenance

Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, turn it oﬀ and remove the batteries.
• Never use chemically-treated dust cloths or strong solvents such as benzine or alcohol.

Camera Exterior• Gently clean the exterior with a soft cloth. To remove stubborn stains, use a cloth that has
been moistened in a solution of water and neutral detergent and then thoroughly wrung out.
The camera should then be dried carefully using a dry cloth. After using the camera at theseaside, clean it with a cloth that has been moistened in fresh water and then thoroughly
wrung out.

The Monitor• Gently clean the monitor with a soft cloth.

Lens• Use a lens blower (available from third-party suppliers) to remove dust and lint. Clean thelens gently using a lens cleaning wipe.

Storage7• Remove the batteries and memory cards before putting the camera away for an extended
period. Store the camera in a cool, dry, and well-ventilated location.
• Periodically reinsert the batteries and check that the camera is functioning normally.
• Remove dust and lint from the body and rear caps before putting them in place.
• If the camera will be stored without a lens attached, attach the body cap to prevent dust
entering the camera. Be sure to replace the front and rear caps on the lens before putting itaway.
• Clean the camera before putting it away.
• Do not store the camera with insect repellent.
• Do not store the camera in areas where chemicals are handled, as this could cause
corrosion or other forms of damage.
• Leaving the lens dirty could encourage the growth of mold.
• If the camera has been left unused for a long period of time, inspect all parts before use. Be
sure to take a test shot to conﬁrm that the camera is functioning normally before using it on atrip or on other important occasions.

632 EN

7-1 Storage and MaintenanceCleaning and Checking the Image Sensor
In addition to a design that prevents dust accumulating on the image sensor, thecamera is equipped with a dust-reduction feature that vibrates the sensor at highfrequencies to remove dust from its front surface. Dust reduction is performed
automatically when the camera is turned on.
Dust reduction is also performed during pixel mapping, which is used to check theimage sensor and image processing circuits. Note that because dust reduction is
performed during camera startup, you should do what you can to keep the camera
upright as you turn it on.

Image Processing Check(Pixel Mapping)

Perform a simultaneous check of both the image sensor and image processing
functions. For best results, perform pixel mapping no sooner than one minute after
taking or viewing pictures.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight [Pixel Mapping] in G Custom Menu b(K Utility) and press I on the arrow pad.

3

Press the OK button.
• A progress bar ([Busy]) will be displayed while pixel
mapping is in progress. The menus will be displayedwhen the process is complete.

• Should you inadvertently turn the camera oﬀ while pixel mapping is in progress, be sure to
perform pixel mapping again after turning the camera on.

7

7-1 Storage and MaintenanceEN 633

7-2

Troubleshooting

The camera does not turn on.
The batteries are not charged.
• Charge the batteries in the battery charger.

Cold temperatures have caused a temporary drop in battery performance.
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Resume use after warming the batteries
slightly by removing them from the camera and placing them in your pocket or other warm
location.

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed.
The camera has turned oﬀ automatically.
• The camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are performed for a set period. Press the
shutter button halfway to reactivate the camera. g [Sleep] (P. 562)
If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera has entered sleep mode, thecamera will turn oﬀ. g [Auto Power Oﬀ] (P. 562)

The ﬂash is charging.
• A # indicator blinks in the display while the ﬂash charges. Press the shutter button after theindicator has stopped ﬂashing.

Camera controls are locked.
• Rotating the lock lever to the lock position locks portrait-orientation buttons and otherselected controls (P. 503).

7634 EN

7-2 Troubleshooting

The camera is unable to focus.
• The camera may be unable to focus (and the monitor in-focus indicator may ﬂash) if thesubject is too close or unsuited to autofocus. Move away from your subject or focus on ahigh-contrast object at the same distance from the camera and recompose the shot using
focus lock.

Subjects Unsuited to Autofocus
The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations.
In-focusindicator ﬂashes
and camera
does not focus

The in-focus
indicator does
not ﬂash but thecamera fails to
focus

Subject lacks contrast

Center of frame
contains very brightobjectAF target contains
objects at diﬀerent
distances from camera

Subject is moving
quickly

Subject is not in AF
target.

Long-exposure noise reduction is enabled.
• “Noise” (mottling) is more noticeable in photos taken at slow shutter speeds, such as canoccur when shooting at night or under low light. The camera can process pictures to reducenoise after shooting; in this case no additional pictures can be taken until processing iscomplete. Long-exposure noise reduction can be disabled by selecting [Oﬀ] for [Noise
Reduct.]. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 533)

The number of available AF targets is lower than usual.
The number and size of the AF targets available varies with the options selected for [Digital
Tele-converter] (P. 235, 411), [Image Aspect] (P. 233), and AF-target mode (P. 120).

The clock is not set.
The clock was not set after purchase.
• The clock is not set at shipment. Set the clock before using the camera for the ﬁrst time.
g “Setting the Camera Clock (X Settings)” (P. 455)

7

The batteries have been removed from the camera.
• The clock will be reset after the batteries have been removed from the camera for about aday. The clock will be reset sooner if the batteries are inserted for only a short period. Be surethe clock is set correctly before taking important pictures.

7-2 Troubleshooting

EN 635

Settings have been reset.
Settings adjusted in custom modes (modes C1–C4) will be reset to saved values when anothershooting mode is selected or the camera is turned oﬀ.

Pictures look “washed out”.
This may occur in pictures of subjects that are back-lit or partially back-lit. It is the result ofphenomena known as “ﬂare” and “ghosting”. Keep bright light sources out of the frame as muchas possible. Flare may occur even when the frame does not contain a light source. Use a lens
hood to prevent light from bright sources entering the lens. If this does not have the desired
eﬀect, try shading the lens with your hand or other objects. g “Interchangeable Lenses”(P. 42)Bright spots appear in pictures.
The image sensor may contain defective pixels. Use [Pixel Mapping]. If this does not solve theproblem, try repeating the process several more times. g “Image Processing Check (Pixel
Mapping)” (P. 633)

Some menu items are unavailable.
You may be unable to select certain menu items using the arrow pad if they:• are unavailable in the current mode or• have been disabled due to the combination of settings currently selected, as is the case forexample withmode [T] (P. 151) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 533).

The subject appears distorted.
The camera uses an electronic shutter:during movie recording (P. 294), in silent (P. 163), Pro Capture (P. 168), and High Res
Shot modes (P. 210), during focus bracketing (P. 239) and focus stacking (P. 243), andwith the live ND ﬁlter (P. 197).
Distortion may occur if the subject or camera moves quickly during shooting. Avoid moving thecamera during shooting or choose a mode that does not require the electronic shutter.

Banding appears in pictures.

7

Flicker caused by ﬂuorescent or LED lamps and certain other forms of artiﬁcial lighting be visiblein pictures taking using features that employ the electronic shutter, namely:
movie recording (P. 294), silent mode (P. 163), Pro Capture (P. 168), High Res Shot
(P. 210), focus bracketing (P. 239), focus stacking (P. 243), and the live ND ﬁlter(P. 197).
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce ﬂicker using
ﬂicker scan. g [K Flicker Scan] (P. 193), [n Flicker Scan] (P. 374)

636 EN

7-2 Troubleshooting

7-3

Warnings and Error Messages

Message/warning

No Card

Cause

Solution

No memory card inserted. Also
displayed if no memory card is
detected.

Insert a memory card. If a card isinserted, check that it is inserted
correctly.

There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 1.

Remove and reinsert the memory
card. If this does not solve theproblem, format the card. If
formatting fails, the card cannot
be used.

5Card Error
There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 2.
4Card Error
The memory card in Slot 1 iswrite-protected (“locked”).
5Write Protect
The memory card in Slot 2 iswrite-protected (“locked”).

The memory card write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Return the switch to the unlocked
position (P. 37).

4Write Protect

5Card Full

4Card Full

• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 is full.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 2 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 2 is full.

Insert another memory or delete
pictures. Before deleting pictures,
be sure any pictures you wish
to keep have been copied to acomputer.
If [Dual Independent] or [DualSame] is selected for [Save
Settings], choose a diﬀerent
setting.

7

7-3 Warnings and Error Messages

EN 637

Message/warning

Cause

5No Picture

Playback unavailable; thememory card in Slot 1 contains
no pictures.

4No Picture

Playback unavailable; thememory card in Slot 2 contains
no pictures.

5Picture Error

Solution

The selected memory card
contains no pictures. Take
pictures before choosing
playback mode.

The selected ﬁle is damaged
and cannot be played back.
Alternatively, the picture is in aformat that is not supported by
the camera.

View the picture using computer
imaging software or the like. If thepicture cannot be displayed on acomputer, the ﬁle may be corrupt.

Camera retouch features cannot
be applied to pictures recordedwith other devices.

Retouch the picture on acomputer or other device.

The batteries are low.

Charge the batteries or insert
fully-charged spare batteries.

4Picture Error

5The Image Cannot Be
Edited4The Image Cannot Be
EditedLogging function cannot
be used at this time.

No additional logs can be saved
to the memory card in Slot 1.
5Card log capacity is full

Copy log ﬁles to a computer anddelete unwanted log ﬁles.
No additional logs can be saved
to the memory card in Slot 2.

4Card log capacity is fullg(steady)

GPS error. The camera’s GPS
has malfunctioned.

7

638 EN

7-3 Warnings and Error Messages

Turn the camera oﬀ and then on
again; if the warning does notclear from the display, take thecamera to an Olympus-authorized
service representative.

Message/warning

Cause

Solution
Turn the camera oﬀ and wait for
it to cool.

mInternal camera temperature
is too high. Please wait forcooling before camera use.

The camera’s internal
temperature is elevated following
burst shooting or the like.

The camera is about to turnoﬀ automatically. Wait until thecamera has cooled and is readyto resume shooting.

The batteries are exhausted.

Charge the batteries.

There is a problem with thecamera’s connection to acomputer or HDMI device.

Reconnect the camera.

The lens is locked.
Please extend the lens.

A retractable lens is attached but
not extended.

Extend the lens.

Please check the status ofa lens.

An error has occurred between
the camera and the lens.

Turn the camera oﬀ andcheck that the lens is properly
connected before turning thecamera on again.

Battery Empty

No Connection

7

7-3 Warnings and Error Messages

EN 639

7-4

Default Settings*1: Can be saved using [Assign to Custom
Mode].
*2: Default setting can be restored using[Reset] (full).

*3: Default setting can be restored using[Reset] (basic).

Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
Shooting mode

P/A/S/M/B

7

640 EN

Item
K ISO
Flash Modex
Manual Value

Default
Auto#±0#FULL (ﬂash set to[#MANUAL])
S-IS AutoK Image Stabilizer
Auto ([On] selected for
K WB[KW Keep Warm Color])
K WB compensation A ±0
K WB compensation G ±05400K ([CWB] selected for
K Kelvin[KWB])AF Area
Center/single
S-AF
K AF Mode
Face Priority
Face & Eye Priority On
Singlej/Y/i
MeteringpStandard
K Save Settings
KK
5
YF (High Res Shot: IF+RAW)
4
YF (High Res Shot: IF+RAW)
Picture Mode
Natural
Sharpness±0
Contrast±0
Saturation±0
Gradation
Gradation Normal
Eﬀect―([i-Enhance] selected for[Picture Mode]: 3Standard)Color Filter―([Monochrome] selected for[Picture Mode]: N:None)
Monochrome Color―([Monochrome] selected for[Picture Mode]: N:Normal)
Image Aspect
4:3
Color SpacesRGB
Highlight&Shadow
f (±0)
ControlOn
Movie K

7-4 Default Settings

*1





*2





*3





g
181
254
259
254










176
202









―
―
―

206

































―


―



―
―
―
―
―

123
115
133
151
186
72
78







224







225













233
232
227







413

202

215
220
221
222
223
226

Shooting moden (movie)
n ISO

Item

Flash Modexn Image Stabilizer
n WB

RC modeDefault[P], [A], or [S] selected for[n Mode]: Auto (ﬁxed)[M] selected for [n Mode]: 200
Flash Oﬀ (ﬁxed)±0 (ﬁxed)

M-IS1
Auto ([On] selected for[nW Keep Warm Color])n WB compensation A ±0
n WB compensation G ±05400K ([CWB] selected forn Kelvin[n WB])AF Area
Center; group (3×3)
C-AFn AF Mode
Face Priority
Face & Eye Priority On
Metering
p (ﬁxed)nK
Picture Mode
Natural
Sharpness±0
Contrast±0
Saturation±0
Gradation
Gradation Normal
Image Aspect
16:9 (ﬁxed)
C4K selected for [nK]: 17:9
Color SpacesRGB (ﬁxed)
Highlight&Shadow
f (±0)
ControlPn ModeOn
Movie KTTL
QA group A
Oﬀ
QB group B
Oﬀ
QC group C
Oﬀ
Q camera ﬂash
Flash compensation±0 (TTL, Auto)
Flash level
1/1 (Manual)#/FP# (Normal)Lowa optical signal
strength
Channel
1

*1
―

*2


*3


g
369

―
―

―

―
―



―
―



―
―
376
380

―
―
―





―
―
―

384




―






―




―






―



―
―


―
―
―
―
―

352
345
360
―
321
388
396
397
398
399
―

―


―


―


―
403

―





















―










332
413
262







380

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 641

The K Shooting Menus
Tab
Item
W Reset / Custom Reset
Modes
Assign to Custom Mode

Picture Mode
KK

XDefault―
Shooting mode: P
Image quality: RAW+YF
Recall from Custom Mode―
CNatural
YF (h: RAW+IF)

Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
j/Y
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Number of Frames
Start Waiting TimeInterval Length
Time Lapse Movie
Movie
Movie
Settings
Resolution
Frame
Rate
Bracketing
AE BKTWB BKT
A– B
G– M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking
Shot CountSet focus diﬀerential#Charge TimeHDR

7642 EN

7-4 Default Settings

4:3
Oﬀ
―
o
Oﬀ
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Oﬀ
FullHD

*1
―

*2


*3
―

g
91, 111,331, 458,
460














―













215, 388
78, 82,
213, 543
233
235, 411
151







172

10fps
Oﬀ
3f 1.0EV
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
[Oﬀ] selected for [Focus
Stacking]: 99[On] selected for [Focus
Stacking]: 8
5
0 sec
Oﬀ
















236
236
237
237
238
238
239
243
―

195

Tab
X Multiple
Exposure

Item
Number of Frames
Auto Gain
Overlay

Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock r/ Anti-Shock r
Silent s
Silent s
Noise Reduction s
Silent s Mode Settings
8
AF IlluminatorFlash ModeHigh Res Shot High Res Shot
#Charge Time
Shooting Method
Live ND Shooting
ND Number
LV Simulation

Default

*1
―
―
―



*2






*3




―





―





―











―

―
―

Default
P
Oﬀ
MOVn4K 30p

*1
―
―


*2




*3
―



6400
200
Oﬀ
Standard
Auto
A±0, G±0
On
Oﬀ
C-AF
±0
±0
M-IS1
±0







―

―
―
―



















―


―

―






Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
r0 secs0 secOﬀ―
Not Allow
Not Allow
Not Allow
h0 sec0 sec
TripodOﬀ
ND8 (3EV)
On

g
246

248
160, 163

210

197

The n Video Menu
Tabn n Mode
Settings
n Speciﬁcation
Settings

Item
n Moden Flicker ScannKb ISO-Auto Set
Upper Limit / High Limit
Default
Defaultb ISO-Auton Noise Filter
n WB
n All xnW Keep Warm Colorn Picture Moden AF/IS Settings n AF Moden C-AF Speed
n C-AF Sensitivity
n Image Stabilizern IS Level

g
332
374
321, 339
372

379
380
385
383
393
345
363
362
376
378

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 643Tab
Item
n n Button/Dial/Levern Button
XF
Function
XK
XR
Xu
XF
Xt
XL
Xd
XD
XE
XY
XZ
YF
YK
Yt
YY
YZ
l
n DialP
Function

Default
F
ISO
RREC
u
N
t
WB
N
Oﬀ (X)Oﬀ (WB)
Peaking

Position 1
Position 2

A

Position 1
Position 2

S

Position 1
Position 2

M

Position 1
Position 2

n Fn Lever Function
mode2

7

644 ENn Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom Speed

7-4 Default Settings

a
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
AF Stop
k: F
j: F
k: KVOL
j: KVOL
k: F
j: FNo.
k: KVOL
j: KVOL
k: F
j: Shutter
k: KVOL
j: KVOL
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
k: KVOL
j: ISO
mode2
AF Mode/AF Target
Mode/AF Target Pointw
Normal

*1

*2

*3

g

―



―

417

―



―

424

―



―

―



―

―



―

―



―

426

―
―




―
―

423
408

Tab
Item
n n Display Settingsn Control Settingsn Info Settings
Time CodeTime Code Mode
Settings
Count Up
Starting Time
8 Display Patterna View Assist
Movie K
Recording
Built-In K
VolumeMIC K
K Volume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Recording Rate
K Plug-in PowerPCM Recorder Camera Rec. Volume
K LinkSlate Tone
Synchronized R Rec.
Headphone Volume
n HDMI Output Output ModeREC BitTime CodeDefault

*1

*2

*3

g

Live Control, Live SCP
Custom1
Drop Frame
Rec Run0:00:00
min
Oﬀ
On
±0
±0
On
Oﬀ
48kHz/16bit
Oﬀ
OperativeOﬀ
Oﬀ
8
Monitor Mode
Oﬀ
On

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―

―
―



―

























―
―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

428
429
324

Default

*1

―
―
―
―
―
―

*2

―
―
―
―
―


*3

―
―
―
―
―
―

g
283
284
291
271, 440
278, 447
274, 443
586

431
395
413

432

The q Playback Menu
Tab
Item
q R
Edit
Print Order
Reset Protect
Reset share Order
Copy All
T Wi-Fi Connect

On
―
―
―
―
―
Device Connection

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 645

The e Setup Menu
Tabe Card Setup
X Settings

Item

X
Time Zone
Auto Time AdjustWs
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings

Availability
Connection Password
Power-oﬀ Standby
Reset Settings
Wi-Fi MAC AddressFirmware7646 EN

7-4 Default Settings

Default

*1

*2

*3

―

―

―

―

―
―

―
―
―
―


―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―



―

―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

Oﬀ
Englishj±0, k±0, Natural
Oﬀ
On
―
Oﬀ
―
―
―

g
38, 276,445, 454
455

455
456
90, 456
457, 586,
607

457

The G Custom Menus
Default

*1

*2

*3

g













115
481
141






















146, 482
145, 483
147, 483
148, 484
485



―









486
486
487







488





―

125, 488

K Orientation Linked N
L AF Limiter
Distance settings
Release Priority
AF Illuminator
I Face Priority

S-AF
Oﬀ
mode3
mode4
mode3
Operative
mode2±0
q (All Targets)
5, 9, or 25 targets
All; Small; Single; 5-, 9-,
or 25-target group
On1
Oﬀ
AF Target Mode, AF
Target Point
Set 1
NMode
I
6Pos
6Pos
1×1; vertical andhorizontal step size: 1
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Setting 1
On
On
K















―




―

489
143, 490

K Tracking Subject
AF Focus Adj. *I Preset MF distanceOﬀ
Oﬀ
999.9 m









―



MF Clutch

Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Operative









―
―


Focus Ring
Bulb/Time Focusing
Reset Lens

b
On
On













Tab

G

Item
AF/MF
J K AF Mode
K AF+MF
K AEL/AFL

S-AF
C-AF
MF
Half Way AF

AF Scanner
K C-AF Sensitivity
K C-AF Center Start
K C-AF Center Priority
K KNMode Settings
AF Area Pointer
AF Targeting Pad
N Set Home
N Select Screen SettingskjABt Target Mode Settings

MF Assist

MagnifyPeaking

490
133, 360,
491
149, 491
492
129, 357,
494
495
128, 356,
496
496
107, 497
497

7* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not aﬀect saved values.

7-4 Default Settings

EN 647Tab
Item
G Button/Dial/Lever
J K Button
XF
Function
XK

XR
Xu
XF
Xt
XL
Xd
XD
XE
XY
XZ
YF
YK
Yt
YY
YZ
l
S Center Button
T Direction Key
K DialP
Function

Position 1
Position 2

A

Position 1
Position 2

S

Position 1
Position 2

M/B Position 1
Position 2
Menu

7

q
Dial Direction

ExposurePs
K Fn Lever Function
mode2
Fn Lever/Power Lever

648 EN

7-4 Default Settings

Default

F
ISO

*1

*2

*3

g





―

463









―
―
―

499
499
473, 500

―



―





―

500

―



―

475, 501

―



―

501

RREC
u
N

t
WB
N
Oﬀ (#)Oﬀ (j/Y)

k
z
F
ISO
t
k
z
AF Stop
Oﬀ
N
k: F
j: Ps
k: ISO
j: WB
k: F
j: FNo.
k: ISO
j: WB
k: F
j: Shutter
k: ISO
j: WB
k: FNo.
j: Shutter
k: F
j: ISO
k: B
j: A/Valuek: Prev/Next
j: Ga
Dial1
Dial1
mode2
AF Mode/AF Target Mode/
AF Target Point
Fn

Tab
G

Item
Default
NormalK K Elec. Zoom Speed
C-LOCK Settings―
Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Oﬀ
N S-AF Release Priority
C-AF Release Priority
On
jL Settings
Max fps
10 fpsj/j
Frame Count
Oﬀ
Limiter
Max fps
18 fps♥j
Frame Count
Oﬀ
Limiter
Max fps
18 fps0Pre-shutter Frames 8
Frame Count
25
Limiter
jH Settings
Max fps
15 fpsj
Frame Count
Oﬀ
Limiter
Max fps
60 fps♥j
Frame Count
Oﬀ
Limiter
Max fps
60 fps0Pre-shutter Frames 14
Frame Count
25
LimiterFlicker
Anti-Flicker LV
Autoreduction
Anti-Flicker
Oﬀ
Shooting
S-IS AUTOO K Image Stabilizer
Fps Priority
j Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
On
Lens I.S. Priority
Oﬀ
Disp/8/PC
Live SCPP K Control Settings
Image Only, Overall
G/Infoq InfoSettings
Magnify Frame, Magnify
qa Info
Scroll, Select Frame
LV-Info
Image Only, Custom1,
Custom2
Informations
Onduring half way
LV OFF-Info
Oﬀ
25, Calendar
G Settings
Picture Mode Settings
All selectedj/Y Settings♥o, T, ♥T, p, S,♥S, q, X, c, hMulti Function Settings
All on except WB and ISO

*1



*2



*3
―
―

g
502
503










505
505
155, 506



































































―
―

190, 509



―








―
―


176, 510
174, 511
178, 511
512



―





―

―

513
515





―





―











―
―
―
―

520
520





―

521

155, 507

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 649Tab
G

Default
Oﬀ
On2, Frame Rate Priority
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Art LV Mode
mode1
Frame Rate
Normal
LV Close Up
LV Close Up Mode mode2
Settings
Live View BoostOﬀ
Recently
qa Default SettingOﬀz Settingsz LockLive View Boost
Oﬀ
Display Color
Preset 1
R Grid Settings
Displayed Grid
Oﬀ
Apply Settings toOn
EVFPeaking
Peaking ColorRed
Settings
Highlight Intensity Normal
Image Brightness Oﬀ
Adj.
Histogram
Highlight
255
Settings
Shadow0Mode GuideOﬀ
Selﬁe Assist
On
On
S 8
HDMI
Output Size
1080p
HDMI Control
Oﬀ
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority
USB Mode
Auto
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
1/3EV
T EV Step
ISO Step
1/3EV
Upper Limit /High Limit: 6400
K ISO-Auto
Default
Set
Default: 200
Lowest S/S Setting AutoAll
K ISO-Auto
Standard
K Noise Filter
Drive Priority
K Low ISO Processing
Noise Reduct.
Auto
Q Live View
Boost

Item
Manual Shooting
Bulb/TimeLive Composite
Others7

650 EN

7-4 Default Settings

*1


*2


*3


g
200, 521





―

















―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

522
175, 522
139, 523





―

525





―

526




―
―
―
―






―


―
―

―
―
―


526
527
527
434, 528,
627













530
530
183, 531














―




185, 531
532
532
533

523
524
524

529

Tab
G

Item
U Bulb/Time Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings
K Flicker Scan
V Metering
AEL Metering
Spot
N SpotMetering
Spot Hilight
Spot Shadow
Exposure Shift p
BC#Custom
W #X-Sync.
#Slow Limit
x+F#+WB#RC Mode
K/WB/ColorX K SetPixel Count

Xiddle
Wmall

Shading Comp.
K WB
K All xKW Keep Warm Color
Color Space

*1













*2













*3

―
―
―
―






―

g
533
534
534
535
110, 535
536
186, 536
537
537

1/250
1/60
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
















―


260, 539
261, 539
540
540
541

K1: YSF
K2: YF
K3: YN
K4: XN
3200×2400
1280×960
Oﬀ
Auto
A±0, G±0
On
sRGB







81, 54282, 543















―



543
544
545
205
232

Default
8 min−7Oﬀ
0.5 sec
1 sec
Oﬀ
p
Auto
On
On
On
±0
±0
±0

538

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 651Tab
G Record/Erase
Y Card Slot
Settings

Item

Default

K Save Settings Standard
K Save Slot5n Save Slot5
q Slot5
Assign Save Folder Do not assign
File Name
Reset
Edit Filename―
dpi Settings
350dpi
Copyright
Copyright Info.
Oﬀ
Settings *Artist Name―
Copyright Name―
Lens Info Settings *Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Z Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
RAW+JPEG
Priority Set
No
EVF
On
a EVF Auto Switch
EVF Adjust

EVF Auto
Luminance
EVF Adjust

EVF Style
V Info Settings
EVF Grid
Display Color
Settings
Displayed Grid
V Half Way Level
S-OVF

On
j±0, k±0
Style 2
Basic Information,
Custom1, Custom2
Preset 1
Oﬀ
On
Oﬀ

*1

*2

*3

g










―
―
―













―
―





―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―




547

―



―





―

85, 328,
553
553

―





―
―

554
555











―
―
―


556

* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not aﬀect saved values.

7652 EN

7-4 Default Settings

548
548
549
549

550
551
551
552

556
89, 557

Tab
Item
Default
G K Utility―b Pixel Mapping
Press-and-hold End LV a
0.7 secTime
Reset LV a Frame 0.7 sec
End 6Reset 6 Frame
Reset F
Reset xReset 7
Reset cReset N
Call EVF Auto
SwitchEnd qaInsert Slate Tone
End D
Reset D
Switch G Lock
Call BKT Settings
End Flicker Scan
Level Adjust
Touchscreen Settings
Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensation
Battery Priority
c Battery
Settings
Battery Status
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Oﬀ
Quick Sleep Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Q Record GPS location
GPS Priority
Elevation/
Calibrate Elevation
Temperature
m/ft
°C/°F
Field Sensor Logger
Certiﬁcation

0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec―
On
RecallOﬀ
e Battery
―
Hold
1 min
4h
Oﬀ
8 sec
10 secOﬀ
GPS accuracy
―
m
°C
―
―

*1

*2

*3

g

―











―











―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

558, 633
558








―
―



―


















―






―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―



―
―

―
―
―





―
―
―

570
564, 579
565, 578

―
―

―
―

―
―

565, 571
566

559
559
560
250, 560
561
561
562
562
563

7

7-4 Default Settings

EN 653

7-5

Memory Card Capacity

Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for an 16 GB SD card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Image
quality

IF+RAW

JF+RAW

Image size
(pixels)(Tripod)
10400 × 7792
(Handheld)
8200 × 6132
8160 × 6120
5184 × 3888
(Tripod)
10400 × 7792
(Handheld)
8200 × 6132
5760 × 4320
5184 × 3888

File format

Lossless

ORF

1/4
Lossless

JPEG
ORI

Lossless

ORF

1/4
Lossless

JPEG
ORI

Approx. ﬁlesize (MB)Capacity(photos)(Tripod)
168.3(Tripod)
87(Handheld)
121.4(Handheld)
120(Tripod)
157.6(Tripod)
94(Handheld)
110.6(Handheld)
133

IF

8160 × 6120

1/4

JPEG

21.7

634

JF
RAW

5760 × 4320

1/4

JPEG

10.9

1261

Lossless
1/2.7

ORF

21.7
13.1

690
1054

YSF

5184 × 3888

1/4

8.9

1550

YN

1/8

4.6

3013

XSF

1/2.7

5.1

2697

1/4

3.6

3906

XN

1/8

1.9

7397

XSF

1/2.7

2.0

6975

YF

XF

XF

3200 × 2400

1920 × 1440

1/4
1/8

XN

JPEG

1.4

9765

0.9

16836

1/2.7

1.0

13562

1/4

0.8

18083

WN

1/8

0.5

28721

WSF

1/2.7

0.8

18779

1/4

0.6

24413

1/8

0.3

61032

WSF
WF

7

Compression

WF

1280 × 960

1024 × 768

WN• Capacity varies with the subject recorded and the presence or absence of print marking andthe like. The display showing the number of exposures remaining may not change when
pictures are taken or deleted.
• File size varies with the subject recorded.
• The maximum number of exposures remaining shown by the camera is 9999.

654 EN

7-5 Memory Card Capacity

Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 32 GB SDHC memory card.
Frame size
C4K
4K

FHD

HD

Compression
—
—
A-I
SF
F
N
A-I
SF
F
N

Frame rate
24p
30p, 25p, 24p
30p, 25p, 24p
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p

Capacity (approx.)
17 minutes
39 minutes
20 minutes
1 hour 15 minutes
2 hours 4 minutes
3 hours 15 minutes
39 minutes
2 hours 22 minutes
4 hours
5 hours 13 minutes• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies withthe frame rate and scene recorded.
• Individual movie ﬁles can be up to 4 GB in size. A new ﬁle is created when the size of thecurrent ﬁle reaches 4 GB.
• Individual movies can be no more than 29 minutes in length.

77-5 Memory Card Capacity

EN 655

7-6

Specifications


CameraType
Type

Digital camera supporting interchangeable lenses conforming to the Micro
Four Thirds system standard

Supported lenses

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL/Micro Four Thirds system lenses

Lens mount

Micro Four Thirds

35 mm format lens focal
length conversion factor

Approx. 2×

Image sensor
Type

4/3″ Live MOS sensor

Total pixels

Approx. 21.77 million pixels

Eﬀective pixels

Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Size (width × height)

17.4 mm × 13.0 mm

Aspect ratio

1.33 (4:3)

Viewﬁnder
TypeElectronic viewﬁnder with eye sensor

Pixel countApprox. 2360k dots

Frame coverage

100%

Eye point

Approx. 21 mm (−1 m −1)

Live view
Image sensor

Live MOS sensor

Frame coverage

100%

MonitorType

Touch-sensitive 3.0″ vari-angle TFT color LCD monitor

Pixel countApprox. 1040k dots (aspect ratio 3:2)

Shutter
TypeElectronically-controlled focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/8000 – 60 s, bulb, time

Flash sync speed

Up to 1/250 s

Autofocus

7

Type

Hi-Speed Imager AF

Focus areas

121

Detection range−3.5 to 20 EV (f/2.8 lens, ISO 100 equivalent)

Focus-area selection

Auto, manual

656 EN

7-6 Speciﬁcations

Exposure control
Metering

TTL (Imager) metering
Digital ESP; center-weighted; spot

Range

−2 – +20 EV (f/2.8 lens, ISO100 equivalent)

Exposure modes

P program AE (with program shift); A aperture-priority AE; S shutterpriority AE; M manual; B (bulb, time, composite); C1–C4 custom modes;
n movie

ISO sensitivity

L64; L100; 200–25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1 EV

Exposure compensation±5.0 EV in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV

White balanceWhite balance modes

Auto; preset white balance (7 types); custom; one-touch white balance(can store up to 4 measured white balance values)

StorageMedia

UHS-II compliant SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards

File formats

Photos: JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW data
Movies: MOV (MPEG-4 AVC/H.264)

Audio

Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)

Supported standards

Exif 2.3, DPOF (photos)

Drive
Drive modes

Single frame; sequential; anti-shock; silent; Pro Capture; self-timer; HighRes Shot

Burst performance

Sequential high: Up to 15 fps
Silent sequential high/Pro Capture high: Up to 60 fps

Self-timer

12 s, 2 s, or custom timer

Power saving

Time to sleep: 1 minute; time to power oﬀ: 4 hours(customizable)

Playback
Display formats

Single-frame; zoom; index; calendar

Wireless LAN
Supported standards

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac *Bluetooth®
Supported standards

Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLEGPSFrequency

1575.42 MHz (GPS/QZSS)
1598.0625 MHz–1605.3750 MHz (GLONASS)

Geodetic system

WGS 84External connectors
USB (Type C); HDMI (Type D); external ﬂash; remote cable (ø2.5 mm
mini-jack); microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack); headphone jack(ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack); DC-IN

7* Note that cameras have been developed in line with the diﬀerent standards of the countries.

7-6 Speciﬁcations

EN 657Power supply
Battery

Li-ion battery ×2

External power sources

Supports AC-5 AC adapter; USB PD compliant

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)

144.4 mm × 146.8 mm × 75.4 mm/5.7″ × 5.8″ × 3.0″ (excluding
protrusions)

WeightApprox. 997 g/2.2 lb. (including two rechargeable batteries of the supplied
type and two memory cards)

Operating environment
Temperature−10 °C – 40 °C/14 °F – 104 °F (operating);−20 °C – 60 °C/−4 °F – 140 °F (storage)

Humidity

30% – 90% (operating); 10% – 90% (storage)

Water resistance

Type: IEC Standard publication 60529
IPX1 (applies if camera is used with Olympus waterresistant lens)

7658 EN

7-6 Speciﬁcations

Li-ion Batteries
MODEL NO.

BLH-1

Type

Rechargeable Li-ion battery

Nominal voltage

DC 7.4 V

Nominal capacity

1720 mAh

Cycle life

Approx. 500 cycles (varies with usage conditions)Operating temperature

0 °C – 40 °C/32 °F – 104 °F (charging)

Dimensions (W × H × D)Approx. 45 mm × 20 mm × 53 mm/1.8″ × 0.8″ × 2.1″

WeightApprox. 74 g/0.16 lb.

Charger for Li-ion Batteries
MODEL NO.

BCH-1

Rated input

AC 100 V–240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 8.4 V, 1100 mA

Charging time

Approx. 2 hours (at room temperature)

Operating temperature

0 °C – 40 °C/32 °F – 104 °F (operating);−20 °C – 60 °C/−4 °F – 140 °F (storage)

Dimensions (W × H × D)Approx. 71 mm × 29 mm × 96 mm/2.8″ × 1.1″ × 3.8″

WeightApprox. 85 g/0.19 lb. (excluding power cable)• The supplied power cable is for use exclusively with this camera. Do not use with otherequipment. Do not use the camera with cables for other equipment.
• The appearance and speciﬁcations of this product are subject to change without notice orobligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest speciﬁcations.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Deﬁnition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo aretrademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United Statesand other countries.

7

7-6 Speciﬁcations

EN 659

7-7

System Chart

Power Supplies

BLH-1
Li-ion battery

Connection
Cables

BCH-1
Charger for Li-ion
batteries

AC-5
AC adapter

USB cable;
HDMI cable *1

Remote Controls
and Releases
RM-CB2
Remote cable

Cases and Straps

Shoulder strap;
camera case

Memory Cards

SD/SDHC/
SDXC

Software
OLYMPUS Capture
Camera control software

Headphones

7

Microphones

Olympus Workspace
Digital photo management and editing software: E-M1X-compatible accessory: Available from third-party suppliers
Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest information.

*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit the OLYMPUS
website for details.
*3 Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on compatible lenses.

660 EN

7-7 System Chart

Converter
Lenses *3

Lenses

FCON-P01
Fisheye

Micro Four Thirds system lenses

WCON-P01
Wide
MCON-P01
Macro
MCON-P02
Macro

Four Thirds system lenses

MMF-2/MMF-3 *2
Four Thirds Adapter

Flash Units

FL-LM3
Electronic ﬂash

FL-900R
Electronic ﬂash

FL-700WR
Electronic ﬂash

STF-8
Macro ﬂash

FC-WR
Wireless radiowave commander

FR-WR
Wireless radiowave receiver7

7-7 System Chart

EN 661MEMO

662 EN

8

SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
The precautions in this chapter must be observed to prevent
personal injury or the like. Be sure to read this chapter in its
entirety.

8

EN 663

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTIONRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFERSERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the product.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol,
WARNING
serious injury or death may result.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol,
CAUTION
injury may result.
If the product is used without observing the information given under this symbol,
NOTICEdamage to the equipment may result.
WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

General Precautions

8

Read All Instructions — Before you use theproduct, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only tothe power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product fromthe wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid oraerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent toclean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near any
heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance thatgenerates heat, including stereo ampliﬁers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.

664 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONSWARNING• Do not use the camera near ﬂammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewﬁnder.
Failure to observe this precaution could resultin eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequencyof the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewﬁnder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the ﬂash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, smallchildren, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) awayfrom the faces of your subjects. Firing theﬂash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.

• Keep young children, infants away fromthe camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants toprevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally ﬁring the ﬂash into theirown eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by themoving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger isemitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noiseor smell, immediately cease use andunplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if you
notice any unusual odors, noise, or smoke
around it.
• Never remove the batteries with barehands, which may cause a ﬁre or burnyour hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely hightemperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch ﬁre. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,resulting in ﬁre.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metalparts, overheating can result in a lowtemperature burn. Pay attention to thefollowing:• When used for a long period, thecamera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a lowtemperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of thecamera’s body may be lower thanthe environmental temperature. If
possible, wear gloves when handlingthe camera in cold temperatures.

• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave thecamera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extremechanges. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidiﬁers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near ﬂammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
• The camera can be powered by one or two
Olympus lithium-ion batteries. Use only
batteries of the designated type. Batteries ofother types could explode (or rupture). The
batteries should only be charged using thedesignated charger. Do not use chargers ofother types.
• Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
• Never leave the camera on or nearelectromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
• Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
• Take precautions when carrying or storingbatteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damageyou.
• To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
• If battery ﬂuid gets into your eyes, ﬂush
your eyes immediately with clear, coldrunning water and seek medical attention
immediately.
• If you cannot remove the battery from thecamera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove thebattery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
• Always store batteries out of the reach ofsmall children and pets. If they accidentallyswallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8

EN 665

• To prevent batteries from leaking,overheating, or causing a ﬁre or explosion,use only batteries recommended for use withthis product.
• If rechargeable batteries have not beenrecharged within the speciﬁed time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
• Do not use batteries with scratches ordamage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.
• Never subject batteries to strong shocks orcontinuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, orburning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomesabnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away fromﬁre immediately.
• If a battery leaks ﬂuid onto your clothingor skin, remove the clothing and ﬂush theaﬀected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the ﬂuid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to otherdevices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets tohandle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,putting in mouth or chewing).

Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger
We strongly recommend that you use only
the genuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable
battery and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/or battery charger may result in ﬁre or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.

8666 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTION• Do not cover the ﬂash with a hand while
ﬁring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected tohigh temperatures in a hot vehicle, near aheat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do notremove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the speciﬁed genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save ourplanet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover theirterminals and always observe local laws andregulations.

NOTICE• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to acomputer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss ofdata associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry thecamera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, notthe camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.

• Do not leave the camera pointed directlyat the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause ﬁres.
• Do not leave the viewﬁnder exposed to astrong light source or direct sunlight. The heatmay damage the viewﬁnder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets orother moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, drylocation for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. Afterstorage, test the camera by turning it on andpressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used ina location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic ﬁeld, radio waves, or highvoltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera oﬀ and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.
• Insert the battery carefully as described in theoperating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor foran extended period of time.

• Using an exhausted battery may cause thecamera to turn oﬀ without displaying thebattery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,camera contact failure may result. Wipe thebattery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it forthe ﬁrst time, or if it has not been used for along period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it iswarmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especiallybefore traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may be
diﬃcult to obtain while traveling.

Using the wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions• Turn oﬀ the camera in hospitals and otherlocations where medical equipment ispresent.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely aﬀect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment(P. 617).
• Turn oﬀ the camera when onboard aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure todisable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 617).
• Do not use this product where it may
interfere with nearby radar systems.

GPS function, electronic compass• In a location not open to the sky (inside,
underground, underwater, in a forest, nearhigh buildings) or in a location subject tostrong magnetic or electric ﬁelds (nearnew high-voltage power lines, magnets orelectrical goods, 1.5GHz mobile telephones),
it may not be possible to determine
measurements or generate errors.
• The altitude displayed on the measurement
information screen or picture playback
screen etc. is displayed/recorded based on
information from pressure sensors built intocamera body. Be careful since the displayed
altitude is not based on GPS position
measurements.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8

EN 667

• Electronic compass errors may be causedby the eﬀects of strong magnetic or electricalﬁelds (such as televisions, microwaves, large
motors, radio towers and high-voltage lines).
To restore the electronic compass function,
hold the camera ﬁrmly and move in a ﬁgure of
8 while turning your wrist over.
• Since the GPS function and electronic
compass function are not required to beaccurate, there is no guarantee that themeasured values (latitude, longitude,
compass direction etc.) are accurate.
• Some countries and regions may prohibit
the acquisition of location data without priorgovernmental permission. In some Olympus
sales areas, the camera may consequently
ship with location data displays disabled.
Further, each country and region has laws
and regulations you must obey when using
the camera abroad.

Monitor• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting ina playback mode failure or damage to themonitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottomof the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in thecamera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it willbe less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, themonitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any inﬂuenceon the image to be saved. Because of thecharacteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found dependingon the angle, but this is due to the structure of
the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

8668 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Legal and Other Notices• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
beneﬁt expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of thisproduct.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
beneﬁt expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.

Disclaimer of Warranty• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, byor concerning any content of these writtenmaterials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty ofmerchantability or ﬁtness for any particularpurpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business proﬁts,
business interruption and loss of businessinformation) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability forconsequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.

Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes noresponsibility for unauthorized photographing,use or other acts that infringe upon the rights ofcopyright owners.

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these writtenmaterials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying andrecording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the priorwritten permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of theinformation contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting fromthe use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the featuresand contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.

FCC Notice

FCC/ISED Caution

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference ina residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment oﬀ andon, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following
measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on acircuit diﬀerent from that to which the receiveris connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
• Only the OLYMPUS-supplied USB cableshould be used to connect the camera to
USB enabled personal computers.

Changes or modiﬁcations not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
This equipment must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or equipment except Olympus wirelessequipment whose RF exposure was evaluatedfor this equipment.
For the latest information, please visit the
Olympus website.
Website: https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/en/
support/imsg/digicamera/download/notice/rfsimullist.cfm
The available scientiﬁc evidence does not showthat any health problems are associated withusing low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wirelessdevices are absolutely safe. Low power Wirelessdevices emit low levels of radio frequency energy(RF) in the microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce healtheﬀects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level
RF that does not produce heating eﬀects causes
no known adverse health eﬀects. Many studiesof low-level RF exposures have not found any
biological eﬀects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological eﬀects might occur, but suchﬁndings have not been conﬁrmed by additional
research. IM010 has been tested and found tocomply with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits
set forth for an uncontrolled environment andmeets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines and RSS-102 of the ISED radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules.

8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

EN 669

For customers in North America, Central America, South America andthe Caribbean
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: IM010
Trade Name
: OLYMPUS
Responsible Party :Address: 3500 Corporate Parkway, P. O. Box 610, Center Valley, PA 18034-0610, USA
Telephone Number : 484-896-5000
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

8

OLYMPUS AMERICAS LIMITED WARRANTY OLYMPUS AMERICA INC. PRODUCTS
Olympus warrants that the enclosed Olympus®
imaging product(s) and related Olympus®
accessories (individually a “Product” andcollectively the “Products”) will be free fromdefects in materials and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of one (1)year from the date of purchase.
If any Product proves to be defective within the
one-year warranty period, the customer must
return the defective Product to the authorized
Olympus Repair Service Center designatedby Olympus, following the procedure set forth
below (See “WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS
NEEDED”).
Olympus, at its sole discretion, will repair,
replace, or adjust the defective Product at
Olympus’s cost, provided that an Olympus
investigation and factory inspection disclose that(a) such defect developed under normal andproper use and (b) the Product is covered under
this limited warranty.
Repair, replacement, or adjustment of defective
Products shall be Olympus’s sole obligation andthe customer’s sole remedy hereunder. Repair
or replacement of a Product shall not extend thewarranty period provided herein, unless requiredby law.
Except where prohibited by law, the customer
is liable and shall pay for shipment of the
Products to the designated Olympus Repair
Service Center. Olympus shall not be obligatedto perform preventive maintenance, installation,
deinstallation, or maintenance.

670 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Olympus reserves the right to (i) use
reconditioned, refurbished, and/or serviceable
used parts (that meet Olympus’s quality
assurance standards) for warranty or any otherrepairs and (ii) make any internal or external
design and/or feature changes on or to its
products without any liability to incorporate suchchanges on or to the Products.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITEDWARRANTY
Excluded from this limited warranty and not
warranted by Olympus in any fashion, either
express, implied, or by statute, are:(a) products and accessories not manufactured
by Olympus and/or not bearing the“OLYMPUS” brand label (the warranty
coverage for products and accessories
of other manufacturers, which may be
distributed by Olympus, is the responsibilityof the respective manufacturer of suchproducts and accessories in accordancewith the terms and duration of suchmanufacturers’ warranties);(b) any Product which has been disassembled,
repaired, tampered with, altered, changed,
or modiﬁed by persons other than Olympus’s
own authorized service personnel unlessrepair by others is made with the writtenconsent of Olympus;(c) defects or damage to the Products resulting
from wear, tear, misuse, abuse, negligence,
sand, liquids, impact, improper storage,
nonperformance of scheduled operator
and maintenance items, battery leakage,use of non-“OLYMPUS” brand accessories,
consumables, or supplies, or use of the
Products in combination with non-compatible
devices;

(d) software programs;(e) supplies and consumables (including but
not limited to lamps, ink, paper, ﬁlm, prints,
negatives, cables and batteries); and/or(f) Products which do not contain a validly
placed and recorded Olympus serial number,unless they are a model on which Olympus
does not place and record serial numbers.
(g) Products shipped, delivered, purchased, orsold from dealers located outside of North
America, Central America, South America
and the Caribbean; and/or(h) Products that are not intended or authorized
to be sold in North America, South America,
Central America, or the Caribbean (ie. Gray
Market Goods).
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER; LIMITATIONOF DAMAGES; AFFIRMATION OF ENTIREWARRANTY AGREEMENT; INTENDED
BENEFICIALLY
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SETFORTH ABOVE, OLYMPUS MAKES NO ANDDISCLAIMS ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS,GUARANTIES, CONDITIONS, AND
WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR
ARISING UNDER ANY STATUTE, ORDINANCE,COMMERCIAL USAGE OR OTHERWISE,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANYWARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO
THE SUITABILITY, DURABILITY, DESIGN,OPERATION, OR CONDITION OF THE
PRODUCTS (OR ANY PART THEREOF)
OR THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE
PRODUCTS OR THEIR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR RELATING
TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER PROPRIETARYRIGHT USED OR INCLUDED THEREIN.
IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES APPLY AS
A MATTER OF LAW, THEY ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE LENGTH OF THIS LIMITEDWARRANTY.
SOME STATES MAY NOT RECOGNIZEA DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF
WARRANTIES AND/OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMERS AND
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY.
THE CUSTOMER MAY ALSO HAVEDIFFERENT AND/OR ADDITIONAL RIGHTSAND REMEDIES THAT VARY FROM STATETO STATE.

THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES AND
AGREES THAT OLYMPUS SHALL NOT
BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGESTHAT THE CUSTOMER MAY INCUR FROM
DELAYED SHIPMENT, PRODUCT FAILURE,
PRODUCT DESIGN, SELECTION, OR
PRODUCTION, IMAGE OR DATA LOSS OR
IMPAIRMENT OR FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE,
WHETHER LIABILITY IS ASSERTED IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
AND STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY) OR
OTHERWISE. IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OFANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATIONLOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE),
WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR
SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE.
Representations and warranties made by any
person, including but not limited to dealers,
representatives, salespersons, or agents ofOlympus, which are inconsistent or in conﬂictwith or in addition to the terms of this limited
warranty, shall not be binding upon Olympus
unless reduced to writing and approved by an
expressly authorized oﬃcer of Olympus.
This limited warranty is the complete andexclusive statement of warranty which
Olympus agrees to provide with respect to the
Products and it shall supersede all prior andcontemporaneous oral or written agreements,
understandings, proposals, and communications
pertaining to the subject matter hereof.
This limited warranty is exclusively for the
beneﬁt of the original customer and cannot betransferred or assigned.
WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS NEEDEDThe customer must contact the designatedOlympus Consumer Support Team for yourregion to coordinate the submission of your
Product for repair service. To contact your
Olympus Consumer Support Team in your region
please visit or call the following:
Canada:www.olympuscanada.com/repair /1-800-622-6372
United States:
www.olympusamerica.com/repair /1-800-622-6372

8

Latin America:
www.olympusamericalatina.com

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

EN 671

The customer must copy or transfer any image
or other data saved on a Product to anotherimage or data storage medium prior to sending
the Product to Olympus for for repair service.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BERESPONSIBLE FOR SAVING, KEEPING OR
MAINTAINING ANY IMAGE OR DATA SAVED
ON A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT FORSERVICE, OR ON ANY FILM CONTAINEDWITHIN A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT
FOR SERVICE, NOR SHALL OLYMPUS BERESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN
THE EVENT ANY IMAGE OR DATA IS LOST
OR IMPAIRED WHILE SERVICE IS BEINGPERFORMED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE),
WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR
SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT.
The customer should package the Productcarefully using ample padding material to prevent
damage in transit. Once the Product is properly
packaged, ship the package to Olympus or the
Olympus Authorized Repair Service Center
location as instructed by the respective Olympus
Consumer Support Team.
When sending Products for repair service, yourpackage should include the following:1) Sales receipt showing date and place ofpurchase. Handwritten receipts will not be
accepted;2) Copy of this limited warranty bearing the
Product serial number corresponding to theserial number on the Product (unless it is amodel on which Olympus does not place andrecord serial numbers);
3) A detailed description of the problem; and
4) Sample prints, negatives, digital prints (orﬁles on disk) if available and related to the
problem.
KEEP COPIES OF ALL DOCUMENTS. Neither
Olympus nor an Olympus Authorized Repair
Service Center will be responsible for documentsthat are lost or destroyed in transit.
When service is completed, the Product will be
returned to you postage prepaid.

8

PRIVACY
Any information provided by you to process yourwarranty claim shall be kept conﬁdential andwill only be used and disclosed for the purposesof processing and performing warranty repair
services.

672 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For customers in Canada
For indoor use only (5150 - 5350 MHz)For customers in Europe
Simple Declaration of Conformity
Hereby, OLYMPUS CORPORATION declaresthat the radio equipment type IM010 is incompliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity isavailable at the following internet address: http://
www.olympus-europa.com/
This symbol [crossed-out wheeledbin WEEE Annex IV] indicatesseparate collection of waste
electrical and electronic equipmentin the EU countries.
Please do not throw the equipment
into the domestic refuse.
Please use the return andcollection systems available inyour country for the disposal of thisproduct.
This symbol [crossed-out wheeledbin Directive 2006/66/EC Annex
II] indicates separate collection ofwaste batteries in the EU countries.
Please do not throw the batteries
into the domestic refuse.
Please use the return andcollection systems available inyour country for the disposal of thewaste batteries.
For indoor use only (5150 - 5350 MHz)
Provisions of warranty
In the unlikely event that your product proves
to be defective, although it has been usedproperly (in accordance with the written
Instruction Manual supplied with it), during theapplicable national warranty period and has
been purchased from an authorized Olympus
distributor within the business area of OLYMPUS
EUROPA SE & Co. KG as stipulated on thewebsite: http://www.olympus-europa.com, it will
be repaired, or at Olympus’s option replaced,free of charge. In order to enable Olympus toprovide you with the requested warranty services
to your full satisfaction and as fast as possible,
please note the information and instructions
listed below:

1. To claim under this warranty please follow
the instructions on http://consumer-service.
olympus-europa.com for registration andtracking (this service is not available inall countries) or take the product, thecorresponding original invoice or purchasereceipt and the completed Warranty
Certiﬁcate to the dealer where it waspurchased or any other Olympus service
station within the business area of OLYMPUS
EUROPA SE & Co. KG as stipulated on thewebsite: http://www.olympus-europa.com,
before the end of the applicable national
warranty period.
2. Please make sure your Warranty Certiﬁcate isduly completed by Olympus or an authorized
dealer or Service center. Therefore, please
make sure that your name, the name of thedealer, the serial number and the year, monthand date of purchase are all completed or theoriginal invoice or the sales receipt (indicating
the dealer’s name, the date of purchase andproduct type) is attached to your Warranty
Certiﬁcate.
3. Since this Warranty Certiﬁcate will not be
re-issued, keep it in a safe place.
4. Please note that Olympus will not assume
any risks or bear any costs incurred intransporting the product to the dealer or
Olympus authorized service station.
5. This Warranty does not cover the following
and you will be required to pay a repair
charge, even for defects occurring within thewarranty period referred to above.
a. Any defect that occurs due to mishandling(such as an operation performed that is
not mentioned in the Instruction Manual,etc.)b. Any defect that occurs due to repair,
modiﬁcation, cleaning, etc. performedby anyone other than Olympus or an
Olympus authorized service station.
c. Any defect or damage that occurs due totransport, a fall, shock, etc. after purchaseof the product.
d. Any defect or damage that occurs due
to ﬁre, earthquake, ﬂood damage,thunderbolt, other natural disasters,
environmental pollution and irregularvoltage sources.
e. Any defect that occurs due to carelessor improper storage (such as keeping
the product under conditions of hightemperature and humidity, near insect
repellents such as naphthalene or harmful
drugs, etc.), improper maintenance, etc.
f. Any defect that occurs due to exhausted
batteries, etc.

g. Any defect that occurs due to sand,mud, water etc. entering the inside of the
product casing.
6. Olympus’s sole liability under this Warranty
shall be limited to repairing or replacing the
product. Any liability under the Warranty forindirect or consequential loss or damage ofany kind incurred or suﬀered by the customer
due to a defect of the product, and inparticular any loss or damage caused to any
lenses, ﬁlms, other equipment or accessories
used with the product or for any loss resulting
from a delay in repair or loss of data, is
excluded. Compelling regulations by law
remain unaﬀected by this.

For customers in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) it is possible that this equipment or device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

For customers in Singapore
Complies with
IMDA Standards
DB104634

Trademarks• Microsoft and Windows are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Apical logo is a registeredtrademark of Apical Limited.

• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and theMicro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos aretrademarks or registered trademarks of the
OLYMPUS CORPORATION in Japan, theUnited States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.

8• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certiﬁcation markof the Wi-Fi Alliance.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

EN 673• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by OLYMPUS CORPORATION isunder license.
• The standards for camera ﬁle systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics andInformation Technology Industries Association(JEITA).
• All other company and product names areregistered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THATWAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by theowners or licensors of that software, under whichsoftware is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF ﬁle stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm

8674 ENSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

9

Index

9
EN 675

9

Symbolsz Settings ............................................524

0 (Camera control) ................603, 622< (DPOF) ............................................291# RC Mode ..................................262, 541#+WB ..................................................540# Slow Limit.................................261, 539# X-Sync. ....................................260, 539
8 Display Pattern .............................431
a (Close-up playback) ........................267
 (Single-frame erase) ................275, 444
G (Index playback) .............268, 300, 438
G/Info Settings ...................................515
h (Share Order) ...........................277, 446
I (Face priority AF) .............133, 360, 491
jH Settings .......................151, 155, 507
jL Settings ........................151, 155, 506
j/Y Settings .....................................520
KNMode Settings ...........................485
K Orientation Linked N ...................489
k (One-touch white balance) .....207, 386
K
Movie .........................................413, 415
Still image ..........................................281
n Picture Mode ...................................393
n mode (movie exposure mode) ........332
N Set Home.......................................487
N Select Screen Settings ..................488
N Spot Metering ................................537
q Slot .................................................547
qa Default Setting............................523
R (Image rotation) ..............................283s (Monitor brightness adjustment) ......456
S Center Button ..................................499
t Target Mode Settings ............125, 488
T Direction Key ...................................499
v (Image selection) ....................279, 448
V Info Settings ....................................555
V Half Way Level ................................556
W (Language) ....................................455
W Keep Warm Color
Movie .................................................383
Still image ..................................205, 545
X Settings......................................48, 455
x+F ..................................................540A

676 EN

Index

A (Aperture-Priority AE) .................96, 335
AC adapter .............................................35
Accessories ..........................................660
AdobeRGB ...................................232, 546
AEL/AFL .......................................141, 482
AEL Metering ........................................537
AE lock .........................................188, 373
AF Area Pointer ....................................486
AF (Autofocus)..............................115, 345
AF Focus Adj. .......................................492
AF illuminator........................................490
AF Limiter .....................................143, 490
AF+MF.................................. 115, 117, 481
AF ModeMovie .................................................345
Still image ..................................115, 480
AF Scanner...................................146, 482
AF Targeting Pad ..................................486
AF Target Mode ............................120, 349
AF Target Point .............................123, 352
AF Tracking ..................................116, 346
All x
Movie .................................................385
Still image ..........................................545
Anti-Flicker LV ......................................190
Anti-Flicker Shooting ............................191
Anti-Shock r ..............................151, 160
Aperture-Priority AE (A) .................96, 335
ART (Art ﬁlter) ...............................215, 388
Art ﬁlter .........................................215, 388
Art LV Mode ..........................................522
Aspect ratio...........................................233
Assign Save Folder ........................76, 319
Assign to Custom Mode ............... 111, 458
Autofocus (AF)......................................115
Auto Power Oﬀ .....................................562
Available recording time .......................655

B
B (Bulb/Time) .......................................104
Backlit LCD ...........................................561
Battery cartridge ...............................24, 31

Battery charge ........................................31
Battery level ..........................................431
Battery Settings ....................................561
Beep sound ..........................................527
BKT (Bracketing) ..................................236
Bluetooth® ...................................582, 584
Bracketing.............................................236
BULB ....................................................104
Bulb/Time Focusing ......................107, 497
Bulb/Time Monitor ................................534
Bulb/Time Timer ...................................533
Button Function
Movie .................................................417
Still image ..................................463, 498

C
Cable clip ................................................24
Cable protector .................................24, 29
C-AFb (Continuous AF and Manual
focus) ........................................115, 346
C-AF Center Priority .....................148, 484
C-AF Center Start .........................147, 483
C-AF (Continuous AF) ..................115, 346
C-AF Release Priority ...........................505
C-AF Sensitivity
Movie .................................................362
Still image ..................................145, 483
C-AF Speed ..........................................363
C-AF+TR (AF tracking).................116, 346
C-AF+TRb (AF tracking and Manual
focus) ........................................116, 346
Calendar playback ..........56, 268, 300, 438
Camera control .............................603, 622
Card ........................................................36
Card Setup .....................38, 276, 445, 454
Card Slot Settings.................................547
Certiﬁcation...........................................566
C-LOCK Settings ..................................503
Close-up playback ................................267
Cluster AF targeting ..............................486
Color Creator ................................229, 405
Color Filter ....................................224, 400
Color grading ........................................393
Color Space ..................................232, 546
Composite Settings ......................110, 535

Compression rate .................................322
Continuous AF ..............................115, 346
Contrast ........................................221, 397
Control Settings
Movie .................................................428
Still image ..........................................513
Copy
All images ..................................274, 443
Single-frame ..............................272, 441
Copyright Settings ................................549
Custom Menu ...............................480, 647
Custom mode ....................................... 111
Custom mode (C1/C2/C3/C4) ............460
Custom picture mode ...................219, 392
Custom Self-timer .........................151, 157

D
Dial Direction ........................................500
Dial Function
Movie .................................................424
Still image ..................................473, 500
Digital Tele-converter ....................235, 411
Direct button ...................................60, 305
dpi Settings ...........................................549
DPOF....................................................291

E
Edit ...............................................284, 450
Edit Filename........................................548
Eﬀect ............................................226, 402
Electronic Zoom....................306, 419, 467
Elec. Zoom Speed
Movie .................................................408
Still image ..........................................502
Elevation/Temperature..................565, 578
Erase
All images ..................................276, 445
Selected images ........................279, 448
Single-frame ..............................275, 444
EVF Adjust ............................................553
EVF Auto Switch .....................85, 328, 553
EVF Grid Settings .................................556
EVF Style..............................................554
EV Step ................................................530
Exif data........................................549, 550
Index

9

EN 677

Exposure compensation ...............180, 367
Exposure Shift ......................................538
Eye priority AF ..............................133, 491

F
Face priority AF ....................133, 360, 491
Fast-motion movie ................................342
Field sensor ..........................................567
Field Sensor Logger .....................565, 571
File format.............................................654
File Name .............................................548
File size ................................................654
Firmware...............................................457
Fisheye Compensation .................250, 560
Flash intensity control ...........................259
Flash Mode ...........................................254
Flash slow limit .............................261, 539
Flash X-sync. ................................260, 539
Flicker reduction ...........................190, 509
Flicker Scan
Movie .................................................374
Still image ..................................193, 536
Fn Lever Function
Movie .................................................426
Still image ..................................475, 501
Fn Lever/Power Lever ..........................501
Focus beep ...........................................527
Focus mode (AF Mode) ................115, 345
Focus Ring ...........................................496
Focus Stacking .....................................243
Format ....................................................38

G
GPS Priority ..................................564, 579
Gradation ......................................223, 399
Grid Settings .........................................524

H

9

Half Way Level (Viewﬁnder) .................556
Half Way Rls With IS ....................178, 511
HDMI ....................................434, 528, 626
HDMI Control ........................................630
HDMI Output.........................................432
HDR ......................................................195
Highlight&Shadow Control......84, 227, 403

678 EN

Index

High Res Shot ..............................151, 210
High-speed movie.................................339
Histogram display ...........................84, 327
Histogram Settings ...............................526

I
IC recorder............................................415
Image Aspect ........................................233
Image Overlay ......................................289
Image quality
Movie .................................................321
Still image ............................................78
Image quality settings .....................81, 542
Image size ..........78, 81, 82, 542, 543, 654
Image Stabilization .......................174, 511
Index playback................56, 268, 300, 438
INFO button ...........................84, 265, 327
Information display
Movie .........................................329, 437
Still image ....................................86, 266
Info settings
G/Info Settings .........................515, 574
n Info Settings .................................429
V Info Settings .................................555
In-Movie Image Capture .......................451
Interchangeable lenses ..........................42
Interval shooting ...................................172
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse ...........................172
IS Level.................................................378
IS ModeMovie .................................................376
Still image ..................................176, 510
ISO
Movie .................................................369
Still image ..........................................181
ISO-Auto
Movie .................................................372
Still image ..................................185, 531
ISO-Auto Set
Movie .................................................372
Still image ..................................183, 531
ISO Step ...............................................530

J
JPEG Edit .............................................287

K
Keystone Comp. ...................................248

L
Language setting (W) ..................47, 455
Lens Info Settings .................................550
Lens I.S. Priority ...................................512
Level Adjust ..........................................559
Level Gauge ...................................84, 327
Light Box...............................................518
Live Bulb ...............................................534
LIVE BULB ...........................................104
Live Bulb/Time ......................................104
Live composite photography.................108
Live Control ............................68, 312, 640
Live ND Shooting..................................197
Live Time ..............................................535
LIVE TIME ............................................104
Live View Boost ....................139, 200, 521
Location data ........................................570
Log tone curve movie recording ...........393
Long exposure (B Bulb/Time) ..............104
Low ISO Processing .............................532
LV Close Up Mode................................139
LV Close Up Settings....................139, 523
LV-Info ..................................................515
LV super control panel ............62, 309, 640

M
M (Manual Exposure) ...................101, 337
Manual Exposure (M) ...................101, 337
Manual focus clutch (MF clutch) ....41, 127,
355
Manual focus (MF)................ 115, 116, 346
Menu...............................................66, 314
Menu Recall..........................................560
Metering........................................186, 536
MF ................................................419, 465
MF Assist ..............................................495
MF Clutch .......41, 127, 128, 355, 356, 496
MF (Manual focus)................ 115, 116, 346
Mode Guide ..........................................526
Monochrome Color .......................225, 401
Movie H ..............................................409
Movie K ........................................413, 415

Movie mode ..........................................294
Movie shooting .....................................294
Multi Function .......................................470
Multi Function Settings .........................521
Multiple Exposure .................................246
Multi selector ............................22, 56, 300
My Menu ...............................................477

N
Noise Filter
Movie .................................................379
Still image ..........................................532
Noise Reduct. ...............................166, 533
Noise Reduction s .............................166
Number of storable still pictures ...........654

O
OI.Share (OLYMPUS Image Share) ....582,
586
OI.Track (OLYMPUS Image Track) .....569,
571, 597
OLYMPUS A-GPS Utility ......................569
OLYMPUS Capture ......582, 601, 614, 620
Olympus Workspace ............................620
Optional ﬂash unit .................................252

P
P (Program AE) ..............................94, 334
Partial Color ..........................................231
PC.........................................................600
Peaking.........................................420, 466
Peaking Settings...................................525
Picture Mode ................................215, 388
Picture Mode Settings ..........................520
Pixel Count .............................82, 543, 654
Pixel Mapping ...............................558, 633
Playback
Movie .........................................300, 436
Still image ....................................56, 265
Playback Menu .....................................645
Playback slot ..................................57, 547
Play Movie ............................................436
Power-oﬀ Standby ................................590
PreMF ...........................................116, 346
Preset MF .....................116, 129, 346, 357
Index

9

EN 679

Preset MF distance...............................494
Press-and-hold Time ............................558
Preview .................................................464
Printing .................................................291
Priority Set ............................................552
Pro capture ...................................151, 168
Program AE (P) ..............................94, 334
Program shift (Ps) ..................................95
Protect ..........................................270, 439
Ps (Program shift) ..................................95

Q
Quick Erase ..........................................551
Quick Sleep Mode ................................563

R
RAW ...............................................78, 284
RAW Data Edit .....................................284
RAW+JPEG Erase ...............................551
RC Mode (# RC Mode) ...............262, 541
Recall from Custom Mode ....................112
Record GPS location ....................564, 570
Recording soundMovie .........................................413, 415
Still image ..........................................281
Rec View ........................................90, 456
Remote shooting ....................55, 297, 596
Reset ..............................................91, 331
Reset Lens ...........................................497
Reset Protect ................................271, 440
Reset share Order ........................278, 447
Rotate ...................................................269

S

9

S (Shutter-Priority AE) ....................98, 336
S-AFb (Single AF and Manual focus) .....
115, 345
S-AF Release Priority ...........................505
S-AF (Single AF)...........................115, 345
Saturation .....................................222, 398
Save Settings .........................................72
Save Slot
Movie .................................................316
Still image ............................................74680 ENIndex

SD card...................................................36
Formatting the card..............................38
Select Screen Settings (N Select Screen
Settings) ...........................................488
Selﬁe Assist ..........................................527
Self-timer ..............................................151
Sequential shooting ..............151, 506, 507
Set Home (N Set Home) ...................487
Setup Menu ..................................454, 646
Shading Comp. .....................................543
Share Order ..................................277, 446
Sharpness ....................................220, 396
Shooting
Movie .................................................295
Still image ............................................52
Shooting Menu .....................................642
Shooting modes......................................93
Shutter Function ...................................423
Shutter-Priority AE (S) ....................98, 336
Silent Control ........................................306
Silent s .......................................151, 163
Silent s Mode Settings .......................167
Single....................................................151
Single AF ......................................115, 345
Sleep ....................................................562
Slow Limit .....................................261, 539
Slow-motion movie ...............................342
S-OVF.............................................89, 557
Spot Metering .......................................537
sRGB ............................................232, 546
Storage .................................................624
Super control panel ........................62, 640
Super Spot AF ......................................136

T
Test Picture ...........................................465
Time Code Settings ..............................324
Time Lapse Movie ................................172
Time photography .................................104
Touch AF.................................................54
Touch screen ....................54, 58, 298, 303
Touchscreen Settings ...........................559
Touch shutter ..........................................54
Tracking Subject ...........................149, 491
Transfer image .............................592, 614

Trimming ...............................................450
TV .........................................................626

U
USB connection ..............................34, 620
USB Mode ............................................529
USB PD ................................................625
User registration .....................................25

V
Video Bit Rate.......................................322
Video Frame Rate ................175, 322, 522
Video Menu ..........................................643
View Assist ...........................................395
Volume adjustment .................................58

W
WB
Movie .................................................380
Still image ..................................202, 544
WB (White balance)......................202, 544
White balanceMovie .................................................380
Still image ..................................202, 544
White balance compensation
Movie .................................................384
Still image ..........................................206
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings ...............457, 586
Wi-Fi Connect .......................582, 584, 605
Wireless LAN ........................................582
Wireless Remote Control Flash ............262

X
X-Sync. .........................................260, 539

Z
Zoom frame ..................................136, 364

9
Index

EN 681MEMO

682 EN10 Additions/modifications byfirmware update10
EN 683

The following functions are added/modiﬁed by ﬁrmware update.

Additions/modiﬁcations by the ﬁrmware version 1.2

685

Default settings

685

Additions/modiﬁcations by the ﬁrmware version 2.0g

K Tracking Subject

686

RAW Video Output

686

Focus Indicators for Manual Focus

688

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL Functions

688

Default settings

689

10
684 ENg

EVF Auto Switch

Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update10-1 Additions/modifications by thefirmware version 1.2
EVF Auto Switch
The Custom Menu (MENUof [On1] and [On2].

Ga[EVF Auto Switch]) now oﬀers a choiceOﬀ

The viewﬁnder display does not light automatically when you put your eye to theviewﬁnder. Press the u button to switch between the viewﬁnder and monitor
displays.

On1

The viewﬁnder display lights automatically when you put your eye to the viewﬁnder.
Pressing the u button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.

On2

Putting your eye to the viewﬁnder turns the viewﬁnder display on only if the monitor
is closed. Pressing the u button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modiﬁed default settings are as
follows.
*1: Can be saved using [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default setting can be restored using [Reset] (full).
*3: Default setting can be restored using [Reset] (basic).

G Custom Menu
Tab
G

Item
a EVF Auto Switch

Default
On1

*1
―

*2


*3
―

g
85, 328,553

10Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update

EN 685

10-2 Additions/modifications by thefirmware version 2.0
K Tracking Subject
A [Birds] option has been added to the custom menus (MENU[K Tracking Subject]) .

G

L

Motorsports

The camera detects cars or motorcycles. It tracks focus on such elements as
the chassis (chieﬂy of types used in motor sports) or driver.

Airplanes

The camera detects planes and helicopters. It tracks focus on such elements
as the fuselage or cockpit.

Trains

The camera detects trains. It tracks focus on such elements as the cars or
driver’s compartment.

Birds

The camera detects birds. It tracks focus on such elements as their heads and
eyes.

Oﬀ

Tracking subject selection disabled.

RAW Video Output
A [RAW Mode] option has been added to the video menu (MENU[n HDMI Output][Output Mode]).

Output Moden[Monitor Mode]: The HDMI device functions as an external monitor. The
camera outputs both images and indicators to the display.
Output settings can be adjusted using the [HDMI] option in
G Custom Menu S (P. 434).
[Record Mode]: The HDMI device functions as an external recorder. Only
images are output to the device. Frame size and soundsettings are adjusted using camera controls.
[RAW Mode]: Video is output to compatible HDMI devices in RAW format.
It is not saved to the camera memory card. Frame size andsound settings are adjusted using camera controls.
• The camera functions in [Monitor Mode] in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still
photography modes), during playback, and when menus are displayed.

• For information on HDMI devices that support [RAW Mode], visit the OLYMPUS website.
• [RAW Mode] is used to record data to which settings such as exposure compensation andwhite balance have not been applied.

10686 EN

Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update• An HDMI indicator appears in the camera monitor while [RAWMode] output is in progress.

1

123minM-IS 2

l
C-AF
ISO-A
400

4K

30p

n

250 F5.6 0.0

HDMI• Video output in [RAW Mode] is not displayed in the camera monitor, but instead appears on
the HDMI device.
• Video output in [RAW Mode] is recorded in ProResRAW format.
• During output to compatible HDMI devices in [RAW Mode], [n Picture Mode] is set to [On]and [Picture Mode] to [l OM-Log400].
• The following restrictions apply to settings when [RAW Mode] is selected:- [nK]: Restricted to [C4K] and [4K]. High-speed and slow- and fast-motion movies
cannot be recorded.
- [n Image Stabilizer]: Restricted to [M-IS Oﬀ] and [M-IS2].
- [Digital Tele-converter]: Set to [Oﬀ].
- [n AF Mode]-selection for Four Thirds lenses: Restricted to [MF] and [PreMF].

Connecting the Camera to HDMI Devices
Connect the camera to the HDMI device using an HDMI cable.
Type D

HDMI connector

HDMI cable (connect to HDMI
connector on HDMI device)

Type A• See the documentation supplied with the HDMI device for information on adjusting device
settings.

10Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update

EN 687

Focus Indicators for Manual Focus
A [Focus Indicator] option has been added to the custom menus (MENU[MF Assist]).
I

G

Magnify

The display automatically zooms in on the view through the lens when the lensfocus ring is rotated.

Peaking

In-focus areas are highlighted in color when the lens focus ring is rotated.
1

100%

S-IS AUTO

Focus
Indicator

Rotating the focus ring during manual focus
displays an indicator showing the direction andapproximate amount of rotation required to bring
the subject into focus.

MF
ISO
200

YF
4K

30p

M

250 F5.6 -2.0

1:02:03

1023• These indicators may be reversed in the case of third-party lenses equipped with a focus
clutch, in which case you will need to change the option selected for [Focus Ring] (P. 496).
• The focus indicator is not displayed when a lens with a Four Thirds mount is used.

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL
Functions
The camera displays “SET(” when the focus position is saved using the SET
option and “CALL(” when a saved focus position is restored using the CALL
option. For more information on SET and CALL, see the lens manual.
1

SET

100%

1

CALL

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF

YF

4K

4K

1:02:03

1:02:03

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1023

10
688 EN

Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.01023

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modiﬁed default settings are as
follows.
*1: Can be saved using [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default setting can be restored using [Reset] (full).
*3: Default setting can be restored using [Reset] (basic).

G Custom Menu
Tab
G

I MF Assist

Item
MagnifyPeaking
Focus Indicator

Default
Oﬀ
Oﬀ
Oﬀ

*1




*2




*3
―
―
―

g
495

10
Additions/modiﬁcations by ﬁrmware update

EN 689MEMO

690 ENdate of issue 2019.01.

WD517402